UNIVERolTY  or  C.UIFORNiA 
CALIFORNIA  COLLEJM  CF  MEDiClf^L 

JAN    "1     1974 
IRVINE,  CAUFORNIA  92664 


^>** 


NEW 

CONCEPTS  IN  DIAGNOSIS 

AND  TREATMENT 

PHYSICO-CLINICAL  MEDICINE 

THE  PRACTICAL  APPLICATION  OF  THE 

ELECTRONIC  THEORY  IN  THE  INTERPRETATION 

AND  TREATMENT  OF  DISEASE 

WITH  AN  APPENDIX  ON  NEW 
SCIENTIFIC  FACTS     ' 

BY 

ALBERT  ABRAMS,A.M.,LLD.,M.D. 

(UNIVKRSIT^'   OF   HEIDELBERg) 

F.R.M.S. 

ONE-TIME    PROFESSOR   OF  PATHOLOGY  AND    DIRECTOR   OF  THE    MEDICAL  CI.INrC, 

COOPER   MEDICAL  COLLEGE  (DEPARTMENT  OF  MEDICINE, 

LELAND  STANFORD  JUNIOR  UNIVERSITY) 

SAN  FRANCISCO,    CAL. 

EIGHTY  ILLUSTRATIONS  IN  THE  TEXT 


PHILOPOLIS  PRESS 
SUITE  711,  ST.   PAUL  BUILDING 
SAN  FRANCISCO.  CAL. 
1916 


Wf34fe0 


COPYRIGHT  1916 

BY 
ALBERT  ABRAMS 


TO  MY  WIFE 
BLANCHE  B.  ABRAMS 


ARCHETYPE  OF  PHYSICO-CLINICAL  MEDICINE. 


"I  often  say  that  when  you  can  measure  what  you  are  speaking  about,  and 
express  it  in  numbers,  you  know  something  about  it;  but  when  you  cannot  measure 
it,  when  you  cannot  express  it  in  numbers,  your  knowledge  is  of  meager  and  un- 
satisfactory kind;  it  may  be  the  beginning  of  knowledge,  but  you  have  scarcely  in 
your  thoughts  advanced  to  the  stage  of  science." — (Kelvin.) 

"Ich  behaupte  aber  dass  in  jeder  besonderen  Xaturlehre  nur  so  viel  eigentliche 
Wissenschaft  angetrofifen  werden  konne,  als  darin  Malhematik  anzutreffen  ist." — 
(Kant.) 

"Progress  is  symbolized  in  the  clock,  the  balance  and  the  foot-rule."  —  (Clcrk- 
Ma.xwell.) 

Paraphrasis  of  the  foregoing  implies  that  if  we  can  time,  weigh  and  measure, 
facts  in  lieu  of  theories  could  be  submitted. 

"Science,  whose  aim  is  to  understand  nature,  must  set  out  with  the  assurance 
that  nature  is  understandable." — (von  Helmholtz.) 

"Is  there  any  phenomenon  which  works  upon  neither  our  natural  senses,  nor 
upon  their  extensions,  our  present-day  instruments  and  apparatus?  Then,  unless 
it  be  out  of  relation  with  things,  must  it  still  be  bound  up  with  other  phenomena 
which  do  work  upon  our  senses  or  our  instruments.  Thus  it  must  sooner  or  later 
become  perceptible  to  us." — (Wiener,  Die  Enveilcruug   uuscrcr  Sinne.) 


PREFACE 

The  author's  new  physico-diagnostic  and  therapeutic  methods  Purport 
are  not  theories  but  physico-clinical  facts  and  therefore  endow  this 
book  with  decisive  meaning.  The  laws  of  physical  science  are  univer- 
sal and  apply  equally  to  living  organisms  and  so-called  inanimate 
things.  This  iatro-physical  conception  demonstrates  the  trend  of 
unifying  the  various  forms  of  force  under  one  great  principle.  Prac- 
tical medicine  embodies  all  the  sciences  and  a  clinical  diagnosis  must 
invoke  physical,  biological  and  chemical  methods.  The  electronic  |  | 
theory  demonstrates  the  electrical  nature  of  matter  and  radioactivity 
is  a  universal  property  of  the  latter.  In  disease,  the  rearrangement  of 
the  electrons  is  associated  with  the  evolution  of  energy  endowed  with 
a  definite  polarity,  wavemeter  index  and  vibratory  rate.  Insomuch 
as  electrons  are  in  motion,  there  is  a  continual  radiation  of  energy  and 
the  instability  of  the  atom,  as  expressed  by  the  polarity  of  my  reactions, 
shows  the  constant  loss  of  positive  or  negative,  positive  and  negative  ,  i 
or  neutral  electrons.  '  < 

In  investigating  the  physiological  physics  of  the  various  forms  of  Visceral 
energy,  the  visceral  reflexes  of  the  author  are  employed.  The  latter  are  Reflexes  of 
interpreted  phonometrically  and  in  a  variety  of  other  ways.  Special  -^°''^'"^- 
reference  is  directed  to  the  reflexophone  and  energeiaometer,  which 
substitute  a  visceral  reflex,  and  to  splanchno-diagnosis,  which  reveals 
specific  forms  of  energy.  Relative  to  the  use  of  metal  in  reflexometry, 
it  confirms  what  Claude  Bernard  called  irritabilite — the  power  pos- 
sessed by  all  matter  of  reacting  to  stimuli.  The  reflexes  of  Abrams, 
are  physiological  constants  and  have  been  repeatedly  corroborated  as 
shown  in  the  subject-matter  succeeding  the  bibliography.  The 
author  regrets  the  necessity  of  obtruding  his  personality  at  that  place 
but  feels  that,  any  merit  attached  to  his  reflexes,  may  be  obscured  by 
the  extraordinary  data  presented  throughout  the  book.  The  author 
fully  realizes  that,  the  acceptance  of  a  discovery,  must  be  in  logical 
concordance  with  current  scientific  conceptions  and  bears  no  relation 
to  the  intrinsic  content  of  the  discovery. 


VI 11 


PREFACE 


In  accepting  the  visceral  reactions  as  the  basis  for  our  varied 
deductions,  bioplasmic  matter  is  employed,  the  most  primitive  and 
sensiti\e  substance  for  exhibiting  the  phenomena  of  energy-.  The 
physiologic  mechanism  designated  as  a  reflex  surpasses  in  its  sensi- 
tivity any  apparatus  yet  devised  by  human  ingenuity. 
Human  ^lan  is  essentially  a  reflex  animal.  Consciousness  depends  upon 
Machine  the  action  of  the  reflexes.  Mental  function  as  work  might  proceed 
without  consciousness,  just  as  the  machinery  of  a  clock  might  work 
without  a  dial.  ]Men  looking  upon  a  machine  executing  a  task  of 
marvelous  complexity  are  habituated  to  observe,  "It  is  almost  human." 
Laboring  art  is  a  crude  imitator  of  nature.  The  lungs,  antedated  the 
bellows;  the  heart,  the  pump;  the  hand,  the  lever,  and  the  eye,  the 
photographic  camera.  Telephonic  and  telegraphic  apparatus  dupli- 
cate mimetically  what  has  always  been  done  by  the  nervous  system 
and  always  by  aid  of  the  same  energy.  The  animal  machine  is 
equipped  by  its  sense-organs  as  receivers  for  practically  all  kinds  of 
physical  energy.  Our  senses,  howe^•er,  report  only  a  comparatively 
small  number  of  gross  stimuli  and  are  readily  replaced  by  modern 
apparatus  of  greater  sensitiveness,  precision  and  certainty.  Aside 
from  the  overt  phenomena  as  revealed  by  our  senses,  there  are  a  multi- 
tude of  recondite  reflexes  which  can  be  utilized  with  mathematical 
accuracy  for  interpreting  cosmical  energy.  The  reflexes  in  question 
are  natural  detectors,  always  attuned  to  definite  rates  of  vibration 
and  insomuch  as  every  phenomenon  in  nature  is  dependent  upon 
matter  in  motion  or  \-ibration,  it  is  not  chimerical  to  assume  that, 
in  the  reflexes,  puissant  physiological  reactions  are  at  our  command 
to  inteq^ret  many  heretofore  inexplicable  phenomena.  In  radio- 
telegraphv,  electro-magnetic  waves  are  set  in  motion  by  an  exciter. 
The  sensitivity  of  the  reflexes  makes  the  latter  unnecessary;  the 
revolutions  of  the  electrons  alone  substitute  the  exciter  or  oscillator. 
New  The  most  mystifying  phenomena  rest  upon  the  least  complex 
Knowledge  causes;  and  the  simpler  a  thing  is,  the  harder  it  is  to  understand,  there- 
fore, ■'Damnant  quod  non  inteUignnt."  New  knowledge  is  always 
viewed  critically  by  the  formahst  and  traditionalist,  and  so  it  should 
be,  particularly  when  the  innovationist  creates  discontinuity  in  the 
transition  to  new  knowledge.  'Tt  is  not  so  much  evidence  that  con- 
vinces men  of  something  entirely  foreign  to  their  habit  of  thought,  as 
the  discoverv  of  a  link  between  the  new  and  the  old." 


PREFACE  IX 

Scientific  theories  are  constantly  shattered  and  swept  into  the  dis-   Scientific 
card  and  the  scientist  presiding  at  the  birth  of  his  theory  one  day  may  Anarchy 
officiate  at  its  burial  on  the  morrow.    In  his  iconoclasm,  he  is  making 
real  the  dream  of  ages. 

In  discussing  the  progress  made  in  pathology,  a  scientist  recently 
affirmed  that,  "The  most  interesting  fact  in  it  right  now,  is  that  noth- 
ing is  happening."  The  aim  of  medicine  is  scientific  exactitude  but 
this  Utopia  is  far  from  realization. 

"One  must  be  strongly  convinced,"  suggested  Charles  Richet, 
"that  science  to-day  though  true,  is  dreadfully  deficient." 

Successive  innovations  have  completely  altered  the  physiognomy 
of  medical  practice  notably,  when  bacteriology  invaded  the  classic 
domain  of  cellular  pathology. 

The  doctrine  of  cells  and  protoplasm,  gave  a  decided  impetus  to  Cytolog^y 
the  formulation  of  modern  biology  and  pathology,  but  it  has  suffered 
many  vicissitudes  notably  that,  in  the  interpretation  of  vital  phe- 
nomena, one  must  look  deeper  than  simple  cell-structure  as  revealed 
by  the  microscope.  In  this  sense,  the  Zeitgeist  demands  an  abrogation 
of  this  misalliance  of  medicine  and  cytology. 

The  cells  constitute  a  superstructure  guided  in  their  activity  by 
physico-chemical  forces.  Vital  phenomena  are  dynamic  and  the 
actions  of  organisms  should  be  regarded  not  as  structures  but  as 
processes. 

The  cell  is  only  the  micro-morphologic  unit  of  plant  and  animal  Electron 
organization.  The  universality  of  the  laws  of  physical  science  are  in  i^ory 
accordance  with  the  accepted  electronic  theory,  viz.,  that  the  ultimate 
atomic  divisibility  of  matter  is  represented  by  the  electron  and  not 
the  cell.  The  cellular  theory  is  destined  to  suffer  the  same  fate  as  the 
molecular  theory.  The  indivisibility  of  the  atom  as  conceived  by  the 
atomists  is  now  substituted  by  the  conception  that,  it  is  a  planetary 
system  on  an  infinitesimal  scale. 

A  study  of  the  physics  of  the  electron  has  dethroned  many  cher- 
ished hypotheses  and  shows  that  it  plays  an  important  part  in  deter- 
mining the  physico-chemical  properties  of  a  substance. 

The  discerning  reader  will  note  that,  the  author's  deductions  are   Objectivism 
essentially  objective  and  that,  due  care  has  been  taken  to  eliminate 
the  personal  equation.    His  results  have  been  controlled  by  necropsy, 
skiagraphy,   at   operations   and   by   histological   e.xaminations.      All 


X  PREFACE 

knowledge  unless  capable  of  numerical  expression  can  never  advance 
to  the  stage  of  science  and  justifies  the  Kantian  observation,  viz., 
that  the  development  of  a  science  may  be  gauged  by  the  amount  of 
mathematics  it  contains.  The  author's  methods  show  how  biotic 
energ}-  may  be  measured  as  the  electrometer  measures  electrical 
potential. 

Neither  the  iury  of  tongue  nor  the  truculence  of  pen  can  discredit 
the  author's  observations  which  are  capable  of  analyzation  and 
demonstration.  Neither  fear  of  difiiculty  nor  adverse  criticism  deters 
him  from  regarding  scepticism  as  an  argument  against  the  truth  of 
his  obser\'ations. 
Vaticination  fhe  author  realizes  that,  -without  hereditary  prestige,  he  is  tread- 
ing on  unknown  territory-  and  that  many  will  sit  in  the  scomer's  seat 
and  hurl  the  cynic's  ban.  They  are  unfamihar  -u-ith  the  Pasteurian 
spirit — I  do  not  know    ....    I  will  investigate. 

Contempt  prior  to  examination  has  relegated  to  obhvion  many 
important  truths.  Man  is  governed  by  mathematical  law  and  any- 
thing concerning  him  incapable  of  numerical  expression  must  be 
limited  to  the  realms  of  speculation.  The  apparently  impossible 
which  the  author  has  striven  to  achieve,  is  based  on  scientific  objec- 
ti\'ity.  To  launch  new  knowledge  is  fraught  with  much  risk  to  the 
offender  who  must  be  prepared  to  await  the  fate  accorded  to  prac- 
tically all  innovations,  v-iz.,  condemnation,  discussion  and  acceptance. 

It  takes  a  long  time  to  align  our  general  thinking  into  harmony 
with  the  results  of  new  knowledge.  "Messieurs"  said  the  aged 
Pasteur  at  his  Jubilee,  "my  first  thought  in  the  midst  of  this  brilUant 
scene  carries  me  back  with  melancholy  to  the  memory  of  many  men 
of  science  who  have  known  nothing  but  trials.  In  the  past  they  had 
to  contend  against  prejudices  which  stifled  their  ideas.  These  preju- 
dices vanquished,  they  had  still  to  encounter  obstacles  and  difliculties 
of  all  kinds." 

There  are  more  false  facts  than  theories.  The  genius  of  the  multi- 
tude is  often  the  primar\"  acclamation  of  a  new  discover}'  which  .is 
later  accepted  by  those  fettered  by  scholastic  prepossessions.  Down 
the  centuries  posthumous  apotheosis  is  often  the  heritage  of  contem- 
poran,'  persecution.  ^^De  mortuis  nil  nisi  bonu?}i,"  but  anathematize 
the  H\-ing.  This  specious  philosophy  often  deters  progress  in  a  world 
where  the  credulous  believe  too  much  and  the  sceptics  too  Uttle.    A 


PKEFACE  XI 

serious  obstacle  at  the  present  time  in  the  presentation  of  new  knowl- 
edge, is  the  arraignment  of  indi\ddual  independence  heretofore 
enjoyed  by  the  pioneer  investigator  despite  the  main  postulate  of 
Herbert  Spencer,  in  "First  Principles,"  that  the  greatest  factor  in  the 
promotion  of  what  we  call  progress,  is  individual  initiative.  In  this 
hegemony,  the  plenipotentiary  right  is  assumed  of  discrediting  new 
knowledge  without  investigation  for  no  other  reason  than  that,  it  is 
in  discordance  with  preexisting  knowledge  and  has  therefore  no 
official  right  of  existence.  When  thought  is  thus  monopolized, 
possession  will  be  regarded  as  greater  than  achievement  and  the 
fascinating  triumph  of  creation  will  be  suppressed. 

In  the  appendix,  the  author  advocates  a  rejuvenation  of  psycho-  Appendix 
logical  investigations  and  his  apparatus  leaves  nothing  to  the  imagina- 
tion. The  so-called  cognoscenti,  may  approve  of  the  present  metnods 
of  investigation  but  others  do  not  and  the  latter  observe  that,  the 
only  difference  between  psychology  and  astrology  is  that,  the  astrolo- 
ger tells  you  what  is  not  so  beforehand  and  the  psychologist  does  it 
afterwards. 

Those  "in  authority,"  who  regard  innovation  from  the  viewjjoint 
of  heresy  recalls  the  bon  mot  by  a  witty  compatriot  of  Talleyrand, 
who,  in  commenting  on  the  conservatism  of  the  latter  said,  if  Talley- 
rand were  present  at  the  creation,  he  would  have  exclaimed;  "Good 
gracious!  Chaos  will  be  destroyed."  This  book  will  be  of  no  value 
to  those  who  subscribe  to  Moliere's  satire;  "The  authorities  exact  an 
oath  from  medical  candidates  never  to  alter  the  practice  of  physic." 
"They  who  do  not  feel  the  darkness  will  never  look  for  the  light." 

The  major  portion  of  this  book  has  been  devoted  to  diagnosis —  Diagnosis 
Qui  bene  dignoscit,  bene  curat.     Treatment  is  emphasized  in  investi-  and 
gating  the  action  of  drugs  from  what  the  author  has  neologized  as  an   Treatment 
electrono therapeutic  viewpoint.     The  cell,  is  a  problem  of  physical 
chemistry,  and  the  author's  methods  invoke  the  data  of  ionization  in 
studying  the  therapeutic  action  of  medicaments.     The  protoplasmic 
action  of  a  drug  is  the  algebraic  sum  of  the  effects  of  the  individual 
ions  and  the  anions  and  cations  are  in  antagonism.     The  neologism 
polaritherapy ,  adequately  expresses  his  therapeutic  procedure. 

If  the  author  has  shaped  the  dawn  of  a  new  epoch  in  science,  he 
hopes  that  others,  more  competent  than  himself  may  prophesy  its 
noon.     It  is  impossible  to  express  adequate  appreciation   for  the 


Xll  PREFACE 

generous  support  accorded  to  me  by  my  colleagues  in  corroborating 
these  new  methods  of  diagnosis  and  treatment.  My  most  compre- 
hensive obligation  is  acknowledged  upon  the  dedicatory  page.  For 
the  benefit  of  physicians,  who  cannot  master  some  of  the  details  of 
the  new  knowledge  presented  in  this  book,  a  practical  mensual  course 
is  given  by  the  author  in  San  Francisco. 

ALBERT  ABRAMS. 

FAIRMONT  HOTEL,  SAN   FRANCISCO,  CAL., 
JANUARY,    I916. 


CONTENTS 

Subject  CHAPTER  I  Page 

Human  Energy i 

CHAPTER  II 

The  Stomach  Reflex 21 

CHAPTER  III 
Polarity  and  Measurement  of  Human  Energy       ...       41 

CHAPTER  IV 

Physics  and  Physiology  of  Human  Energy 54 

CHAPTER  V 
Auxiliary  Methods  for  Demonstrating  Human  Energy  .       75 

CHAPTER  VI 

Topographic  Percussion loi 

CHAPTER  VII 

Sexual  Polarity no 

CHAPTER  VIII 
Byodynamgnosis  of  Specific  Infections  and  Constitutional 

Diseases 124 

CHAPTER  IX 
Biodynamgnosis  of  Diseases  of  the  Digestive  System  and 

Anim.al  Parasites 143 

CHAPTER  X 
Byodynamgnosis  of  Diseases  of  the  Respir.atory  and  Circu- 
latory System 151 

CHAPTER  XI 
Biodynamgnosis  of  Diseases  of  the  Kidneys  and  Ductless 

Glands 156 

CHAPTER  XII 
Biodyn.\mgnosis  of  Nervous  Disorders  and  Neoplasms    .     164 

CHAPTER  XIII 
New  Concepts  in  Treatment 193 


XIV  CONTENTS 


APPENDIX 

NOTE  I  Page 

Electronic   Delimitation   of    the   Lower   Border   of   the 

Stomach 223 

NOTE  II 
The   Ether  Theory — The   Electro — Magnetic   Theory   of 

Light — Gravitation — Polarity 223. 

NOTE  III 
Brain  and  Spinal  Centers — The  New  Psychology  .     228 

NOTE  IV 

Gyrography 238. 

NOTE  V 

Subliminal  AIind — Telepathy 244 

NOTE  VI 

Personal  Magnetism — Occult  Phenomena 254 

NOTE  VII 
Original     Capacity — Conservation     of     Energy — Electro- 

NALGiAS 265 

NOTE  VIII 

The  Sphygmobiometer 272- 

NOTE  IX 

BiocLiNicAL  Reactions  in  Toxicology        288. 

NOTE  X 
Tracheal  Percussion — Crico — Thyroid  Reflex  .     289 

NOTE  XI 

The  Cell  Doctrine 290- 

NOTE  XII 
Splanchno — Diagnosis — Biosphygmomanometry — Cardiokin- 
ESTHESiA — Predetermination  of  the  Sex  of  Eggs — Alo- 
pecia— Personal   Equation — Reflexophonometry — Tele- 
diagnosis — Energeiaometry 29r 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

Figure  Page 

1.  Method  or  Testing  (Electropathology)     ....  14 

2.  Scale  in  Electropathology 15 

3.  Clock  Test  in  Cancer 17 

4.  Electropathologic  Diagnosis  of  Cancer    ....  18 

5.  Apparatus  for  Recording  Wireless  Messages     .      .  19 

6.  Anatomic  Features  of  Stomach 21 

7.  Nerves  of  the  Stomach  Musculature 22 

8.  Position  of  Abdominal  Viscera 24 

9.  Position  of  Abdominal  Viscera  (Back  View)  ...  24 

10.  Position  of  the  Fingers  in  Percussion       ....  29 

11.  Elevation  of  Ungual  Phalanx     ........  30 

12.  Illustrating  Orthopercussion       .         30 

13.  Plexor  and  Pleximeter  (for  Percussion)  ....  31 

14.  Illustrating  Threshold  Percussion 32 

15.  Method  of  Conveying  Energy 36 

16.  Correct  Way  of  Holding  the  Magnet  and  Electrode  .  37 

17.  Illustrating  Stomach  Retraction  from  Energy  .  39 

18.  BlODYNAMOMETER 44 

19.  Distal  and  Proximal  Electrodes 45 

20.  Calibrated  Tube  for  Measuring  Energy  ....  46 

21.  Carcinomatous  Electronic  Reaction 50 

22.  Localization  of  the  Psychomotor  Area      ....  52 

23.  Course  of  Oculopupillary  Fibers 62 

24.  Tambour  for  Sphygmomanograms 64 

25.  Screen  for  Chromo-diagnosis 68 

26.  Energeiagenic  Centers  (male) 72 

27.  Energeiagenic  Centers  (female) 72 

28.  Energeiagenic  Centers  (back) 73 

29.  Organotonometer  and  Tonometric  Scale    ....  76 

30.  Visualized  Aura 78 

31.  Decussation  of  Aural  Energy 79 

32.  Areas  of  Ventral  Dulness 82 


XVI  ILLUSTRATIONS 

Figure  Page 

33.  Phonograms 83 

34.  Sphygmomanometer 84 

35.  PSYCHOPHANOMETER    (PlANCK) 87 

36.  PSYCHOPHANOMETER    (WhITE) 89 

37.  APPAR.A.TUS   FOR   RECORDING    StOMACH    CONTR.A.CTIONS  91 

38.  Tracings  oe  the  Stomach 92 

39.  Tracings  of  the  Stomach  (Emotions) 93 

40.  Dots  and  Dashes  (Stomach  Record) 94 

41.  Ophthalmo — axonometer      .     .     .     .' 95 

42.  psychomanograph loo 

43.  Illustrating  Topographic  Percussion 102 

44.  appar.a.tus  for  demagnetization i04 

45.  Apparatus  for  Short-circuiting io8 

46.  Illustil\ting  Sexual  Polarity  (female)            .  m 

47.  Illustrating  Sexual  Polarity  (m.a.le) iii 

48.  Illustrating  Method  OF  Eliciting  THE  Stomach  Reflex  112 

49.  Conduction  of  Energy  Through  Glass       ....  127 

50.  Areas  of  Ventral  Dulness  in  Sythilis  and  Tubercu- 

losis      135 

51.  Anatomic  Relations  of  the  Bronchial  Glands  140 

52.  Course  of  the  Ureter 157 

53.  Energy  ARE.A.S  OF  SUPR.A.RENAL  Gl.A-ND  AND  Kidney  158 

54.  Plexor  and  Pleximeter  (for  Reflexes)     .  .160 

55.  Dull  Areas  in  SpLANCHN^c  Congestion        ....  169 

56.  CEREBR.A.L   SiNUSES    AND   PSYCHOMOTOR    REGION  1 73 

57.  Electronic  CRAN^OGR.\PHY 175 

58.  Patient  of  Dr.  Evans 214 

59.  Patient  of  Dr.  Evans 214 

60.  Illustrating  Theory  of  Gr^witation 227 

61.  Location  of  Centers  (Smell,  Taste  ant)  He.a.r1ng)  230 

62.  Method  of  Making  Gyrograms 241 

63.  Pathograms 243 

64.  Electrode  Connected  With  the  Antennae  245 

65.  Specificity  of  Thought  (Figures) 248 

66.  Ventral  Areas  of  Dulness  (Words) 251 

67.  Ventral  Areas  of  Dlt-ness  (Visualil.a.tion)  251 

68.  Functional  Brain  Areas 253 


ILLUSTRATIONS  XVll 

Figure  P<^?,^ 

69.  Sphygmobiometer 272 

70.  Sphygmobiometer 273 

71.  Sphygmophone 276 

72.  Plethysmograph 279 

73.  Sphygmograms  (from  Conveyed  Energy)      ....  284 

74.  Areas  of  Dulness  in  Splanchno-Diagnosis  .      .      .      .  292 

75.  Sphygmograms  WITH  Biometer 296 

76.  Illustrating  Theory  of  Magnetism 298 

77.  Reflexophone 300 

78.  Reflexophonograms 304 

79.  Telediagnosis 305 

80.  Energei.aometer 310 


NEW  CONCEPTS  IN 
DIAGNOSIS  AND  TREATMENT 


NEW  CONCEPTS  IN  DIAGNOSIS 
AND  TREATMENT. 

CHAPTER  I. 

.HUMAN   ENERGY.* 

The  Modern  Knowledge. — At  one  time  in  liistorical 
medicine  (period  of  medical  mysticism),  physics  and  chem- 
istry were  invoked  to  explain  the  bodily  functions  and  to 
reconcile  their  dogmas  with  empirical  methods  in  the 
treatment  of  disease. 

These  iatrophysical  doctrines  endowed  with  exclusiv- 
ism  failed  to  survive  the  lapse  of  time. 

Recent  researches  made  by  the  writer  bearing  on  human 
energy,  emphasize  the  importance  of  the  laws  of  physical 
science  in  the  investigation  of  disease  and  the  physician 
is  constrained  to  correlate  his  data  with  this  new  knowledge. 

The  forces  resident  in  the  living  organism  correspond 
with  those  governing  the  inanimate  world  and  the  theory 
of  vitalism  has  been  abandoned. 

Physical  science  by  reason  of  the  universality  of  its 
laws  dominates  practically  every  phase  of  medical  research. 

Circulation  of  the  blood  is  a  matter  of  hydrauHcs; 
gaseous  changes  in  the  lungs  and  tissues  correspond  to  the 
physical  theory  of  gases  and  heat  regulation  conforms  to 
the  physical  theory  of  heat. 

*Italicized  words  signify  that  detailed  reference  to  the  subject  may  be 
found  in  the  author's  book,  Spondylotherapy  :  Methods  based  on  a 
study  of  CLINICAL  PHYSIOLOGY.     Fifth  Edition,  1914.    philopolis  press,  san 

FRANCISCO. 


2  HUMAN    ENERGY 

All  progress  made  in  medicine  is  dependent  on  the 
cumulative  evidence  of  science  as  a  whole. 

The  CELL  THEORY  AND  CELLULAR  PATHOLOGY  embodied 

the  conception  that  the  activities  of  an  organism  are  the 
sum  of  the  activities  of  its  component  cells  which  were 
regarded  as  the  most  elementary  form  of  organized  sub- 
stances incapable  of  further  reduction  other  than  by 
mechanic  or  chemic  means. 

In  accordance  with  the  electronic  theory,  cellular 
pathology  does  not  emphasize  the  ultimate  atomic  divisi- 
bility of  matter  and  this  theory  is  exploited  by  the  writer 
to  suggest  the  inauguration  of  a  new  diagnosis  and  path- 
ology   which    are    respectively    neologized    as    electron 

DIAGNOSIS  and  PATHOLOGY  OR  BIODYNAMGNOSIS  AND 
BIODYNAMOPATHOLOGY.  * 

Cellular  pathology  which  owed  its  genesis  to  the 
macro  and  microscopical  investigation  of  morbid  tis- 
sues dominated  medical  progress  for  many  years. 

Therapeutic  nihilism  owed  its  conception  to  the 
pathologist  who  sought  to  identifiy  every  disease  with 
definite  anatomic  changes,  and  the  clinician  studied 
disease  only  in  relation  to  these  conditions.  As  a  mat- 
ter of  fact,  the  anatomical  changes  are  sequential  and 
not  the  disease  itself.  A  perturbed  physiology  creates 
its  own  pathological  anatomy. 

When  modern  chemistry  invaded  the  field,  a  tre- 
mendous impetus  was  given  to  therapeutics  and  path- 
ology as  evidenced  in  chemotherapy,  the  study  of  pro- 
teins and  protective  mechanisms  of  defense  and  Abder- 

halden's  diagnostic  methods. 
I 

Disease  is  regarded  as  an  entity  only  because  we  do  not 

know    enough    about    it    to    specify    it   as   a    reaction    or 

symptom. 

*BiODYNAMics  (G.  bios,  life  and  dynamis,  force).  Also  known  as  bio- 
physiology,  the  science  dealing  with  the  energy  of  living  matter. 


ELECTRON    THEORY  6 

The  cellular  theory  is  now  as  remote  from  the  inter- 
pretation of  ultimate  structure  as  the  atomistic  is  from  the 
electronic  conception  of  matter. 

Sir  Oliver  Lodge  suggests  the  following  comparison 
to  indicate  the  amount  of  space  in  an  atom.  Let  an 
ordinary  church  represent  an  atom  of  hydrogen.  The 
electrons  constituting  it  will  be  represented  by  about 
I  GOG  grains  of  sand,  each  of  the  size  of  a  printer's  period 
dashing  in  all  directions  or  rotating  with  inconceivable 
velocity  and  filling  the  whole  interior  of  the  church  with 
their  tumultuous  action. 

^  The  time  is  fast  approaching  when  the  activities  of 
living  cells  will  find  explanation  on  a  physico-chemical 
basis  and  when  the  biologist  shall  know  the  laws  that 
govern  cell-growth  with  the  accuracy  of  the  scientist  know- 
ing his  laws.  It  will  be  then  that  prevention  and  cure  will 
be  questions  of  scientific  accuracy.  As  physicians  we  dare 
not  stand  aloof  from  the  progress  made  in  science  and 
segregate  the  human  as  something  apart  from  the  other 
entities  of  the  physical  universe.  Our  differentiation  of 
matter  is  largely  morphologic.  Whether  the  object  of  our 
differentiation  is  a  human  or  a  germ,  we  are  only  dealing 
with  a  congregation  of  vibrating  atoms  which  in  their 
varied  combinations  are  the  basic  constituents  of  all  that 
exists. 

"Here,  for  example,  is  a  swarm  of  atoms,  vibrating, 
scintillating,  martial, —  they  call  it  a  soldier, — and, 
anon,  some  thousands  of  miles  away  upon  the  South 
African  veldt,  that  swarm  dissolves, — dissolves  forsooth, 
because  of  another  little  swarm, — they  call  it  lead^." 

Electron  theory. — The  three  physical  entities  are. 
MATTER,  ENERGY  and  ETHER.  The  electron  or  corpuscular 
theory  has  solved  the  ultimate  structure  of  matter  and 


4  HUMAISr    ENERGY 

reduces  all  electric  and  magnetic  phenomena  to  the  dis- 
tribution and  motion  of  electrons. 

This  theory,  which  most  fully  accords  with  modern 
investigations  concerning  the  physical  basis  of  the  material 
universe  conceives  matter  to  be  made  up  of  molecules; 
molecules  to  be  composed  of  atoms  and  atoms  to  consist 
of  electrons.  The.  electrons  or  corpuscles  are  charges  of 
electricity.  The  atoms  of  matter  are  individualized  masses 
of  positive  electricit}"  diffused  uniformly  o\'er  the  area  of  an 
atom,  spherical  in  shape  and  one_two-hundredth  millionth 
of^n^inch  in  diameter. 

'  Throughout  the  spherical  mass  are  some  eight  hundred 
minute  particles  of  negative  electricity  all  alike  flj'ing 
vigorously  about,  each  repelling  ever\'  other  particle  yet 
all  contained  within  their  orbits  by  the  mass  of  positive 
electricity  which  constitutes  only  about  one  per  cent,  of 
the  atom's  mass. 

The  number  of  electrons  in  an  atom  are  proportional  to 
the  atomic  weight  of  the  element.  \Mien  the  crowding  of 
the  electrons  becomes  excessive  as  in  radium,  thorium  or 
uranium,  the  atoms  become  radioactive  owing  to  collisions 
between  the  electrons,  some  of  which  are  constantly  shot 
away.  Radiation  refers  to  a  change  in  the  velocity  of  an 
electron  which  causes  ripples  in  the  surrounding  ether, 
Wlienever  _the  yejocity  of  an  electric  charge  is  increased, 
diminished  or  changed  in  direction,  Roentgen  rays,  light 
and  aU  other  radiations  result. 

The  investigations  of  the  writer  show  that  practically 
all  atoms  of  matter  are  radioactive,  assuming  that  the 
streams  of  radiations  also  consist  of  ethereal  \'ibrations  as 
weU  as  flying  particles. 

The  following  data  may  be  summarized  concerning 
electrons : 


ELECTRONS  0 

1.  The  electron  is  the  smallest  entity  known  to  I  ^C^^Cyty*^-''^'^^ 
science  and  is  a  thousand  limes  smaller  in  mass  than! 
the  smallest  atom. 

2.  It  is  a  sphere  of  positive  electrification  enclosing 
a  number  of  negatively  electrified  corpuscles  which 
counter-balance  the  positive  electricity  of  the  enclosing 
sphere. 

3.  The  electrons  are  characterized  by  the  uni- 
formity of  their  vibrations.  This  is  demonstrated  l)y 
the  sharpness  of  the  lines  of  light  making  up  the  si:)ec- 
trum  of  an  element.  These  lines  originate  from  the 
vibrations  of  electrically  charged  systems  and  if  the 
vibrations  of  different  atoms  were  not  attuned  to  each 
other,  the  spectral  lines  would  be  blurred  and  diffused. 

4.  Light  and  other  radiations  are  dependent  on 
disturbances  in  the  surrounding  ether  caused  by  a  change 
in  the  motion  of  the  corpuscles. 

We  refer  to  perpetual  motion  as  impossible,  yet  the 
whole  universe  is  nought  else.  Matter  is  only  an  effect 
of  a  definite  kind  of  motion. 

During  the  revolutions  of  the  electrons,  thousands 
of  billions  of  times  per  second,  an  electro-magnetic  field 
of  energy  is  created  but  the  rhythmic  changes  in  the 
field  of  energy  thus  transmitted  by  the  ether  have  thus 
far  eluded  all  instruments  for  their  detection  and  study. 


f^aa^<a.i 


The   phenomena   of   moving   electrons    are   known    as 
radiation   and   the   rhythmatic   ethereal   vibrations   occur-     >  • 
ing  within  certain  limits  of  frequency  constitute  light.         oi-'^^-^Y^  y 

Everything  in  nature  is  in  a  state  of  perpetual  motion       / 
and  the  latter  is  continually  changing  from  one  ^-elocity  to 
another. 

The  power  to  change_the__state  of  motion  of  a  body  is  S^^^^ 
ENERGY.     The  total  energy  contained  in  matter  depends  /   /' 

on  the  extent  to  which  it  can  be  changed.     Energy  is  the  ^ 

universal  commodity  on  which  all  life  depends. 

All  forms  of  energy  whether  deri\'ed  from  heat,  clec- 


u-*'-*^^ 


HUMAN    ENERGY 


tricity,  magnetism  or  gravitation  are  interconvertible  and 

represent  practically  different  varieties  of  motion.    Energy, 

like  matter,  canjieither_bejcr^at^^ 

/^yV'-MAfyv^  ^       '^^^  energy  in  all  matter  is  enormous  and  it  has  been 

V  K  estimated  that  one  gram  of  hydrogen  possesses  siifhcient 

/(/^'^^^^'•■^^\        energy  to  raise  one  million  tons  through  a  height  exceeding 

/  /         three  hundred  feet. 

A  gram  of  radium  yields  enough  heat  every  hour 
In  melt  one  and  three-fifths  times  its  own  weight  of  ice. 

A  vital  question  propounded  by  physicists  is,  whether 
it  is  possible  to  gain  control  of  this  tremendous  store  of 
subatomic  energy.^ 

Later  in  discussing  treatment,  this  anticipation  is  not 

beyond  realization. 

2v>>'/^v/v^i,  •'^^^      Electrons  are  only  electricity  and  nought  else  is  in  exist- 

jAiJia  (^*-^'^H^'^     tence  but  electrons. 

'xA^J<^^*^^  >      In  gases,  electricity  is  conducted  by  free  corpuscles  flying 

^.jt^  bullet-like  and  with  velocities  often  approximating  100,000 

[   'T  >ivwi-^  /^       miles  per  second.     In  liquids,  the  conduction  is  only  about 

'  ^^^1)  an  inch  an  hour, 

Y^/  In  metallic  conduction,  the  atoms  are  relatively  fixed  and 

/^^  '  their  only  power  is  that  of  vibration.     Certain  corpuscular 

aggregations  will  hold  in  an  unstable  condition  a  few  more 

corpuscles  than  exactly  suffices  to  balance  the  surrounding 

sphere  of  positive  electricity.     The  atom  thus  constituted 

is  negatively  charged.    Others  hold  a  few  less  corpuscles  than 

suffices  to  balance  the  positive  electricity.     This  leaves  the 

I  atom  positively  electrified. 

,/^^^  ***-^       ^^  these  two  t}^es  of  atoms  are  free  to  move  and  they 

■  t^^^^^  -  unite  and  neutralize  each  electricallv,   we  have  chemical 


union. 


V 


ENERGY  / 

After  the  discovery  of  radium,  the  spinthariscope 
enabled  one  to  watch  the  action  of  a  single  atom,  then 
the  alpha  particle  was  photographed  and  still  later  it 
was  demonstrated  that,  in  the  phenomenon  of  radio- 
activity, we  are  present  at  the  birth  of  helium.  Evi- 
dence is  accumulating  to  show  that  it  is  possible  to 
synthesize  helium  from  hydrogen,  neon,  from  hydrogen 
and  oxygen,  argon  from  sulphur  and  hydrogen  and 
krypton  from  selenium  and  hydrogen. 

Energy. — The  present  age  marvels  at  man's  conquests 
of  the  forces  of  nature.  Yet,  this  age  of  energ}^  can  only  be 
triumphant  when  man  can  know  and  then  direct  and  con- 
trol the  more  important  forces  within  himself. 

The  laws  of  physical  science  are  universal  and  apply 
equally  to  living  organisms  and  so  called  inanimate  things. 
The  supposition  was  entertained  that  natural  objects  which 
to  our  senses  seemed  at  rest  were  absolutely  devoid  of  any 
internal  motion. 

Molecules  and  their  constituents  are  never  at  rest  and 
swift  and  orderly  movements  are  constantly  in  progress 
among  and  within  them. 

There  is  no  such  thing  as  immobility. 

"Water,  to  the  eye  of  the  poet,  the  symbol  of  peace 
and  rest,  its  flow  a  quiet,  continuous  gliding  movement, 
viewed  through  the  molecular  spectacles  of  science, 
presents  a  picture  compared  with  which  the  most 
frenzied  struggles  of  a  fighting  mob  is  almost  absolute 
stillness.  So  the  electric  fluid  when  it  is  forced  into  the 
limelight  of  searching  inquiry,  undergoes  a  similar 
transformation^". 

Every  phenomenon  in  nature  is  dependent  upon  matter 
in  motion  or  vibration  and  energy  is  employed  to  designate 
the  modes  of  motion  in  the  universe. 


;• 


8  HUMAN    ENERGY 

The  first  principle  of  energetics  is,  all  physical  phenom- 
ena (\'ital  or  chemical),  are  forms  of  motion.  .\11  these 
forms  are  susceptible  of  change  into  one  another,  and  in  all 
the  transformations  the  quantity  of  mechanical  work 
represented  b}'  different  modes  of  motion  remains  invariable. 
Atomic  energy-  like  matter,  in  accordance  vdih  the  law  of 
the  Conser\*ation  of  Energ}',  is  indestructible  and  un- 
creatable.     Energ}'  is  differentiated  as  potential  and  kinetic. 

The  total  energy  in  matter  is  dependent  upon  the  extent 
to  which  it  can  be  changed. 

As  long  as  energ}-  changes  neither  in  position  nor  in 
amount  in  space,  'Tt  belongs  to  the  unseen  and  eternals" 
The  latter  is  no  longer  tenable.  Xo  dehcate  apparatus  has 
been  discovered  by  science  to  re\'eal  the  rhythmatic  changes 
in  the  energ}-  field  by  revol\-ing  electrons.  Some  of  the 
lowliest  organisms  however  are  endowed  with  this  per- 
ceptive  apparatus. 

The  author's  visceral  reflexes  show  that  the  potential  or 
slumbering  energ}-  is  detectable  and,  if  energ}-  is  work  and 
the  latter  is  a  function  of  motion,  energ}-  in  repose  is  a 
misstatement. 

Our  present  conception  of  matter  presumes  a  cyclic  or 
\dbrator}-  motion  of  electrons  and  it  continues  as  potential 
energ}-  until  transformed  into  actual  energy  by  some  exciting 
energ}-  from  without. 

The  latter  supposes  a  current  of  energ}-  or  transference 
of  atomic  energ}-  in  space. 

"Energ}-  is  like  water-power — potential  in  the  lake, 
actual  in  the  waterfall  or  river'."  Ever}-  h\-ing  being  is  a 
transformer  of  energ}-  converting  the  en\ironmental  energy 
into  mechanical  motion,  heat  and  nervous  energ}-. 

The  sun  is  the  direct  source  of  all  the  energ}-  animating 
yH^-'Vv.       the  earth's  surface. 


RADIATIONS  y 

Human  energy. — Investigations  of  all  ages  have  es- 
poused the  theory  of  human  radiations. 

To  some,  the  organism  is  compared  to  a  Voltaic  battery 
which  emits  something  akin  to  electricity. 

The  hagiologist  conciliates  the  reality  of  radiations  by 
referring  to  the  auras  in  ancient  pictures  around  the  heads 
and  bodies  of  Christ  and  the  saints. 

The  phenomena  of  light  in  materialization  have  been 
witnessed  and  accepted  by  notable  scientists  as  spiritistic 
phenomena.  Of  superstition,  it  has  been  said,  that  it  is 
true  psychology  with  the  wrong  dress. 

The  writer  is  convinced  that  the  phenomena  are  realities 
independent  of  disembodied  spirits  and  can  be  referred 
to  the  manifestations  of  human  energy.  Disocculting  the 
occult  will  be  possible  when  one  attains  a  better  understand- 
ing of  the  activities  of  living  cells  and  when  the  biologist 
shall  know  the  laws  that  govern  cell-growth  with  the 
accuracy  of  the  scientist  knowing  his  laws. 

The  depths  of  the  sea  teem  with  luminous  fish,  crusta- 
ceans and  zoophytes  (animal  light). 

Luminous  phenomena  (photisms)  have  been  coincident 
with  many  conversions. 

The  theory  of  exteriorization  is  supported  by  the  occul- 
tist in  his  reference  to  the  perispirit  and  astral  body. 

Every  individual,  it  is  maintained,  is  enveloped  in  a    ^ 
radiance  (Aura)  invisible  to  the  carnal  eye  and  only  per-  Syy^^^^^'^f^n^ 
ceived  by  the  soul  accustomed  to  it.    Perception  of  the  aura    ^l***"*-^ 
is  the  supposed  prerogative  of  clairvoyance  but  Kilner^ 
has  shown  that  any  one  can  observe  the  "atmosphere" 
surrounding  the  human  body  by  aid  of  chemical  screens 
notably,  one  containing  a  solution  of  dicyanin  which,  by 
partially   paralyzing    the    retinal    rods    and    cones    causes 
visibility  of  the  aura  in  a  darkened  room. 


10  HUMAN    ENERGY 

Kilner  does  not  explain  the  auric  force. 

The  aura  is  probably  energy-discharge.  In  a 
letter  from  Dr.  Kilner,  the  latter  obser\'es:  "Your 
opinion  that  the  aura  is  only  energy  emanating  from  the 
body  corresponds  entirely  with  mine,  only  I  have  ex- 
pressed it  in  a  different  manner.  I  have  tried  to  see 
it  on  the  dead  body  but  have  always  failed  to  do  so." 

Confirmation  of  the  aura  is  established  by  the  demon- 
stration of  a  neurodynamic  field  (page  80). 

In  heakh  the  aura  is  symmetrical.  In  hysteria,  the 
aura  instead  of  gradually  diminishing  and  reaching  its 
narrowest  limits  not  higher  than  the  lower  half  of  the 
thigh  (as  in  health),  suddenly  contracts  to  its  final 
breadth  at  a  short  distance  from  the  pubes.  In  epi- 
lepsy, at  any  time,  the  width  of  the  aura  is  markedly 
increased  on  one  side  which  inequality  is  more  con- 
spicuous in  women  than  in  men  (Kilner). 

The  N-rays  of  Blondlot,  supposed  to  emanate  from  the 
bod}^  and  detected  by  the  fluorescence  of  a  phosphorescent 
screen,  have  been  relegated  to  oblivion.  The  writers' 
investigations^  which  preceded  those  of  Blondlot  were 
abandoned  owing  to  the  difficulty  of  eliminating  the  per- 
sonal equation  which  permitted  one  to  perceive  what  one 
expected  to  perceive  (expectant  attention). 

Holmes,  I  assume,  is  sponsor  for  the  epigram  that  some 
people  believe  that  their  personality  is  limited  by  their 
physical  exterior  but  as  far  as  he  himself  was  concerned,  it 
extended  some  distance.  Leon  Denis  %  contended  that, 
the  psychical  being  is  not  confined  within  the  limits  of  the 
body  but  that  radiations  are  exteriorized  like  the  Hertzian 
waves.  They  arouse  impressions  in  sensitive  people  vary- 
ing according  to  the  d\Tiamic  condition  of  such  persons; 
visions,  voices  or  movements.    The  latter  conception  corre- 


RADIATIONS  11 

spends  to  that  of  Reichenbach  and  others,  respecting  a 
force  variously  called  odic,  vital,  electric  and  magnetic 
which  is  exteriorized  in  an  unlimited  field  and  manifested 
by  varied  mediumistic  or  psychological  phenomena. 

Baraduc^,  contends  that  each  segment  in  our  organism 
(cerebral,  pulmonary,  gastric  and  genital),  has  a  radio- 
activity of  its  own,  an  area  of  vibrations  varying  in  nature; 
that,  owing  to  their  power  of  emanation,  they  may  exert 
a  telepathical  influence,  a  kind  of  wireless  telegraphic  action 
over  the  passive  radioactivity  of  another  person  in  a  condi- 
tion of  vital  hypotension.  Grasset  cites  the  following  from 
Bue  {Le,  Magnetisme  curatlf):  "One  may  easily  get  a  clear 
idea  of  the  impression  made  on  plants  by  our  radiant  action, 
by  operating  with  hyacinth  or  tulip  bulbs." 

In  his  spectroscopic  studies  of  the  human  rays'.  Hooker 
contends  that  the  color  of  the  radiations  are  utilizable  in 
determining  definite  temperamental  conditions. 

Clerk-Maxwell,  observed  that  progress  was  symbolized 
in  the  clock,  the  balance  and  the  foot-rule.  Implying  there- 
by, if  we  could  time,  weigh  and  measure,  facts  in  heu  of 
theories  could  be  submitted.  Until  observations  are  ex- 
pressed numerically,  all  data  concerning  radiations  must  be 
limited  to  the  realms  of  speculation. 

Philosophism,  the  refuge  of  the  scientifically  destitute, 
can  never  substitute  objectivity  in  scientific  research. 

There  are  more  false  facts  than  theories  and  the  true 
scientist  does  not  hesitate  to  preside  at  the  birth  of  a  theory 
and  officiate  at  its  burial  on  the  morrow. 

Energy  liberated  by  the  organism  appears  in  mechani- 
cal, thermal  and  electrical  form. 

Apparatus  devised  for  recognizing  or  measuring  radia- 
tions embrace  the  biometer  of  Lucas,  the  magnetometer  of 
Fortin  and  Baraduc,  the  Sthenometer  of  Joire  and  a  variety 


12  HUMAN    ENERGY 

of  dynamoscopes.  Some  are  practically  sensitive  Galvano- 
meters and  the  essential  factor  of  other  apparatus  is  a  light 
and  unstead}'  needle  of  straw  (Sthenometer)  or  metal 
enclosed  in  a  glass  case,  which  is  attracted  or  repelled  by 
the  approach  of  the  fingers.  The  apparatus  in  question 
lack  constancy  of  action  and  are  therefore  impracticable. 
It  is  unnecessar}-  to  discover  a  new  form  of  energs'  to  make 
any  apparatus  of  value  insomuch  as  all  forms  of  energy 
specified  as  kinetic,  gra\-itational,  radiant,  etc.,  are  merely 
protean  manifestations  of  the  same  thing  as  their  inter- 
convertibility  is  conceded. 

i      Action  currents. — Physiologists  have  established 
the  follow-ing: — 

1.  Electrical  currents  appear  in  the  body  when  a 
muscle  or  nerve  is  active  and  such  currents  are  inti- 
mately associated  with  the  functional  condition  of  the 
tissue. 

2.  These  action  currents  correspond  to  the  general 
law  that  ever}^  active  portion  of  nerve  or  muscle  main- 
tains a  negative  relation  toward  the  resting  part,  i.  e., 
the  active  muscle  and  ners^e  show  a  negative  electrical 
reaction  toward  the  resting  structures. 

3.  The  action  currents  are  sufficiently  strong  to 
have  a  stimulating  action  of  their  own.  The  electric 
phenomena  in  the  li\'ing  body  (electrobiology)  have 
recently  been  studied  from  a  diagnostic  \dewpoint  by 
Baines  and  Bo\\Tnan. 

Electropathology. — In  Chicago,  September  30,  1913, 
the  writer  gave  his  first  pubHc  demonstrations  of  recogniz- 
ing  and  measuring  human  energ}'  in  health  and  disease. 

In  1914,  Baines  and  Bowman,  pubhshed'  the  result  of 
at  least  thirty  years  research  work,  which  has  an  impor- 
tant bearing  on  my  previous  observations.  A  s>'nopsis  of 
their  work  is  as  follows : 


ELECTROPATHOLOGY  13 

"^  The  living  cell  constantly  forms  biogens  (a  compound 
formed  only  as  a  result  of  vital  action).  The  chemical 
reactions  of  the  cell  are  dependent  on  protoplasm  which 
belongs  to  the  coHoids  (non-jiQiiductors  of  electricity). 
Crystalloids,  the  other  cellular  constituents,  are  conductors 
of  electricity.  In  emulsion  colloids,  if  the  reaction  is  alkaline 
the  charge  is  always  negative,  and  it  is  positiveTlf  acid. 
Physiologic  action  is  associated  with  electrical  phenomena 
which  are  demonstrable  by  a  sensitive  Galvanometer.  The 
history  of  Electrophysiology  is  a  record  of  contradictions 
due  to  a  disregard  of  the  following  fundamental  factors : 

1.  Chemical  generation  of  nerve  force  in  the  body. 

2.  Presence  in  the  latter  of  great  conductive  and  in- 
ductive capacity;  and 

3.  The  conductive  and  inductive  capacity  of  every 
liquid  and  every  moist  substance  or  object. 

The  human  generates  electricity  statically  by  muscular 
movement — but  this  charge  can  be  dissipated  almost  in- 
stantly by  placing  the  body  in  contact  with  an  earth  plate 
of  low  resistance.  Its  great  conductive  and  electrostatic 
capacity  is  likewise  known  because  the  insulated  body  can 
be  charged  to  a  very  high  potential.  The  body  may  be 
likened  to  a  collection  of  storage  cells,  which  are  liable  to 
become  highly  charged,  or  to  have  their  charge  altered  by 
any  direct  or  passing  current,  or  exciting  influence.  Elec- 
tromotive force  continues  even  when  the  body  is  absolutely 
motionless,  hence  the  theory  of  chemical  generation  of  nerve 
force.  Electricity  in  the  body  must  be  constantly  dis- 
charged, otherwise  the  electrical  pressure  would  become 
unbearable.  The  skin,  the  body  insulator,  is  not  of  uni- 
form high  resistance.  Sign,  electromotive  force  and  cur- 
rent vary  with  the  individual.  Whereas  the  generation  of 
electricity  in   the  body  may  be  constant,   its  dissipation 


4 


14  HUMAN    EXERGY 

cannot  be  so  by  reason  of  the  varying  conditions  of  external 
conductivity.  The  sign  of  the  current  is  not  always  the 
same.  Taking  the  right  hand  (as  a  whole)  as  one  terminal, 
and  the  left  hand  as  another  terminal  of  the  body,  one 
person  may  be  negative  and  the  other  positive. 

In  this  respect  the  bod}'  resembles  a  Galvanic  cell  whose 
terminals,  electromotive  force  and  internal  resistance  are 
unkno\\Ti  until  tested  and  ascertained.  Investigators  have 
ignored  the  tension  and  sign  of  the  atmosphere  in  the  test- 
ing room,  which  have  always  been  unknown  quantities. 
The  Electromotive  forces  are  liable  to  \-ariation  by  the 
following  heretofore  ignored  factors: 


.7-0    Ga.lu 


Fig.  I. — Method  of  testing  (Baines  and  Bowman). 

1.  Number   of   persons   present   and    their   respective 
electrical  signs  and  electromotive  forces. 

2.  Nature    of    liquids    employed    in    moistening    the 
electrodes. 

3.  Degree  of  absorption  of  material  on  electrodes. 

4.  Area  of  electrodes;  and 

5.  Amount  of  moisture  present  in  the  subject  examined. 
The  apparatus  used  are  a  sensitive  Astatic  mirror  Gal- 
vanometer, short-circuit  key,  flexible  wire,  electrodes  and 


ELECTROPATHOLOGY 


15 


contacts.  Unfortunately  the  apparatus  is  not  portable,  it 
cannot  be  installed  within  a  mile  of  an  electric  railway  or 
mains  carrying  current  of  high  potential  by  reason  of  induc- 
tion, which  will  yield  only  negative  results.  It  must  not  be 
subjected  to  vibration, 

Intlamation. — Augmented  temperature  acting  upon 
the  nerve  sheaths  by  decreasing  resistance  causes  a  leakage 
or  short  circuit,  i.  e.,  the  nerve  current  from  the  affected 
parts  passes  into  wet  tissue,  thus  depriving  the  vessels  of 
their  supply.  If  the  part  a  (Fig.  i)  were  an  inflamed  area, 
the  deflection  of  the  needle  from  "A"  to  a  would  be  higher 

Jfe^aiwcSidc ;,'; .  -PcsUh^eSido 

00  2Sf)    200     /5C    /OO     JO    '^"6"     JO      /CO 


/GO     20O   250  ZC 


Fig.  2. — Scale  upon  which  deflections  are  recorded  in  milUmeters  (Baines  and 
Bowman). 


than  from  "A"  to  6,  and  the  rapidity  of  deflection  would 
be  in  proportion  to  the  acuity  of  the  inflammation.  Cure 
of  inflammation  is  based  on  restoring  the  insulation  of  the 
nerve  sheath  by  dielectrical  treatment. 

Neurasthenia. — The  Galvanometer  scale  is  divided 
into  300  millimeters  on  each  side  of  zero  (Fig.  2).  In 
health,  the  hand  to  hand  deflection  should  be  250  to  300 
mm.,  rising  steadily  and  becoming  constant  at  whatever 


16  HUMAN    ENERGY 

point  it  halted.  In  neurasthenia,  the  Hght  is  never  at  rest 
and  the  deflections  may  be  anything  from  5  to  90  mm.  It 
\xi]l  be  both  positive  and  negative,  moving  slowly  and 
erratically  backwards  and  forwards.  Irregularity,  fluctua- 
tion and  insufficiency  of  nerve  energ}'  characterize  this 
disease.  Improvement  was  effected  in  these  cases  and 
noted  objectively  (increased  and  steady  needle  deflections) 
by  ha^^.ng  the  patients  constantly  wear  a  belt  carr}-ing  two 
circular  silver  plates,  one  in  contact  ^\ith  the  spine  and  the 
other  Anth  the  abdomen,  just  above  the  navel.  To  the 
plates  a  dr\'  cell  (electromotive  force  of  i  \^olt)  was  con- 
nected ( — terminal  to  back  and  +  to  abdominal  plate). 

Epilepsy. — The  essential  neuro-electrical  phenomena  are 
low  body  and  high  head  deflections,  subnormal  body  and 
high  head  temperature  and  a  point  of  least  resistance  at 
some  cranial  point  from  which  during  an  aura,  or  during 
and  after  an  attack,  an  abnormally  high  deflection  can  be 
eUcited.     The  comparative  data  obtainable  are  as  foUows: 

Healthy  sltbject. — Normal  temperature;  hand  to 
hand  deflection,  250  mm.,  positive;  head  deflections, 
approximately,  270  mm.;  above  navel,  200  mm.;  spinal 
cord,  240  to  200  mm. 

Epileptic. — Temperature,  95.6°  F.;  hand  to  hand  de- 
flections, 120  mm.  (positive  or  negative);  head  deflections 
during  an  aura  or  after  a  parox}'sm,  700  rmn.  (shunted 
do^^^l);  above  navel,  10  mm.,  spinal  cord,  10  mm.,  point 
of  least  resistance  on  skull,  1200  mm.,  (shunted  down  to 
scale  limit).  The  direct  cause  of  a  parox\'sm  is  a  species  of 
neuro-electrical  brain  storm*  and  nature  creates  a  path  of 
least  resistance  to  the  passage  of  the  current  somewhere  in 

*It  was  Charcot,  I  believe,  who  made  a  similar  analogy  to  hysteria  when 
he  referred  to  it  as  an  electric  explosion  (sex  manifestation)  resulting  from 
lack  of  ground-wire. 


ELECTKOPATHOLOGY 


17 


the  skull  {safety  valve)  which  is  located  by  noting  the  area 
from  which  the  highest  head  deflection  is  obtained. 

Bromides  in  this  disease  act  by  checking  generation  of 
nerve  force.  This  is  tantamount  to  the  action  of  bromide 
in  photography  by  checking  development.  Good  results 
are  achieved  by  shunting  the  nerve  current  from  the  head 
to  the  body.  If  the  hair  covering  the  safety  valve  is  re- 
moved, and  a  small  silver  plate  is  fastened  upon  it  (by 
adhesive  plaster)  and  a  belt  carrying  a  silver  plate  (with  a 
terminal)  is  placed  around  the  waist  so  as  to  make  contact 


Fig.  3. — Illustrating  the  "clock  test"  in  canrer  (Baines  and  Bowman). 


with  the  skin  just  above  the  navel,  and  both  plates  are 
connected  by  a  wire  of  low  resistance,  the  deflections  and 
temperature  will  in  a  few  days  go  to  normal.  During  an 
aura,  no  fit  will  ensue  if  the  head  is  at  once  wetted  with 
hot  salt  water  which  decreases  skin  resistance  and  provides 
an  easy  exit  for  the  current. 

Cancer. — The  essential  diagnostic  feature  is  the  dielec- 
tric character  of  the  growth  which  interposes  a  high  resis- 
tance to  the  passage  of  electricity  through  it,  or  being  in 
all  probabihty  an  absolute  non-conductor. 

Fig.  3  represents   the   "clock  test"   i.  e.,  making  one 


18 


HUMAN    ENERGY 


contact  in  the  center  and  the  others  in  accordance  with  the 
hours  upon  the  dial  of  a  clock.  The  deflections  were  in 
millimeters  of  the  scale. 

A — Area  of  secondary  deposits. 

B — Cancerous  growth. 

C — An  area  on  unaffected  side  corresponding  to  the 
cancerous  growth. 

D — An  area  on  the  unaffected  side  corresponding  to  the 
secondary  deposits. 


Fig.  4. — ^The  upper  figure  illustrates  the  area  of  cancer  by  ordinary  diagnosis 
and  the  lower  one,  by  electro-diagnosis.  The  threads  (a,  b,  c)  indicate  the  extension 
of  the  carcinomatous  infiltration  beyond  the  area  suggested  by  the  conventional 
examination  (Baines  and  Bowman). 


By  aid  of  the  electro-diagnostic  method,  the  area  of  the 
cancer  can  be  detected  with  exactitude  (Fig.  4). 

BlOMECHANIC   DETECTION   OF   ENERGY. — The  physiologic 

mechanism  which  the  writer  chiefly  employs  for  detecting 
energy  in  health  and  disease  is  the  living  human  stomach 
(Gastrobiodynamometer).  Epoch-making  discoveries  usually 
date  from  the  discovery  of  a  sensitive  mechanism,  which 


ENERGY   DETECTION 


^J^/Xce/^i-'i'''^^ 


reveals  some  phenomenon  of  the  atomic  world.  The  radium 
emanation  is  detectable  by  the  electroscope  which  is  a  mil- 
lion times  more  sensitive  than  a  spectroscope,  yet  the  latter 
will  detect  the  millionth  of  a  miUigram  of  matter.  The 
delicacy  of  the  string-Galvanometer  has  established  the 
principles  of  electrocardiography.  In  employing  the 
stomach  reflex  of  Abrams  as  a  delicate  physiologic  test 
for  energy,  stomach  musculature  is  utilized.  The  latter 
representing  bioplasmic  matter  is  the  most  primiti\'e  and 


/^^^-vw-'vyi-^ 


Fig.  5. — Apparatus  for  recording  wireless  messages  with  the  leg  of  a  frog; 
A,  nerve;  B,  muscle.    The  attached  tracing  represents  a  record. 


sensitive  substance  for  exhibiting  the  phenomenon  of 
vitality.  The  pupillary  response  to  light  is  an  energy 
reaction  not  unlike  the  stomach  reflex. 

V  A  frog's  muscle  is  now  used  for  recording  wireless 

messages.  The  sciatic  nerve  of  the  leg  is  connected  with 
the  microphonic  circuit  of  the  receiver.  One  end  of  the 
leg  is  fixed  to  a  base,  and  the  other  end  connected  with 
a  pivoted  lever  which  records  on  a  drum  the  contraction 
of  the  muscles  caused  by  the  electrical  impulses  (Fig.  5). 


20  HUMAN   ENEKGY 

Reference  has  been  made  to  the  sensitiveness  of  the 
electroscope.  The  latter  is  far  less  sensitive  than  the 
stomach  reflex. 

>».  An  infinitesimal  quantity  of  radium  detectable  by  the 
electroscope  at  a  distance  of  thirty  inches,  will  yield  a  re- 
action from  the  stomach  at  a  distance  of  thirty  feet,  and 
this  distance  may  be  exceeded  by  the  use  of  an  induction 
coil  (page  275). 

Olfactiflji  surpasses  in  sensitiveness  the  most  im- 
pressible scientific  instruments.  The  spectroscope 
can  detect  a  quantity  of  helium  weighing  no  more  than 
3-100  millionths  of  a  grain,  yet  the  nose  can  perceive  an 
odor  of  a  three  hundred  times  smaller  quantity  of  sulphur- 
eted  hydrogen.  Each  individual  emits  an  odor  peculiar 
to  himself  as  evidenced  by  the  ability  of  bloodhounds 
and  other  animals  to  scent  out  a  man's  trail.  The 
hunter  avoids  the  windward  side  of  the  game  he  seeks  to 
bag.  Alexander  Graham  Bell,  recently  affirmed,  if  an 
odor  could  be  measured  a  new  science  would  be  cre- 
ated. By  means  of  the  biodynamometer  (page  238), 
it  can  be  shown  that  each  odor  can  be  identified  by 
its  specific  rate  of  vibration. 


THE    STOMACH    REFLEX 


21 


CHAPTER  II. 


THE    STOMACH   REFLEX. 


Stomach. — The  musculature  of  this  organ  is  very  power- 
ful. In  the  patient  St.  Martin,  it  was  found  that  when  the 
bulb  of  a  thermometer  was  placed  about  three  inches  from 
the  pylorus  through  the  gastric  fistula,  it  was  tightly  em- 
braced from  time  to  time  and  drawTi  toward  the  pyloric 
orifice  (a  distance  of  three  or  four  inches).  The  anatomic 
features  are  shown  in  fig.  6. 


DUODENUM 

PYLORUS 

ANTRUM 

SPHINCTER 
ANTRI   PYLORICI 


CIRCULAR    FIBERS 

OF 
MUSCLE   COAT 


OBLIQUE   FIBERS  OF 
MUSCLE  COAT 


POSITION 

or  the 
incter 

PYLOR 


POSITION  OF  THE 
SPHINCTER   CARDIAC 


esophago-gastric 
orifice;the  cardia 


FUNDUS 


PREANTRAL   OR  CARDIAC    REIGION 

Fig.  6. — Anatomic  features  of  the  stomach  (Brubaker,  Blakiston). 


The  NERVES  specially  concerned  in  gastric  contractions 
are  the  vagi  and  splanchnics.  Impulses  to  the  nerve  centers 
are  contained  in  the  vagus  trunk,  whereas  impulses  from 
the  centers  reach  the  stomach  through  the  vagus  and  splan- 
chnic nerve.  The  vagal  fibers  are  motor  and  induce  con- 
tractions   when    stimulated.      The    splanchnic    fibers    are 


22 


THE    STOMACH    EEFLEX 


inhibitory  and  produce  dilatation  when  stimulated.    Inner- 
vation of  the  stomach  is  sho^^Tl  in  fig.  7. 


Fig.  7. — Xen'es  of  the  stomach  musculature.  C,  the  cerebrum;  V,  stomach > 
MO,  medulla;  MS,  spinal  cord;  5-10,  thoracic  roots;  VRS,  right  vagus;  VS,  left 
vagus;  ND,  dilators  of  the  cardia;  XC,  constrictors  of  the  cardia;  A,  Auerbach's 
plexus;  S,  S,  fibers  from  the  sjTnpathetic  plexus;  i,  sulcus  cruriatus;  2,  corpus 
striatum;  3,  corpus  quadrigemina;  4,  centers  in  the  spinal  cord.  The  dilator  center 
for  the  cardia  inhibits  the  movements  of  the  pylorus. 

The  sympathetic  fibers  emerge  from  the  cord  by  the 
anterior  roots  of  the  spinal  nerves,  from  the  5th  to  the  8th 
thoracic.  The  traditional  conception  of  the  stomach  as  an 
organ  horizontal  in  position  has  been  modified  with  the 
advent  of  the  Roentgen  rays  yet,  by  the  author's  vago- 


PERCUSSION  23 

visceral  method  of  percussion,  it  may  be  shown  that  the 
Roentgenographic  examination  yields  fictitious  results. 
As  long  as  food  is  present  in  the  stomach,  the  peristaltic 
waves  are  about  three  to  the  minute.  Water  runs  out  of 
the  organ  almost  as  quickly  as  it  enters  it.  The  motor 
mechanism  of  the  stomach  as  expressed  by  peristalsis,  must 
be  differentiated  from  the  tonicity  of  the  gastric  muscles. 
In  the  latter,  the  stomach  is  a  potential  space  which  should 
contract  upon  its  contents  in  such  a  manner  that  the  tubular 
form  is  maintained  until  the  stomach  is  empty  (Barclay). 
Relaxation  of  the  tonicity  causes  a  dropping  of  the  lower 
stomach  border  whereas  an  increase  in  the  tone  causes 
elevation  of  the  organ. 

Prior  to  an  operation,  the  stomach  by  X-ray  examination 
has  been  found  to  be  normal,  yet  at  the  operation  it  appears 
as  a  flaccid  sac  or  vice  versa.  In  the  former  instance,  nausea 
and  anesthesia  have  diminished  tonicity;  in  the  latter, 
retching  or  vomiting  has  increased  tonicity.  The  topog- 
raphy of  the  organ  is  shown  in  figs.  8  and  9. 

When  the  lower  border  of  the  stomach  is  distended,  it 
lies  about  two  to  three  fingers'  breadth  (ij^  to  2}i  inches) 
above  the  umbilicus  and  when  empty,  it  retreats  into  the 
left  cavity  of  the  diaphragm  and  falls  away  from  the  abdom- 
inal wall. 

Percussion. — The  stomach  is  immersed  in  an  atmos- 
phere of  tympany,  and  it  is  impossible  in  the  norm  to  differ- 
entiate by  percussion  the  tympanitic  resonance  of  the 
stomach  from  the  adjacent  coils  of  intestines. 

If  however,  the  stomach  musculature  is  reflexly  stimu- 
lated so  as  to  evoke  the  stomach  reflex,  the  tympanitic 
resonance  of  the  organ  is  supplanted  by  dulness  and  differ- 
entiation from  the  adjacent  structures,  yielding  tympany 
is  possible. 


24 


THE    STOMACH    EEFLEX 


Lung 


Outline  of 
Stomach 


Liver 

Call 
Bladder 

Umbilicus 
Colon 


Fig.  8. — Position  of  the  organs  in  the  upper  part  of  the  abdomen.  Front  view. 
The  highest  points  of  the  Hver  and  fundus  are  somewhat  too  high  in  the  figure 
(Luschka,  Reed). 


Outline  of. 
Stomach 


Spleen 


Left 
Kidney 


Descending 
Colon 


Lung 


Liver 


—Duodenum 
Pancreas 

Ascending 
Colon 


Fig.  9. — Position  of  the  organs  in  the  upper  part  of  the  abdomen.    Back  view 
(Luschka) . 


PERCUSSION  25 

To  explain  the  altered  percussion  sound  when  the  stomach 
reflex  is  elicited,  one  must  have  recourse  to  the  Skodaic 
interpretation  of  the  condition  which  exists  when  dulness 
supplants  tympanicity.  The  reflex  in  question  causes  the 
gastric  walls  to  become  tense,  thus  putting  the  air  or  gas 
within  them  under  increased  tension,  and  for  this  reason 
we  have  the  physical  elements  necessary  for  the  transition 
of  a  tympanitic  to  a  dull  sound.  The  stomach  reflex  is 
mediated  through  the  vagus  which  is  the  chief  autonomic 
nerve  innervating  the  viscera. 

A  tropin  paralyzes  the  motor  endings  of  the  vagus.  An 
injection  of  o.ooi  gm.  (gr.  1-60)  of  the  latter  drug,  will  mani- 
fest its  action  within  30  minutes  and  disappears  in  from  i 
to  3  hours.  During  the  full  physiologic  action  of  the  drug, 
the  stomach  reflex  cannot  be  elicited.  The  vagus  is  more 
active  in  middle  life  than  in  old  age,  and  least  active  in 
infancy,  hence  the  stomach  shows  a  varying  state  of  tonic- 
ity; it  may  be  normal  (ortho tonic) ,  increased  (hypertonic) 
diminished  (hypotonic)  or  absent  (atonic). 

The  stomach  reflex  is  elicited  in  response  to  a  stimulus. 
The  fundamental  property  to  which  the  total  activity  of  the 
living  substance  can  be  traced  is  its  irritability.  The  latter 
can  be  evoked  by  chemical  reagents,  mechanical  agents, 
heat,  light  and  electricity.  The  production  of  energy  is 
many  times  as  great  as  the  energy  of  the  stimulus  employed. 
Thus,  in  the  familiar  experiment  with  a  frog's  gastrocnemius, 
the  mechanical  work  of  the  muscle  called  forth  is  about  38 
times  the  active  force  of  the  stimulus.  Toward  every 
effective  stimulus,  a  cell  always  reacts  in  a  way  which  is 
characteristic  for  its  kind;  a  muscle  cell  always  responds 
with  a  contraction,  a  salivary  gland  cell  always  secretes 
saliva,  etc. 

In  the  reflex  responses  to  stimuli,  a  reflex  is  more  easily 


d^c 


26  THE    STOMACH    REFLEX 

discharged  by  stimulation  of  the  peripheral  end-organ  than 
by^stimulation  of  the  corresponding  afferent  trunk. 

The  human  automatism. — If  the  toe  of  an  adult  is 
pricked  with  a  pin,  the  foot  is  pulled  away  in  about  one- 
tenth  of  a  second.  This  is  a  reflex,  and  is  very  slow  when 
compared  with  the  speed  of  electricity  or  a  light  wave. 
The  latter  would  travel  seven  times  the  equator  in  a 
I  second,  but  the  nerve  wave  travels  at  the  rate  of  only 
loo  feet  a  second.  A  reflex  is  made  up  of  a  stimulus 
causing  a  discharge  of  energy,  transmission  of  the  latter 
to  a  center  whereby  another  energy  is  discharged,  and 
finally  the  transmission  of  energy  to  the  stimulated  area. 
All  actions  are  essentially  reflexes,  and  if  this  view- 
point is  carried  further,  it  means  that  we  have  no  will 
of  our  own,  and  that  our  actions  are  simply  the  result 
of  external  circumstances.  We  are  instinctively  like 
ants  and  bees,  and  we  are  creatures  of  physical  forces. 
All  reflexes  are  purposeful  in  character;  closing  of  the 
eyelid,  and  contraction  of  the  pupil  protect  the  eye  ftom 
foreign  bodies,  and  the  retina  from  intense  light.  Irri- 
tability and  conductivity  are  the  only  qualities  essential 
to  reflexes,  and  both  are  common  qualities  of  all 
protoplasm^*^. 
*  What  happens  to  a  nerve  when  it  is  stimulated  or 
when  it  is  struck  by  a  series  of  blows?  Loeb^",  demon- 
strated that,  muscles  could  be  made  to  contract  or 
relax  under  the  influence  of  certain  ions.  Mathews, 
found  that,  a  like  effect  could  be  observed  in  nerves. 
It  was  Graham,  who  divided  all  substances  into  those 
which  crystallize  when  they  solidify  and  those  which 
do  not. 

The  latter  were  designated  colloids  or  gluelike 
substances.  The  colloids  in  the  body  bear  a  positive 
electrical  charge  and  are  precipitated  by  negative  ions. 

Now  the  nerves  consist  of  colloid  particles  in  sus- 
pension and  the  thicker  this  jelly-like  substance,  the 
better  will  the  nerve  conduct.  When  chloroform  or 
ether    is    inhaled,    unconsciousness    ensues    when    the 


VISCERAL,    TONICITY  27 

nerves  no  longer  conduct  sensation.  Here,  the  action 
of  the  anesthetic  is  to  dissolve  the  colloid  substance, 
and  the  thinner  the  latter,  the  less  easily  will  the  nerves 
conduct.  The  colloid  particles  as  intimated  are  posi- 
tively charged,  and  a  nerve  is  stimulated  by  a  current 
proceeding  from  the  negative,  pole.  The  positive  and 
negative  ions  in  a  nerve  are  balanced.  Now  suppose 
the  nerve  is  stimulated  by  blows,  then  the  colloid 
particles  coming  together  would  have  their  surfaces 
reduced.  The  latter  would  reduce  their  electrical  charge, 
and  releasing  a  number  of  negative  charges,  a  nerve 
impulse  would  be  started. 

Static  Electricity  is  obtainable  in  a  variety  of  ways 
among  which  is  concussion  which  produces  positive 
and  negative  charges.  If  the  seventh  cervical  spine  is 
struck,  the  energy  evoking  the  stomach  reflex  is  neu- 
tral and  it  is  found  to  be  negative  when  the  first  lum- 
bar spine  is  concussed. 

-^  Visceral  tonicity. — In  health  the  viscera  are  in  a  state 
of  tonicity,  /.  e.,  their  musculature  is  in  a  more  or  less  perma- 
nent although  variable  condition  of  contraction.  This 
visceral  tonicity  is  most  important  in  regulating  the  cavities 
of  the  heart  and  other  organs. 

Muscle  tonus  is  a  reflex  caused  by  stimuli  acting  on  the 
skin  (and  elsewhere)  conveyed  by  nerves  to  the  cord,  and 
from  the  latter  impulses  are  carried  to  the  muscles.  This 
tonus  disappears  if  either  the  posterior  roots  of  the  spinal 
nerves  or  the  afferent  nerves  from  the  muscles  are  cut.  When 
a  stimulus  is  applied  to  the  stomach  region,  i)ercussion  of 
the  stomach  elicits  dulness. 

We  shall  note  later  (page  io3),  that  a  relaxed  organ  will 
yield  a  smaller  area  of  dulness  than  an  organ  which  is  in  a 
state  of  tone.  To  accurately  reproduce  the  area  occupied 
by  an  organ,  it  must  be  put  in  a  condition  of  augmented 
tone,  otherwise  percussion  will  yield  untrustworthy  results. 


28  THE    STOMACH    EEFLEX 

Methods  of  percussion. — The  author's  experience 
with  hundreds  of  physicians  to  whom  he  has  taught  his 
method  of  dehmiting  the  stomach,  constrains  him  to  con- 
clude that,  errors  are  most  frequent  owing  to  the  non- 
recognition  of  differences  in  the  percussion  note,  rather 
than  inability  to  ehcit  them. 

It  is  better  to  rely  upon  the  fingers  in  percussion.  In- 
strumental is  easier  than  finger  percussion,  although  less 
rehable.  The  index  or  second  finger  of  the  left  hand  is 
applied  closeh'  and  evenh'  to  the  part  and  then  tapped  with 
the  second  finger  of  the  right  hand.  A  single,  double,  or 
repeated  percussion  blows  may  then  be  made.  In  finger- 
finger  percussion,  we  can  appreciate  the  resistance  of 
tissues  percussed  (plessesthesia)  and  adapt  the  finger  to 
irregularities  of  the  superficies. 

Observe  the  following:  i.  Press  firmly  as  a  rule 
against  part  to  be  percussed.  2.  Movement  of  per- 
cussing hand  must  spring  only  from  wrist,  while  fore- 
arm is  motionless.  3.  Blow  must  be  sharp  and  quick, 
direct  and  perpendicular.  The  results  obtained  by 
percussion  are  as  much  due  to  the  method  of  execution 
as  to  the  condition  of  the  tissues.  The  force  of  the 
percussion  blow  is  always  secondary  to  the  knack  of 
obtaining  full  \ibration  in  resonant  tissues.  The  stu- 
dent to  gain  flexibihty  of  the  wrist  joint  should  prac- 
tice movements  of  this,  joint  with  the  arm  adducted 
toward  the  thorax,  and  the  forearm  at  right  angles 
and  motionless. 

As  already  observed,  the  best  results  are  secured  by 
finger-finger  percussion;  one  finger  acting  as  a  pleximeter 
and  the  other  finger  as  a  plexor.  After  this  manner  one  can 
appreciate  the  resistance  of  tissues  percussed  (palpable 
percussion).  To  localize  the  percussion-blow,  the  second 
linger  (usually  employed)  acting  as  a  pleximeter  must  be 


PERCUSSION 


29 


held  rigid  with  the  ungual  phalanx  slightly  raised  (Fig.io). 
If  the  latter  precaution  is  not  taken,  and  the  terminal 
phalanx  rests  on  the  abdomen,  the  blow  will  be  transmitted 
to  the  contiguous  area,  and  the  tone  elicited  will  obscure 
the  stomach  dulness.  When  the  raising  of  the  ungual  phalanx 
is  difficult,  a  celluloid  thimble  may  be  affixed  to  the  end  of 


Fig.  io. — The  upper  figure  represents  the  correct  position  of  the  finger  when 
used  as  a  pleximeter.  The  cross  indicates  the  part  of  the  digit  to  be  struck  by  the 
other  finger  acting  as  a  plexor.  The  lower  figure  indicates  the  incorrect  position 
of  the  finger  in  eliciting  dullness  of  the  stomach.  The  middle  figure  illustrates  the 
use  of  plaster  for  raising  the  ungual  phalanx  when  this  is  impossible  voluntarily. 


the  finger,  thus  attaining  the  correct  position  as  shown  in 
fig.  II.  Another  means  of  securing  the  same  object  is  to 
raise  the  phalanx  by  aid  of  adhesive  plaster  as  shown  in 

fig.     IO. 

To   thoroughly   appreciate   the   changes   in    resonance, 
light  percussion  must  be  employed,  insomuch  as  it  is  a 


30  THE    STOMACH    REFLEX 

recognized  law  of  sense-perception  that  the  less  loud  the 
initial  sound,  the  simpler  it  is  to  recognize  its  variations 
and  furthermore,  a  heavy  blow  dulls  the  sensibility  of  the 
finger  tips. 

If  the  finger  used  as  a  pleximeter  is  held  stiffly  and  rests 


Fig.  1 1 . — Elevation  of  the  ungual  phalanx  secured  by  aid  of  a  celluloid  thimble 

VERY  LIGHTLY  in   contact  with   the   stomach  region,   the 
terminal  phalanx  need  not  be  raised. 

The  phalanx  need  not  be  raised  if  either  of  the  following 
methods  of  Auscultatory  Percussion  is  used;  i.  If  during 
percussion  a  stethoscope  is  placed  somewhere  in  the  stomach 


Fig.  12. — Illustrating  orthopercussion. 

region.     This  method  accentuates  the  dulness.     2.     Using 
the  stethoscope  in  the  same  way  and  in  lieu  of  percussion, 
briskly  rub  the  skin.    When  the  lower  border  of  the  stomach 
is  attained,  a  characteristic  differential  sound  is  audible. 
The  percussion  blow  may  also  be  localized  by  Gold- 


PERCUSSION 


31 


scheider's  orthopercussion ;  distal  phalanx  of  the  plessimeter 
finger  is  held  perpendicular  to  the  superficies  (Fig,  12). 

For  those  unskilled  in  finger-finger  percussion,  the 
plexor  and  pleximeter  shown  in  fig.  i3  have  been  devised 
by  the  author. 


W^ 


Fig.  13. — Plexor  and  pleximeter  for  the  use  of  physicians  unskilled  in  finger- 
finger  percussion.  The  dark  area  in  the  pleximeter  represents  a  small  quantit}-  of 
wax.  The  latter  eliminates  all  adventitious  sounds  likely  to  disturb  the  elicitation 
of  stomach-dulness.  A  Ught  blow  yields  the  best  results  and  when  the  lower  border 
of  the  stomach  is  attained,  an  unmistakable  woody  sound  is  audible.  The  plexor 
at  its  rounded  extremity  is  provided  with  a  soft  rubber  ring. 


Light  blows  with  the  plexor  yield  the  best  results — a 
sound  almost  woody  in  character,  when  the  lower  border 
of  the  stomach  is  attained.  Plexor-finger  percussion  may 
be  used  (Fig.  14) ;  the  tip  of  the  finger  firmly  approximating 
the  abdominal  wall. 

Before  attempting  delimitation  of  the  lower  stomach 
border,  the  lower  border  of  the  liver  is  defined  in  the  usual 
way,  and  marked  by  a  dermograph.  It  must  be  observed 
however,  that  when  energy  is  conveyed  to  the  epigastric  re- 
gion, the  liver  border  will  be  found  lower  (pages  81  and  io3). 


32  THE    STOMACH    KEFLEX 

To  elicit  the  stomach  reflex,  it  is  necessary  to  take  the 
following  factors  into  consideration;  the  subject,  posture 
and  position  of  the  subject,  grounding  and  energy. 

The  subject. — The  reflex  is  best  elicited  on  a  healthy 
test  subject  with  known  stomach  tonicity,  with  moderately 
thin  abdominal  walls,  and  in  whom  a  tympanitic  sound  is 
demonstrable  by  percussion  over  the  entire  abdomen. 


Fig.  14. — The  author's  method  of  threshold  percussion  for  defining  viscera 
borders.  The  tip  of  the  index  finger  is  firmly  fixed  at  an  angle  with  the  chest  or 
abdominal  wall  and  parallel  with  the  boundary  percussed.  As  the  finger  gradually 
approaches  the  boundary  it  is  struck  \vith  the  middle  finger  of  the  other  hand  at 
its  base  and  side  as  indicated  by  the  black  spot. 


Spastically  contracted  intestines,  obesity,  the  presence  of 
feces  and  intra-abdominal  congestion*,  will  modify  the 
abdominal  tympanicity.  For  esthetic  reasons  when  the 
biodynamic  reactions  are  executed  (page  124),  the  subject 
may  be  screened  from  the  patient.    When  a  better  acquain- 

*Described  by  the  author  in  his  book  "S planchnic Neurasthenia,"  E.  E. 
Treat  &  Co.,  New  York. 


THE    STOMACH   EEFLEX  33 

tance  with  the  method  is  attained,  the  reactions  may  be 
obtained  directly  from  the  patient. 

I  employ  a  male  individual  as  a  test  subject.     Some  of 

my  disciples  employ  a  boy  with  very  thin  abdominal  walls, 

who  is  in  attendance  at  their  offices  for  several  hours  daily. 

One  physician   employs  a  dog  for  demonstrating  the 

stomach  reflex;  the  animal  held  erect  on  his  hind  legs. 

The  tonicity  of  the  stomach  varies  in  different  individ- 
uals, yet  investigations  convince  me  that  this  variable 
factor  is  practically  negligible  in  gauging  the  intensity  of 
the  reflex  with  the  biodjmamometer  (page  44). 

The  subject  in  whom  the  reflex  is  elicited  must  wear  no  x 
yellow  material,  nor  ingest  prior  to  the  examination  any 
food  possessing  this  color  (page  114).  Odors  of  various 
kinds  (page  124)  and  emotional  factors  (page  34)  may 
influence  the  visceral  reflexes.  One  must  work  in  a  room 
with  subdued  light  (page  36)  and  no  colored  shades  must> 
be  used  to  modify  the  light.  The  stomach  like  other  vis- 
ceral reflexes  is  easily  exhausted. 

As  a  rule  two  hours  continuous  use  of  my  test  subject 
unfits  him  for  the  execution  of  my  physico-diagnostic 
methods. 

It  is  absolutely  necessary  to  determine  if  the  reflex 
is  present  before  making  a  biodynamic  reaction.  Not 
infrequently  the  liver  border  (page  77)  or  the  heart 
is  used  when  the  stomach  reflex  is  exhausted. 

To  revivify  the  exhausted  reflex,  pilocarpine  may  be 
used,  but  this  drug  accentuates  the  reflex  so  as  to  make 
the  results  untrustworthy.  A  simple  and  often  reliable 
method  is  to  permit  the  flux  from  a  large  horseshoe 
magnet  to  act  on  the  7  th  cervical  spine  for  several 
minutes.     Vide  p.  62. 

It  is  a  curious  physiologic  phenomenon  to  which 
the  author  has  directed  attention  elsewhere,  that  other 
afferent  paths  may  be  utilized  in  the  excitation  of 


34  THE   STOMACH   KEFLEX 

centers   which   cannot   be   reached   by   paths   already 
enervated. 

The  time  most  propitious  for  using  the  subject  is  about 
one  hour  after  a  repast.  When  the  stomach  is  empty,  it 
retreats  into  the  left  cavity  of  the  diaphragm,  and  falls 
away  from  the  abdominal  wall.  The  psycho-vagus  tone 
and  consequently  the  stomach  reflex,  may  be  compromised 
by  emotional  factors  which  by  increasing  in  the  blood,  the 
content  of  adrenalin  secretion  (hyperadrenalinemia)  reduces 
vagal  tonicity. 

Pylorus  reflex. — This  is  a  new  phenomenon  observed 
by  the  author  in  thin  subjects,  at  the  end  of  expiration 
during  suspended  breathing.  When  the  nth  rib  in  Traube^s 
space  is  struck  a  series  of  blows  with  a  plexor,  corresponding 
to  the  region  of  the  pylorus,  an  e'evation  followed  by  slight 
retraction  of  the  abdominal  parietes  is  noted. 

Posture  and  position. — The  sub'ect  must  be  in  the 
ERECT  posture,  which  is  the  best  possible  position  to  elicit 
the  stomach  reflex. 

The  posture  of  the  patient  from  whom  the  energy  is 
conveyed  is  immaterial.  It  is  possible  however  with  intense 
energy  to  evoke  the  reflex  in  the  recumbent  posture  in  a 
suitable  subject.  The  test  subject  or  the  patient,  on  whom 
the  reflex  is  elicited  must  face  toward  the  West.  When 
the  subject  faces  North,  no  energy  is  sufficient  to  elicit  the 
reflex,  and  if  the  subject  faces  South,  only  a  positive  energy 
will  evoke  the  reflex;  negative  energy  is  without  any  action. 
The  foregoing  is  equally  true  if  grounding  is  necessary 
with  a  plate  of  aluminum  (page  35).  To  secure  uniform 
results  even  the  patient  from  whom  the  energy  is  conveyed 
should  face  the  West,  or  if  recumbent,  the  feet  should  be 
in  the  same  direction,  insomuch  as  the  energy  discharged 
varies  with  posture  (page  35). 


GROUNDING  35 

The  Earth  is  itself  a  magnet  and  the  terrestrial  magnetic 
elements  of  a  place  may  modify  the  foregoing  results,  which 
held  good  in  San  Francisco,  where  most  of  the  observations 
have  been  made. 

When  the  subject  stands  exactly  in  the  magnetic 
MERIDIAN,  the  stomach  reflex  is  evoked  of  its  own 
accord,  whether  the  subject  faces  the  North  or  South. 
Place  a  compass  on  the  floor  and  mark  the  position  of 
the  two  ends  of  the  needle.  Remove  it,  and  draw  a 
line  joining  these  two  points.  This  line  is  the  inter- 
section of  two  planes,  viz.: —  the  Magnetic  Meridian, 
and  the  surface  of  the  floor. 

Our  methods  of  Topographic  Percussion  have  ignored 
the  magnetic  elements  and  are  consequently  erroneous. 
A  relaxed  organ  will  yield  a  smaller  area  of  dulness  than  an 
organ  which  is  in  a  state  of  tone  (page  io3).  The  foregoing 
refers  to  all  the  viscera. 

The  best  stomach  reflex  is  obtainable  when  all  iron  or 
steel  articles  are  removed  from  the  room  and  the  pockets 
of  the  subject. 

Grounding. — This  refers  to  the  forming  of  an  earth 
connection.  The  discovery  of  the  stomach  reflex  solves 
many  heretofore  inexplicable  physical  phenomena.  The 
reflex  demonstrates  that  the  earth  is  the  negative  terminal 
of  nature's  energy.  With  the  subject  facing  West,  even 
though  insulated,  either  pole  of  a  bar-magnet  will  elicit  the 
stomach  reflex,  but  the  latter  is  not  obtainable  as  a  rule 
with  other  forms  of  energy,  unless  the  subject  is  grounded. 

The  subject  must  stand  on  a  flooring  of  unvarnished 
wood.  Carpet  is  not  objectionable  if  the  latter  condition 
is  fulfilled.  When  the  flooring  is  of  insulated  material,  the 
subject  must  stand  on  a  sheet  of  aluminum;  the  latter  is 
grounded  by  a  wire  connected  with  a  convenient  faucet, 


36 


THE   STOMACH   KEFLEX 


radiator  or  gas-pipe.  The  shoes  worn  by  the  subject  must 
be  free  from  insulating  material.  In  my  office  as  well  as 
elsewhere,  if  the  subject  stands  over  water  or  gas-pipes 
under  the  flooring,  a  spontaneous  stomach  reflex  (revealed 


Fig.  15. — Illustrating  method  of  conveying  energj^  from  the  heart  to  the 
stomach  region.  The  subject  holds  both  electrodes  during  the  time  the  physician 
percusses  by  aid  of  the  plexor  and  pleximeter  (Fig.  13). 

by  dulness)   is  evoked  and  disappears  when  the  subject 
occupies  another  part  of  the  room. 

Energy. — Proximity  of  the  subject  to  intense  light 
must  be  avoided ;  light  being  a  form  of  energy,  and  is  capable 
in  itself  of  evoking  the  stomach  reflex.     It  is  necessar}^ 


THE    STOMACH   REFLEX 


37 


primarily  to  locate  the  lower  stomach  border.  To  increase 
the  tone  of  the  gastric  musculature  sufficient  to  elicit  dul- 
ness,  two  simple  maneuvers  are  available: 


Fig.  i6. — ^The  lower  figure  represents  the  correct  way  of  holding  the  magnet 
or  electrode.  The  upper  figure  is  incorrect  owing  to  modification  of  polarity  from 
the  finger  tips  and  approximation  of  the  latter  to  the  metal  which  causes  short- 
circuiting  and  interferes  with  conveyance  of  energy. 


I.  While  the  patient  or  an  assistant  directs  either  pole 
of  a  bar-magnet  at  a  distance  of  about  4  inches  from  the 
presumable  location  of  the  lower  stomach  border,  light 
percussion  is  executed  from  below  upward  until  dulness 


38  THE    STOMACH    REFLEX 

is  elicited;  this  is  the  lower  border  of  the  stomach  and  its 
position  should  be  marked  with  a  dermograph. 

2.  During  the  time  energ\^  is  conveyed  from  the  heart 
region  of  the  subject  to  stomach  region  by  means  of  an 
insulated  cord  of  copper  as  shown  in  fig.  15,  execute  per- 
cussion after  the  manner  cited  in  the  first  maneuver. 

To  secure  uniform  results,  the  electrode  approximating 
the  stomach  is  fixed  in  the  left  anterior  axillany-line  just 
below  the  loth  rib.  The  finger  tips  discharge  energy  (page 
37)  hence  the  latter  must  be  directed  away  from  the  elec- 
trodes (Fig.  16).  The  energy  polarity  may  be  modified  at 
its  source,  or  at  its  point  of  discharge. 

Thus,  the  negative  energy  from  the  left  ventricle 
would  be  neutralized  if  the  finger  tips  of  a  male's  right 
hand  holding  the  electrode  were  directed  toward  the 
heart  and  consequently  no  dulness  of  the  stomach 
would    ensue. 

The  insulated  flexible  copper  conducting  cord  and  elec- 
trodes which  I  employ  have  been  devised  by  Dr.  George 
Starr  WTiite,  of  Los  x^ngeles. 

In  my  experiments,  it  was  found  that  aluminum  would 
reenforce  human  energy,  hence  the  electrodes  are  of 
aluminum. 

Dulness  of  the  stomach  (stomach  reflex)  may  be  elicited 
in  a  variety  of  ways  by  reflex  stimulation  of  the  vagus. 
The  act  of  deglutition,  stimulation  of  the  nipples,  pressure 
in  an  intercostal  space,  etc.,  wfll  temporarily  duU  the  stom- 
ach. As  a  rule,  energy  conveyed  to  the  stomach  region 
will  only  maintain  stomach  dulness  during  the  duration  of 
its  conveyance,  but  when  the  energ}'  is  intense  (page  184)  the 
dulness  may  persist  for  several  minutes. 

When  the  stomach  dulness  is  correctly  elicited,  the  per- 
cussion sound  is  either  dull  or  tympanitically  dull;  the  grada- 


THE    STOMACH    EEFLEX 


39 


tion  being  dependent  on  the  intensity  of  the  energy  plus 
the  response  of  the  gastric  musculature.  After  demarcation 
of  the  lower  stomach  border  with  energy  of  moderate 
potentiality,  and  an  energy  of  greater  potentiality  is  con- 
veyed, there  is  not  only  accentuated  dulness  but  likewise  a 


Fig.  17. — Liver  (A)  and  stomach  (C)  borders.  The  latter  were  primarily 
elicited  by  a  bar-magnet.  When  energy  was  conveyed  to  the  stomach  region  from 
a  carcinoma,  the  energy  potentiality  was  such,  that  it  caused  a  retraction  of  the 
stomach  border  from  C  to  B,  and  if  percussion  were  not  extended  far  enough  up, 
stomach  dulness  would  have  escaped  observation. 


40  THE   STOMACH   EEFLEX 

RETRACTION  of  the  stomach  border,     unless  the  latter 

IS  CONSIDERED,  PERCUSSION  IS  NOT  EXTENTDED  FAR  ENOUGH 
UP,  AND  AN  ERROR  MAY  BE  PERPETILA.TED  BY  FAILING  TO 
RECOGNTZE  THE  RECEDED  STOMACH  REFLEX. 

This  contingency  is  shown  in  fig.  17. 

The  following  constant  may  be  formulated; — the  dura- 
tion and  amplitude  of  the  stomach  or  any  other  visceral 
reflex  is  in  direct  proportion  to  the  intensity  of  the  energy- 
and  its  proximity  to  the  region  governing  a  given  reflex. 

Even  in  the  norm,  when  energy'  of  moderate  degree  is 
conveyed  to  the  stomach  region  and  percussion  is  executed? 
the  stomach  shows  alternate  tympanitic  resonance  (never 
pronounced)  and  dulness  at  intervals  of  from  3  to  5  seconds 
(page  27). 

In  hypermotility  of  the  organ  which  however  is  not 
frequent,  the  spontaneous , alternate  tonicity  and  relaxation 
of  the  stomach  will  create  dulness  and  t}Tnpanitic  resonance 
even  though  no  energ}'  is  conveyed. 

Fig.  9  shows  the  posterior  view  of  the  stomach.  When 
energ\^  is  directed  anteriorly  to  the  stomach  region,  an  area 
of  dulness  is  evoked  posteriorly,  surmounting  the  splenic 
dulness  which  corresponds  to  the  gastric  area.  The  latter 
is  essentially  the  dorsal  gastric  nucleus  of  resonance. 


POLARITY  41 

CHAPTER  III. 

POLARITY   AND    MEASUREMENT   OF   HUMAN   ENERGY. 

Until  a  better  acquaintance  with  human  energy  is 
attained,  we  are  constrained  to  consider  biodynamic  proces- 
ses in  conventional  technicalities. 

Polarity. — As  an  aid  in  differential  diagnosis,  it  is 
necessary  to  determine  the  polarity  of  energy.  The  polarity 
of  energy  may  be  determined  by  a  bar-magnet.  If  dulness 
of  the  stomach  is  elicited  by  conveyed  energy,  have  an 
assistant  or  the  patient  hold  first  one  end  marked  N  (posi- 
tive), and  then  the  other  end  marked  S  (negative  pole), 
in  the  direction  of  the  stomach  during  percussion.  If  the 
dulness  persists  with  the  N  pole  and  is  dissipated  by  the  S 
pole,  the  energy  conveyed  is  positive.  The  opposite  also 
holds  good. 

"When  the  stomach  dulness  is  dissipated  by  both  poles  of 
a  bar-magnet,  it  is  neutral  or  isoelectronic,  and  when  it 
persists  despite  the  flux  emanating  from  both  poles,  it  is 
positive  and  negative.  The  energy  discharged  in  health 
and  disease  may  be: 

1.  Positive. 

2.  Negative. 

3.  Neutral  (Isoelectronic). 

4.  Positive  and  negative. 

An  assistant  may  be  eliminated  by  using  a  small  disk 
which  is  fixed  to  the  electrode  approximating  the  stomach. 
The  disk  is  covered  on  one  side  with  a  positive  and  on  the 
other  side  with  a  negative  discharging  chemical.* 

*These  disks  are  furnished  by  Philopolis  Press,  711,  St.  Paul  Building 
San  Francisco. 


42         POLAKITY  AND  MEASUREMENT  OF  HUMAN  ENERGY 

Polarity  can  only  be  determined  during  the  time  the 
energy  is  conveyed  to  the  stomach  region.  Like  care  must 
be  employed  in  holding  the  magnet  as  in  holding  the  elec- 
trode (Fig.  1 6).  If  dulness  of  the  stomach  is  evoked  by 
exposure  to  the  flux  of  one  pole  of  a  bar-magnet,  the  oppo- 
site pole  of  another  magnet  acting  in  the  same  direction  will 
neutralize  its  effects,  and  the  dulness  is  dissipated.  Ex- 
posure of  the  subject  to  two  like  poles  of  a  magnet  multiplies 
the  intensity  of  the  dulness;  the  streamings  being  concen- 
trated anteriorly  on  the  stomach  region. 

Care  must  be  exercised  in  interpreting  the  lettering 
on  a  magnet.  If  a  bar-magnet  is  suspended,  the  pole 
of  the  magnet  which  turns  North,  is  the  north  seeking 
pole  or  positive  pole  in  Germany,  and  all  English  speak- 
ing countries.  This  pole  is  marked  N.  According  to 
the  law  of  magnetic  attraction  and  repulsion,  the  earth 
must  be  considered  as  a  ball  with  a  bar-magnet  in  its 
axis,  but  shorter  than  its  axis,  the  poles  of  which  are 
negative  at  the  North  pole,  and  positive  at  the  South 
pole  of  the  earth.  In  accordance  with  this  conception, 
the  French  magnets  are  marked  N  (being  negative)  and 
S  (positive).  S  will  seek  the  North  and  N,  the  south 
of  a  suspended  French  magnet.  The  N  seeking  pole  of 
a  compass  needle  will  be  repelled  by  the  N  marked 
pole  of  an  English  or  German  bar-magnet,  and  will  be 
attracted  by  the  N  marked  pole  of  a  French  magnet. 

The  bar-magnet  should  not  exceed  6  inches  in  length, 
^  inch  in  width  and  Yz  inch  in  thickness.  Otherwise,  the 
potentiality  of  human  energy  cannot  cope  with  the  polarity 
of  the  magnetic  flux.  For  a  like  reason,  the  end  of  the 
magnet  must  not  be  held  too  close  to  the  stomach  region; 
just  far  enough  (before  making  the  biophysical  examina- 
tion) to  produce  stomach  dulness. 

Dr.  George  White,  standardizes  his  magnet  by  employing 


NON-DULING   ENERGY  43 

one  which  causes  a  deflection  of  a  compass  needle  at  a  dis- 
tance of  6  inches. 

Owing  to  my  failure  to  correctly  interpret  the 
markings  on  my  bar-magnet,  the  electronic  reactions 

CITED  IN  THE  FIFTH  EDITION  OF  'SPONDYLOTHERAPY" 
MUST  BE  reversed:  positive,  should  read  negative  AND 
NEGATIVE,  positive.  POSITIVE  AND  NEGATIVE  AND  NEU- 
TRAL REACTIONS  ARE  ALONE  CORRECT.  THE  POLARITY  OF 
THE  ENERGEIAGENIC  CENTERS  MUST  LIKEWISE  BE  REVERSED. 
THE  REACTIONS  IN  THIS  BOOK  ONLY  HOLD  GOOD  WITH  A  MALE 
SUBJECT  FACING  THE  WEST   (page  34). 

The  polarity  of  energy  is  determinable  directly  by  the 

SPLANCHNIC   VASOMOTOR   REFLEXES    (page   8l). 

NoN-DULiNG  ENERGY. — Reference  has  heretofore  been 
made  to  energy  of  sufficient  polarity  to  elicit  the  stomach 
reflex  as  indicated  by  dulness  on  percussion  of  the  lower 
stomach  border. 

Non-duling  energy  signifies  that,  although  energy  is 
discharged,  it  is  insufficient  to  evoke  the  stomach  reflex, 
but  is  nevertheless  capable  of  neutralizing  either  or  both 
poles  of  a  magnet  so  that  the  poles  which  in  the  norm 
elicit  the  reflex,  can  no  longer  do  so  during  the  time  energy 
is  conveyed  to  the  stomach. 

Non-duling  energy  may  be  positive,  negative,  positive 
and  negative  or  neutral.  In  the  norm  a  neutral  duling 
energy  emanates  from  the  yth  cervical  spine  (Fig.  28).  If 
the  electrode  is  held  away  about  one  inch  from  the  latter 
area,  while  no  stomach  dulness  can  be  evoked,  the  energy 
conducted  is  sufficient  to  prevent  either  pole  of  a  bar- 
magnet  from  discharging  a  reflex. 

Therefore,  the  energy  from  the  7th  cervical  spine  with 
the  electrode  in  contact  with  the  skin  will  produce  a  neutral 
duling  energy,  at  a  distance  of  one  inch  a  non-duling  neutral 


44 


POIiAKITY  AXD   MEASUREMENT   OF   HUMAN   ENERGY 


energy  is  manifested.  Non-duling  may  be  converted  into 
duling  energy',  in  two  ways;  i.  By  condensation  (page  70) 
and  2,  By  passing  it  through  an  induction  coil  (page  275). 
Potentiality  of  human  energy. — ^We  are  constrained 
to  employ  electrical  terms  and  electrical  methods  of  men- 
uration  until  our  knowledge  of  this  form  of  energy  is  better 
understood.     From  the  vie^^point  of  the  utilitarian,   the 


Fig.  18. — Biodynamometer. 


latter  subserve  our  purpose.  To  paraphrase  the  law  of 
OHM,  the  strength  of  human  energ\'  varies  directly  as  the 
biod}Tiamic  force  and  inversely  as  the  resistance.  The 
greater  the  resistance,  the  smaller  is  the  quantity  of  energy 
which  a  given  biod^Tiamic  force  will  produce.  The  latter 
force  is  measured  in  Ohms  or  fractions  of  an  Ohm. 

The  rheostat  which  the  wTiter  employs  for  this 
purpose  (Fig.  18)  is  neologized  for  the  convenience  of 
future  reference  as  "biodynamometer." 

It  is  wound  to  carry  100  milliamperes  with  a  voltage 


BIODYNAMOMETER 


45 


of  20.    The  scale  is  marked  in  one-twenty-fifths  of  an 
Ohm  to  one  Ohm  and  then  up  to  1000  Ohms. 

To  secure  uniform  readings  in  my  physicodiagnostic 
methods,  the  conducting  insulated  flexible  cords 
(copper  wire),  are  80cm.  in  length.  The  electrodes 
are  made  of  aluminum;  the  one  affixed  to  the  stomach 
region  is  4I  inches  in  circumference  whereas  the  other 
for  receiving  energy  is  pointed  to  permit  exact  local- 
ization (Fig.  19).  Use  the  latter  only  as  a  distal  elec- 
trode (p.  125). 


Fig.  19. — Distal  and  proximal  electrodes.  The  latter  must  not  be  rod-shaped 
(p.  125).  The  large  electrode  is  for  receiving  energy  from  extensive  areas  (supposi- 
titious tuberculous  lung)  and  if  energy  is  conveyed,  the  lesion  may  be  localized  by 
a  smaller  electrode. 


The  method  of  using  the  biodynamometer  is  essentially 
as   follows: — Let   us   assume    that    the   biodynamic   force 


46 


POLARITY  AND  MEASUREMENT  OF  HUMAN  ENERGY 


sought,  is  from  a  carcinoma.  Place  the  pointed  electrode 
over  the  site  of  the  neoplasm  and  the  other  electrode  at  the 
usual  area  near  the  stomach.  Note  that  at  zero  the  dulness 
of  the  stomach  is  pronounced,  then  gradually  interpose 
more  and  more  resistance  until  the  stomach  dulness  on 
percussion  disappears.  When  the  latter  point  is  attained, 
the  scale  on  the  instrument  will  indicate  the  Ohmic  resis- 
tance of  the  growth. 


C^ 


Fig.  20. — Calibrated  glass  tube  for  measuring  energy.  The  open  end  of  the 
tube  is  fixed  to  the  energy  source  and  the  distal  metallic  tip  (aluminum)  is  gradually 
withdrawn  during  execution  of  percussion.  The  electrode  is  fixed  to  the  stomach 
region. 


VIBRATION    RATE  47 

After  this  manner  one  may  gauge  the  progress  of  the 
growth.  As  a  rule,  the  Ohmic  resistance  diminishes  with 
amelioration  of  the  condition.  A  crude  method  for  meas- 
uring the  intensity  of  energy  is  based  on  the  principle 
that  the  further  away  the  end  of  the  conducting  cord  is 
from  the  source  or  energy  eliciting  stomach  dulness, 
the  greater  is  the  energy  discharge. 

For  this  purpose  a  calibrated  glass  tube  (Fig.  20)  is 
used.  The  conducting  cord  passes  through  the  latter  and  is 
gradually  withdrawn  until  the  energy  discharge  is  no 
longer  able  to  evoke  stomach  dulness.  Thus,  in  the  average 
male,  dulness  of  the  stomach  produced  by  energy  derived 
from  the  left  psychomotor  region  is  rarely  elicited  if  the 
conducting  cord  is  further  distant  than  one-quarter  inch 
from  the  region  in  question. 

Vibration  rate. — The  writer  has  specified  the  energy 
of  the  human  organism  as  anthropodynamic  because  it  is 
a  specific  electronic  energy.  A  nerve  impulse  resulting 
from  the  action  of  a  stimulus  liberates  energy  stored  within 
protoplasm.  Heretofore,  the  only  evidence  of  the  libera- 
tion of  energy  was  the  electrical  change;  the  wave  of  nega- 
tivity. This  energy  was  assumed  to  be  electrical  but  this 
was  supposedly  disproved  by  the  measurement  of  its 
velocity. 

The  new  philosophy  regards  an  electric  current  as 
nought  else  but  a  series  of  electrons  "handed  along" 
from  one  atom  to  another  through  the  conductor. 
The  current  flow  is  from  a  place  of  high  to  a  place  of  low 
potential.  -^^ 

Velocity  is  a  question  of  the  character  of  the  con-  ly^j-^/^,  yP^\/ oA/^^'Y^ 
ducting  medium   (page    6).     A    conductor    is    a    sub- 
stance containing  electrons  which  are  free  to  move, 
whereas    in    non-conductors,    the    electrons    are    fixed 
and  unable  to  follow  the  impulse  of  the  field. 


48  POLARITY  AND   MEASUREMEXT   OF   HUMAX   EXERGY 

The  writer  conceives  atomic  differentiation  as  \dbration 
frequencies,  and  each  atom  is  endowed  with  a  specific 
rate  of  vibration.  Colors  are  the  effect  of  particular  fre- 
quencies of  \abration  and  polarities. 

All  electrons  are  characterized  by  the  uniformity 
of  vibrations.  This  is  e\ddent  when  one  observes  the 
sharpness  of  the  lines  of  light  making  up  the  spectrum 
of  an  element. 

These  lines  develop  from  the  \dbrations  of  electrically 
charged  systems,  and  if  the  \dbrations  of  different  atoms 
were  not  attuned  to  each  other,  the  spectral  lines  would 
be  blurred  and  diffused. 

The  stomach  does  not  respond  (as  revealed  by  dulness) 
to  all  degrees  of  xdbration.  The  vibrations  of  a  vibrating 
tuning-fork  duling  the  stomach  can  be  sho^^Tl  to  be  endowed 
with  a  definite  polarity. 

The  ner\^es  of  taste  and  smell  must  be  endowed  with 
specific  electrons  which  are  only  attuned  to  different  vibra- 
tion rates,  hence  the  differentiation  of  taste  and  smell 
like  the  differentiation  of  color. 

The  energ}'  evolved  from  the  human  is  as  characteristic 
of  the  human  as  the  energ\"  evolved  from  the  lower  animals 
is  distinctive  for  the  lower  animals.  Furthermore,  one  man 
differs  from  another  man  only  in  the  sense  that  his  electrons 
show  var\'ing  rates  of  vibration.  The  diamond,  lampblack 
and  charcoal,  are  all  practically  identical  in  composition. 
[Oil  of  roses  and  coal  gas  have  the  identical  composition 
'  (4  atoms  of  hydrogen  and  4  atoms  of  carbon) ,  yet  the 
mephitic  odor  of  the  one,  and  the  delightful  odor  of  the 
other,  is  merely  a  question  of  rate-vibration. 

It  is  strange,  but  nevertheless  true  that,  the  attunement 
of  the  organism  shows  no  apparent  physiologic  rhythmicity. 
Each  atom  of  our  organism  is  endowed  ^^dth  a  definite 


VIBRODYNAMOMETRY  49 

vibration  rate,  and  the  author  beHeves  he  can  demonstrate 
what  Baraduc  anticipated  (page  ii). 

Just  as  there  is  a  "periodic  law"  with  reference  to  the 
periodicity  of  the  atoms  of  the  elements,  so  there  is  a  law 
with  relation  to  morbid  processes.  The  periodic  law,  em- 
phasizes the  relationship  of  atoms  and  periodicity  of  prop- 
erties, and  shows  that,  family  relationships  of  atoms  is  as 
assured  as  are  the  organisms  of  the  biologist. 

In  executing  our  physico-clinical  methods,  we  must  not 
only  determine  the  energy  evolved  in  a  quantitative  direc- 
tion but  we  must  also  determine  its  vibration  rate. 

The  essential  factor  embraced  in  my  investigations  con- 
cerns the  ATOM  IN  VIBRATION.  The  fact  has  been  definitely 
established  by  physicists,  that  when  a  moving  electric 
charge  is  accelerated  or  retarded  in  any  way,  a  wave  of 
ELECTROMAGNETIC  DISTURBANCE  radiates  out  through  the 
surrounding  space.  Such  pulses  are  given  out  when  cathode 
rays  strike  the  solid  anticathode,  and  are  called  X-rays. 

If  the  charge  is  not  suddenly  arrested  but  is  permitted 
to  oscillate  about  a  mean  position,  a  series  of  electromagnetic 
waves  move  out  from  the  vibrating  electron. 

If  white  light  is  passed  through  sodium  vapor,  the 
spectroscope  shows  two  dark  lines  across  the  ordinary 
colored  spectrum.  This  effect  has  been  likened  to  a 
form  of  resonance.  The  electrons  of  the  sodium  atom 
when  excited,  yield  light  of  the  frequency  correspond- 
ing to  the  two  sodium  lines  because  it  is  tuned  to  this 
frequency,  and  it  vibrates  if  oscillations  of  this  frequency 
fall  upon  it.  By  so  doing,  it  abstracts  the  energy  of  the 
radiation  in  tune  with  itself,  whereas  light  of  frequency 
remote  from  this,  passes  on  practically  unaffected. 

VIBRODYNAMOMETRY. — As  already  observed,  when  a 
moving  electric  charge  is  suddenly  arrested,  electromag- 
netic waves  move  out  from  the  vibrating  electrons.     The 


50 


POLAEITY  AXD   MEASUBEMEXT   OF   HUMAX   EXERGY 


latter  is  determined  by  aid  of  the  biod}Tiamometer  (page 
44J.  The  point  on  the  scale  of  the  instrument  indicating 
this  electromagnetic  disturbance  I  have  specihed  for  con- 
venience VIBRATIOX  R-\TE. 

The  instrument  is  employed  after  the  manner  indicated 
in  determining  the  potentiality  of  human  energy  (page  44). 


Fig.  21.    Carcinomatous  electronic  reaction.    A  to  B,  stomach  reflex;  B  to  C. 
no  stomach  reflex;  C,  sudden  reappearance  of  stomach  reflex  (vibration  rate). 


Accepting  the  stomach  reflex  as  an  index  and  emplojdng 
a  carcinoma  as  a  test  object,  we  note  the  following  phases 

(Fig.   2t): 

1.  Dulness  of  the  stomach  from  o  to  12  Ohms  on  scale. 

2.  Non-duling  energy  from  12  to  50  Ohms. 

3.  Sudden   reappearance    of   stomach   dulness   at    50 

Ohms. 

The  latter  point  indicates  the  \dbration  rate.     Beyond 
50,  the  dulness  evanesces.     It  is  important  to  remember 


VIBRODYNAMOMETRY 


51 


that  when  the  index  on  the  scale  is  gradually  moved  from 
12  to  50,  there  may  be  intermediate  grades  of  dulness,  but 
they  are  of  short  duration  and  not  permanent  as  is  the  case 
when  50  is  attained.  Therefore,  the  point  selected  on  the 
scale  for  determining  vibration  rate  is  when  the  stomach 
dulness  has  attained  its  maximum  intensity  and  is  perma- 
nent during  the  energy  flow. 

The  vibration  rate  in  health  is  practically  constant  and 
each  individual  has  his  own  rate  of  vibration,  so  that  after 
the  lapse  of  months,  an  individual  can  be  identified  with 
almost  the  same  accuracy  as  in  the  Bertillon  system  of 
anthropometry. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing,  each  organ  has  its  specific 
rate  of  vibration  which  is  equally  specific  for  the  individual 
(page  53).  The  following  vibratory  rates  in  normal  indi- 
viduals were  practically  the  same  during  a  period  of  six 
months.  The  rate  from  the  male  was  taken  with  energy 
from  the  tips  of  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand  approximating 
the  electrode;  with  the  female,  the  finger  tips  of  the  right 
hand  were  used: 


Male,  Vibrating  Rate  at  400  Ohms 
525 


Female, 


460 
320 

350 
300 


7-  316 

In  a  psychasthenic,  the  rate  was  at  11 25  Ohms  but  when 
his  condition  was  ameliorated  it  was  reduced  to  825  Ohms. 
The  rate  however,  fluctuated  considerably  insomuch  as  his 
condition  varied  from  time  to  time. 

As  already  observed  each  organ  has  its  specific  vibratory 
rate. 


52         POLARITY  AND  MEASUEEMEXT  OF  HUMAN  ENERGY 

Whereas  the  potentiality  of  energ}'  may  yary  in  health, 
the  rate  is  relatively  constant.  Thus,  in  a  male  when  the 
potentiality  of  energy-  from  the  left  psychomotor  region 
(Fig.   22)  was   determined,  it  was   found  to   be  ^25  oi  an 


Fig.  22.  Localization  of  the  psychomotor  area.  Decermined  approximately 
by  two  perpendiciilar  lines;  from  depression  in  front  of  external  meatus  and  from 
the  posterior  border  of  the  mastoid  process  at  its  root;  t,  most  prominent  part  of 
parietal  eminence.  The  area  in  question  is  approximately  4x6  cm.  (electronic 
reaction). 

Ohm,  but  during  the  time  he  was  engaged  in  solving  a 
problem,  the  potentiahty  was  raised  to  2  Ohms;  the  vibrating 
rate  however  being  uninfluenced. 

The  following  measurements  from  the  left,  in  the  male, 
and  the  right  psychomotor  region  in  the  female,  may  serve 
as  a  nucleus  for  future  research  work : 


ENERGY    POTENTIALITY 


53 


9 

lO 


Female,  Average  intellectuality. . .  4/25  of  an  Ohm 
Male,  Low  grade  of  intelligence .   2/25     "        " 
"       Pronounced  intellectuality    4  Ohms 

"       Intelligent 14/25  of  an  Ohm 

"        Physician i  Ohm 

"         .-14/25 

17/25 

Female,  Intelligent 16/25 

"       Child 3/25 

"       Intelligent 11/25 


Psychasthenics  as  a  rule,  show  high  potentiality  and 
when  rested  or  bromidized,  the  potentiality  is  very  much 
reduced.  Intellectuals  after  brain  rest  show  a  like 
reduction. 


54  PHYSICS    AND    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    HUMAX    ENERGY 


CHAPTER  IX. 

PHYSICS   AND    PHYSIOLOGY   OF   HUiLAX   ENERGY. 

Voltage. — In  the  subsequent  observations  the  stomach 
reflex  was  employed  as  an  index  of  human  energy.  ]My 
results  show  that,  the  emission  of  ionizing  radiation  is  an 
inherent  property  of  all  things  in  nature.  This  conclusion 
could  not  have  been  attained  were  it  not  for  the  sensitivity 
of  the  stomach  reflex.  The  sense  in  which  emission  radia- 
tion is  employed  by  the  writer,  is  not  identified  with  radio- 
activity, if  by  the  latter,  reference  is  made  to  ray  emission 
associated  with  atomic  decomposition.  The  atom  is  con- 
stantly in  a  state  of  dissolution  into  helium  and  supposedly 
hydrogen. 

WTien  Voltage  and  frequency  are  high,  it  is  unnecessary 
to  make  a  closed  circuit  to  obtain  a  flowing  current. 

In  the  latter  instance  contact  with  one  terminal  suffices. 
In  consequence  of  the  high  \^oltage,  and  great  periodicity  of 
oscillator}'  currents,  a  metallic  conducting  circuit  is  not 
required. 

The  denser  a  current,  the  greater  is  its  stimulating  effect. 
Unipolar  action  is  recognized  by  the  physiologist.  In  the 
stimulation  of  a  preparation,  the  complete  circuit  of  an 
electric  current  is  necessary. 

Exceptionally,  one  wire  of  a  secondary  coil  leading  to 
the  nerve  is  sufficient  to  excite  it  when  the  primary  circuit 
is  opened  omng  to  the  charge  generated  in  the  secondary 
coil. 

It  will  be  noted  in  our  preceding  investigations  that, 
unipolar  conduction  was  employed  in  transmitting  human 


ENERGY    OUTPUT  55 

energy  and  that,  the  only  other  requisite  was  grounding 
(page   35). 

Human  energy  is  of  high  frequency  and  Voltage.  If  it 
were  not  so,  its  action  could  not  be  exhibited  through  dry 
air;  one  of  the  best  known  insulators. 

The  conductivity  of  this  energy-  is  most  pronounced 
with  aluminum  wire  although  the  latter,  as  a  conductor 
for  electricity,  is  but  64%  of  that  of  copper. 

It  is  generally  believed  that  the  poles  of  cells  of  batteries 
(Galvanic  or  storage)  do  not  emit  waves  expanding  in  ether. 
This  is  supposed  to  be  only  the  prerogative  of  high  pressure 
electrostatic  machines,  condensers,  induction  coils  etc. 

The  foregoing  is  incorrect.  One  may  obtain  a  posi- 
tive discharge  from  the  positive,  and  a  negative  dis- 
charge, from  the  negative  pole  if  the  stomach  reflex  is 
used  as  an  index.  The  Voltage  compared  with  human 
energy  is  low. 

Thus,  a  dry  cell  of  i  Volt  elicits  a  reflex  from  the  nega- 
tive terminal  at  a  distance  not  greater  than  i  inch, 
whereas  a  negative  discharge  from  an  average  individual, 
will  evoke  the  reflex  at  a  distance  of  70  inches. 

The  energy  from  either  pole  of  a  bar-magnet  may 
be  conducted  through  a  wire  as  evidenced  by  the  stomach 
reflex;  from  the  N  pole  a  positive  energy  is  transmitted, 
and  from  the  S  pole,  a  negative  energy. 

Energy  ouxpux.^The  stomach  reflex  may  be  elicited 
with  all  the  fingers  extended  (Fig.  48  and  page  112);  the 
discharge  emanating  from  the  finger  tips. 

Human,  like  all  energy  traversing  space,  passes  out  of 
the  body  in  straight  lines  and  is  not  deflected  by  a  magnet. 

Emission  radiations  are  streams  of  electrified  particles  or 
merely  pulses  or  vibrations  of  the  ether.  In  the  former 
instance  they  must  be  deflected  by  the  approach  of  a 
magnet;  in  the  latter  instance,  not  necessarily  so. 


56  PHYSICS   AND   PHYSIOLOGY    OF    HUMAN"    ENEEGY 

Differentation  of  electronic  energy  is  now  possible  by 
aid   of   the   stomach   reflex,     emission  radiations   will 

EVOKE   THE   REFLEX  THROUGH  AN   INSULATOR   BUT   ETHERIC 
VIBRATIONS  WILL  NOT. 

This  cannot  be  attributed  to  potentiality.  Magnetic 
flux  relatively  more  potent  than  radium,  is  intercepted  by 
an  insulating  substance. 

If  the  fingers  discharging  energy  are  wet,  no  energy  is 
discharged,  and  dry  hands  discharge  more  energy  than 
moist  hands.  Similarly,  less  energy  is  discharged  in  humid 
than  in  dry  air.  If  an  individual  discharging  little  or  no 
energy  from  the  hands,  takes  an  electrode  for  several 
minutes  in  either  hand  from  a  moderately  strong  Galvanic 
current  and  then  directs  his  fingers  at  a  distance  of  many 
feet  from  another  subject,  he  can  elicit  in  the  latter,  the 
stomach  reflex.  This  ability  to  discharge  energy  will 
continue  for  several  minutes.  A  like  effect  may  be  noted 
with  the  energy  from  a  magnet  or  the  energy  from  an  electric 
lamp  directed  on  any  part  of  the  body  for  several  minutes. 
The  same  action  may  be  noted  by  aid  of  a  very  sensitive 
Galvanometer. 

The  energy  output  of  an  individual  may  be  accurately 
gauged   (page  60)  and  is  modified  by  many  factors  (page 

59). 

During   cerebration    (thinking),    the   energy   output   is 

increased  and  stomach  dulness  by  the  extended  fingers  may 
be  elicited  at  enormous  distances. 

The  effects  of  anesthetics  on  energy  may  be  easily 
determined.  A  few  inhalations  of  ether  or  chloroform  will 
inhibit  the  output  of  energy,  but  if  to  the  ether  or  chloro- 
form, oil  of  orange  is  added,  there  is  little  or  no  effect  on  the 
energy  output. 


EXPERIMENTATION  57 

Gwathmey,  has  shown  that  oil  of  orange*  added  to 
ether,  produces  anesthesia  with  less  discomfort,  quicker 
results,  no  preliminary  excitement,  rapid  recovery  from 
effects  with  neither  nausea  nor  vomiting  and  with  half 
the  quantity  of  ether. 

Dr.  George  Jarvis,  utilizing  the  stomach  reflex  has 
rationalized  the  Gwathmey  Method. 

Animal  experimentation. — Several  prominent  clini- 
cians have  contended  that,  the  demonstration  of  the  stomach 
and  other  reflexes  by  animal  experimentation,  is  necessary 
before  the  reflexes  can  be  accepted  as  scientific  facts. 

"Clinical  physiology"  has  been  neologized  by  the 
author  to  emphasize  the  fact  that,  "The  proper  study  of 
mankind  is  man,"  and  to  protest  against  the  tendency  to 
substitute  the  guinea-pig  for  a  human,  and  the  laboratory 
for  the  bedside.  Ealhology,  is  founded  on  physiology,  and 
pathology,  i^nought  else  but  thejphysiolo^  ,oi.the  sick. 
Instead  of  regarding  morbid  tissue  change  as  a  primary 
requisite  of  disease,  it  is  in  reality  secondary  to  physiology 
in  a  state  of  disequilibration.  Anatomic  changes  are  sequen- 
tial to  a  disease,  and  not  the  disease  itself. 

Therapeutic  nihilism  owed  its  conception  to  the  pathol- 
ogist, who  sought  to  identify  every  disease  with  definite 
anatomic  changes,  and  his  coadjutor,  the  clinician,  studied 
disease  only  in  relation  to  these  anatomic  conditions. 

The  same  egregious  error  is  perpetrated  by  the  thera- 
peutist who  is  responsible  for  the  creation  of  a  toxicotherapy. 

The  author  was  constrained  to  discontinue  his  experi- 
mentation on  animals  for  various  reasons. 

The  stomach  reflex  is  dependent  on  visceral  tone  (page 
27)  which  is  the  resultant  of  not  one,  but  a  summation  of 

*Gwathmey,  has  informed  me  that  he  prefers  the  bitter,  to  combat  any 
possible  nauseating  action  from  the  sweet  oil. 


58  PHYSICS    AND    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    HUMAN    ENERGY 

peripheral  sensory  stimuli,  and  that  the  continuity  of  tone 
may  be  blocked  by  annihilation  of  a  single  stimulus.  There- 
fore, the  use  of  anesthetics  (local  or  general)  will  inhibit 
the  reflexes. 

Vivisection  under  pain  creates  the  sympathicotropic 
action  of  adrenalin,  which  by  depressing  the  vagus  anni- 
hilates the  stomach  reflex. 

In  his  elaboration  of  the  "kinetic  theory,"  Crile, 
found  that  electric  fish  could  not  discharge  their  elec- 
tricity when  under  anesthesia.  In  deep  morphia  narcosis 
and  anesthesia,  the  production  of  fever  is  hindered 
owing  to  the  depressing  influence  on  the  brain  cells, 
thus  causing  diminished  activity.  These  conclusions 
were  largely  based  on  histological  studies  of  the  brain. 
The  cells  are  classified  as  hyperchromatic,  active, 
fatigued  and  exhausted  (stages  only).  The  experi- 
mental animals  were  subjected  to  exertion,  fear,  trauma- 
tism etc.  The  characteristic  condition  was  hyperchrom- 
atism  which  disappeared  in  a  few  hours,  but  if  the 
stimulus  were  extreme,  hyperchromatism  was  succeeded 
by  the  fatigue  and  finally  exhausted  stage. 

My  investigations  with  the  exsected  stomach  were 
negative.  Smooth  muscle  cut  out  of  the  body  passes 
at  once  into  a  state  of  tonic  contraction  lasting  for  hours. 
Like  negative  results  followed  investigations  with  the 
musculature  in  warm  oxygenized  blood.  Physiologists 
who  discredit  observations  without  the  domain  of  the 
laboratory  forget  that,  disease  is  practically  an  experi- 
ment of  nature  under  abnormal  conditions.  Physiologic 
laboratory  experiments  are  conducted  under  like  adverse 
conditions.  Pavloff,  contends  that  the  physician  gives 
a  more  correct  verdict  concerning  physiologic  processes 
than  the  physiologist. 

Dr.  George  C.  Jarvis,  whose  accuracy  as  an  observer, 
and  skill  as  a  surgeon  are  conceded,  authorizes  me  to  say 
that,  in  his  research  work  embracing  a  new  departure  in 


POSITION    AND    POSTURE  59 

surgery,  the  publication  of  which  is  anticipated,  that  in 
anesthetized  subjects  at  the  operating  table,  the  vis- 
ceral  REFLEXES   MAY   BE   ELICITED    WITH   A    STRONG    SINU- 

SOLDAL  CURRENT  (ouc  elcctrode  at  the  sacrum,  and  the 
other,  over  definite  vertebral  regions  as  described  in  ''Spon- 
dylotherapy") .  The  stomach  reflex  is  elicited  (contraction 
of  the  organ)  to  approximately  one-fourth  of  its  original 
volume.  Associated  with  the  reflex  is  a  marked  anemia 
of  the  stomach.  The  gall-bladder  reflex  of  contraction  is 
likewise  evocable.  The  subjects  were  under  narcosis  with 
nitrous-oxid  and  oxygen,  and  in  addition,  in  some  instances, 
even  scopolamin  and  morphin  were  used. 

When  spinal  anesthesia  was  alone  employed,  although 
visceral  reflexes  could  be  elicited,  they  were  not  as  accen- 
tuated as  under  narcosis. 

Position  and  posture.^ — Brief  reference  has  already  been 
made  (page  27)  to  the  varying  tonicity  of  the  viscera  with 
relation  to  posture  and  position. 

Energy  is  appropriated  from  the  physical  forces  which 
make  up  the  environment  of  man.  When  a  subject  without 
physical  effort  places  himself  in  the  magnetic  meridian, 
there  is  a  momentary  inhibition  of  the  pulse.  There  are  also 
slight  variations  in  blood-pressure  depending  on  the  position 
of  the  subject  with  relation  to  the  points  of  the  compass. 
With  the  subject  in  the  magnetic  meridian,  the  stomach 
dulls  of  its  own  accord,  and  the  energy  in  the  magnetic 
meridian  (facing  the  North  or  South)  is  neutral. 
Another  subject  standing  in  the  magnetic  meridian  (male 
or  female)  can  dull  the  stomach  of  another  subject  by  the 
extension  of  either  hand.  Thus  no  distinct  type  of  polarity 
is  displayed;  the  subject  discharging  a  neutral  energy. 
The  latter  fact  is  of  great  importance  in  determining  sexual 
polarity  (page  no). 


60  PHYSICS    AND    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    HUMAN    ENERGY 

By  aid  of  the  biodynamometer  (Fig.  44)  and  connect- 
ing one  electrode  with  the  finger  tips  of  the  right  hand, 
the  following  output  of  energy  was  estimated: 

1.  Standing  toward  the  north 1/25  of  an  Ohm 

2.  "  "  "    EAST 2/25        " 

3.  "  "  "    WEST 5/25        "  " 

4.  "  in       "  magnetic 

meridian  8/25       "       " 

SUBJECT  IN  THE  RECUMBENT  POSTURE 

1.  Head  toward  the  north 1/25       "      " 

2.  Feet       "  "  NORTH 3/25       "      " 

3.  "  "  "    WEST      4/25         "         " 

Standing  and  facing  the  North,  there  is  the  least,  and 
in  the  Magnetic  Meridian,  there  is  the  greatest  energy  dis- 
charge. 

In  the  RECUMBENT  POSTURE  with  the  head  to  the  north, 
the  energy  output  is  at  its  minimum.  The  moon  and  sun 
augment  visceral  tonicity.  When  the  lunar  or  solar  rays 
fall  directly  on  the  subject  irrespective  of  position,  the 
stomach  reflex  is  elicited  at  once  and  maintained  during 
exposure,  and  the  energy  is  of  the  neutral  variety. 

The  sun  as  far  as  human  knowledge  extends  is  an  inex- 
haustible source  of  physical  energy,  which  pours  upon  our 
earth,  and  maintains  the  activity  of  everything  which 
moves  upon  the  globe. 

All  forms  of  mechanical  movement  are  a  transformation 
of  the  heat  of  the  sun. 

The  physics  of  thought. — Many  literary  men  develop 
a  sort  of  "work  fever"  before  the  brain  can  yield  its  best 
work.  Thus,  the  brain  condition  of  the  intellectual  laborer 
is  somewhat  analogous  to  that  occurring  in  fever.  A  little 
fever  increases  the  readiness  of  the  tongue,  and  makes  the 
imagination  more  fertile.     Light  as  an  agent  in   hastening 


CONDUCTION  61 

chemical  change  is  everywhere  witnessed  in  nature.  Some 
writers  work  better  in  proportion  as  the  heat  and  hght  are 
more  intense,  and  many  cannot  think  well  in  the  dark. 

The  author  believes  he  was  one  of  the  pioneers*  in  estab- 
lishing the  therapeutic  value  of  the  solar  rays  at  a  time 
when  Finsen,  was  gathering  evidence  which  later  startled 
the  scientific  world. 

While  the  author  at  that  time  recognized  the  merits  of 
the  solar  rays,  he  was  also  cognizant  of  the  injurious  effects. 
The  energy  output  is  diminished  in  the  dark  and  augmented 
when  the  body  is  subjected  to  the  influence  of  intense  light 
or  the  solar  rays. 

Thus,  energy  from  a  subject  (male)  from  the  finger  tips 
of  the  left  hand  shows  an  output  in  the  dark  of  %5  of  an 
Ohm;  standing  in  the  sxjn,  the  same  subject  discharges 
energy  equal  to  %5  of  an  Ohm. 

From  the  right  psychomotor  region  of  a  subject  (female) , 
the  energy  output  in  the  dark  is  %5  of  an  Ohm ;  in  the  sun 
^/25  of  an  Ohm.  The  foregoing  data  suggest  the  pathogeny 
of  Tropical  Neurasthenia. 

Conduction  of  energy. — Insulated  aluminum  wire  is 
the  most  effective  material  for  conducting  human  energ>% 
and  for  this  reason  aluminic  electrodes  are  employed  (Fig. 

19). 

The  fingers  must  not  be  in  contact  with  the  non- 
insulated  metal;  otherwise  a  short  circuit  of  the  energy 
current  will  ensue,  and  no  stomach  reflex  can  be  elicited 
(Fig.  16). 

Bodies  like  glass,  porcelain,  oils,  wax,  \nilcanite  etc., 
which  do  not  permit  electricity  to  escape  as  soon  as  it  is 
developed  are  called  non-conductors,  insulators  or  dielec- 

*The  author's  contribution  was  published  in  March,  1899,  and  that  of 
Finsen,  September,   1899. 


62 


PHYSICS    AND    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    HUMAN    ENERGY 


tries  (page  124).  These  bodies  are  likewise  non-conductors 
for  normal  human  energy. 

Dry  air  at  atmospheric  pressure  is  almost  a  perfect 
insulator  of  electricity,  but  this  statement  does  not  apply 
to  human  energy  (page  55). 

Energy  from  pathological  sources  passes  through 
non-insulating  material;  a  fact  of  importance  in  differential 
diagnosis  (page  124). 


Non-striated    Muscle 
of  Upper  Lid. 


Fig.  23.  Diagram  of  course  of  oculopupillary  fibers  of  the  cervical  sym- 
pathetic. The  pupil-dilating  fibres  arise  from  the  pupil-dilating  center  in  the 
medulla,  and  descending  in  the  lateral  column  of  the  cord  they  emerge  in  the 
anterior  roots  of  the  first  and  second  thoracic  segments.  Entering  the  inferior 
cervical  ganglion  by  white  rami  communicantes,  they  ascend  in  the  cervical  sym- 
pathetic to  the  Gasserian  ganglion  and  pass  to  the  orbit  along  the  ophthalmic 
division  of  the  trigeminus.  The  other  half  of  the  diagram  shows  the  origin  and 
course  of  the  cardiac  nerves.  The  stimulus  applied  at  the  seventh  cervical  spine 
corresponds  to  the  third  dorsal  segment  of  cord  and  approximately  to  the  2nd  and 
3rd  dorsal  nerves. 


ENERGY   DISCHARGE  63 

Whereas  the  energy  of  light  rays  sufl&cient  to  elicit  the 
stomach  reflex  do  not  traverse  glass,  yet  a  large  lens  in 
front  of  the  stomach  exactly  in  focus  will  invoke  the 
reflex  in  question. 

Discharge  of  energy  without  conductors. — There 
are  many  individuals  notably  temperamental  ones  whose 
mere  presence  will  evoke  the  stomach  reflex.  Let  such 
a  one,  if  a  male,  point  his  left  fingers  at  the  region  of  the 
stomach  of  the  subject,  and  the  stomach  will  immediately 
dull.  A  temperamental  female  will  achieve  the  same  object 
with  her  extended  right  fingers. 

It  has  been  shown  elsewhere  that,  stimulation  of  the 
spinal  centers  (which  are  related  to  definite  spinous  pro- 
cesses), elicits  reflexes  which  may  be  executed,  and  demon- 
strated with  the  same  certainty  in  the  living  human,  as  is 
done  by  the  laboratory  vivisectionist.  Thus,  stimulation 
of  the  seventh  cervical  spine  will  inhibit  the  pulse  and 
diminish  the  area  of  heart.  This  temporary  inhibition  of 
the  heart  beat  is  also  determinable  by  auscultation.  The 
course  of  the  energy  conduction  to  the  vagus  by  stimula- 
tion of  the  7th  cervical  spine  is  shown  in  (Fig.  23). 

Temperamental  individuals  may  achieve  the  same  object 
(on  a  subject)  by  placing  the  finger  tips  at  the  7th  cervical 
spine.  Some  individuals  with  a  great  output  of  energy  may 
attain  this  phenomenon  when  the  fingers  are  several  feet 
distant  from  the  spine  in  question  (page  86).  The  fore- 
going is  best  observed  in  a  subject  with  a  feeble  pulse. 

Sphygmography  and  tracings  direct  from  a  sph}'gmo- 
manometer  (Fig.  24),  likewise  show  the  effects  of  human 
energy. 

When  a  subject's  heart  is  viewed  with  a  fluoroscope 
during  the  time  the  X-rays  traverse  the  chest  and  energy 
from  the  fingers  is  permitted  to  act  on  the  7  th  cervical 


64  PHYSICS   AND   PHYSIOLOGY    OF    HUMAN    ENERGY 


Fig.  24.  Tambour  connected  directly  with  a  sphygmomanometer  for  sphyg- 
momanograms.  The  tracing  (read  from  right  to  left)  demonstrates  the  augmented 
amplitude  of  the  pulse  when  energy  conveyed  to  the  epigastrium  (p.  277)  causes 
reflex  vagus  stimulation. 

spine,  the  borders  of  the  heart  recede  during  systole  and 
diastole  of  the  latter  {heart  reflex  of  Ahrams). 

If  the  fingers  impinge  on  the  area  between  the  3rd  and 
4th  dorsal  spines,  there  ensues  an  immediate  increase  in  the 

cardiac  diameter.* 

Another  clinico-physiologic  phenomenon  observable  by 
by    skiascopy    is    the    opening    of    the    pylorus    {Pyloric 


*These  heart  reflexes  are  discussed  elsewhere  in  detail. 


ENERGY    DISCHARGE  -  65 

reflex  of  dilatation)   when    the   fingers    are   in    apposition 
with  the  5th  dorsal  spine. 

Here,  the  appearance  of  the  stomach  can  be  likened 
to  the  flow  of  water  from  an  inverted  pitcher  when  the 
bismuth  is  pouring  into  the  duodenum. 

Dr.  Patrick  S.  O'Donnell,  an  expert  Roentgenoscop- 
ist,  observes  that  after  the  ingestion  of  the  conventional 
bismuth  meal,  it  takes  approximately  one  hour  and 
fifteen  minutes  for  the  stomach  to  void  its  contents, 
whereas  after  stimulation  of  the  5  th  dorsal  spine,  the 
stomach  voids  the  bismuth  in  i}4  minutes. 

Lebon  and  Aubourg,  recently  presented  before  the 
Societe  de  Radiologie  Medicale  de  Paris  comparative  radio- 
graphs showing  modifications  of  the  large  intestine,  after 
stimulation  of  different  vertebral  spines  by  the  author's 
methods. 

The  author  has  shown  in  numerous  publications  that  if 
any  form  of  energy  is  applied  at  the  7th  cervical  spine, 
the  lungs  dilate  whereas  if  a  like  energy  is  brought  to  bear 
at  a  point  between  the  3rd  and  4th  dorsal  spines  (excitation 
of  the  depressor  nerve),  the  lungs  contract.  The  position 
of  the  lower  lung  border  posteriorly  is  first  determined  by 
percussion.  Energy  discharged  from  the  finger  tips  at  the 
7th  cervical  spine  will  show  a  descent  of  the  lung  border  by 
percussion.  Energy  from  the  finger  tips  directed  between 
the  3rd  and  4th  dorsal  spines  will  show  on  percussion  a 
temporary  ascent  of  the  lung  border. 

Physiological  physics  of  psychic  energy. — It  is  diffi- 
cult to  conceive  the  mind  as  a  simple  thinking  organ,  on  the 
contrary,  it  is  psychodynamic  and  must  be  regarded  as  a 
form  of  energ}^,  like  heat,  light  and  electricity.  This  dyna- 
mogenic  or  energy  producing  power  of  mind  is  capable  of 
demonstration. 


66  PHYSICS    AXD    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    HUMAN    ENERGY 

On  page  12,  action  currents  were  discussed.  Psychic 
action  currents  conform  to  like  laws.  The  action  current  is 
associated  with  the  process  of  excitation  and  is  produced  by 
all  kinds  of  stimuli  but  varies  in  strength  with  the  strength 
of    stimulation. 

]\ly  investigations  concerning  the  action  of  stimuli 
haA'e  been  discussed  elsen'hcrc. 

Thought  yields  an  energy,  the  presence  of  which  can  be 
exhibited  by  the  stomach  reflex.  This  energ}'  is  not  revealed 
if  the  brain  functionates  in  its  entirety  unless  both  psycho- 
motor regions  are  covered  with  a  piece  of  red  coloring 
material  (page  69).  Without  this  color,  it  is  impossible 
to  evoke  the  visceral  reflexes. 

With  the  first  subject  in  one  room  with  closed  doors, 
and  the  other  subject  in  another  room,  the  energy  provoked 
by  thought  may  be  transmitted  from  the  latter  to  the  for- 
mer over  a  distance  of  forty  or  more  feet  as  revealed  by 
stomach  dulness  in  the  first  subject.  Psychic  energ}'  passes 
through  metal  and  all  other  media  thus  far  tried. 

Anger  and  emotions  }ield  an  energ}'  which  may  be  trans- 
mitted over  a  distance  of  eighty  or  more  feet. 

The  potentiality  of  psychic  energ}'  ih  determinable  by 
the  intensity  and  duration  of  the  stomach  dulness  and  the 
distance  of  the  subject  from  the  person  engaged  in  thought. 
The  position  of  the  recipient  ^^•ith  reference  to  the  person 
occupied  in  thought  is  of  no  moment,  but  the  recipient 
must  be  standing  to  elicit  the  reaction  of  stomach  dulness. 

In  my  experiments,  the  person  engaged  in  thought  was 
instructed  to  perform  examples  in  mental  arithmetic. 

The  Cartesian  conception  that  matter  cannot  act 
where  it  is  not,  was  overthrown  b}'  Xewton,  in  his  law  of 
universal  gravitation. 

If  in  my  experiments  I  ha\'e  utilized  the  stomach  muscle 


COLOR  67 

as  an  index  in  revealing  energy  and  its  transmission,  con- 
ventionalism has  not  been  disregarded. 

Frogs'  legs  are  now  employed  for  recording  wireless 
messages  (page  19).  Psychists  have  accepted  the  con- 
tracting muscles  of  the  frog  as  the  first  definite  index  of 
thought  transference.  Our  nerves  and  muscles  are  more 
complex  and  responsive  than  those  of  a  frog.  The  influence 
of  color  on  psychic  energy  is  noted  on  this  page. 

Color. — The  therapeutic  value  of  colors  (chromotherapy) 
has  been  acknowledged  on  empirical  lines. 

Percussion  demonstrates  that  in  the  light,  the  organs 
show  more  tonicity  and  better  definition  (page  103)  than 
in  the  dark.  Yellow  augments  the  tonicity  of  all  the  organs, 
whereas  other  colors  diminish  the  tonicity  of  the  organs. 

To  relax  the  organs  and  thus  secure  a  "visceral  rest 
cure"  green,  violet  or  blue  may  be  used,  and  yellow  when 
a  tonic  effect  is  desired. 

For  diagnostic  purposes,  I  employ  a  screen  (Fig.  25) 
which  permits  different  colored  sheets  of  gelatine  to  filter 
light  on  to  the  body  of  the  subject. 

Yellow  material  oh  the  subject  used  for  eliciting  the  stomach 
reflex  must  he  avoided  as  the  color  itself  will  produce  the  reflex 
in  question. 

Color  influences  the  transmission  of  psychic  energy  as 
can  be  noted  when  the  person  engaged  in  thought  holds 
large  colored  sheets  of  gelatine  in  front  of  the  head.  Green 
and  violet,  obstruct  the  passage  of  the  energ>%  whereas  blue 
and  notably  yellow  intensify  the  action  of  the  energy  as 
revealed  by  the  intensity  and  duration  of  the  stomach 
dulness.  Light  acting  on  the  head  through  a  yellow  medium 
minimizes  psychic  activity. 


68 


PHYSICS    AND    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    HUMAN    ENERGY 


Fig.  25.    Screen  for  chromo-diagnosis.    B,  knob  for  shifting  the  colors  at  A. 


Some  writers  work  better  in  proportion  as  the 
heat  and  light  are  more  intense.  Some  cannot  think 
well  in  the  dark.  Red  excites  some  indi\dduals  and 
most  animals.  Witness  the  Matador  as  he  excites  the 
infuriated  bull  to  charge  by  manipulations  of  his  red 
cloth. 

There  is  reason  for  the  foregoing.  Electric  light 
thrown  on  one  side  of  the  head  stimulates  like  a  blow 
and  excites  the  stomach  to  contract.  Directed  on  the 
center  of  the  head,  it  is  negative.  Light  passed  through  a 
red  medium  covering  the  head  is  negati\-e  when  directed 
on  one  side  of  the  head  but  produces  a  powerful  con- 
traction when  directed  on  the  center  of  the  head. 


COLOR  69 

This    exciting    effect    on    protoplasm    is    the    same 
whether  resident  in  muscle  or  brain. 

Psychic  energy  may  be  transmitted  to  another  (as  revealed 
by  stomach  dulness),  if  during  thought,  the  head  is  covered 
(covering  other  parts  does  not  suffice)  with  some  red  material 
or,  if  the  latter  is  held  in  front  of  the  stomach  of  the  second 
subject. 

This  experiment  dispenses  with  the  necessity  of  demag- 
netizing one  side  of  the  head.  Furthermore,  the  stomach 
of  the  patient  engaged  in  thought  may  be  used  provided 
any  red  material  is  thrown  over  the  head  or  held  near  the 
stomach-region.  If  red  paper  or  any  other  red  material  is 
thrown  over  the  head  of  an  intelligent  dog,  the  stomach  of 
a  subject  in  proximity  to  the  animal  shows  dulness,  and 
the  latter  disappears  when  the  colored  material  is  removed. 
The  energy  thus  transmitted  differs  in  no  respect  from  the 
psychic  energy  of  the  human  as  far  as  its  physiologic  effect 
(visceral  reflexes)  is  concerned. 

Red  yields  a  neutral  duling  energy.  Thus  the  polarity 
of  the  two  hemispheres  is  neutralized,  and  the  stomach 
reflex  is  e vocable.  Nullification  of  aural  polarity  by  a  strip 
of  aluminum  across  the  psychomotor  regions  (page  io8)  of 
the  subject  on  whom  percussion  is  executed  will  likewise 
evoke  the  reflex  by  another  engaged  in  thought.  The 
same  maneuver  on  the  person  engaged  in  thought  prevents 
the  exit  of  psychical  energy  (page  109).  Elsewhere,  it  has 
been  shown  that  colors  are  capable  of  dijfferentation  by  rate 
of  vibration  and  polarity. 

The  foregoing  experiments  may  explain  some  of  the 
phenomena  of  telepathy.*  Thought  transference  is  a  reality 
despite  the  fact  that  the  most  heretofore  known  about  it 
was  practically  nothing,  and  we  were  not  sure  of  that. 

*Appendix,  Note  V. 


70  PHYSICS    AND    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    HUMAX    ENERGY 

The  proceedings  of  the  "Society  for  Psychical  Research" 
reveal  many  pertinent  paradigms  which  demonstrate  that, 
in  man  there  is  a  faculty  which  perm'ts  him  at  times  to 
communicate  directly  with  the  consciousness  of  another 
individual. 

I  have  purposely  italicized  "at  times"  for  the  reason 
that  my  in\'estigations  show  that,  the  energy  is  only 
propagated  during  the  time  one  side  of  the  brain  is  tem- 
porarily incapacitated  unless  further  experiments  show  that 
it  is  possible  for  an  individual  to  inhibit  voluntarily  one 
side  of  the  brain  (pages  69,  233,  250). 

Cerebration  does  not  evoke  visceral  reflexes;  the  positive 
energy  from  one  hemisphere  neutralizes  the  negative  energy 
from  the  other  brain  half.  This  is  equivalent  to  the  energy 
discharge  from  the  finger  tips  (page  112).  One  hand  may 
evoke  the  stomach  reflex  but  when  the  other  hand  is  simul- 
taneously extended,  no  dulness  ensues. 
■^  Condensation  of  human  energy. — For  this  puq^ose 
the  best  results  are  attained  by  using  a  Ley  den  Jar,  although 
other  condensers  are  more  or  less  efficient.  In  any  Ley  den 
Jar  one  may  store  normal  or  pathologic  human  energy  for 
about  one  hour  or  longer,  in  jars  specially  constructed  to 
minimize  leakage.  Not  long  ago  I  saw  a  patient  remote 
from  my  city  with  a  supposititious  carcinoma  of  the  breast. 
The  energy  from  this  growth  was  condensed  in  a  specially 
constructed  jar,  and  eight  hours  later,  tests  with  the  con- 
densed energy  demonstrated  the  electronic  reactions  of  a 
cancer  which  were  later  corroborated  b}'  histological 
examination. 

Leakage  is  insignificant  from  a  paper  condenser.  Charg- 
ing the  latter  with  carcinomatous  energy  for  5  minutes,  it 
shows  a  potentiality  of  11^  Ohms,  and  after  24  hours,  9 
Ohms. 


ENERGY    CENTERS 


71 


Leakage  is  prevented  by  enveloping  the  condenser  with 
insulating  tape  and  likewise  the  wire  for  receiving  energy 
after  charging.  This  wire  is  primarily  covered  with  rubber 
dam  to  exclude  the  entrance  of  normal  energ3\  The  other 
wire  of  the  condenser  is  not  used,  but  is  covered  with  insu- 
lating tape.  In  taking  the  reaction  use  the  rubber  covered 
wire  after  removal  of  the  tape. 

Care  must  be  exercised  in  discharging  the  jar,  before 
charging  it  with  a  new  source  of  energy. 

Employing  the  stomach  reflex  as  an  index,  it  will  be 
observed  that  when  a  male  permits  the  finger  tips  of  his 
right  hand  to  remain  for  several  minutes  in  contact  with  the 
metal  knob,  the  condensed  energy  will  be  positive;  from  his 
left  finger  tips  negative,  and  when  the  finger  tips  of  one 
hand  are  placed  on  the  outer  coating  of  tin  foil,  and  the 
fingers  of  the  other  hand  on  the  knob,  it  will  be  neutral. 
The  opposite  polarity  is  obtainable  in  a  female  excepting 
when  the  fingers  of  both  hands  are  used  after  the  manner 
indicated,  the  charge  will  be  likewise  neutral. 

One  may  obtain  either  a  positive  or  negative  charge  from 
a  bar-magnet  or  a  neutral  charge  from  a  hores-shoe  magnet. 

In  testing  the  polarity  of  the  condensed  energy,  present 
the  jar  to  the  stomach  region  by  grasping  the  glass  only, 
or  conduct  the  energ}'  to  the  stomach  from  the  knob  by  aid 
of  insulated  wire. 

Energeiagenic  centers. — Practically  e\xTy  area  of 
the  body  discharges  energy  which  can  be  determined  by 
the  stomach  reflex.  Energy  discharge  conveyed  by  con- 
ducting cords  only  (Fig.  19)  may  be  of  the  duling  or  non- 
DULiNG  variety  (pages  41  and  43). 

The  centers  shown  in  Figs.  26,  27,  28,  refer  only  to  areas 
from  which  energy  conducted  to  the  stomach  region  will 
produce  duling  energy. 


72  PHYSICS    AXD    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    HUMAN    ENERGY 


Right  5»de 


ALLVElMS 

Positive 

ENEtA&Y 


TESTICLES 
NEGATIVE 


PO  S  I T I  V  E 


_  ne&ATiVE 


RIGHT  SIDE 


LtFTSlDE 


OVAfOES 


NE&ATt»E 


Positive  + 


-     NEGATtve 


Fig.  26.     Xormal  energeiagenic  Fig.  27.     Xormal  energeiagenic 

centers  in  a  male.  centers  in  a  female. 

Whereas  the  energ}-  polarity  is  the  same  in  the  sexes  from  both  psychomotor 
regions  (p.  m.  r.)  yet  an  energy-  sufficient  to  dull  the  STOiiACH  can  only  be  drawn 
off  from  the  left  p.  m.  r.  in  the  male  and  from  the  right  p.  m.  r.  in  the  female 
(p.  III).  From  the  right  p.  m.  r.  in  the  male  and  from  the  left  p.  m.  r.  in  the 
female,  the  energ}'  polarity  is  non-duling  (p.  43). 


The  polarity  discharge  in  the  sexes  was  determined  by 
the  method  sho\\Ti  on  page  41.  Figures  26,  27,  28,  are 
marked  by    +    (positive),  —  (negativej   and  O  (neutral) 


ENERGY    CENTERS 


73 


signs;  indicating  the  polarity  of  the  energ\^  emanating  from 
different  body  regions.  The  discharge  of  duling  energy 
relative  to  the  extremities  only  occurs  at  the  tips  of  the 
fingers  and  toes. 


NEUTRAL 
E.WER.GY 


(ST.  LOrjBAR 
"  SPINE 

NEGATIVE 

ENERoy 


Fig.  28.    Normal  energeiagenic  centers  in  the  back  common  to  both  sexes. 


Common  to  both  sexes,  the  duling  energy  is  as  follows: 

1 .  Negative  ( — )  discharge  from  the  arteries. 

2.  Positive  (+)  discharge  from  the  veins. 

3.  A  NEUTRAL   (O)   discharge   from  the   7  th   cervical 
spine,  and  negative  (— )  discharge  from  the  ist  lumbar  spine. 

4.  Negative  discharge  from  the  left  ventricle. 


74  PHYSICS    AXD    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    HUMAX    ENERGY 

5.  PosiTR'E  discharge  from  the  right  ventricle. 

6.  A  POSiTR'E  discharge  from  the  regions  occupied  by 
the  kidneys. 

7.  An  EPIGASTRIC  AREA  discharging  neutra'  energy- 
Hmited  to  the  central  line  of  the  abdomen,  and  extending 
up^vards  to  a  distance  of  about  5  cm.  above  the  navel. 

From  any  of  the  foregoing  centers,  one  may  conduct 
the  energv  by  means  of  an  ordinary  flexible  insulated  cord 
(approximately  80  cm.  in  length)  of  copper,  or  aluminum 
wire. 

Insulated  aluminum  wire  is  the  most  effective  material 
for  conducting  human  energ}'. 

The  metal  tips  of  the  conducting  wire  in  contact  with  the 
fingers  must  be  insulated.  Placing  one  tip  of  the  cord 
(which  must  not  be  insulated)  to  any  center  of  energ}'  and 
the  other  tip  in  contact  with  the  stomach-region  or  several 
inches  away  (if  the  energy  conveyed  is  of  sufiicient  potency), 
an  immediate  dulness  of  the  stomach  is  elicited  and  by  aid 
of  the  bar-magnet  one  may  determine  the  polarity  of  the 
energ}'  during  the  flow  of  the  latter. 

Other  visceral  reflexes  are  similarly  elicited. 

Polarity  oe  HrM.\x  il\dioactrity. — Irrespective  of 
the  source  of  the  energ}-  a  differentiation  of  polarity  is 
possible; 

Shellac  permits  only  the  positive  rays  to  pass; 
\'ULCAXITE  permits  only  the  negative  rays  to  pass; 
Lead  permits  only  the  neutral  rays  to  pass. 

Refer  to  hypermotility  of  the  stomach  (p.  40).  This 
may  often  be  ob\dated  by  concussion  (Fig.  54)  of  the  5th 
dorsal  spine  (p.  64)  which  discharges  the  storrach  con- 
tents. The  latter  maneuver  will  also  empty  the  stomach 
when  necessary  (p.  65). 


AUXILIARY  METHODS  DEMONSTRATING  HUMAN  ENERGY      ^0 

CHAPTER  \  . 

AUXILIARY    METHODS    FOR   DEMONSTR.\TING  HU]VL^.N  ENERGY. 

Visceral  tonicity. — Reference  has  been  made  to  this 
subject  (pages  27  and  75).  Visceral  tone  may  likewise  be 
modified  (page  77).  Whereas  the  stomach  reflex  is  cited, 
other  visceral  reflexes  may  be  similarly  employed. 

In  organotonometry,  Dr.  George  Starr  White  (Los 
Angeles),  has  perfected  a  device  for  translating  the  tonicity 
of  the  viscera  into  audible  tones;  the  vibrations  yielding 
these  tones  from  the  organotonometer  change  in  wave 
length  in  proportion  to  the  tension  or  tonicity  of  the  viscera. 

The  Organotonometer  (Fig.  29)  is  a  tambour  made  by 
covering  the  opening  in  a  wooden  hoop  itself  with  a 
specially  prepared  parchment  and  forcibly  pressing 
over  all  another  wooden  hoop,  which  makes  the  parch- 
ment very  tense.  These  hoops  are  securely  fastened 
to  a  wooden  handle  which  has  a  cloth  shock  absorber 
fastened  to  it  close  to  the  hoops.  The  hammer  for 
striking  the  Organotonometer  is  made  of  piano  felt 
glued  to  a  wooden  handle. 

To  vibrate  the  Organotonometer,  the  handle  is  held 
firmly  in  one  hand,  and  the  shock  absorber  on  it  is  hit 
with  the  felt  hammer  with  a  staccato  stroke.  The  tone 
varies  with  the  tension,  substance,  and  j)roximity  of 
the  neighboring  material. 

The  same  observer  has  constructed  a  drum  (Fig.  29) 
made  of  a  metal  cylinder  tightly  closed  at  one  end  with 
metal,  and  at  the  other  end,  with  the  specially  prepared 
parchment  so  put  on  that  it  is  air  tight  and  very  tense. 

In  the  side  of  the  cylinder  is  soldered  a  nipple  to  which 
one  end  of  a  rubber  tube  is  attached,  and  a  mouth  piece  is 


76     AUXILIARY  METHODS  DEMONSTRATING  HUMAN  ENERGY 


Fig.  29.  Figures  above  and  to  the  right,  organo tonometer  and  hammer. 
Below,  to  the  right,  drum;  inflation  of  latter  regulated  by  a  bulb.  The  figure  to 
the  left  is  a  tonometric  scale  of  one  octave  devised  by  Dr.  Geo.  Jarvis.  When  a 
percussion  sound  is  elicited  this  is  translated  by  the  tonometric  scale  (struck  by 
felt  hammer)  and  a  record  made.  Employed  for  interpreting  and  confirming 
sounds  elicited  by  ordinary  percussion. 

put  on  the  other  end.  By  varying  the  degree  of  inflation  of 
the  cyHnder  all  nuances  of  sound  may  be  elicited  during  the 
time  the  organotonometer  is  used. 

The  writer  has  employed  for  a  similar  purpose*  percus- 
sion of  the  cheek  with  the  mouth  closed.  By  inflation  and 
deflation  of  the  cheek  all  shades  of  sound  are  evocable. 

The  present  standards  of  recognizing  various  grades 
of  dulness  are  indefinite  and  misleading  and  militate 
against  progress  in  percussion.     A  notable  advance  in 


*Clinical  Diagnosis,  Abrams. 


LIVER    REFLEX  77 

this  direction  has  been  made  by  Wood^^  who  studies  the 
pitch  of  the  various  percussion  notes  from  a  musical 
standard.  It  is  not  unlikely  that  the  recently  devised 
tonoscope  may  solve  this  perplexing  problem. 

Define  the  left  cardiac  border  by  percussion  and  then 
note  that,  when  the  energy  from  either  pole  of  a  bar-magnet 
is  directed  toward  the  heart  region,  the  left  border  extends 
one  or  more  centimeters  further  to  the  left,  and  the  cardiac 
area  of  dulness  is  accentuated. 

Energy  from  whatever  source  will  produce  like  results. 
In  the  percussion  of  the  viscera  the  subject  must  face  toward 
the  WEST  (page  77). 

Define  the  lower  border  of  the  lung  by  percussion  and 
note  that,  when  energy  from  a  magnet  or  the  finger  tips  is 
directed  at  the  7th  cervical  spine,  there  is  an  immediate 
descent  of  the  lung  border.  Here  the  effect  is  secured  in- 
directly by  stimulation  of  the  vagus*  which  furnishes  inner- 
vation to  the  viscera. 

This  biomechanic  effect  of  energy  is  not  available  for 
determining  polarity  of  the  energy  insomuch  as  a  neutral 
energy  emanates  from  the  7th  cervical  spine.  (Fig.  73). 

Liver  border. — The  right  or  left  lower  liver  border  is 
frequently  utilized  by  the  author  for  determining  the  pres- 
ence and  polarity  of  energy  when  the  stomach  reflex  is  ex- 
hausted. As  a  rule,  the  liver  reflex  can  be  elicited  when 
the  stomach  reflex  is  exhausted,  but  in  exceptional  instances 
the  loss  of  both  reflexes  is  synchronous.  The  liver  reflex  is 
decidedly  less  sensitive  than  the  stomach  reflex.  The 
polarity  of  the  left. lower  liver  border  corresponds  to  that 
of  the  stomach  in  the  male.     The  polarity  of  the  right 

*The  writer  demonstrated  the  presence  in  the  vagus  of  broncho-constrictor 
and  bronchodilator  fibers.  This  observation  was  later  confirmed  by  the  Eng- 
lish physiologists;  Dixon  and  Brodie'^. 


78     AUXILIARY  METHODS  DEMOXSTRATIXG  HUMAX  EXERGY 

lower  liver  border  has  an  opposite  polarity  to  that  of  the 
stomach  and  left  lower  liver  border  in  the  male.  In  the 
normal  female  subject,  these  polarities  are  reversed.  An 
energy  which  is  positive  over  the  stomach  in  the  male, 
would^be'negative  over  the  right  liver  border. 


Fig.  30. — \'isualized  aura  (,Kilner,  "The  Human  Atmosphere."  Rebman  Co.) 
consisting  of  an  inner  and  outer  aura. 


Neutral  and  positive  and  negative  polarities  however, 
would  be  the  same  either  over  the  stomach  or  liver  borders 
in  males  or  females. 


AURAL    ENERGY' 


79 


POSI  T»VE 
NON- 
PULING 
ENtRGY-i 


NEUTRAL 
NON- 
DUL(NG 
ENERfrY 


Fig.  31. — Decussation  of  aural  energy  in  a  male  subject.  Whereas  polarity 
in  the  sexes  from  both  psychomotor  regions  is  the  same  (p.  113)  the  energy  produc- 
ing value  is  greater  (duling  energy)  in  the  left  brain  in  the  male  and  the  right 
brain  in  the  female.  A  like  disparity  is  noted  in  the  bullfinch  (p.  198).  Changes 
in  sexual  polarity  (p.  115)  are  evidently  a  defensive  mechanism  to  secure  a  sexu- 
ality in  the  mental  (p.  114)  and  physical  unfit. 


80     AUXILIARY  METHODS  DEMOXSTEATIXG  HUMAX  EXERGY 

Aural  energy. — The  foregoing  reversed  polarity  is 
caused  as  follows:  The  human  organism  is  an  energ}-  pro- 
ducing machine;  the  extremities  representing  the  poles. 
Surrounding  the  body  to  a  variable  distance  is  an  aural 
area  of  energy  (extending  in  the  average  male  a  distance  of 
about  7  cm.  from  the  waist)  corresponding  to  the  visualized 
aura  (pages  9  and  78,  Fig.  30). 

The  aural  energ}'  yields  a  positive  non-duling  energ}' 
on  the  right  and  a  negative  duling  energ}'  on  the  left  side 
in  the  male  (Fig.  31)  which  is  reversed  in  the  female. 
Exactly  in  the  median  line  of  the  body  from  the  vertex  to 
the  termination  of  the  trunk,  the  energy  is  neutral  (non- 
duling)  . 

Note  that  in  the  male,  the  positive  energy  over  the  left 
psychomotor  region  (non-duling  in  the  female)  is  transferred 
to  the  right  side  of  the  body  by  means  of  the  crossed  fibers 
of  the  pyramidal  tract.  .Iny  non-duling  energ}'  may  be 
converted  into  a  duling  energ}'  by  an  induction  coil  (page 
275).  Here,  the  induction  coil  only  must  be  used.  Em- 
ployed in  conjunction  with  a  condenser,  a  non-duling  cannot 
be  transformed  into  a  duling  energy. 

The  study  of  organolog}'  in  the  dissecting  room  furnishes 
an  inadequate  conception  of  the  topographic  anatomy  of 
the  living  viscera. 

The  liver  border  is  ahvays  lower  than  described. 
The  liver  border  is  immersed  in  an  atmosphere  of  tym- 
panitic sound  and  its  edge  does  not  exceed  i  cm. 

In  the  norm,  one  must  proceed  upward  a  distance  of 
several  centimeters  before  eliciting  a  dulness  peculiar 
to  the  liver  and  this  point  is  erroneously  accepted  as  the 
lower  border.  If  however,  the  liver  is  endowed  with 
tonicity  by  energ}'  from  any  source,  the  very  edge  of 
the  liver  will  \'ield  dulness. 


ABDOMINAL    BRAIN  81 

With  the  patient  facing  West,  energy  is  conveyed  to  the 
Hver  in  the  conventional  way.  Insomuch  as  the  right 
border  is  usually  used,  place  the  electrode  about  5  cm.  to 
the  right  of  the  median  line  of  the  abdomen,  otherwise  the 
neutral  energy  above  the  navel  (page  74)  may  modify  the 
polarity  of  the  extraneous  source  of  energy.  The  method 
of  procedure  corresponds  to  that  employed  in  eliciting  the 
polarity  of  energy  by  aid  of  the  stomach  reflex  {q.  v.). 

When  the  liver  border  is  defined  in  the  usual  way  by 
percussion,  conveyed  energy  will  yield  an  area  of  dulness 
one  or  more  centimeters  lower. 

If  the  latter  is  dissipated  by  the  positive  pole  and  main- 
tained by  the  negative  pole,  the  energy  is  negative;  if  it  is 
dissipated  by  both  poles  it  is  neutral,  and  if  it  persists  with 
both  poles,  it  is  positive  and  negative. 

Polar  expression  of  energy. — The  writer  iirst  des- 
cribed a  clinical  entity  now  kno^vn  in  the  literature  as, 
"splanchnic  neurasthenia*."  The  splanchnic  nerves  are 
the  vasomotors  of  the  abdominal  vessels.  Clinically,  like 
in  laboratory  experiments,  one  may  contract  or  dilate  the 
vessels.  The  physiologist  knows  that  stimulation  of  any 
centripetal  nerve  augments  blood-pressure,  and  the  essential 
factor  in  this  reflex  is  vasoconstriction  in  the  splanchnic 
area.  The  only  exception  to  the  foregoing  rule  is  stimula- 
tion of  the  depressor  nerve  which  lowers  pressure  by  dilating 
the  splanchnic  vessels. 

It  may  be  shown  clinically  that,  when  a  stimulus  is 
applied  between  the  third  and  fourth  dorsal  spines  (stimula- 
tion of  the  depressor),  the  splanchnic  vessels  dilate  as  re- 
vealed by  areas  of  abdominal  dulness  which  disappear 
after  forced  inspirations.     The  abdominal  brain  (pages  81 

*Abrams;  4th  Edition,  191 1,  E.  B.  Treat  &  Co.,  New  York.      This  subject 
is  also  discussed  in  the  5th  edition  of  Spondylothcrapy. 


82      AUXILIARY  METHODS  DEMOXSTRATIXG  HUMAX  ENERGY 

and  249)  is  not  a  misnomer;  it  even  fails  to  portray  the 
autonomy  of  a  nervous  system  which,  in  its  reflex  functions, 
performs  tasks  that  from  a  utihtarian  viewpoint  transcend 
inteUigence.  According  to  the  polarity  of  the  energy  con- 
veyed by  a  magnet  to  the  area  between  the  3rd  and  4th 
dorsal  spines,  the  areas  of  abdominal  dulness  vary  in  position 
as  shown  in  fig.  32. 


Fig.  32. — Areas  of  ventral  dulness  superinduced  by  magnetic  energy.  The 
areas  refer  to  the  latter  only.  The  splanchnic  expression  of  specific  pathological 
energy  (splanchno-diagnosis)  is  discussed  on  page  291.  A,  neutral  energy  (horse- 
shoe magnet);  B,  positive  energy  from  a  bar-magnet;  C,  area  of  negative  energy 
superimposed  on  B. 


PHONOGRAMS 


These  splanchnic  vasomotor  reflexes  are  only  e vocable 
with  the  subject  standing;  are  alike  (site  of  areas)  in  the 
sexes  and  readily  demonstrated  by  even  the  maladroit. 
The  subject  faces  West.  About  thirty  seconds  elapse 
before  the  dull  areas  develop  during  the  time  energy  is 
conveyed. 

Pulmonary  vasomotor  reflex. — Analogous  to  the 
foregoing  without  any  evidence  of  polarity  howe\er,  is  the 
augmentation  in  area  of  the  paravertebral  triangles  when 
energy  is  conveyed  to  the  tenth  dorsal  spine  and  diminu- 
tion of  the  same,  when  energy  is  conveyed  to  the  7th  cer- 
vical spine. 

The  RETINAL  vasomotor  reflexes  are  described  on  page 

97- 


Fig.  7,;^. — Phonograms:    D,  dulncss  and  T,  tympanitic  sound. 

Phonograms. — Percussion  is  an  empirical  procedure 
with  limitations  best  realized  by  the  expert  with  trained 
hands  and  ears.  Maladroit  percussion  yields  untrustworthy 
results  (page  28). 

Percussion  depends  on  variations  in  vibrations  elicited 
by  blows  on  different  structures,  and  the  recognition  of 
•clearness,  tympany  and  dulness,  is  only  a  matter  of  experi- 
ence not  unlike  that  of  the  carpenter,  who  determines  the 
position  of  a  stud  in  the  plastered  wall  by  aid  of  his  hammer, 
or  the  ganger  striking  his  mallet  upon  the  cask,  ascertains 
the  level  of  the  wine. 

To  eliminate  the  personal  equation,  I  have  sought  to 
make  tracings  of  the  percussion  sounds  by  fixing  a  cardio- 


84     AUXILIARY  METHODS  DEMOXSTRATING  HUMAX  EXERGY 

graphic  attachment  in  proximity  to  the  site  of  percussion. 
The  cardiograph  communicates  with  a  sensitive  tambour, 
and  the  records  are  made  on  a  revolving  cyHnder. 


Fig.  34. — Sphygmomanometer  with  a  dial  8  inches  in  diameter  and  may  be 
read  across  a  room.  This  large  dial  magnifies  the  oscillations  of  the  needle.  The 
range  is  300  mm.    The  dial  is  adjustable  to  any  position. 

Fig.  T,;^  represents  such  a  tracing  by  percussion  of  the 
stomach  before  (tympanitic  sound),  and  during  the  time 
energ)'  ^vas  conveyed  to  the  stomach  region  (dulness)*. 

SPHYGMOM-A.XOMETRY. — It  occurred  to  the  author  that 
the  heart  could  be  utilized  for  the  clinical  recognition  of 
energy  by  vagus  stimulation. 

*The  author  is  indebted  to  Professor  J.  E.  Coover,  Department  of  Psxxhol- 
ogy,  Leland  Stanford  Junior  University,  for  his  valuable  aid  in  making  the 
tracings. 


SPHYGMOMANOMETRY  00 

Physiologists  concede  that  when  the  ventricle  is  inhibited 
by  MODERATE  vagus  stimulation,  the  beats  although  slower 
are  stronger  whereas  when  stimulation  is  greater,  the 
contractions  are  diminished  in  strength  and  rate  (page 
277). 

My  primary  efforts  in  this  direction  were  made  with  the 
largest  size  Faught  aneroid  barometer.  One  may  employ 
any  other  sphygmomanometer  with  less  convenience  inso- 
much as  the  fluctuations  in  the  column  of  mercury  must 
he  determined  by  aid  of  a  lens.  The  apparatus  is  applied 
in  the  conventional  manner  for  taking  blood-pressure. 
One  must  note  the  following: 

1.  Select  an  individual  with  a  responsive  vagus.  This 
is  easily  determined  by  palpating  the  pulse  during  the  time 
energy  is  conveyed  by  the  finger  tips  to  the  7  th  cervical 
spine.  If  there  is  vagus  response  a  momentary  inhibition 
of  the  pulse  will  be  noted,  specially  if  a  weak  pulse  is  pal- 
pated. It  must  be  noted  however  that  when  the  pulse  is 
weak,  the  energy  response  of  the  ventricle  will  be  corre- 
spondingly diminished. 

2.  After  inflation  of  the  arm-piece,  gradually  deflate 
until  the  maximum  oscillations  of  the  needle  are  noted  (or 
mercury,  if  another  instrument  is  used). 

3.  The  subjects  eyes  must  be  closed,  and  not  even  the 
slightest  movement  must  be  permitted  and  breathing  must 
be  regular  during  all  observations. 

The  effects  of  energy  may  be  noted  by  deflection  of  the 
needle  toward  a  higher  point  on  the  scale  when  stimula- 
tion of  the  vagus  is  achieved  by  conveyance  of  energ}-  to  the 
7th  cervical  spine  or  the  epigastrium  (page  277)  The  latter 
is  more  effective  than  the  former  site  (page  277). 

The  needle  will  be  deflected  toward  a  lower  point  on 
the  scale  when  the  vagus  is  depressed  by  conveyance  of 


86      AUXILIARY  METHODS  DEMONSTRATING  HUMAN  ENERGY 

energy  to  a  site  in  the  median  line  between  the  3rd  and  4th 
dorsal  spines  (page  81). 

Concentration  of  energy  to  the  sites  indicated  is  best 
secured  by  preparing  a  screen  of  cardboard  covered  with  tin 
foil  or  other  non-conductor  (impervious  to  human  energy) 
in  which  an  opening  is  cut  about  one  inch  in  diameter  (Fig. 

35)- 

If   the   opening   in   the   screen   covers   the   7  th  cervical 

spine  or  the  area  indicated  in  the  epigastrium,  a  person  dis- 
charging an  abundance  of  energy  may  with  extended  fingers 
directed  toward  the  opening,  cause  a  rise  of  blood-pressure 
as  indicated  by  the  movement  of  the  needle. 

Depression  of  vagus  tone  and  a  fall  of  pressure  is  noted 
when  the  energy  from  the  fingers  is  directed  at  the  opening 
in  the  screen  fixed  between  the  3rd  and  4th  dorsal  spines. 
These  effects  may  be  achieved  by  persons  discharging  an 
abundance  of  energy  at  a  distance  of  several  feet,  whereas 
with  others,  apposition  of  the  finger  tips  to  the  sites  indi- 
cated is  necessary. 

The  determination  of  polarity  by  aid  of  this  apparatus 
requires  much  patience.  Let  one  assume  by  aid  of  the  con- 
ducting cord  (Fig.  19)  energy  is  conveyed  to  the  epigastric 
area  from  a  supposititious  carcinoma.  To  avoid  any  move- 
ment on  the  part  of  the  subject  fix  the  electrode  to  the 
epigastric  area  with  plaster  or  a  band. 

The  primary  effect  of  such  conveyance  of  energy  is 
augmented  blood-pressure. 

Polarity  as  has  been  shown  (page  41),  may  be  modified 
at  its  source  or  point  of  exit  (from  electrode  in  proximity 
to  the  stomach). 

If  the  pressure  rises  when  the  positive  pole  of  the  magnet 
is  directed  at  the  site  corresponding  to  the  electrode  over 
the  growth,  the  conducted  energy  is  positive.     The  nega- 


PSYCHOPHANOMETEH 


87 


tive  pole  of  the  magnet  directed  toward  the  same  area  would 
inhibit  any  rise.  If  both  poles  of  the  magnet  inhibit  a  rise 
of  pressure,  the  energy  is  neutral  assuming  of  course  that, 
there  has  been  a  rise  of  pressure  prior  to  the  use  of  the 
magnet. 


Fig.  35. — Psychophanomcter   (Planck)   and  screen    (p.  25) 
latter  over  the  7th  cervical  spine. 


Fenestra  of  the 


PsYCHOPHANOMETER. — This  ingenious  apparatus  (Fig. 
35)  devised  by  Dr.  F.  M.  Planck,  consists  of  a  collar  for  the 
arm  similar  to  the  collars  used  in  blood-pressure  instruments. 
This  collar  connects  by  a  rubber  tube  with  the  short  arm 
of  a  well  of  mercury.  The  long  arm  of  the  latter  is  adjusted 
to  an  adjustable  copper  contact  point  which  in  turn  connects 
with  a  battery  strong  enough  to  light  a  small  electric  bulb. 
The  collar  is  inflated  to  about  the  limits  of  blood-pressure. 


88     AUXILIARY  METHODS  DEMONSTRATING  HUMAN  ENERGY 

The  copper  point  is  adjusted  so  that  the  fluctuations  of  the 
mercury  in  response  to  the  impulse  of  the  heart  make  and 
break  the  contact  with  the  copper  point  and  with  the  bat- 
tery, thus  Kghting  the  electric  bulb  at  every  systole.  By 
this  means  which  is  the  well  known  method  of  relaying, 
the  current  is  reinforced  by  the  subject,  and  the  demonstra- 
tion is  made  through  the  physical  results  of  energy 
stimulation. 

By  decreasing  the  caliber  of  the  long  limb  of  the 
mercury  well,  the  oscillations  at  systole  can  be  length- 
ened. By  making  the  contact  of  the  copper  point  with 
an  adjusting  ratchet  with  a  delicately  graduated  Ver- 
nier or  with  a  gauge,  the  transmitted  energy'  can  be 
measured.  The  moment  energy  is  conveyed  to  the 
epigastrium  or  the  yth  cervical  spine,  the  current  will 
no  longer  make  and  break  but  will  be  a  continuous  con- 
tact, and  the  light  will  burn  steadily. 

While  the  pressure  is  high  (continued  burning  of 
the  light)  and  energy  is  conveyed  over  the  opening  in 
the  screen  placed  between  the  3rd  and  4th  dorsal  spines, 
vagus  tone  will  be  decreased  so  that  the  column  of  mer- 
cury no  longer  makes  contact  at  systole,  and  the  electric 
light  goes  out. 

The  apparatus  of  Dr.  George  Starr  WTiite,  (Fig.  36) 
surpasses  the  Planck  apparatus  in  sensitiveness.  Its  appli- 
cation is  similar  to  that  of  the  latter. 

Four  electric  lamps  of  different  colors  approximate 
the  scale.  Between  the  first  and  second  lamp  there  is  a 
distance  of  2  mm.;  between  the  second  and  third  i^ 
mm. ;  between  the  third  and  fourth,  i  mm. 

The  metallic  contact  with  the  fluctuating  mercurial 
column  may  be  adjusted  to  give  systolic  and  diastolic 
readings  by  alternate  lighting  of  two  differently  colored 
lamps. 

The  conveyance  of  energy  is  demonstrated  by  the 
lighting  of  one  or  more  superimposed  lamps. 


SPHYGMOMANOMETER 

Not  infrequently  the  primary  effect  of  conveyed 
energy  to  the  epigastrium  or  the  7th  cervical  spine  is  to 
diminish  blood-pressure  owing  to  the  strength  of  the 
stimulus  (page  85).  Again,  when  the  energy  is  con- 
veyed to  the  region  between  the  3rd  and  4th  dorsal 
spines,  the  primary  effect  may  be  stimulation,  but  this 
momentary  excitation  is  succeeded  by  depression  of 
the  vagus. 

By  aid  of  the  foregoing  apparatus,  the  effects  of  color 
(page  48)  on  human  energy  may  be  demonstrated. 
If  between  the  fingers  of  the  operator  and  the  subject  a 
red  screen  is  interposed,  a  continuously  lighted  lamp 
will  light  intermittently,  because  red  intercepts  the 
transmission   of  energy.     If  however,   the  red  screen 


89 


Fig.  36. — Psychophanomcter  (White). 


90     AUXTLIARY  METHODS  DEMOXSTRATIXG  HUMAX  EXERGY 

is  placed  on  the  head  of  the  operator,  there  is  an  in- 
creased output  of  energy  and  the  column  of  mercury 
rises  (continuous  lighting  of  the  lamp). 

These  instruments  may  be  utilized  for  measuring 
psychic  energy  (page  65).  They  open  the  field  of 
research  concerning  the  effects  of  colors,  of  color  har- 
monies, clothing,  music,  discord  and  thousands  of  other 
questions  which  have  hitherto  been  problematical  in 
psychoneuroses  and  psychotherapy. 

To  show  Diastolic  Pressure  Avith  the  psychophanom- 
eter  of  White,  lower  the  lamp  carriage  until  all  the 
lamps  light.  WTien  vagus  tone  is  depressed  by  con- 
veying energy  between  the  3rd  and  4th  dorsal  spines, 
the  top  light,  the  third  and  even  the  second  and  first 
will  go  out  in  proportion  to  the  amount  of  conveyed 
energy  and  the  susceptibility  of  the  subject. 

Sphygmogr,a.phic  registration. — If  one  end  of  a  rubber 
tube  is  hermetically  attached  to  practically  any  mercurial 
sphygmomanometer,  and  the  other  end  to  a  tambour,  one 
may  make  a  graphic  record  of  the  variable  grades  of  pres- 
sure of  the  column  of  air  superinduced  by  the  fluctuations 
of  mercury. 

The  sphygmomanometer  is  attached  in  the  usual  way, 
and  the  pressure  of  the  arm-piece  is  adjusted  by  inflation 
or  deflation  so  as  to  secure  the  maximum  oscillations  of  the 
mercury.  Increase  or  decrease  of  pressure  is  noted  by  the 
amplitude  of  the  curves  (Fig.  24)  when  energy  is  conveyed 
to  the  epigastric  area  or  the  7th  cervical  sp  ne  to  increase 
blood-pressure,  or  to  the  area  between  the  3rd  and  4th 
dorsal  spines  to  diminish  pressure. 

Extensi^•e  investigations  by  the  writer  w  th  \'arious 
forms  of  sphygmographs  and  the  electrocardiograph,  with 
the  object  of  securing  characteristic  sphygmograms  and 
electrocardiograms  by  the  application  of  various  forms  of 


GASTROGRAPHV 


91 


energy  (normal  and  pathological)  to  the  7th  cervical  spine 
and  epigastrium,  were  without  definite  results.  I'iik  p.  296. 
Gastrography. — With  the  apparatus  shown  in  Fig.  37, 
attempts  were  made  to  make  records  of  the  stomach  con- 
tractions with  the  results  shown  in  Figs.  38  and  39. 


Fig.  37. — Apparatus  for  recording  stomach-conlracLions  incideiil  to  the  action 
of  transmitted  energy.  It  consists  of  a  stomach-tube  to  one  end  of  which  a  rubber- 
balloon  is  fixed  and  to  the  other  end  a  pump  for  in  Hating  the  balloon  in  the  stomach. 
The  pump  and  stomach-tube  are  connected  with  a  piece  of  V-glass  tubing.  The 
stomach-contractions  are  transmitted  to  a  tambour,  the  lever  of  which  makes  the 
record  ofi  a  revolving  cvlinder. 


The  stomach  faithfully  records  the  dots  and  dashes 
from  an  ordinary  transmitter  operated  at  a  distance  of  40 
feet  from  the  subject  (Fig   40). 

Gastrography   is   not   destined   to  be   of  any  practical 


92     AUXILIARY  METHODS  DEMONSTRATING  HUMAN  ENERGY 


Fig.  38. — Tracings  of  the  stomach  with  the  apparatus  shown  in  Fig.  37.  A, 
normal  curves  dependent  on  respirators-  excursions;  B,  normal  curves  due  to  trans- 
mitted pulsations  of  the  aorta;  C,  curves  caused  by  concussion  of  the  7th  cervical 
spine;  D,  curves  caused  by  contraction  of  the  stomach  due  to  making  and  breaking 
of  the  current  leading  to  an  electromagnet  in  pro.ximity  to  the  subject;  E,  curves 
caused  by  transmitted  energy  from  one  subject  (by  concussing  the  7th  cervical 
spine)  to  another  subject;  F,  cur\-es  due  to  transmitted  psychic  energy  from  one 
subject  to  another  subject.  During  the  making  of  records  of  C,  D,  E,  and  F, 
breathing  of  the  subject  from  whom  the  records  were  taken  was  temporarily  sus- 
pended. The  records  of  transmitted  energy  were  made  during  the  time  one  subject 
was  in  proximity  but  not  in  contact  with  the  other  subject. 


GASTRODIAPHAXE 


93 


value  insomuch  as  it  necessitates  a  subject  accustomed  to 
the  stomach  tube  and  one  must  eliminate  respiratory  curves 
and  transmitted  pulsations  (Fig.  38). 


'hi  V  \(v  y^AJ^^  V  V 


VWN^VV^'^^^u 


Fig.  39. — Physiological  manifestalions  of  the  emotions  as  exhibited  by  con- 
tractions of  the  stomach;  A,  joy;  B,  fear;  C,  great  agitation.  These  tracings  were 
taken  from  different  subjects  in  whom  these  emotions  were  e.xpressed  by  aid  of  the 
apparatus  shown  in  Fig.  38.  Practically  identical  records  were  made  in  other 
subjects  under  like  emotional  conditions. 

By  aid  of  a  gastrodiaphane,  one  may  note  a  diminu- 
tion in  the  area  of  the  stomach  illumination  by  conveying 
energy  to  the  seventh  cervical  spine  or  the  epigastrium. 
Transillumination  in  this  way  however  is  too  gross  for 
recognizing  the  transmission  of  energy.  Any  electrical 
difference  in  potential  (that  is  difference  in  amount  of  posi- 
tive or  negative  electricity)  is  indicated  by  the  swing  of 
the  needle  of  the  Galvanometer. 

Galvanometric  measurements  were  made  with  a 
stomach  tube  converted  into  a  non-polarisable  elec- 
trode. The  tube  was  introduced  into  the  stomach, 
and  the  hand  of  the  subject  immersed  in  a  salt  solu- 
tion.   Tube  and  vessel  were  connected  with  a  sensitive 


9-4     AUXILIARY  METHODS  DEMONSTRATING  HUMAN  ENERGY 

Galvanometer.  When  energy  was  conveyed  to  either 
the  7th  cervical  spine  or  epigastric  area,  the  readings 
were  invariably  negative  to  the  original  electrical 
potential. 

This  method  was  of  great  value  in  determining  the 
action  of  psychic  energy,  but  it  is  not  destined  to  be  of 
practical  value  to  the  average  physician. 


Fig.  40. — Dots  and  dashes  from  a  transmitter  recorded  by  the  contractions 
of  the  human  stomach;  A,  dashes  and  B,  dots. 

Ocular  reflexes. — The  writer  has  sho^^Tl  elsewhere 
that  augmentation  of  vagus  tone  by  conveying  energ}^  to 
the  7th  cervical  spine  or  epigastrium,  will  increase  visual 
acuity  and  enlarge  the  field  of  vision  and  the  field  for  colors. 
Contrary  effects  are  observed  when  \-agus  tone  is  reduced 
(stimulus  between  the  3rd  and  4th  dorsal  spines). 

Dr.  George  Starr  \\Tiite,  comments  on  this  optometric 
recognition  of  energy  as  follows: 

"Dr.  Albert  Abrams,  in  the  fifth  edition  of  his  work 
on  Spondylotherapy,  makes  mention  of  the  ocular 
reflex  in  cases  of  exophthalnic  goitre.  In  our  work  in 
translating  the  visceral  reflex  (Abrams)  into  audible 
tones,  we  were  able  to  demonstrate  by  means  of  various 
de\dces  that  the  ^dsceral  reflex  was  really  an  increase 
in  tension  in  the  viscera.  This  can  be  brought  about 
by  the  change  of  tension  in  the  blood  vessels,  in  the 
musculature  of  the  viscera,  or  of  the  capsules  surround- 
ing the  viscera. 

Any  energy  which  excites  the  vague  tone  will  change 
the  tension  in  everv  organ  of  the  bodv,  and  we  could  not 


OCULAR    REFLEXES  95 

see  why  it  should  not  change  the  ocular  accommodation. 
To  enable  us  to  prove  this  conclusion,  we  purchased  an 
Ophthalmo-axonometer,  manufactured  by  the  Stan- 
dard Optical  Co.,  of  Waupaca,  Wis.  This  instrument 
is  illustrated  herewith  (Fig.  41). 


Fig.  41. — UphllKilmo-axonomcUT. 

The  principle  upon  which  this  apparatus  works  is: 

1.  The  scaling  down  of  the  distance  type  and  fan 
chart  to  a  range  of  a  few  feet  and  still  preserve  the  re- 
quirements of  the  standard  \'isual  angle. 

2.  The  substitution  of  the  focal  length  of  the  lens 
for  the  actual  lens  itself. 

In  the  neutralizing  telescope  there  is  placed  a  +8  D 
lens.  The  emmetropic  eye  at  the  telescope  will  read 
the  "fogging"  type  at  zero.  By  sliding  the  dial  carriage 
on  the  beam  l)ackwafd  and  forward  according  to  the 
gradations  engraved  on  the  beam,  plus  and  minus 
corrections  of  the  dioptric  lens  indicated  is  obtained. 

By  sliding  the  disc  carriage  away  from  the  telescope 
several  diopters  beyond  zero,  the  "fogging"  lens  on  the 
disc  is  in  such  a  position  that  the  eye  when  looking 
through  the  telescope,  is  "fogged"  and  can  discern 
nothing.     By  sliding  the  disc  carriage  slowly   toward 


96      AUXILIARY  METHODS  DEMOXSTRATIXG  HUMAX  ENERGY 

the  telescope,  while  the  observing  eye  is  looking  through 
it,  when  the  proper  location  on  the  beam  is  reached, 
the  observing  eye  can  readily  read  the  letters  on  the 
chart. 

We  make  a  note  of  the  reading  on  this  beam  and 
immediately  slide  the  carriage  away  so  as  to  again  fog 
the  eye.  We  must  not  allow  the  eye  to  accommodate 
but  use  entirely  the  "fogging"  or  "subjective"  method. 

We  now  place  a  bar-magnet  in  front  of  the  epigas- 
trium or  point  the  "energetic  finger"  at  this  location, 
or  concuss  the  7  th  cer\-ical  vertebra  or  direct  magnetic 
or  human  energy-  toward  that  point.  We  immediately 
draw  the  disc  carriage  to  such  a  location  on  the  beam  as 
to  make  the  letters  on  the  chart  of  the  same  clearness 
as  they  were  at  the  former  test.  We  make  a  note  from 
the  scale,  and  generally  find  that  the  carriage  has  been 
moved  from  >^  to  2  diopters  nearer  the  telescope  than 
with  the  pre^•ious  test.  This  means  that  a  plus  lens 
would  have  to  be  put  in  the  cell  frame  in  front  of  the 
telescope  to  make  the  eye,  after  such  a  stimulation 
read  without  accommodation  at  the  same  distance  as 
it  did  before  the  stimulation.  In  other  words,  the  stim- 
ulation which  would  produce  the  \isceral  reflex  has  at 
the  same  time  changed  the  accommodation  mechanism 
in  the  eye.  The  amount  of  change  will  depend  upon  the 
age  of  the  subject — the  older  the  subject,  the  less  will 
be  the  change.  The  degree  of  change  is  apparently 
dependent  upon  the  consistency  of  the  lens. 

This  is  one  of  the  most  remarkable  and  con\-incing 
proofs  of  the  \-isceral  reflex.  All  subjectiveness  is  oblit- 
erated as  the  subject  has  no  way  of  telling  what  the 
location  of  the  carriage  on  the  beam  is,  while  the  eye  is 
looking  through  the  telescope. 

In  all  new  work  the  innovator  is  constantly  on  the 
alert  to  find  means  of  pro\-ing  to  skeptical  minds  that 
his  discoveries  are  well  founded. 

All  originators  know  by  experience  that  some  men 
would  rather  criticise  than  test  the  work.    In  justice  to 


OCULAR    REFLEXES  97 

Dr.  Abrams,  the  discoverer  of  the  "visceral  reflex,"  as 
we  now  understand  it,  we  are  very  glad  to  have  found 
another  fact  to  prove  this  remarkable  discovery — the 
visceral  reflex  of  Abrams. 

We  have  discovered  several  other  proofs  that  there 
is  such  a  phenomenon  as  the  visceral  reflex,  but  we 
know  of  none  that  is  less  subjective  than  the  ocular 
demonstration  above  described. 

Our  newest  discovery  for  the  demonstrating  and 
proving  the  visceral  reflex  is  by  the  interference  of  sound 
waves  through  our  organ-tonicity  translating  device 
which  we  have  neologized  organotonometer  (page  75); 
a  measure  for  the  tonicity  of  the  organs.  By  means  of 
the  organotonometer  we  are  able  to  translate  organic 
tonicity  (visceral  reflex — Abrams)  into  audible  tones, 
which  tones  vary  in  pitch  according  to  the  tonicity  of 
the  viscera." 

With  a  simple  optometer,  purchasable  for  fifty  cents  or 
test-types,  an  increase  or  decrease  of  visual  acuity  may  be 
determined  (less  accurately)  by  transferring  energy  to 
produce  pressor  or  depressor  effects  on  the  vagus. 

Mydriasis. — The  pupillary  responses  to  Hght  are  the 
effects  of  energy.  The  ciliospinal  reflex  is  pupillary  dilata- 
tion by  stimulation  of  the  sensory  cutaneous  nerves. 

The  dilator  muscle  of  the  iris  is  innervated  by  the 
sympathetic.  The  mydriatic  pupillary  tract  (Fig.  23) 
passes  out  of  the  cord  through  the  first  three  dorsal  nerves 
(corresponding  to  the  ist  and  2nd  dorsal  spines).  Stimu- 
lation of  the  latter  causes  pupillary  dilatation.  If  to  the 
spines  in  question  an  electrode  is  fixed  and  accommodative 
efforts  on  the  part  of  the  subject  are  guarded  against  in  the 
usual  way,  the  conveyance  of  energ}^  is  followed  by  an 
immediate  reflex  of  dilatation. 

Retinal  vasomotor  reflexes. — It  has  been  shown 
elsewhere,  that  energy  to  the  7th  cervical  spine  will  contract 


98     AUXILIARY  METHODS  DEMONSTKATIXG  HUMAX  EXERGY 

the  retinal  blood  vessels  whereas  the  counter  reflex  of  dila- 
tation ensues,  when  energ}-  is  conveyed  to  the  loth  dorsal 
spine.  These  effects  may  be  noted  during  the  ophthalmos- 
copic examination  by  conveyance  of  energ}-  from  the  finger 
tips  to  the  spinous  processes  in  question. 

Audition. — \Miat  has  been  said  of  vision  (page  170) 
refers  with  equal  cogency  to  audition.  It  has  been  sho\\Ti 
elsewhere  that  this  sense  is  controlled  by  the  autonomic 
nervous  system. 

The  following  simple  experiment  shows  how  audition 
may  be  improved  or  diminished;  Determine  with  a  normal 
subject  the  distance  at  which  the  tick  of  a  watch  is  heard 
in  the  ear  under  examination.  Xow  convey  energ}-  with  the 
finger  tips  to  the  7th  cervical  spine  and  note  that  the  sub- 
ject perceives  the  tick  at  a  greater  distance.  By  diminish- 
ing vagus  tone  (finger  tips  between  the  3rd  and  4th  dorsal 
spines),  the  tick  is  heard  with  less  intensity  and  at  a  dim- 
inished distance. 

Accurate  quantitative  tests  may  be  made  with  Politzer's 
acoumeter.  Let  a  subject  with  normal  hearing  listen  to  the 
tick  of  a  watch  at  the  threshold  of  perception.  Observe 
that  when  the  positive  pole  of  a  bar-magnet  is  held  close 
to  the  external  auditor}'  meatus,  audition  is  increased  and 
decreased,  when  the  negative  end  of  the  magnet  is  similarly 
employed.  Both  ears  show  a  like  reaction.  This  method 
of  dift"erentiating  polar  energ}-  is  worthy  of  further 
investigation. 

Photography. — In  studying  the  photochemistry  of  psy- 
chic energ}-  it  was  found  to  vary  in  difi'erent  individuals. 
In  those  who  spontaneously  discharge  large  quantities  of 
energ}-  by  placing  a  very  sensitive  film  (enclosed  in  a  black 
envelope)  and  interposing  a  medium  which  resists  the  pene- 
tration of  psychic  energ}-,  one  may  practically  always  obtain 


PHOTOGRAPHY  99 

an  impression  on  the  film.  These  impressions  I  have 
neologized  as  psychograms.  At  the  present  time  the  im- 
pressions are  so  faint  that  they  cannot  be  illustrated  in  this 
work.  It  is  reasonable  to  hope  however,  that  further 
experimentation  will  achieve  better  results. 

Time  of  exposure  depends  on  the  subject  discharging 
psychic  energy.  The  most  satisfactory  time  varies  from 
30  seconds  to  5  minutes.  The  discharge  may  be  augmented 
by  placing  a  strip  of  red  material  across  the  head  and  the 
action  of  the  psychic  rays  on  the  plate  may  be  intensified 
by  interposing  between  the  forehead  and  the  plate  a  strip 
of  aluminum.  The  material  for  obstructing  the  rays  may 
be  a  thin  layer  of  shellac  or  the  insulating  tape  used  by 
electricians.  The  shellac  may  be  painted  on  the  forehead 
or  envelope  (prior  to  the  introduction  of  the  film),  and 
similar  disposition  may  be  made  of  the  tape.  I  have  endeav- 
ored to  obtain  similar  pictures  of  the  bones  of  the  hand. 

The  results  thus  far  have  not  been  satisfactory,  but  there 
is  reason  to  believe  that  further  efforts  with  new  developers 
may  eventually  be  successful. 

My  experiments  do  not  refer  to  mentoids  (thought 
forms  or  bodies.)  Yamaguchi  refers  to  a  woman  having 
the  mental  faculty  of  autohypnosis,  who  was  requested 
to  hypnotize  herself  and  strongly  suggest  to  herself  a 
word  spelled  in  Japanese  letters.  She  did  and  remained 
hypnotized  during  one  hour.  Sensitive  dry  plates 
held  near  her  head,  upon  development,  revealed  the 
negative  of  the  word  spelled  in  Japanese. 

Photography  of  human  radiations  has  been  largely 
exploited  in  the  realms  of  spirit  photography.  The 
fogged  plates  (excluding  chicanery)  thus  secured,  de- 
mand an  inordinate  amount  of  imagination  for  their 
interpretation.  The  heat  of  the  body  will  produce 
irregular  fogging  on  dry  plates.  It  is  also  known  that 
printed  characters  may  impress  a  plate  due  to  the  heat 


100  AUXILIARY  METHODS  DEMONSTRATING  HUMAN  ENERGY 

mentioned,  plus  the  previous  exposure  of  the  printed 
sheet  to  any  bright  source  of  illumination. 


^Lr\nJlJlrls^lS\s^. 

A 

'^xinnnririru  ' 
■""nrinririnnn^ 

Fig.  42. — Psychomanograph  (Planck).  The  tracings  (exact  size)  represent 
the  systolic  (A)  and  diastolic  (B)  phases:  i,  Psychomanogram  from  energy  stimu- 
lation at  the  7th  cervical  spine  and  2,  from  like  stimulation  at  the  3rd  dorsal  spine. 

Psychomanograph. — The  great  ingenuity  of  Dr.  F.  Mar- 
shall Planck  (Kansas  City,  Mo.)  suggested  the  use  of  this 
apparatus  (Fig.  42)  which  is  employed  after  the  manner  of 
his  psychophanometer  (page)  87.  The  instrument  records 
the  action  of  the  heart  (Fig.  42) ;  systole  (A)  and  diastole  (B). 

For  the  employment  of  the  Sphygmophone  and  Biom- 
eter  vide  page  272. 

Vide  GYROGRAPHY,  appendix,  Note  IV  and  Note  VIII, 
biometer  and  sphygmomanometer  and  metallic  reflex. 


TOPOGRAPHIC    PERCUSSION  101 


CHAPTER  VI 

TOPOGRAPHIC   PERCUSSION 

Visceral  tone. — This  subject  has  been  discussed  else- 
where (pages  27).  Tone  is  an  essential  attribute  of  all  liv- 
ing organisms.  The  term  relaxation  may  be  used  as  the 
antithesis  of  tone.  The  centers  of  the  brain  and  spinal  cord, 
are  in  a  state  of  tonic  excitation  and  from  these  centers, 
impulses  are  constantly  passing  through  nerves  to  muscles 
and  organs,  maintaining  the  latter  in  a  condition  of  tonic 
stimulation.  If  a  decapitated  frog  is  suspended  vertically 
with  the  hind  legs  downward  and  the  sciatic  nerve  of  one 
leg  is  severed,  this  leg  will  hang  down  more  limply  than  the 
other  leg.  Such  an  experiment  shows  that  tonic  impulses 
are  no  longer  conveyed  from  the  spinal  cord  to  the  muscles 
supplied  by  the  severed  nerve. 

Repeated  reference  has  been  made  to  the  influence  of 
cosmical  energy'  on  our  organisms,  radioactivity  wKich 
embraces  atomic  transformations  is  practically  the  main- 
spring of  the  universe. 

"The  natural  rate  of  flow  of  energy  from  its  primary 
atomic  reservoirs  to  the  sea  of  waste  heat  energy  of 
uniform  temperature,  allows  life  to  proceed  at  a  certain 
pace,  sternly  regulated  by  the  inexorable  laws  of  supply 
and  demand,  which  the  biologists  have  recognized  in 
their  field  as  the  struggle  for  existence.  The  main 
part  that  concerns  life  on  this  planet  is  received  as 
radiant  energy*." 

Every  living  being  transforms  energy  from  the  universe 
nto  heat,  mechanical  motion  and  nervous  energy.    Reference 


102  TOPOGRAPHIC    PERCUSSION 

has  alread}'  been  made  to  the  influence  of  the  magnetic 
elements  on  visceral  tonicity  (page  103). 

The  output  of  energy  varies  in  relation  to  the  posture 
of  the  individual  (page  269)  because  the  intake  of  energy 
is  similarlv  influenced. 


Fig.  43. — Illustrating  a  difference  in  the  topographic  area  of  the  viscera  by 
percussion  according  to  the  position  of  the  subject.    Broken  Hnes  (liver,  stomach 
and  spleen)  indicate  the  lower  borders  of  the  organs  cited  when  the  subject  faces 
the  north  and  the  continuous  lines  during  the  time  the  subject  is  facing  west. 
This  linear  distinction  is  reversed  in  the  illustration  with  reference  to  the  heart  and 
the  aorta.    When  the  7th  cer\-ical  spine  is  grounded  (p.  35),  the  removal  of  vagus 
tone  is  practically  equivalent  to  the  effects  obtained  when  the  subject  faces  north- 
Any  variation  in  the  proportion  and  character  of 
the  electrolytes  in  a  tissue  is  capable  of  imparting  to 
that  tissue  certain  properties.     The  chief  electrolyte 
in  our  blood  is  sodium  chlorid.    If  a  muscle  is  put  into 
a  solution  of  the  latter  (/.  e.,  isotonic  with  the  muscle) 


DEMAGNETIZATION  .  lOo 

it  twitches  rhythmically,  while  the  addition  of  a  soluble 
calcium  salt  prevents  the  twitching. 

My  investigations  show  that  the  stomach  muscula- 
ture exhibits  like  phenomena.  Let  a  subject  ingest  50 
Cc.  of  normal  salt  solution — a  persistent  stomach  dul- 
ness  (stomach  reflex)  ensues  until  inhibited  by  the 
ingestion  of  the  same  quantity  of  fluid  containing  5 
grains  of  chlorid  of  calcium.  When  the  latter  is  in- 
gested, it  is  impossible  to  impart  tone  to  the  stomach 
by  the  conveyance  of  energy. 

The  organs  are  in  a  varying  state  of  tonicity.  The  tone 
may  be  normal  (orthotonic),  increased  (hypertonic),  (di- 
minished (hypotonic)  or  absent  (atonic). 

A  RELAXED  ORGAN  WILL  YIELD  A  SMALLER  AREA  OF 
DULKESS   THAN  AN   ORGAN   WHICH   IS    IN   A    STATE    OF   TONE. 

To  accurately  reproduce  the  area  occupied  by  an  organ, 
it  must  be  put  in  a  condition  of  augmented  tone,  otherwise 
topographic  percussion  yields  untrustworthy  results. 

Fig.  43,  represents  topographic  percussion  of  the  heart 
and  liver,  the  subject  alternately  facing  North  and  West. 
By  conveying  energy  directly  (Fig.  43)  or  indirectly  to  the 
viscera,  the  increased  visceral  tonicity  permits  better 
delimitation  of  the  viscera. 

When  the  subject  stands  in  the  magnetic  meridian  (page 
103)  supreme  tonicity  is  conferred  on  the  viscera.  This 
maneuver  is  equivalent  to  organismal  induction  from  cos- 
mical  energ>\ 

Visceral  demagnetization.  —  Demagnetization  is 
effected  when  one  subjects  an  object  to  a  series  of  cycles  of 
diminishing  intensity. 

For  local  demagnetization,  a  coil  of  wire  is  wound  around 
a  piece  of  soft  iron  (Fig.  44)  and  connection  established 
with  an  alternating  current. 

The  viscera  are  dominated  by  two  sets  of  fibers,  opposite 


104  TOPOGRAPHIC    PERCUSSION 

in  action,  and  for  convenience,  may  be  designated  as  vagus 
and  sympathetic  fibers.  The  vagus  fibers  maintain  the 
organs  in  a  state  of  contraction,  and  the  s\Tnpathetic  fibers 
maintain  a  state  of  dilatation. 

\Mien  both  sets  are  in  physiologic  tone,' the  viscera  are 
neither  contracted  nor  dilated,  but  in  a  condition  of  equi- 
poise. If  one  stimulates  the  vagus  fibers  at  the  7th  cer\'ical 
spine  (Fig.  23),  the  heart,  aorta,  stomach,  Hver  and  spleen 
contract. 


^ 


..■■szz> 


Fig.  44. — Apparatus  for  demagnetization;  removal  of  vagus  tone  (.vagus 
h>potonia). 

Stimulation  of  the  sympathetic  fibers  at  a  point  between 
the  3rd  and  4th  dorsal  spines  (page  81)  results  in  dilation 
of  the  foregoing  viscera.  The  foregoing  maneuvers  impart 
tone  to  the  vagus  or  sympathetic  fibers. 

^Magnetic  flux  appHed  to  the  regions  in  question  will 
achieve  like  results. 

Demagnetization  corresponds  to  the  removal  of  tone. 
If  one  applies  the  extremity  of  the  iron  rod  (Fig.  44)  to  the 
7th  cervical  spine  and  executes  demagnetization  for  several 


AUTOCHTHONOUS    ENERGY  105 

minutes,  the  tone  of  the  viscera  suppHed  by  the  vagus  is 
partially  annihilated,  and  the  action  of  the  sympathetic 
fibers  on  the  organs  becomes  dominant.  In  consequence 
of  the  foregoing,  percussion  will  show : 

1.  Dilatation  of  the  heart  and  aorta; 

2.  Enlargement  of  the  stomach,  liver  and  spleen; 

3.  Dilatation  of  the  intra-abdominal  veins. 
Visceral  attraction  and  repulsion  by  aid  of  positive 

or  negative  charges  is  a  fascinating  subject,  but  the  scope 
of  this  work  will  not  permit  of  its  discussion.  Those  inter- 
ested in  the  subject  will  find  a  summary  of  my  observations 
in  the  fifth  edition  of  Spondylotherapy. 

Here  it  is  shown  how  the  organs  are  maintained  in 
position  a  new  theory  for  splanchnoptosis,  and  the  pro- 
bable cause  of  traumatic  neuroses. 

Autochthonous  energy. — In  health  the  heart  and 
aorta  yield  an  energy  sufficiently  potent  when  conducted 
to  the  stomach  region  to  elicit  the  stomach  reflex.  By  aid 
of  the  electrodes  and  conducting  cord,  the  energy  from  the 
heart  or  aorta  is  transferred  to  the  stomach  region.  The 
electrode  for  demarcating  the  viscera  should  be  pointed 
at  the  tip  like  a  sharpened  pencil  (Fig.  19).  The  energy 
is  discharged  in  straight  lines  hence  the  pointed  electrode 
must  not  slant. 

With  the  stomach  region  electrode  fixed  by  the  patient, 
an  assistant  gradually  approaches  the  heart  border  while 
percussion  of  the  stomach  border  (previously  ascertained 
by  a  bar-magnet)  is  executed  by  the  physician.  The  moment 
the  border  of  the  heart  is  attained,  dubiess  of  the  stomach 
is  elicited. 

Both  borders  of  the  heart  may  thus  be  determined. 
The  method  is  absolutely  correct  if  properly  executed,  and 
has  been  repeatedly  corroborated  by  orthodiagraphy.    The 


106  TOPOGRAPHIC  PERCUSSION 

same  is  true  with  reference  to  topographic  percussion  of  the 
thoracic  aorta. 

Reference  to  Thymus  Percussion  will  be  made  later 
(page  1 06).  The  line  of  demarcation  between  the  liver  and 
heart  may  also  be  defined,  insomuch  as  the  former  organ 
in  health  yields  no  duling  energy.  It  is  possible  by  this 
method  to  determine  the  ventricular  line  of  demarcation 
after  the  following  manner.  The  left  ventricle  yields  a 
negative  energy,  and  the  right  ventricle  a  positive  energy. 

If  the  negative  pole  of  a  bar-magnet  is  held  in  front  of 
the  stomach  during  percussion,  the  transferred  negative 
energy  from  the  left  ventricle  will  only  fortify  the  energy 
from  the  magnet,  but  the  moment  any  part  of  the  right 
ventricle  is  attained,  the  positive  energy  from  this  ventricle 
neutralizes  the  negative  energy  of  the  magnet  and  no 
stomach  dulness  can  be  elicited. 

In  disease  the  syphilitic  energy  (page  133)  from  the  liver 
will  permit  a  definition  of  that  organ,  and  the  same  may 
be  said  of  the  spleen.  In  the  norm  the  kidneys  yield  a 
positive  duling  energy  and  for  this  reason  their  demarcation 
by  the  method  in  question  is  easy. 

Condensed  energy. — It  has  already  been  shown  (page 
70)  that  energy  is  appropriated  from  our  environment 
(physical  forces  of  nature) .  This  energy  is  condensed  in  our 
organisms  in  excess  of  our  momentary  demands.  When 
extraordinary  physical  or  mental  effort  is  necessary,  we 
draw  on  this  surplus  energy. 

By  aid  of  the  stomach  reflex,  it  can  actually  be  demon- 
strated that  the  spleen  and  appendix  act  as  energy 
condensers. 

Spleen. — This  is  practically  a  storage  organ  in  addition 
to  its  other  functions.  If  the  tips  of  the  fingers  discharging 
a  positive  energy  or  the  positive  pole  of  a  bar-magnet  be 


APPENDIX  1 07 

placed  in  apposition  with  the  spleen  for  one  or  more  min- 
utes, one  may  for  hours  conduct  energy  from  it  sufficient 
to  dull  the  stomach,  and  the  energy  thus  discharged  is  in- 
variably positive.  This  discharge  can  at  once  be  annihilated 
by  an  opposite  charge  to  the  spleen  (using  the  finger  tips 
of  the  other  hand  or  the  opposite  pole  of  a  bar-magnet) . 

If  the  spleen  is  charged  with  a  negative  energy,  the 
energy  duling  the  stomach  will  be  negative.  By  charging 
the  spleen  for  about  one  minute,  say  with  the  finger  tips  of 
either  hand,  one  may  delimit  it  in  its  entirety  by  the  method 
of  defining  the  heart  and  aorta  (page  105). 

The  spleen  evidently  supplies  tone  to  the  vagus  and 
all  the  viscera  innervated  by  this  nerve. 

Let  us  take  a  concrete  paradigm.  An  individual 
has  a  vagus  tone  (page  154)  of  13/25  of  an  Ohm.  A 
giant  magnet  is  permitted  to  discharge  its  positive 
energy  in  the  splenic  region  for  about  one  minute. 
Immediately,  there  is  an  increase  of  vagus  tone  up  to 
4  Ohms.  If  now  the  negative  pole  of  a  magnet  dis- 
charges its  energy  in  the  splenic  region,  vagus  tone  is 
reduced  to  13/25  of  an  Ohm  (its  original  tone). 

Appendix. — WTiat  has  been  said  of  the  spleen  applies 
with  equal  cogency  to  this  structure.  By  charging  the 
appendiceal  region  for  one  minute  with  the  linger  tips  of 
either  hand  or  with  a  bar-magnet,  the  energy  is  retained 
ior  several  hours  as  evidenced  by  the  conveyance  of  energy 
to  the  stomach  and  eliciting  the  stomach  reflex.  By  this 
method  one  may  as  a  rule,  locate  the  site  of  the  appendix. 
With  the  pointed  electrode  gradually  passed  around  the 
ileoceal  region  (the  other  electrode  near  the  stomach  region) 
the  moment  energy  is  conveyed  to  elicit  the  stomach  reflex, 
there  is  the  site  of  the  appendix.  We  shall  learn  later  that 
the  colon  bacillus  may  yield  a  duling  energy  and  this  may 
be  a  confusing  factor  in  diagnosis.    Error  may  be  obviated 


108  TOPOGRAPHIC    PERCUSSION 

however  by  the  fact  that  the  duUng  energ}'  is  either  positive 
or  negative  depending  on  the  pole  of  the  magnet  used  or 
whether  the  finger  tips  of  the  right  or  left  hand  were  em- 
ployed. If  the  duling  energ}^  from  the  charged  appendix 
were  positive,  negative  energy^  conveyed  to  the  appendix 
for  a  few  seconds  will  not  permit  the  conveyance  of  energ}' 
(neutralization  of  positive  charge)  hence  there  will  be  no 
stomach  reflex. 


Fig.  45. — Apparatus  for  short-circuiting  the  psychomotor  regions.  It  con- 
sists of  two  clamps  (for  attachment  to  the  hair)  united  by  insulated  copper  wire. 

If  the  loth  dorsal  spine  is  concussed,  the  energ}'  from  a 
charged  appendix  wiW  be  shifted  do\\'nward  3  cm.  (provided 
there  are  no  adhesions)  and  this  downward  luxation  of  the 
appendix  will  persist  for  15  seconds.  It  is  likely  that  the 
appendix  stores  energy  for  maintaining  the  tone  of  the 
stomach,  insomuch  as  the  dyspeptic  symptoms  associated 
with  appendicitis  may  be  caused  b}*  the  appendix  failing  to 
act  as  a  reservoir  for  energ}'.  In  appendicitis  one  cannot 
store  energ}'  by  the  method  cited.  In  appendectomized 
subjects  the  foregoing  phenomena  are  not  obtainable. 

Geodynamics. — The  geophysiologic  factor  in  modify- 
ing visceral  percussion  may  also  be  noted  with  blood-pressure. 


HYPERPIESIS  109 

The  latter  varies  slightly  in  different  positions  with  relation 
to  the  compass  points. 

If  the  psychomotor  regions  (page  52)  are  short  cir- 
cuited by  a  strip  of  metal  across  the  head  connecting  the 
regions  in  question,  there  is  no  energy  discharge  from  the 
hands  sufficient  to  evoke  the  stomach  reflex.  The  effect 
of  this  short  circuiting  on  the  pulse  is  immediate ;  on  palpa- 
tion it  becomes  small  or  is  inhibited  for  one  or  more  seconds. 
A  sphygmogram  is  characteristic  The  pulse  volume  is  at 
once  restored  when  the  metal  is  removed.  In  the  norm, 
within  a  minute  the  blood-pressure  (as  a  result  of  short 
circuiting)  is  reduced  from  8  to  20  mm. 

In  hypertension  (notably  the  psychogenic  forms,  often 
specified  as  hyperpiesis)  the  reduction  in  blood  pressure  by 
short  circuiting  may  be  as  high  as  30  mm.  In  a  patient 
seen  with  Dr.  J.  T.  Fisher  (Los  Angeles),  the  pressure 
within  5  minutes  fell  from  220  to  180  mm.  Respecting  the 
duration  of  this  reduction,  I  cannot  say,  insomuch  as  my 
observations  in  this  respect  have  been  too  limited.  Vide 
page  176. 


110  SEXUAL    POLARITY 


CH.\PTER  VII 

SEXUAL   POLARITY 

The  present  tendency  is  to  refer  all  phenomena  to  a 
sexual  basis  and  the  odd  and  even  numbers  are  regarded  as 
the  mathematical  sexes.  Anatomy  has  heretofore  been 
invoked  to  differentiate  the  sexes.  If  I  appeal  to  the 
electronic  theorj',  there  can  be  no  absolute  differentiation. 
Humans  are  mere  aggregations  of  electrons,  and  there 
must  be  transitional  forms  of  humans  just  as  there  are 
transitional  forms  of  metals  and  non-metals. 

It  has  been  suggested  by  Steenstrup,  that  sexual  char- 
acters are  present  in  every  part  of  the  body,  and  that  ever}' 
ceU  in  the  body  has  its  definite  sexual  significance.  The 
electrons  characterizing  masculinity  and  femininity  are  so 
grouped  that  definite  areas  in  a  woman  provide  a  sexual 
stimulus  for  the  male  and  definite  areas  of  the  latter  for 
the  female. 

The  law  of  sexual  attraction,  "that  every  male  t}pe  has 
its  female  counterpart  with  regard  to  sexual  affiinity" 
appears  to  me  to  be  based  on  the  definite  law  that,'  'Like 
poles  repel  and  unlike  attract."  Sexual  attraction  and 
repulsion  must  obey  this  law. 

Weininger^^,  referring  to  the  fertihzation  of  some  sea- 
weeds, speaks  of  the  lines  of  force  between  the  opposite 
poles  of  magnets  as  no  more  natural  than  that  which  irre- 
sistibly attracts  the  spermatozoon  and  the  egg-cell. 

In  the  attraction  between  the  inorganic  substances, 
strains  are  set  up  in  the  media  between  the  poles,  whereas 
in  the  living  matter  the  forces  are  confined  to  the  organisms. 


POLARITY    TYPES 


111 


When  the  spermatozoa  approach  the  egg-cells  they  over- 
come the  force  exercised  by  hght,  hence  the  chemotactic 
is  more  potent  than  the  phototactic  force. 

Sexual  adjustment  cannot  abrogate  the  laws  of  the 
universe.  The  adjustment  of  differences  in  potential  in  the 
sexual  sphere  are  as  inviolable  as  when  iron-sulphate  and 
caustic  potash  are  brought  together;  the  SO4  ions  leave  the 
iron  to  combine  with  the  potash. 


Figs.  46  and  47. — Illustrating  the  female  and  male  type  of  polarity.  Only 
the  finger  tips  must  approximate  the  psychomotor  area. 

Attention  has  already  been  directed  to  the  differences  of 
polarity  in  the  sexes.  We  must  first  make  clear  what  I  have 
differentiated  as  the  male  and  female  types  of  polarity. 

Two  methods  are  available  for  determining  the  latter. 
In  the  first  method  only  the  subject  can  be  employed;  in 
the  second  method  any  subject  may  be  used,  and  for  that 
reason  it  is  the  more  practical  of  the  two. 

First  method. — One  first  localizes  the  psychomotor  area 


112 


SEXUAL    POLARITY 


(Fig.  52).  If  the  subject  (female)  touches  the  left  motor 
AREA  with  the  tips  of  her  fingers  of  her  left  hand  (Figs.  46 
and  47)  the  stomach  reflex  ensues,  and  one  may  demonstrate 
dulness  of  her  stomach.  This  is  the  female  type  of  polarity. 
The  male  type  of  polarity  is  the  opposite  of  the  female 
type;  dulness  of  the  stomach  only  ensues  when  the  tips  of 
the  fingers  of  the  right  hand  are  placed  on  the  left  psy- 
chomotor AREA  (Fig.  47).  The  energy  evoking  the  dulness 
is  positive. 


Fig.  48. — Illustrating  the  method  of  eliciting  the  stomach  reflex  by  directing 
the  extended  fingers  in  the  direction  of  the  epigastrium. 


A  male  facing  a  patient  (male  or  female)  produces 
stomach  dulness  by  touching  the  left  psychomotor  region 
with  the  fingers  of  his  right  hand.  A  female  similarly 
located  with  reference  to  the  patient  (male  or  female)  can 
only  produce  like  dulness  by  touching  the  right  psychomotor 
region  with  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand. 

Second  method. — In  the  norm,  if  a  male  extends  the 
fingers  of  his  left  hand  directly  on  a  line  with  the  exposed 


POLARITY    TYPES  115 

epigastrium  of  another  individual  (male)  at  a  distance  of  one 
or  more  feet,  the  stomach  reflex  (as  ehcited  by  dulness) 
may  be  demonstrated  (Fig.  48).  This  dulness  is  main- 
tained only  during  the  time  the  fingers  are  extended.  The 
finger  energy  may  likewise  be  conveyed  by  a  conducting  cord. 
The  latter  dulness  is  only  evocable  by  the  female  when 
the  fingers  of  the  right  hand  are  extended.  These  types 
are  reversed  in  left  handed  individuals,  but  are  usually 
maintained  in  the  ambidextrous.  These  t>pes  are  not  de- 
monstrable in  either  sex  before  puberty,  and  are  usually 
absent  at  the  menopause  and  in  elderly  males.  No  polarity 
(by  these  methods)  is  demonstrable  in  certain  conditions 
(page  115). 

Energy  discharge  from  the  fingers  is  augmented  by 
thinking  profoundly.  The  psychologist  may  avail  himself 
of  this  fact  in  gauging  cerebration. 

The  male  and  female  types  of  polarity  are  explained 
as  follows:  In  the  male  the  aural  polarity  (page  79) 
on  the  right  side  of  the  body  is  positive  and  on  the  left 
•  side  negative.  This  aural  polarity  is  reversed  in  the  fe- 
male. The  stomach  in  the  male  is  in  the  zone  of  nega- 
tive, and  the  right  lower  border  of  the  liver  in  the  zone 
of  positive  polarity.  When  a  female  extends  her  right 
hand,  she  dulls  the  stomach  of  the  male  owing  to  the 
discharge  of  negative  energy;  her  left  hand  discharging 
positive  energy  is  neutralized  by  the  aural  zone  of 
negative  energy  and  no  stomach  dulness  ensues.  Her 
LEFT  hand  and  not  her  right  hand  for  a  like  reason 
would  elicit  the  liver  reflex  (page  77). 

If  the  subject  on  whom  the  stomach  and  liver 
reflexes  are  elicited  ,  is  a  female,  the  foregoing  is 
reversed. 

For  a  like  reason  the  polarity  of  a  cancer  (page  187)  is 
dependent  on  whether  the  stomach  reflex  is  elicited  in  a 
male  or  female.    In  the  former  it  is  positive  and  in  the  latter,. 


114  SEXUAL    POLARITY 

negative.  If  one  grounds  the  left  side  of  a  male  by  means 
of^a  conducting  cord,  the  grounding  of  the  negative  aural 
energy  no  longer  combats  the  energy  discharge  from  the 
left  hand  of  the  female,  and  the  stomach  dulls  when  either 
hand  is  extended. 

By  short  circuiting  the  psychomotor  regions  (page  109), 
aural  polarity  may  likewise  be  inhibited  and  the  polarity 
of  normal  or  pathological  energy^  is  alike  over  the  lower 
liver  bordier  or  stomach.  Color  has  an  important  bearing 
in  the  diagnosis  of  sexual  polarity.  Red  or  yellow  on 
any  part  of  the  body  reverses  polarity ;  converting  a  male 
type  into  a  female  t^q^e  of  polarity  and  vice  versa. 

Even  the  ingestion  of  yellow  fluids  (tea),  lemon  drops 
etc.,  will  reverse  the  normal  type  of  polarity  for  several 
hours.  While  the  fecal  coloring  matter  has  no  apparent 
effect  on  polarity  types  yet,  in  the  prediction  of  sex,  the 
previous  employment  of  a  purgative  is  indicated. 

The  luetic  (permanently)  and  the  patient  with  auto- 
intoxication (temporarily)  show  no  polarity.  Sodium 
bicarbonate  which  yields  in  the  blood  a  temporary  neutral 
energy  (page  41)  nullifies  the  polarity  temporarily.  Thus, 
a  female  with  a  normal  polarity  type  taking  one  drachm  of 
sodium  bicarbonate  cannot  dull  the  stomach  of  a  subject 
with  either  hand;  after  five  minutes  she  dulls  the  stomach 
with  either  hand  {bisexual  type  of  polarity)  and  after  a 
further  5  minutes  her  normal  type  of  polarity  is  restored. 

A  syphilitic  or  autotoxemic  subject  used  for  test  pur- 
poses appears  not  to  influence  the  polarity  of  the  electronic 
tests  in  disease,  and  may  therefore  be  employed. 

Polarity  anomalies  thus  far  observed  by  the  writer  are 
as  follows: 


POLARITY    TYPES  115 

A  polarity  Bi polarity  Reversed  Polariy 

Syphilis  Tuberculosis  (active).        Color  (page  114). 

Carcinoma.  Menstruation  (ist  day). 

Autointoxication.  Paranoia. 

Neutral  sexuality.  Drugs  (page  288). 

Drugs  (page  288).  Posture 

(Person    extending    fin- 
gers while  standinig  in 
the      magnetic       mer- 
dian). 
Bisexuality  (rare). 

The  female  type  of  polarity  characterizes  the  normal 
sexual  life.  At  the  menopause  this  type  disappears,  pro- 
vided all  sexual  feeling  has  been  lost.  In  two  instances 
where  the  ovaries  had  been  removed,  the  male  t\pe  of 
polarity  was  present,  but  the  latter  could  be  reversed  to  the 
female  type  when  ovarian  extract  was  administered. 

It  would  seem  that  the  sexual  apparatus  is  merely  a 
vehicle  for  the  elaboration  of  an  internal  secretion  which  by 
its  action  on  the  electrons  of  the  body  endows  them  with  a 
distinctive  polarity. 

There  are  typical  and  atypical  men  just  as  there  are 
typical  and  atypical  women,  and  humans  will  eventually 
be  subjected  to  a  biologico-physiological  differentiation  of 
positive  (+)  negative  ( — )  or  neutral  (O)  polarities.  Color 
as  I  conceive  it  represents  different  electrical  charges. 

In  the  case  of  a  woman  whose  ovaries  were  removed, 
her  male  t>pe  of  polarity  could  be  changed  to  the  female 
type  by  placing  a  strip  of  yellow  material  over  her  right 
psycho-motor  area. 

Magnetic  attraction  or  repulsion  is  preceded  by  in- 
duction. The  latter  refers  to  magnetization  or  electri- 
fication in  a  body  by  the  mere  pro.ximity  of  magnet- 
ized or  electrified  bodies.  The  induced  magnetization 
or  electrification  is  always  of  opposite  kind  to  that  of 
the  inducing  pole  or  body  on  the  side  nearest  the  latter, 
and  of  the  same  kind  on  the  farther  side. 


116  SEXUAL    POLARITY 

I  have  on  several  occasions  elicited  the  same  type  of 
polarity  in  husband  and  wife.  When  alone  each  pre- 
sented the  normal  type  of  polarity.  Together,  when 
the  attraction  of  the  wife  was  greater  than  that  of  the 
husband,  the  mere  propinquity  of  the  latter,  caused  in 
the  wife  a  reversal  of  polarity,  i.  e.,  a  male  type  of  polar- 
ity by  induction.  Similar  observations  have  been  made 
on  men  who  demonstrated  a  preponderance  of  affec- 
tion for  their  wives. 

Is  affection  only  a  question  of  polarity?  Can  the 
sex  problem  be  solved  by  the  foregoing  observations? 

Can  we  predict  sex  by  the  type  of  polarity  shown 
by  the  pregnant  woman?  These  are  the  problems  which 
we  must  investigate.  They  await  demonstration  by 
repeated  observations. 

OcuLO-GASTRic  REFLEX. — This  differs  in  the  sexes. 
Looking  through  a  red  medium,  stomach  dulness  in  the 
male  is  only  elicited  when  the  right  eye  is  thus  employed, 
whereas  in  the  female  gazing  through  the  red,  the  left  eye 
elicits  dulness. 

Localization  of  the  ovaries. — Draw  an  imaginary 
transverse  line  from  the  anterior  superior  spine  of  the  ilium  to 
the  linea  alba.  Midway  between  this  hne  on  both  sides  an 
area  (approximately  2  inches  in  circumference)  is  found  which 
discharges  negative  energy.  This  area  changes  when  the 
ovary  is  dislocated.  During  menstruation  the  ovaries 
discharge  a  neutral  duling  energy  and  the  same  ovarian 
reaction  is  demonstrable  in  hysteria  during  the  intermen- 
strual period. 

The  total  energy  contained  in  matter  depends  on  the 
extent  to  which  it  can  be  changed.  Here  change  predicates 
functional  capacity  and  if  an  ovary  discharges  no  energy, 
its  incapacity  may  be  functional  or  due  to  disease. 

By  our  method  of  measuring  energy  (page  44),  the 
means   are   at   our   command   of   determining   the   sexual 


HOMOSEXUALITY  117 

activity  of  the  average  female.  Just  as  we  can  determine 
male  sterility  (page  ii8),  a  like  condition  may  be  deter- 
mined in  women.  The  writer  here  refers  to  ovarian  in- 
fertility which  has  heretofore  been  accepted  in  a  vague 
way  in  explanation  of  inexphcable  sterilities. 

The  ovarian  anomaly  may  be  structural  or  functional. 
In  either  event,  there  is  no  ovarian  energy  discharge.  In 
some  instances  stimulation  of  the  3rd  lumbar  spine  will 
cause  an  ovarian  discharge  if  absent,  or  will  increase  it,  if 
present. 

Homosexuality. — Is  this  condition  (sexual  inclination 
toward  members  of  the  same  sex)  a  mere  question  of  polarity? 
My  observations  suggest  the  latter  viewpoint.  One  may 
at  once  recognize  homosexualists  (due  caution  being  exer- 
cised as  cited  on  page  114)  by  demonstrating  the  female 
type  of  polarity  in  so-called  males  and  the  male  t>pe  of 
polarity,  in  so-called  females. 

Sexual  differentiation  is  never  absolute.  There  is  a 
permanent  bisexual  condition,  however  vestigial  and  rudi- 
mentary. If  I  suggest  to  an  individual  in  an  h>pnotic 
condition  that  he  is  a  woman  and  endowed  with  some  of 
her  attributes,  I  can  reverse  his  polarity  to  that  of  the 
female.  I  have  frequently  reversed  this  polarity  by  sug- 
gestion even  in  the  non-hypnotic  state. 

Male  sexual  power. — If  one  end  of  an  insulated  con- 
ducting cord  is  placed  at  the  meatus  of  the  penis,  and  the 
other  end  in  proximity  to  the  stomach,  the  latter  becomes 
dull  on  percussion  and  there  is  a  retraction  of  the  organ  in 
proportion  to  the  energy  discharged  from  the  penis. 

In  individuals  with  strong  sexual  power  this  retraction 
may  amount  to  2  or  3  cm.  In  cases  of  extreme  impotency 
the  energ>^  discharged  is  not  sufhcient  to  elicit  the  stomach 
reflex.    The  following  observations  with  the  biod\'namome- 


118  SEXUAL    POLARITY 

ter  (page  44)  show  the  energy  discharge  from  the  meatus 
in  males : 

1.  Puissant 16/25  of  an  Ohm 

2.  Moderately  vigorous 12/25      "       " 

3.  Very  moderate 8/25      "       " 

4.  Slightly  impotent 4/25      "       " 

5.  Impotent 1/25      "       " 

6.  Impotent no  stomach  reflex. 

This  method  of  measurement  is  of  extraordinary  value 

in  so-called  psychical  impotency,  insomuch  as  the  psycho- 
genic nature  of  the  affection  can  be  demonstrated  (no 
marked  reduction  in  energy  discharge). 

Again,  one  is  in  a  position  to  gauge  the  results  of  treat- 
ment. From  both  testicles,  there  is  in  the  norm  a  dis- 
charge of  negative  energy.  If  one  of  the  testicles  is  made 
functionless  in  consequence  of  previous  disease  it  yields 
no  energy.  The  absence  of  any  energy  discharge  would 
show  the  futility  of  an  operation  for  azoospermia  consecu- 
tive to  an  epididymitis. 

In  X-RAY  STERILITY,  the  tcsticlcs  yield  no  discharge  of 
energ\\  In  several  syphilitics  contemplating  matrimony, 
there  was  likewise  no  energy  discharge  from  the  testes, 
despite  the  fact  that  no  previous  disease  of  these  structures 
existed. 

A  like  condition  was  demonstrable  in  married  syphihtics 
without  progeny. 

Menstruation. — During  the  entire  menstrual  period, 
a  very  powerful  positive  duling  energy  may  be  obtained 
from  the  lower  abdomen  strictly  confined  to  the  uterine 
region.  Menstrual  energy  does  not  traverse  a  non-con- 
ductor (vide  cancer). 

Other  interesting  reactions  strictly  limited  only  to  the 
first  day  of  menstruation  are  the  following:  energy  suffi- 
cient to  produce  stomach  dulness  is  obtained  from  extended 


•  PREGNANCY  1 1  f> 

fingers  of  both  hands  (male  and  female  tynpes  of  polarity) ; 
from  the  right  psychomotor  region,  a  neutral  duling  energy 
(positive  duling  energy  in  the  intermenstrual  period,  and 
after  the  first  day  of  menstruation)  and  from  the  left  psy- 
chomotor region,  a  duling  energy'  which  is  both  positive 
and  negative  (negative  non-duling  energ}'  in  the  norm). 

This  reaction  on  the  first  day  of  menstruation  corre- 
sponds to  that  elicited  in  paranoia  (q.  v.).  The  latter  fact 
emphasizes  the  important  influence  of  menstruation  on 
mentality.  The  normal  woman  is  really  a  psychoneurotic 
during  menstruation  and  menstrual  psychoses  are  not 
uncommon,  Dubois i^,  observes  that  there  are  women 
who  could  be  shut  up  every  month  in  an  insane  asylum. 

Menstrual  blood  yields  a  positive  duling  energy, 
whereas  normal  blood  (male  or  female),  elicits  a  neutral 
duling  energy  when  removed  from  the  body. 

A  MALE  HAIR  yields  a  positive  and  a  female  hair,  a 
negative  duling  energy. 

Pregnancy. — Strictly  limited  to  the  gravid  uterus,  a 
negative  duling  energy  is  obtainable.  The  entire  area  of 
the  enlarged  uterus  can  be  defined  and  its  topography 
established  thus  excluding  ectopic  gestation. 

In  one  case  of  pregnancy  in  which  the  clinical  diagnosis 
was  positive  no  reaction  was  obtainable.  It  was  assumed 
that  twins  were  present  of  opposite  sex,  and  when  a  wire 
was  attached  to  one  side  of  the  uterine  region  and  grounded, 
the  negative  duling  energy  was  elicited.  Female  polarity 
was  present  and  a  girl  was  predicted.  I  am  awaiting  the 
outcome  of  this  case  examined  at  the  office  of  Dr.  James 
Moran  of  New  York.* 

*This  palient  gave  birlh  lo  only  one  child — a  girl.  Two  weeks  atler  my  examina- 
tion she  suffered  from  uremic  convulsions.  I  am  unable  to  associate  in  theory 
any  association  between  my  reaction  and  the  uremic  convulsions. 


120  SEXUAL    POLARITY 

D LA. GNOSIS  or  THE  SEX  OF  THE  FETUS. — Reference  has 
already  been  made  to  the  methods  of  determining  sexual 
polarity  (page  iii).  The  second  is  the  better  of  the  two 
methods.  In  addition  to  the  precautions  cited  on  page  114, 
one  must  remember  that  a  male  in  immediate  proximity 
to  the  female  extending  her  hand  alw  reverse  her  polarity. 
In  the  prediction  of  sex,  the  pregnant  woman  extends  the 
fingers  of  first  one  and  then  the  other  hand  in  the  direction 
of  the  exposed  epigastrium  of  another  individual  on  whom 
percussion  is  executed.  My  investigations  of  this  method 
are  limited  and  permit  me  to  formulate  only  tentative 
conclusions : 

1.  Prior  to  the  4th  month,  the  pregnant  woman  shows 
no  polarity,  z.  e.,  extension  of  either  the  right  or  the  left 
hand  fails  to  elicit  dulness  of  the  stomach. 

2.  After  the  4th  month,  if  the  extended  fingers  of  the 
right  hand  evoke  stomach-dulness  (normal  polarity)  a 
FEMLALE  fetus  may  be  diagnosticated. 

3.  If  after  the  same  period  only  the  extended  fingers 
of  the  left  hand  cause  stomach-dulness,  a  male  issue  may 
be  predicted. 

4.  For  a  variable  period  after  confinement,  no  polarity 
can  be  demonstrated  by  the  foregoing  method.  The  follow- 
ing incomplete  record  has  been  made  by  the  author : 


SEX    PREDICTION 


121 


DATE 

DURATION    OF 
PREGNANCY 

PLACE 

POLARITY 

PREDICTION  RESULT 

Oct.  9, 

1913 
Mrs.  T. 

6  months 

Kansas  City 
(Dr.  Craig) 

Female 

Female 

Female 

Oct.  9, 

1913 
Mrs.  C. 

6  months 

Kansas  City 
(Dr.  Craig) 

Male 

Male 

Male 

Oct.  9, 

1913 
Mrs.  V. 

3  months 

Kansas  City 

No 
polarity  | 

Oct.  20, 

1913 
Mrs.  L. 

7  months 

Patient  yields 
electronic  test  for 
syphilis 

San  Francisco 
(Dr.  G.) 

No. 

polarity 

Oct.  17, 

1913 
Mrs.  E. 

9  months 

San  Francisco 
(Patient  of  Dr. 
Koerber) 

Male 

Male 

Male 

Oct.  20, 

1913 
Mrs.  G. 

9  months 

San  Francisco 
Mt.   Zion   Hos- 
pital 

Female 

Female 

Female 

Nov.   7, 

1913 
Mrs.   J. 

9  months 

San  Francisco 
City  &  County 
Hospital 

Female 

Female 

Female 

Nov.  7, 

1913 
Mrs.  S. 

9  months 

San  Francisco 
City  &  County 
Hospital 

Male 

Male 

Male 

Jan.    6, 
1914 

8  months 

San  Francisco 
(Dr.  A.) 

Female 

Female 

Female 

Jan.  12, 
1914 

7  months 

San  Francisco 
(Dr.  A.) 

Male 

Male 

Male 

Since  the  foregoing  was  consummated  only  a  few  addi- 
tional records  have  been  made.  Recently  in  New  York,  a 
few  predictions  were  made  concerning  which  Dr.  Valdemar 
Sillo,  writes  as  follows: 

"The  pregnant  cases  which  you  examined  in  Dr.  Moran's 


122  SEXUAL    POLARITY 

office  have  all  confirmed  your  prognosis  as  to  the  sex  of  the 
child,  and  I  have  personally  succeeded  in  three  more  cases." 

Several  mistakes  have  been  made  by  the  writer  in 
prognostication  OTsang  no  doubt  to  failure  in  recognizing 
the  liable  sources  of  error  (page  114). 

Productiox  of  sex.- — The  law  governing  the  production 
of  sex  has  been  the  subject  of  much  speculation.  Hippo- 
crates, beheved  that  the  right  ovary  produced  boys  and 
the  left  ovary,  girls.  In  accordance  with  the  foregoing, 
women  who  desired  male  oft'spring  should  during  coitus  lie 
on  the  right  side,  and  vice  versa.  The  question  of  sex  is 
dictated  by  two  theories;  the  one  supposing  that  sex  is 
determined  before  impregnation;  the  other,  that  the  em- 
br\-o  is  possessed  of  the  elements  of  both  sexes  until  either 
one  acquires  a  dominant  influence  in  consequence  of  factors 
present  during  early  pregnancy.  The  latter  theory  has 
been  evoh'ed  from  a  study  of  lower  animals  and  plants,  and 
is  supported  by  the  fact  that,  the  elements  of  both  sexes  in 
the  human  embr>'o,  are  apparently  present  in  equal  force 
at  the  commencement  of  embr}^onal  life. 

Minot's  theory  concerning  the  polar  bodies  sup- 
poses that,  the  ordinary'  cell  is  hermaphroditic,  and  that, 
maturation  produces  a  unisexual  germ-cell  by  a  divis- 
ion of  the  mother-cell  into  its  sexual  constitutents 
(genoblasts).  The  male  element  is  removed  with  the 
polar  globules  leaving  the  mature  egg  of  a  female. 

jMere  conjecture  sustained  b}"  numerous  investigations 
on  plants,  prompts  the  suggestion  that,  yellow  over  the 
right  psychomotor  region  (which  reverses  polarity  from  the 
female  to  the  male  t}pe) ,  soon  after  conception  until  the  4th 
month,  may  eventuate  in  a  male  issue. 

The  citation  of  a  few  cases  whereby  a  successful 
result  was  thus  attained,  means  little. 


SEX    PRODUCTION  12o 

Dr.  F.  M.  Planck,  reports  as  follows: 

"When  you  examined  the  patient  in  my  City  {Vide, 
page  i2i)  Mrs.  V.  Oct.  9,  1913,  the  polarity  was  neutral. 
She  expressed  a  desire  for  a  girl  and  you  advised  her  to 
wear  yellow  coloring  material  over  the  left  psychomotor 
region.  She  says  she  has  one  of  the  finest  girls  in  the 
country." 

When  the  polarity  is  reversed  by  yellow,  there  is  also 
an  increased  energy  discharge.  Thus,  when  this  color  is 
placed  on  the  head  (psychomotor  region)  of  a  female, 
the  energy  discharge  from  the  right  finger  tips  was  4/25 
of  an  Ohm;  from  the  left  finger  tips,  24/25  of  an  Ohm. 


124  BIODYXAMGNOSIS    OF    SPECIFIC    INFECTIONS 


CIL\PTER  VIII 

BIODYXAMGNOSIS    OF    SPECIFIC   INFECTIONS 
ANT)    CONSTITUTIONAL   DISEASES.* 

XoRiLAL  AND  PATHOLOGICAL  ENERGY. — In  electronic 
diagnosis,  these  forms  of  energ}-  may  be  differentiated  as 
follows : 

1.  A  few  whiffs  of  cJioIofarm  will  at  once  dissipate 
normal  energ}-,  /.  c,  it  is  insufficient  in  potential  to  evoke 
the  stomach  reflex  whereas  no  amount  of  chloroform  appears 
to  deprive  abnormal  energ}*  of  eliciting  the  same  reflex. 
Even  under  complete  anesthesia  the  energ\-  discharged 
from  neoplasms  persists. 

2.  To  convey  sufficient  normal  energ>'  to  elicit  the 
stomach  reflex,  the  tip  of  the  cord  or  electrode  must  be  in 
contact  with  the  part  supplying  the  energ}'.  ]\Iorbid 
energy  however,  ma\-  still  be  conducted  even  though  the 
electrode  is  more  than  one  inch  distant  from  the  source  of 
energ>'-supply. 

3.  \Mien  the  stomach  is  the  object  of  investigation 
another  subject  should  be  selected  for  the  elicitation  of  the 
stomach  reflex. 

4.  Pathological  energ}'  traverses  glass  or  other  non- 
conductor (rubber  etc.);  normal  energ\'  does  not.  The  non- 
conductor may  be  interposed  between  the  source  of  energy' 
and  the  electrode  or  even  better,  the  stomach  electrode 
(pointed)  passes  through  a  cylinder  of  glass  like  the  closed 

*\Mien  (C)  follows  the  caption  of  an  infectious  disease  it  signifies  that,  the 
reaction  was  obtained  from  cultures  of  the  pathogenic  germs. 


INFECTIOUS    DISEASES  125 

end  of  a  test  tube  or  a  rubber  nipple  (Vide  further  applica- 
tion of  this  method  on  pages  6i  and  192). 

All  rods  irrespective  of  material  ha\'E  polarity 

(page  228)  AND  MODIFY  POLARITY  WHEN  EMPLOYED  AS 
PROXIMAL  BUT  NOT  AS  DISTAL  ELECTRODES  FOR  RECEIVING 
ENERGY. 

All  POLARITIES  UNLESS  OTHERWISE  SPECIFIED  REFER 
TO   THE   STOMACH   REFLEX  AS   ELICITED   IN  A   MALE   SUBJECT 

FACING  WEST  (pages  59,  103). 

When  use  is  made  of  the  biod^namometer  (page  44), 
pathological  energ>^  traverses  a  non-conductor  to  the  point 
of  its  energy  value  but  not  beyond.    At  the  vibrodyna- 

MOMETRIC  index,  PATHOLOGICAL  ENERGY  WILL  NOT  TRA- 
VERSE A  NON-CONDUCTOR.     At  itS  WAVEMETRIC  INDEX  (page 

281)  however,  the  energy  in  question  will  traverse  a  non- 
conductor. 

Typhoid  fever. — Neutral  duling  energy  evocable  from 
the  spleen,  ileocecal  region  and  blood  vessels.  The  reaction 
from  the  spleen  may  be  present  for  many  years  after 
recovery  from  the  primary  attack,  and  I  have  never  failed 
to  elicit  the  reaction  in  an  individual  who  has  had  the  disease. 

When  the  spleen  yields  a  reaction  it  may  be  defined 
topographically  by  the  electronic  method  (page  105). 

Paratyphoid. — Positive  duling  energ\'  from  spleen, 
ileocecal  region  and  blood  vessels. 

Vaccinia. — (cow  pox). — The  preponderance  of  evi- 
dence favors  the  opinion  that  cow  pox  is  variola  modified 
by  transmission  whereas  the  French,  believe  in  the  duality 
of  variola  and  cow  pox. 

The  prevailing  polemic  on  this  subject  could  possibly 
be  solved  by  noting  whether  the  reaction  in  variola  corre- 
sponds to  the  vaccine  reaction,  z^is.,  a  neutral  duling  energy-. 

Vaccine  from  animal  lymph  if  contaminated,  fails  to 


126  BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    SPECIFIC    INFECTIONS 

yield  the  foregoing  reaction  (which  is  obtainable  through 
white  but  not  through  yellow  glass). 

Scarlet  fever. — A  positive  duling  energy,  i.  e.,  stomach 
dulness  persisting  with  the  positive  and  dissipated  by  the 
negative  pole  of  a  bar-magnet.  Obtainable  when  pointed 
electrode  is  held  within  either  naris.  No  reaction  from  the 
exanthem. 

Pertussis. — A  neutral  duling  energ}^  i.  e.,  stomach 
dulness  which  is  dissipated  by  both  poles  of  a  bar-magnet. 
Obtainable  from  the  skin  over  the  larynx,  trachea  and 
bronchus.  Over  the  latter,  hold  the  electrode  receiving 
the  energ}^  a  distance  of  one  inch  to  avoid  normal  heart 
energy. 

By  aid  of  this  reaction  it  is  important  from  an  academic 
vie^\point  to  be  able  to  localize  the  debatable  site  of  in- 
fection in  this  disease. 

In  this  disease,  thymus  enlargement  (page  159)  may  be 
determined  by  an  area  of  dulness  located  at  or  on  either 
side  of  the  manubrium  sterni.  This  dull  area  was  errone- 
ously interpreted  clseu^licre  as  a  dilated  aorta.  The  author's 
treatment  of  pertussis  (concussion  of  the  7  th  cervical 
spine)  will  also  reduce  an  enlarged  thymus. 

Ikflxjenza. — A  neutral  duling  energy  from  the  nostrils, 
and  when  infection  is  generaHzed,  the  same  energy  from 
the  blood  vessels. 

The  SPUTA  in  influenza  will  yield  a  like  reaction. 

Meningococcic  imfection  (c)  . — A  duling  energy  which 
is  positive  and  negative,  i.  e.,  stomach  dulness  persists  with 
the  positive  and  negative  poles  of  a  bar-magnet.  The 
reaction  clinically  is  obtainable  from  the  site  of  infection. 

Pneumonia  (pneumococcal  infection). — A  positive 
duling  energy  obtainable  from  the  site  of  the  lesions. 

Diphtheria. — A  duling  energy  which  is  positive  and 


PUS 


127 


negative,  i.  e.,  stomach  dulness  is  not  dissipated  by  either 
pole  of  a  bar-magnet.  Reaction  obtainable  about  one  inch 
away  from  the  angle  of  the  jaw  to  exclude  normal  energy 
from  the  blood  vessels.  This  precaution  is  unnecessar)-  if 
the  energy  is  conducted  through  glass  (Fig.  49). 

Erysipelas  (c). — Negative  duling  energy  from  the  site 
of  the  infection. 

Streptococcic  ineection  (pus). — Negative  duling 
energy  from  the  suppuration  focus. 


Fig.  49. — Illustrating  the  conduction  of  energy  through  glass  (lower  end  of  a 
test-tube).  Owing  to  the  influence  of  rods  on  polarity  (p.  228),  rubber  or  a  glass 
slide  is  preferable. 


128  BIODYNAMGNOSIS    OF    SPECIFIC    INFECTIONS 

Polyarthritis. — Positive  duling  energy  from  implicated 
joints. 

Poliomyelitis  (acute  and  sporadic). — Negative  duling 
energy  from  the  spine.  (In  the  norm,  the  7th  cervical  spine 
yields  a  neutral  duling  energy,  and  the  ist  lumbar  spine,  a 
negative  duling  energ>0-  The  reaction  in  poliomyelitis 
persists  even  after  recovery. 

Malaria.- — A  positive  duling  energ>^  from  the  spleen 
which  persists  for  years  after  recovery.  In  practically  every 
subject  who  has  once  had  the  disease,  a  paroxysm  as  shown 
^/^rW/ere  may  be  precipitated   (page  132). 

Anthrax  (c). — Negative  duling  energy. 

Actinomycosis  (c)*  Neutral  non-duling  energy  (page 
43),  i.  e.,  energy  not  sufhcient  to  dull  stomach  but  of 
sufficient  potency  to  annihilate  the  dulness  which  would 
otherwise  be  evoked,  when  either  the  positive  or  negative 
pole  of  a  bar-magnet  is  held  in  proximity  to  the  stomach. 

Tetanus  (c)*  Neutral  duUng  energy. 

Glanders  (c)*. — Duling  negative  energy. 

Hydrophobia*. — Positive  duling  energy. 

Gonococcic  ineection. — A  duling  energy  which  is 
positive  and  negative  and  is  obtainable  from  site  of  infection 
(urethra,  joints  etc.).  In  women,  the  material  may  be 
obtained  directly  from  the  infection  nidus  placed  on  a  cover 
glass  and  the  electronic  reaction  made  directly  from  the  pus. 
Smears  may  be  taken  from  the  infection  nidus;  urethra 
(most  frequently)  cervdx  and  vulvo-vaginal  glands. 

Syphilis. — The  electronic  reaction  in  this  disease  is 
absolutely  pathognomonic  provided  due  care  is  exercised. 

In  hundreds  of  patients  thus  far  examined,  this  reaction 
was  positive  despite  the  fact  that  in  many  cases  the  Was- 

*Cultures  and  specimens  were  placed  at  my  disposal  in  the  laboratory  of  the 
Veterinary  Department,  University  of  Pennsylvania. 


SYPHILIS  129 

sermann,  Noguchi-luetin  and  other  reactions  were  nega- 
tive. 

Unlike  conventional  tests  in  this  disease,  the  electronic 
test  appears  to  have  no  limitations. 

Thus  in  the  Noguchi-luetin  reaction,  the  test  is  not 
appKcable  in  the  primary  and  secondary  stage;  the  chief 
response  is  in  the  treated  and  late  cases. 

The  Wassermann  is  not  absolutely  specific  for  syphil- 
lis  insomuch  as  it  is  not  dependent  on  syphilitic  anti- 
bodies in  the  blood,  but  upon  admission  to  the  latter  of 
abnormal  products  from  morbid  tissues. 

Again,  it  has  been  found  positive  in  scarlatina,  ap- 
pendicitis,  cancer,   typhoid,   sepsis,  phthisis,   diabetes 
and  other  diseases.     Syphilographers  concede  that  50 
per  cent,  of  all  serological  tests  are  valueless. 

"A  negative  Wassermann  is  not  sufficient  evidence 
of  the  cure  or  absence  of  syphilis  and  a  positive  Wasser- 
mann, unsupported  by  cHnical  evidence,  is  not  sufficient 
evidence  of  the  presence  of  syphilis"  (Keyes). 

"Errors  in  the  diagnosis  of  specific  diseases  of  the 
nervous  system  were  no  greater  in  the  pre- Wassermann 
days  than  at  the  present  time"  (Weisenburg). 

The  electronic  reaction  is  obtainable  in  every  case  of 
syphilis  notwithstanding  the  use  of  Salvarsan,  Neosalvarsan, 
Mercury,  Potassium  iodid  and  various  organic  arsenic  com- 
pounds. In  only  5  PATIENTS  AMONG  MANY  HUNDREDS 
EXAMINED,  NO  ELECTRONIC  REACTION  WAS  PRESENT.  IT  IS 
INTERESTING  TO  OBSERVE  THAT,  IN  THESE  PATIENTS  (aLL 
physicians)  ANTISYPHILITIC  MEDICATION  WAS  EXECUTED  AT 
THE  TIME  OF  THE  PRIMARY  LESION  AND  MAINTAINED,  FOR 
PERIODS  VARYING  FROM  I  TO  5  YEARS. 

The  electronic  reaction  is  obtainable  at  the  time  of  the 
PRIMARY  INOCULATION  which  assures  me  that  even  at  this 
time  the  disease  is  no  longer  local  but  constitutional. 


130  BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    SPECIFIC    IXFECTIOXS 

The  Wassermann  is  not  in  evidence  until  about  the 
2oth  day  after  the  appearance  of  the  chancre.     It  is 
only  in  the  secondary  and  latent  period  of  s}-philis  that 
the  Wassermann  yields  the  surest  and  constant  results. 
The  specificity  of  the  primary  lesion  is  only  determinable 
by  demonstration    of    the    treponema  with    the   ultra- 
microscope. 
This  is  a  statement  more  radical  than  is  usually  ad- 
vanced.   In  the  preroseolar  period,  the  large  lymph  spaces 
of  the  central  nervous  system  are  the  site  of  specific  in- 
fection in  association  with  characteristic   changes  in  the 
spinal  fluid  (Wechseknann) . 

Sjphilologists  concede  from  the  spinal  findings  that  the 
ner\-ous  system  is  affected  in  secondary  syphilis  (63%,  Wile 
and  Stokes).  Some  assume  that,  at  the  outset  of  the  disease 
before  generahzation  of  the  spirochetes,  excision  of  the 
chancre  will  arrest  the  disease.  With  this  positive  assur- 
ance of  an  early  diagnosis  at  our  command,  we  can  anni- 
hilate the  disease  by  early  treatment  as  sustained  in  the 
previous  comment.  Patients  who  have  been  treated  most 
assiduously  for  years  atter  appearance  of  the  secondaries 
always  give  the  electronic  reaction  and  one  is  justified 
(in  such  instances  of  prorogated  therapy)  in  agreeing  with 
Ricord — "Once  s}-philis  always  s}-phiHs." 

The  electronic  reaction  will  also  show  the  exact  site  of 
the  primary  lesion.  With  a  pointed  electrode  the  patient 
or  an  assistant  passes  slowly  over  the  penis  or  other  sus- 
pected area,  at  a  distance  of  about  one-half  inch.  The  very 
moment  the  site  of  the  lesion  is  attained,  there  is  an  imme- 
diate stomach  dulness.  The  reaction  is  often  obtained 
some  distance  from  the  point  of  inoculation,  but  the  most 
intense  reaction  (determinable  roughly  by  the  distance  of 
the  pointed  electrode  from  the  site  of  the  lesion)  is  always 
at  the  point  of  inoculation. 


SYPHILIS  131 

The  T.  Pallidum,  as  is  known,  may  be  obtained  from 
the  healthy  skin  around  the  chancre  or  from  the  gland 
which  drains  it,  even  though  absent  from  the  sore 
scrapings. 

The  Bacillus  Smegmatis  yields  a  duling  neutral  energy 
like  syphilis  hence,  the  genitalia  must  be  thoroughly  cleansed 
before  making  the  test.  Cleansing  of  the  genitalia  must  be 
supplemented  by  urethral  irrigation. 

The  energy  of  the  smegma  bacillus  does  not  traverse 
a  non-conductor  hence  the  use  of  the  latter  when  seeking 
the  site  of  primary  infection.  With  a  rubber  nipple  on  the 
pointed  electrode,  direct  contact  with  the  tissues  is  per- 
missible insomuch  as  normal  energy  from  the  vessels, 
smegma  etc.,  will  not  traverse  a  non-conductor. 

I  recall  an  examination  made  in  Chicago,  in  conjunc- 
tion with  Dr.  G.  Frank  Lydston,  the  eminent  syphilolo- 
gist.  The  subject  was  a  physician.  The  lesion  was 
correctly  located  on  one  of  the  fingers.  In  my  classes, 
I  do  not  recall  having  made  a  single  mistake  in  thus 
locating  the  site  of  the  primary  lesion.  Ascertaining 
the  site  of  the  latter,  is  of  value  as  corroborative  evi- 
dence, and  as  a  possible  aid  in  the  successful  treatment 
of  syphilis. 

Reference  has  been  made  to  the  fact  that,  notwithstand- 
ing the  use  of  mercury,  the  electronic  reaction  is  neverthe- 
less present.  The  exception  to  the  foregoing  is  the  follow- 
ing: If  the  site  of  the  primary  inoculation  is  submitted  to 
several  mercurial  inunctions,  the  electronic  reaction  cannot 
be  obtained  for  several  weeks. 

In  submitting  the  foregoing  fact  to  an  eminent 
syphilologist,  he  assured  me  that  a  negative  Wassermann 
was  most  raj)idly  achieved  by  using  a  salve  of  neo- 
salvarsan  at  the  point  of  primary  inoculation. 

Painting  the  area  of  local  infection  and  the  lymphatic 
glands    (inguinal)    draining    the    site    with    safranin 


132  BIODYNAMGNOSIS    OF    SPECIFIC    INFECTIONS 

(pages  2IO  and  212)  causes  the  general  electronic  reaction 
of  syphilis  to  disappear  but  the  reaction  at  the  site  of 
infection  persists.  The  writer  is  disposed  to  believe 
from  his  clinical  results  that  the  drug  employed  after 
this  manner  has  a  curative  action  in  syphilis. 

Even  when  mercurial  inunctions  at  the  site  of  in- 
fection failed  to  cause  a  disappearance  of  the  reaction 
in  paralytic  dementia  (q.  v.),  it  was  effected  by  safranin. 

The  discovery  of  the  Spirocheta  Pallida  was  an  important 
but  not  a  final  event  in  luetic  pathogeny.  Numerous  obser- 
vations notably  those  of  LoefBer  and  Frosch,  show  that 
invisible  microbes  must  exist  which  evade  demonstration 
by  culture  and  are  not  demonstrable  by  staining  even  with 
the  ultra-microscope. 

Nor  must  we  forget  sporulation  as  a  factor  in  the 
pathogeny  of  syphilis.  A  spore  is  the  most  resisting  object 
of  the  organic  world  to  all  chemical  and  physical  agents. 
The  sexual  cycle  of  a  spirochete  as  far  as  can  be  demon- 
strated begins  as  a  sporozoite.  Whether  the  hypothesis  of 
toxins,  invisible  microbes  or  spores  is  advocated,  I  am  firmly 
convinced  that,  the  periodic  exacerbations  of  syphilitic 
manifestations  are  due  to  the  invasion  of  the  organism 
from  the  primary  site  of  inoculation,  and  that  the  use  of 
mercurial  inunctions  or  safranin,  at  the  area  of  inoculation 
is  a  most  important  factor  in  syphilotherapy. 

If  the  potentiality  of  the  liver  energy  in  syphilis  is 
23/25  of  an  Ohm,  and  the  site  of  the  primary  inocula- 
tion is  pinched  for  about  a  minute,  and  the  liver  energy 
again  determined,  the  latter  will  have  risen  to  7^  Ohms. 

Let  us  seek  malaria  as  an  analogy.  Here  the  spleen  has 
long  been  recognized  as  the  habitat  of  the  Plasmodium 
malariae.  Indeed  Laveran,  avers  that  the  plasmodium  here 
finds  protection  from  destruction  in  the  circulation. 

The  author  has  shown  elsewhere  that  one  can  precipitate 


SYPHILIS  133 

a  paroxysm  of  malaria  (even  in  supposititious  cases  of  cure) 
by  exciting  contraction  of  the  spleen.  Italian  observers, 
claim  that  quininization  is  unable  to  free  the  system  com- 
pletely of  the  malarial  parasites,  and  as  long  as  the  spleen 
is  enlarged,  the  disease  cannot  be  regarded  as  cured. 

The  electronic  reaction  for  s}^hilis  (congenital  and 
acquired),  is  as  follows: 

Energy  conducted  from  the  liver,  spleen  and  verte- 
bral COLUMN  (site  selected,  7th  dorsal  spine),  causes  a 
stomach  reflex  (ascertained  by  dulness)  and  the  dulness  is 
dissipated  by  the  +  and  —  poles  of  a  bar-magnet;  /.  e.,  the 
energy  is  neutral  or  isoelectronic. 

Energy  conveyed  from  the  arteries,  veins  and  heart  is 
also  neutral  but  insomuch  as  this  reaction  is  obtainable 
in  other  diseases,  the  reaction  as  first  cited  should  be 
accepted. 

In  my  early  experience  with  the  syphilitic  electronic 
test  several  egregious  blunders  were  perpetrated.  The 
chief  and  practically  constant  error  was  to  differentiate 
AUTOINTOXICATION  (page  143)  from  s>philis;  both  diseases 
yielding  the  same  reaction  from  the  sites  mentioned. 

In  a  young  girl  a  patient  of  Dr.  Leo  Newmark,  the 
neurologist,  symptoms  suggestive  of  a  spinal  cord 
neoplasm  were  present.  The  electronic  reaction  was 
positive  and  so  was  the  Wassermann. 

An  operation  performed  by  Dr.  Harry  Sherman, 
demonstrated  a  glioma. 

In  San  Francisco,  I  saw  a  lady  with  arterial  hyper- 
tension, the  electronic  reaction  for  syphilis  was  positive, 
but  after  the  use  of  a  purgative  and  several  enemas, 
the  reaction  for  lues  disappeared. 

This  patient  subsequently  saw  Dr.  J.  H.  Kellogg,  of 
Battle  Creek.  The  serologist  at  the  Sanatorium 
elicited  a  pronounced  Wassermann  reaction.  It  has 
been  my  experience  that  in  autointoxication  (page  143) 


134  BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    SPECIFIC    INFECTIONS 

a  Wassermann  is  invariably  present  when  the  electronic 
reaction  could  be  elicited,  but  if  purgatives  and  enemata 
were  used  (in  doubtful  cases  a  milk  diet  for  a  day)  for 
one  or  two  days,  the  Wassermann  like  the  electronic 
reaction  could  not  be  obtained. 

It  is  known  that  autointoxication  owing  to  the  in- 
crease of  proteids  in  the  blood  may  give  a  Wassermann 
of  maximum  intensity  (+++)  and  this  is  also  noted 
after  repasts. 

Hence,  the  careful  serologist  always  makes  his 
Wassermann  before  breakfast.  The  patient  in  question 
was  subsequently  sent  to  Noguchi.  Three  reactions  for 
syphilis  were  made  and  all  were  negative.  These  were 
succeeded  by  a  provocative  injection  which  was  like- 
wise  negative. 

Now,  in  all  cases  of  suspected  syphilis  when  the 
electronic  reaction  can  be  evoked,  purgation,  enemata 
and  in  very  doubtful  subjects  a  milk  diet  are  employed 
before  concluding  that  syphilis  is  present.  Despite  the 
use  of  the  foregoing,  the  sj^hilitic  electronic  reaction 
persists  but  disappears  in  autointoxication. 
The  electronic  test  in  s>philis  is  further  corroborated 
by  the  following: 

1.  Location  of  the  primar}^  site  of  inoculation  and 
evanescence  of  the  electronic  test  by  anointing  for  several 
days  the  point  of  inoculation  with  mercurial  ointment  or 
the  use  of  safranin.  Augmentation  of  the  potentiahty  of 
the  reaction  after  massage  of  the  primar)^  site  of  infection 
(page    130). 

2.  The  syphilitic  has  neither  male  nor  female  polarity 
(page  114)  and  no  duling  energy  is  obtainable  from  the 
psychomotor  region  (page  52).  Normal  sexual  polarity 
is  temporarily  restored  and  psychomotor  energy  is  obtain- 
able after  mercurial  inimctions  or  the  use  of  safranin  at 
the  site  of  inoculation  (pages  210  and  212). 

Sexual  polarity  is  maintained  in  intestinal  autointoxi. 


SYPHILIS 


135 


cation.  The  absence  of  polarity  in  syphilitics  may  account 
for  sterile  marriages,  abortions,  miscarriages  and  stillbirths. 

The  fact  that  polarity  may  be  restored  temporarily  by 
inunctions  at  the  site  of  primary  infection  may  be  of  service 
in  avoiding  the  foregoing. 

In  syphilis,  no  duling  energy  is  evocable  from  the  normal 
epigastric  area  (Fig.  26) ;  in  autointoxication,  this  reaction  is 
present. 

3.  In  addition  to  the  stomach  dulness,  there  is  an  area 
of  dulness  in  the  region  of  the  splenic  flexure  (Fig.  50)  which 


-A 


Fig.  50. — Additional  areas  of  ventral  dulness  when  energy  is  conveyed  in  the 
usual  way  to  the  stomach-region;  A,  dull  area  in  syphilis  and  B,  dull  area  in 
tuberculosis. 


136  BIODYNAMGNOSIS    OF    SPECIFIC    INFECTIONS 

appears  in  from  15  to  45  seconds  after  the  stomach  dulness 
(which  is  immediate). 

4.  In  sj^hiHs,  the  vibrodynamometer  (page  49)  shows 
a  recurrent  stomach  dulness  at  20  Ohms.  This  rate  is  the 
same  in  mild  or  severe  cases  whether  determined  from  the 
liver,  spleen  or  spine. 

In  autointoxication,  the  same  apparatus  demonstrates 
a  vibratory  rate  of  10  Ohms. 

Vide  also  wave  rate  with  the  Sphgmobiometer  (page 
286). 

The  use  of  the  biodynamometer  (page  44)  permits  us 
to  say  whether  we  are  dealing  with  a  quiescent  or  active 

SYPHILIS. 

When  the  energy  is  obtainable  from  the  spine  or  liver 
in  quiescent  syphilis,  the  potentiality  of  the  energ}^  varies 
from  2/25  to  10/25  of  an  Ohm.  In  active  syphilis,  it  is  from 
1-3  Ohms.  Roughly  speaking  in  quiescent  spyhilis,  no 
reaction  (stomach  dulness)  is  obtainable  when  the  point  of 
the  electrode  is  in  excess  of  one-half  inch  from  the  skin 
covering  the  spine,  liver  or  spleen. 

Let  one  assume  a  luetic  lesion  of  the  spine  or  the  liver, 
the  potentiality  of  the  energ}-  at  a  given  point  (lesion) 
would  exceed  that  of  the  spine  or  liver  in  general. 

The  biodynamometer  will  gauge  the  results  of  treat- 
ment. Whsit  proof  has  the  s}'philologist  of  his  successful 
cures  with  salvarsan?  Reinfection  and  neuro-recidives 
which  are  not  infrequent  are  his  only  reliable  guides. 

Inherited  syphilis  responds  to  the  electronic  tests. 
Over  half  of  the  children  born  of  syphilitic  parents,  who 
survive  infancy,  give  a  positive  luetin  reaction  (Stoll). 

The  electronic  reaction  may  disappear  in  hereditary 
syphihs  after  a  thorough  mercurial  inunction  treatment. 
This  is  in  contrast  to  the  acquired  form  (page  129). 


TUBERCULOSIS  137 

Hypertension  in  early  life,  familial  forms  of  neurasthenia 
and  cardiac  disease  often  respond  at  once  to  specific  treat- 
ment, hence  the  importance  of  a  diagnosis  which  is  easily 
determined  by  the  electronic  test.  The  corroboration  of  the 
electronic  test  in  parasyphilis  can  only  be  successfully 
attained  by  the  intraspinal  use  of  spiriUicides. 

Serological  tests  make  syphilitic  diagnosis  a  labora- 
tory question  whereas  the  electronic  tests  make  it  clini- 
cal. Serological  tests  become  less  and  less  positive  the 
longer  the  time  that  has  elapsed  from  the  date  of  in- 
fection and  the  more  thorough  the  treatment. 

In  syphilitics  a  sterile  aiarriage  may  be  predicted 
in  the  event  the  testes  show  luetic  involvement  by  a 
neutral  discharge  of  duling  energy  (page  ii8). 

The  citation  of  the  following  case  is  interesting: 
The  patient  was  treated  by  several  prominent  physi- 
cians for  neurasthenia.  Serological  tests  were  negative. 
Dyslalia  and  Romberg's  sign  were  present.  The  elec- 
tronic reaction  was  positive  for  syphilis  as  well  as  the 
reaction  for  dementia  paralytica  (page  172).  After  a 
single  injection  of  salvarsanized  serum  by  Dr.  V.  Vecki, 
all  the  symptoms  evanesced. 

Other  cases  similar  in  character  were  likewise  ob- 
served in  consultation  with  this  eminent  authority. 

Fluid  from  the  spinal  puncture  yielded  a  positive 
Wassermann  (+  ++). 

Tuberculosis. — It  is  generally  conceded  that  the  tuber- 
culin reaction  is  a  phenomenon  of  sensitization.  There  are 
many  limitations  to  the  tuberculin  test  which  time  will  not 
permit  me  to  review. 

The  electronic  reaction  in  tuberculosis  yields  a  neutral 
duling  energy.  One  may  localize  with  absolute  certainty 
the  site  of  the  lesion  and  ascertain  its  area  whether  located 
in  the  lung,  larynx,  lymphatic  gland,  bone,  joint  or  other 
structure. 


138  BIODYNAMGNOSIS    OF    SPECIFIC    INFECTIONS 

Observe  that  the  reaction  is  that  of  syphiUs  but  the 
reaction  cannot  be  obtained  from  the  hver,  spleen  or  spine 
(provided  these  structures  are  not  imphcated  by  tuberculous 
lesions) . 

It  is  not  difficult  to  differentiate  between  an  active  and  a 
healed  tuberculous  lesion. 

In  the  latter,  the  reaction  is  only  obtainable  when  the 
electrode  is  in  immediate  contact  with  the  site  of  the  lesion, 
whereas  in  an  active  lesion,  the  reaction  is  obtainable  when 
the  electrode  is  held  several  inches  away  from  the  site  of  the 
lesion. 

The  potentiality  of  the  energy  discharge  is  in 
direct  ratio  to  the  bacterial  or  toxin  content  of  the 
lesion. 

Healed  lesions  by  the  safranin  method  (page  210) 
fail  to  show  the  reaction  in  many  instances. 

When  tuberculosis  is  generalized,  the  arteries  and  veins 
yield  a  neutral  energy.  In  a  quiescent  lesion,  the  biodynam- 
ometer  may  register  only  2/25  to  5/25  of  an  Ohm.  whereas 
in  an  active  lesion,  the  energy  potentiality  may  equal  or 
exceed  10  Ohms. 

Varying  grades  of  potentiality  may  indicate  the  progress 
of  the  lesion.  When  the  tuberculous  reaction  is  present  we 
may  exclude  mixed  infection. 

The  coincident  presence  of  pus  annihilates  the  tubercu- 
lous electronic  reaction.  Here  is  a  source  of  error  in  the 
diagnosis  of  tuberculosis ;  the  coincident  presence  of  other 
organisms.  When  this  symbiosis  occurs,  notably  with  pus, 
the  vibratory  rate  gives  us  no  clue  in  differentiation,  inso- 
much as  pus  and  tuberculosis  have  the  same  rate  of  vibra- 
tion, viz.,  at  15  Ohms  (stomach  reflex).  Vide  sphygmobi- 
ometry  (page  272)  for  differentiation.  Color  however  aids 
in  differentiation.    If  a  subject  (other  than  the  patient)  is 


TUBERCULOSIS  139 

employed  and  the  light  is  permitted  to  filter  on  any  part  of 
his  body  through  blue  coloring  material  (Pig.  68)  one  may 
obtain  stomach  dulness  from  tuberculosis  but  not  from 
pus  energy.  Yellow  on  the  subject  inhibits  dulness  from 
tuberculous  energy  and  elicits  dulness  emanating  from  the 
energy  of  pus.  The  electronic  reaction  from  tuberculosis 
is  far  more  reliable  than  experimental  inoculation  in  guinea- 
pigs. 

Tuberculous  sputum  gives  the  same  electronic  reaction 
of  tuberculosis.  Tuberculin  yields  a  non-duling  neutral 
energy.  Like  in  syphilis  (page  135)  an  additional  area  of 
dulness  to  the  right  of  the  umbilicus  (Fig.  50)  occurs  in  tuber- 
culosis and  occupies  an  area  approximately  equivalent  to 

2  inches  square.  When  the  tuberculous  energy  is  conveyed, 
the  stomach  dulness  is  apparent  at  once,  but  the  umbilical 
area  of  dulness  does  not  appear  until  30  seconds  later.  The 
latter  like  stomach  dulness  disappears  when  yellow  light  is 
thrown  on  any  part  of  the  subject. 

The  localization  of  tuberculous  lung  lesions  by  the 
electronic  test  is  absolutely  accurate  and  is  available  when 
the  X-rays  and  sputum  examination  are  negative.  On 
arrival  of  the  electrode  at  the  lesion,  duling  of  the  stomach 
is  immediate. 

In  the  light  of  the  pronunciamento  by  Koch  in  1901,  that 
the  bacillus  of  bovine  tuberculosis  did  not  cause  tubercu- 
losis in  cattle,  it  is  interesting  to  observe  that  the  electronic 
reaction  for  bovine  tuberculosis  is  identical  with  that  of 
human  tuberculosis. 

Tuberculosis  in  childhood. — Primary  infection  in 
tuberculosis  implicates  the  regionary  glands,  notably  the 
bronchial  lymph  glands.  The  evolution  of  glandulo-pulmon- 
ary  tuberculosis  may  be  determined  radiographically  into 

3  stages:    i.     Pulmonary  infection  and  unlilateral  adenop- 


140  BIODYNAMGNOSIS    OF    SPECIFIC    INFECTIONS 

athy.  2.  Tracheo-bronchial  adenopathy  (more  or  less 
latent).  3.  Reinfection  of  apex  and  evolution  of  chronic 
pulmonary  tuberculosis. 

Reactions  are  taken  from  regions  occupied  by  the  glands 
(Fig  51)  and  by  conducting  the  energy  through  rubber 
(page  124).  In  this  way  the  normal  energ}^  from  the  heart, 
blood  vessels  and  thymus  may  be  excluded.  The  base  or 
middle  part  of  the  lung  is  in  the  majority  of  cases,  the  pri- 
mary seat  of  inoculation  in  infants  and  young  children,  but 
that  in  subjects  over  10  years  of  age  as  in  adults,  it  is  the 
apex  which  is  usually  involved  (Radiographic  deductions, 
Lerous,  Paris). 


Fig.  51. — Diagrams  showing  the  anatomical  relations  of  the  bronchial  h-mph 
glands  anteriorly  and  posteriorly  (Lucas). 

WTien  sj'philis  coexists  with  tuberculosis  and  the  ques- 
tion is  one  of  differentiation  of  a  lung  lesion,  anointing  the 
site  of  the  primar}-  lesion  (page  131)  causes  the  disappearance 
of  the  electronic  reaction  in  s}'philis,  whereas  the  energ>" 
from  the  tuberculosis  lesion  is  uninfluenced.  Vide  sphyg- 
mobiometr)'  (page  286). 


PARATUBERCULOSIS  141 

In  ACTIVE  TUBERCULOSIS  there  is  bipolar  sexuality 
(the  tuberculous  subject  elicits  the  stomach  reflex  by  ex- 
tension of  the  fingers  of  either  hand). 

Hypertrophic  pulmonary  arthropathy. — Enlarged 
terminal  phalanges  in  this  condition  yield  the  electronic 
reaction  of  tuberculosis  thus  justifying  either  Thorburn's 
conception  that,  it  is  a  benign  chronic  tuberculosis  affection 
or  Marie's  behef  that,  it  is  caused  by  the  absorption  of 
toxines.  The  reaction  is  obtainable  even  in  the  absence  of 
any  evidence  of  tuberculosis,  and  is  observable  in  individ- 
uals with  a  tuberculous  heredity  only  over  enlarged  phalanges 
or  phalangeal  articulations.     Vide  arthritis  deformans. 

Leprosy. — All  varieties  of  this  affection  show  the  same 
reaction  of  tuberculosis — a  neutral  duling  energy  obtainable 
from  all  leprous  lesions.  I  have  not  yet  determined  the 
vibratory  rate  in  this  disease. 

Arthritis  deformans. — A  neutral  duling  energy  like  in 
tuberculosis  from  the  implicated  articulations.  In  addition 
to  the  duling  of  the  stomach  there  is  likewise  a  dulness 
corresponding  to  the  splenic  flexure  (Fig  50).  The  latter 
is  more  pronounced  than  the  stomach  dulness. 

When  yellow  is  thrown  on  the  source  of  energy,  no 
stomach  dulness  is  obtainable  in  arthritis  deformans  whereas 
the  opposite  is  true  in  tuberculosis.  The  foregoing  neutral 
energy  reaction  may  be  modified  owing  to  the  infectious 
factor  in  the  disease. 

Rosenow,  in  a  study  of  the  lymph  glands  draining  the 
implicated  joints  found  in  35  out  of  38  cases,  streptococci 
in  14,  bacillus  Welchii  in  9,  staphylococci  in  3,  bacillus 
mucosus  in  i  and  the  gonococcus  in  i  case. 

Paratuberculosis. — This  refers  to  tuberculous  affec- 
tions in  which  the  tubercle  bacillus  cannot  be  demonstrated. 
Many    conditions    with    an    at>pic    symptomatology    are 


142  BIODYNAMGNOSIS    OF    SPECIFIC    INFECTIONS 

paratuberculous  and  this  refers  in  particular  to  many  forms 
of  arthritis  deformans.  The  writer  feels  justified  in  this 
conclusion  owing  to  the  corrobative  evidence  of  the  elec- 
tronic reaction,  sphygmobiometry  and  the  successful  em- 
ployment of  the  safranin  treatment. 

The  foregoing  assails  neither  the  doctrine  of  bacillary 
nor  histological  specificity,  but  directs  attention  to  a  more 
sensitive  and  reliable  method  of  recognition. 

Gout. — A  neutral  duling  energy  from  the  affected 
joints. 

Diabetes  mellitus. — A  neutral  duling  energy  from 
the  liver,  heart  and  blood  vessels. 


BIODYNAMGNOSIS  OF  DISEASES  OF  DIGESTIVE  SYSTEM      143 


CHAPTER  IX. 

BIODYNAMGNOSIS   OF   DISEASES   OF   THE   DIGESTIVE 
SYSTEM  AND   ANIMAL   PARASITES. 

Autointoxication  and  colisepsis. — The  primary  en- 
deavor, before  making  an  electronic  reaction  in  intrabdom- 
inal  disease,  is  to  recall  the  fact  that,  in  the  norm  one  obtains 
an  epigastric  area  of  neutral  duHng  energy.  If  the  stomach 
or  bladder  contains  fluids,  a  neutral  duling  energy  can  like- 
wise be  elicited.  This  energy  does  not  traverse  a  non-con- 
ductor (page  6i).  Another  obstacle  to  combat  is  the 
presence  of  the  colon  bacillus.  There  are  more  than  60 
species  of  colonic  microbes,  each  yielding  its  own  specific 
toxin. 

The  micro-organisms  of  the  gastro-intestinal  tract 
estimated  by  Herter,  at  126  billions  for  the  daily  human 
excreta,  yield  no  reaction  in  the  norm  as  far  as  duling  energy 
is  concerned.  It  is  always  advisable  however,  before  abdom- 
inal reactions  are  made  to  cleanse  the  bowels  and  institute 
a  milk  diet  if  only  for  a  day. 

Intraabdominal  congestion  yields  a  positive  duling 
energy  which  is  dissipated  (temporarily)  after  a  series  of 
forced  inspirations. 

The  bacillus  coll — The  reaction  of  the  colon  bacillus 
from  cultures  is  identical  with  that  of  syphilis  and  tubercu- 
losis, viz.,  a  neutral  duling  energy. 

Whereas  the  vibratory  rate  for  tuberculosis  is  15 
Ohms,  and  that  for  syphilis,  20  Ohms,  the  rate  for  the 
colon  bacillus  rarely  exceeds  10  Ohms;  in  fact,  the  latter  is 
the  established  rate  for  colisepsis.    The  colon  bacillus  while 


144       BIODYNAMGNOSIS  OF  DISEASES  OF  DIGESTIVE  SYSTEM 

identified  with  many  t}^es  of  infection,  acute  invasion  of  the 
kidneys  and  biliary  passages  is  not  uncommon.  Choroiditis, 
pelvic  exudates  and  a  host  of  other  conditions  have  with 
reason  been  attributed  to  colisepsis.  It  has  been  said  that 
''a  colon  bacillus  is  not  a  colon  bacillus,  when  busy  in  some 
other  part  of  the  anatomy,  than  the  colon." 

When  colon  bacilh  are  present  in  anomalous  locations 
say  the  kidneys,  in  Heu  of  the  normal  positive  duling  energy, 
we  would  elicit  a  neutral  duling  energ>\  In  addition  to  the 
foregoing,  one  would  anticipate  a  colon  bacilluria  and  the 
GENERAL  REACTIONS ;  a  ucutral  duling  energy  from  the  hver, 
spleen  and  spine  like  in  syphilis  due  to  blood  invasion  of  the 
colon  bacilli. 

Endogenous  infection  from  the  latter,  occurs  usually 
through  the  intestinal  wall,  biliary  passages  and  the 
urinary  tract.  My  observations  show  the  identity 
of  the  reactions  in  intestinal  autointoxication  and 
colisepsis;  the  only  difference  is  in  the  grade  of  infec- 
tion. In  both  conditions  one  finds  the  general  reaction 
previously  cited. 

It  is  in  the  differentiation  of  syphilis  (page  144)  from 
colisepsis  that  errors  may  accrue,  yet  if  the  following  data 
are  noted,  the  likelihood  of  error  may  be  minimized: 

1.  The  general  reaction  is  common  to  colisepsis,  auto- 
intoxication and  S}q3hilis. 

2.  Enemata  and  cathartics  for  one  or  two  days  cause 
the  disappearance  of  the  general  reaction  in  autointoxi- 
cation and  colisepsis,  but  the  reaction  persists  in  s}philis. 

If  there  is  any  doubt  whether  the  intestinal  tract  has 
been  efficiently  drained,  give  the  subject  the  following  for 
about  one  week;  Urotropin  and  sodium  benzoate,  each  10 
grains  administered  by  the  mouth  every  3  hours;  if  the  drugs 
are  not  tolerated  by  the  stomach,  use  by  rectum. 


COLISEPSIS  145 

3.  In  colisepsis  and  autointoxication  (not  in  s>philis 
unless  there  is  intestinal  stasis)  a  local  abdominal  reaction 
of  neutral  duling  energ}^  is  obtainable  notably  over  the 
hepatic  and  splenic  flexures,  the  sigmoid  and  caput  coli. 
The  reaction  however  should  evanesce  after  efficient  cathar- 
sis. Any  fecal  matter  remaining  may  be  recognized  and 
localized  by  the  electronic  test. 

4.  In  autointoxication  and  colisepsis,  the  vibratory 
rate  from  the  liver,  spleen  and  spine  is  at  10  Ohms. 

5.  The  coliseptic  subject  does  not,  as  a  rule  (p.  144), lose 
his  normal  type  of  polarity  (page  115)  and  a  duling  energy 
is  obtainable  from  the  psychomotor  region  (Fig.  22). 

The  Ohmic  resistance  in  colisepsis  is  low;  usually  not  in 
excess  of  2/25  of  an  Ohm  (Use  of  biodynamometer). 

Midway  between  the  frontal  eminences  (metopion), 
a  negative  duling  energy  may  be  elicited  in  colisepsis 
and  autointoxication.  This  reaction  may  survive  the 
reaction  from  the  liver,  spine  and  spleen  after  catharsis. 
It  also  occurs  in  alcoholism  (page  170).  The  headache 
(in  the  metopion)  from  constipation  and  digestive  dis- 
orders may  be  caused  by  the  products  of  Enterotoxism 
in  this  region. 

In  parasyphilitic  diseases,  the  parasites  are  found 
in  the  "dead  corners"  of  the  organism  and  resist  the 
action  of  drugs.  The  cells  secreting  the  cerebro-spinal 
fluid  permit  only  the  passage  of  substances  with  small 
molecules;  more  complex  molecules  are  kept  back.  An 
analogous  condition  is  evidently  present  in  colisepsis. 
The  ingestion  of  sodium  bicarbonate  causes  the  dis- 
appearance of  foregoing  reaction  at  the  metopion. 

6. — Indicantjria  is  practically  always  associated  with 
autointoxication  but  not  necessarily  so  with  syphilis. 

Gastric  cancer. — The  electronic  diagnosis  of  carcinoma 
is  noted  elsewhere  (page  181).  In  eliciting  the  reaction,  note 
that  five-sixths  of  the  stomach  lies  to  the  left  of  the  median 


146       BIODYNAMGNOSIS  OF  DISEASES  OF  DIGESTIVE  SYSTEM 

line.  The  pylorus  (50%  of  the  neoplasms  develop  at  or  near 
this  orifice)  Hes  midway  between  the  right  sternal  and 
parasternal  lines  and  the  cardiac  orefice  (9%  of  growths 
occur  at  the  cardia)  lies  behind  and  a  little  to  the  left  of  the 
7th  cartilage  (7th  rib),  1}^  inches  from  the  sternal  border 
on  a  level  with  the  spinous  process  of  the  9th  dorsal  vertebra, 
and  4^  inches  from  the  anterior  abdominal  surface. 

A  subject  other  than  the  patient  must  be  employed  for 
the  test.  Recall  the  duling  energy  obtainable  in  the  norm 
from  the  epigastrium  (page  74).  Exclude  normal  energy 
in  executing  the  tests  by  conveying  the  energy  through  a 
non-conductor  (Fig.  49  and  pages  61  and  192). 

A  GASTRIC  or  DUODENAL  ULCER  wiU  yield  the  electronic 
reaction  of  carcinoma  (page  181).  This  enables  us  to  locate 
the  ulcer  but  offers  no  aid  in  differentiation.  The  biodyna- 
mometer  may  be  solicited  for  this  purpose.  With  abatement 
of  symptoms  there  will  be  a  coincident  diminution  in  energy 
discharge.  Whereas  the  latter,  progressively  increases  in 
carcinoma.  In  the  latter,  the  vibratory  rate  is  approxi- 
mately 50  Ohms  whereas  in  morbid  cell  activity  (not 
carcinomatous)  the  rate  is  about  28  Ohms. 

In  a  patient  with  gastric  ulcer,  the  rate  was  28. 
One  year  later,  symptoms  recurred,  and  the  vibratory 
rate  was  50.  An  operation  demonstrated  the  presence  of 
a  carcinoma  at  the  site  of  the  healed  ulcer. 

For  further  differentiation,  vide  pages  186. 

Appendicitis. — Reference  has  already  been  made  (page 
107)  to  the  method  of  locating  the  normal  appendix.  In 
appendicitis  it  is  impossible  to  locate  the  structure  after  the 
method  in  question. 

In  appendicitis  the  appendix  yields  autocthonous  energy 
which  may  be  due  to  the  following : 

I.     Presence  of  pus; 


GALL    BLADDER  I 47 

2.  Presence  of  fecal  matter; 

3.  Inflammation. 

Streptoccic  intection  gives  a  negative  duling  energy 
and  fecal  concretions  in  the  appendix  give  the  reaction  of  the 
colon  bacilli  (page  143). 

Inflammatory  structures  yield  the  reaction  characteristic 
of  morbid  cell  activity  (page  )i49. 

A  patient  is  recalled,  who  was  seen  in  consultation 
with  Dr.  Lawrence  N.  Hoffman  (San  Francisco).  The 
diseased  appendix  was  located  to  the  left  of  the  navel 
and  yielded  the  fecal  concretion  reaction.  The  opera- 
tion confirmed  the  electronic  findings;  size,  location 
and  the  presence  of  fecal  matter. 

Gall  bladder. — The  biodynamic  reactions  of  this 
structure  presume  its  correct  localization  which  has  been 
described  elsewhere. 

A  line  drawn  from  the  right  acromion  process  to  the 
umbilicus  approximates  the  location  of  the  gall  bladder. 

During  percussion,  the  patient  inclines  the  body 
backward  as  far  as  possible,  and  to  relieve  the  tedium 
of  the  posture,  the  body  is  supported  by  means  of  the 
hands  resting  on  the  hips  or  by  an  assistant.  Having 
located  the  lower  liver  border,  the  gall  bladder  is  located 
by  very  light  percussion.  The  tympanitically  dull  area 
of  the  gall  bladder  is  in  marked  contrast  with  the  abso- 
lute dulness  of  the  liver  border.  During  percussion  the 
posture  of  the  patient  must  be  maintained. 

Many  surgeons  have  availed  themselves  of  the 
author's  method  of  locating  the  structure  (notably,  Dr. 
George  Jarvis,  Philadelphia,  Dr.  D.  C.  Ragland,  Los 
Angeles  and  Dr.  Lawrence  Selling,  Portland)  and  have 
confirmed  the  findings  at  the  operation. 

Note  the  following  concerning  the  gall  bladder  area 
of  tympanitic  dulness: 

I.     It  descends  on  inspiration; 


148      BIODYNAMGNOSIS  OF  DISEASES  OF  DIGESTIVE  SYSTEM 

2.  It  diminishes  or  diasppears  after  concussion  of 

the  4th,  5th  and  6th  dorsal  spines; 

3.  The  area  of  dulness  is  increased  after  concussion 

of  the  9th  dorsal  spine. 

Electronic  location. — The  normal  gall  bladder  area 
yields  no  duling  energy.  In  the  norm,  a  non-duling  neutral 
energy'  is  obtainable,  i.  e.,  the  energy  is  sufficient  to  annihilate 
the  action  of  both  poles  of  a  bar-magnet  (which  in  the  norm 
produce  stomach  dulness). 

A  like  reaction  is  obtainable  from  sodium  glycocholate. 
The  skin  area  in  juxtaposition  to  the  gall  bladder  is  the 
reaction  common  to  the  skin;  non-duling  negative  energy 
in  the  female  (page  79).  The  liver  yields  the  same  energy 
as  the  gall  bladder,  but  insomuch  as  the  reaction  is  made 
from  below  upward,  the  liver  energy  may  be  excluded. 

When  a  duling  energy  is  obtainable  from  the  gall  bladder 
area,  the  polarity  of  the  energy  varies  in  cholecystitis 
depending  on  the  character  of  the  bacterial  invasion;  typhoid 
and  colon  bacillus,  pneumococcus  and  streptococcus.  Vide 
page  286. 

Gall  stones. — Here,  the  electronic  reaction  is  interfered 
with  by  symbiotic  reactions  (page  286).  Gall  stones  yield 
the  following  reaction ;  a  positive  and  negative  duling  energy 
(page  41). 

The  vibrodynamometer  may  aid  when  a  symbiotic 
reaction  is  present.  As  we  move  the  index  of  our  scale  one 
finds  first  a  stomach  dulness  at  15  Ohms  in  streptococcic 
infection,  then  no  recurrence  of  dulness  occurs  until  18 
Ohms  is  attained  in  the  presence  of  gall  stones,  at  28, 
in  inflammation  and  50  Ohms  in  carcinoma. 

Using  the  sphygmobiometer  (page  272),  the  indices 
would  be: 


TAPEWOEM  149 

Streptococci 7 

Gall  stones 15 

Chronic  inflammation 15 

Carcinoma 6 

My  failure  to  recognize  the  symbiotic  reaction  was 
the  cause  of  frequent  errors  in  diagnosis,  and  these  fail- 
ures associated  with  success  characterized  my  early 
work. 

The  author  has  by  no  means  eliminated  all  the  sources 
of  error,  and  he  anticipates  making  many  more  diag- 
nostic mistakes  for  .  some  time  to  come  with  the  elec- 
tronic methods. 

Abscess  or  the  liver. — Here  one  must  take  into  con- 
sideration the  reaction  of  a  large  number  of  organisms  and 
parasites  etiologically  concerned  in  abscess  formation. 

In  AMEBIASIS,  a  neutral  duling  energy  is  obtainable  from 
the  Uver.  Disregarding  the  polarity  of  the  energy  ehcited 
from  the  Kver,  it  suffices  to  know  that  when  the  symptoms 
suggest  liver  abscess,  a  duling  energy  evocable  from  a  definite 
liver  area  suggests  the  location  of  the  focus  of  suppuration. 

A  liver  abcess  was  thus  located  in  a  patient  seen  in 
consultation  with  Dr.  Chas.  V.  Cross,  (San  Francisco). 

Tapeworm  (solium  and  mediocanellata) . — Before  an 
electronic  diagnosis  is  executed  observe  the  precautions  ^J^yiAyl^Li^i^ 
already  cited  (page  143).  The  electronic  reaction  is  very 
pronounced,  and  is  obtainable  even  when  the  electrode  is 
held  some  distance  from  the  abdomen.  The  reaction  is  a 
duling  negative  energy,  i.  e.,  the  energy'  conveyed  produces 
stomach  dulness  which  is  dissipated  by  the  positive  pole  of 
a  bar-magnet,  and  maintained  by  the  negative  pole. 

The  energy  also  produces  a  sigmoid  flexure  dulness 
(Fig.  50)  which  is  dissipated  by  the  positive  and  main- 
tained by  the  negative  pole  of  a  bar-magnet.  Unlike  the 
energy  from  the  colon  bacillus,  if  the  energy  in  teniasis  is 


150       BIODYNAMGNOSIS  OF  DISEASES  OF  DIGESTIVE  SYSTEM 

passed  through  a  non-conductor  (page  124)  no  duling  of 
the  stomach  nor  sigmoid  is  obtained. 

Locahzation  of  the  duling  energy  to  a  definite  area  may 
aid  in  diagnosis. 

The  mediocanellata,  is  the  more  common  of  the  two 
varieties  in  the  United  States.  Its  habitat  is  the  small 
intestine.  At  autopsies  the  head  is  usually  fastened 
below  the  pylorus,  and  the  rest  of  the  worm  inhabits 
the  small  intestine,  rarely  going  beyond  the  ileocecal 
valve. 

Trichiniasis. — Tissues  containing  the  trichina  spiralis 
yield  a  positive  duling  energy.  The  symptomatology  of 
this  affection  is  usually  concerned  with  the  migration  of 
the  embryos  to  the  muscles,  and  the  electronic  reaction 
over  the  latter  in  association  v^ith  other  signs  of  the  affection 
may  establish  the  diagnosis. 


BIODYNAMGNOSIS  OF  DISEASES  OF  RESPIRATORY  SYSTEM    151 


CHAPTER  X. 

BIODYNAMGNOSIS    OF    DISEASES    OF    THE    RESPIRATORY    AND 
CIRCULATORY   SYSTEM. 

Laryngitis. — In  the  diagnosis  of  syphilitic  or  tubercu- 
lous laryngeal  affections,  vide  the  electronic  reactions  for 
these  diseases.  In  the  application  of  the  test,  one  electrode 
is  placed  over  the  lar3aix,  and  the  other  in  the  usual  location 
approximating  the  stomach  of  the  subject. 

Some  forms  of  laryngitis  specified  as  chronic,  yield  the 
electronic  reaction  of  tuberculosis,  and  are  amenable  to 
the  safranin  treatment  {q.  v.). 

Bronchial  asthma. — A  positive  duling  energy  is  ob- 
tainable from  any  part  of  the  spinal  column.  This  reaction 
is  probably  caused  by  some  disturbance  in  the  function 
of  the  pituitary  gland  (g.  v.).  Asthma  is  unquestionably 
a  vagus  neurosis,  and  I  believe  that  my  investigations 
confirm  the  conclusion  of  Sajous'^  viz.,  that  the  predis- 
posing cause  of  the  disease  is  h\^ersensitiveness  of  the 
vagal  center  in  the  posterior  pituitary  body. 

A  reliable  preparation  of  pituitrin  likewise  yields  the 
same  reaction  obtainable  from  the  spine  in  bronchial 
asthma  {vide  ut  supra). 

The  average  energy  from  the  spine  in  asthma  is  approx- 
imately 13/25  of  an  Ohm,  and  the  intensity  of  the  reaction 
is  in  proportion  to  the  severity  of  the  attack. 

The  reaction  is  practically  always  present  even  in  the 
interparoxysmal  period.    A  positive  duling  energy  is  always 


152     BIODYXAMGXOSIS  OF  DISEASES  OF  EESPIRATOEY  SYSTEM 

obtainable  from  the  nasal  secretion  in  asthma  but  not  from 
the  sputa. 

A  spontaneous  flow  of  cerebrospinal  fluid  through 
the  nose  has  been  observed,  and  it  is  not  unHkely  that 
the  beneficent  action  of  the  iodides  in  asthma  is  due  to 
the  medicamentous  rhinorrhea  which  hastens  the  output 
of  the  pituitary  secretion. 

The  relation  of  the  nasal  mucosa  and  asthma  has  been 
established.  Cyon,  has  shown  that  destruction  of  the 
pituitary  body  completely  inhibited  the  sensibility  of 
the  nasal  mucosa. 

Hydrothorax.^ — The  reaction  for  transudates  is  a 
neutral  duling  energ}'.  The  area  occupied  by  the  fluid 
can  be  accurately  determined  by  the  foregoing  reaction. 
The  subject  employed  for  demonstrating  the  stomach 
reflex  must  be  grounded  with  both  feet.  If  between  one 
foot  and  the  ground  a  board  covered  with  shellac  varnish 
or  other  non-conductor  is  interposed,  it  is  impossible  to 
elicit  the  stomach  reflex  from  the  energy  derived  from 
transudates. 

Heart. — The  sufficiency*  of  this  structure  is  deter- 
minable by  the  biod\Tiamometer.  While  the  scientific 
diagnostician  strives  to  make  the  clinical  correspond  with 
the  anatomic  findings,  or  in  other  words,  pictures  to  his 
mind  the  pathologic  conditions  prevailing  in  disease,  the 
less  radical  physician  is  often  content,  and  reasonably  so, 
with  a  FUNCTIONAL  DL\ GNOSIS.  The  latter  takes  cognizance 
of  anomalies  in  the  physiologic  functions  of  the  viscera. 
Thus  a  functional  takes  precedence  over  a  pathologic 
diagnosis,  for  the  reason  that  physiologic  fluctuations  may 
be  resident  in  an  organ  even  before  a  pathologico-anatomic 

*The  author  believes  that  the  first  systematic  and  detailed  attempt  to  study 
visceral  sutficiency  was  embraced  in  his  work  ^'Diagnostic  Therapeutics,"  Rebman 
Co.,  N.  Y.,  iQio,  pages  748  to  1014. 


HEART    SUFFICIENCY  153 

substratum  is  assumed  to  exist.  The  advances  made  in  the 
pathology  and  therapeutics  of  the  stomach  have  been 
mainly  along  the  lines  of  functional  diagnosis.  Gower's 
observed,  that,  "The  diseases  of  which  we  know  the  least 
pathology  are  the  diseases  which  we  treat  successfully." 

Numerous  tests  have  been  advocated  to  determine 
heart  sufficiency  in  the  cardiopath. 

In  physics,  work  and  energy  are  interchangeable  terms. 
With  the  biodynamometer  (page  44),  the  energy  obtain- 
able from  a  normal  heart  varies  from  5/25  to  7 '25  of  an 
Ohm. 

When  the  sufficiency  of  the  myocardium  is  to  be  deter- 
mined in  a  cardiopath,  energ}^  measurement  should  be 
obtained  from  the  right  and  left  ventricles,  insomuch  as  a 
disproportion  in  the  energy  output  is  often  present. 

This  may  be  concretely  illustrated  in  a  patient  referred 
to  me  by  Dr.  A.  E.  Foster  (Kalamazoo) ; 

Energy  output  from  the  left  ventricle,  3/25  of  an  Ohm; 
Energy  output  from  the  right  ventricle,  1/25  of  an  Ohm; 

The  patient  suffers  from  periodic  attacks  of  lung 
edema  which  are  probably  caused  by  the  disproportion 
in  the  strength  of  the  two  ventricles.  When  the  heart 
reflex  of  the  right  ventricle  (myopathic  reflex)  is  e\'oked 
after  a  seance  of  muscle  percussion,  the  energy  output  of 
the  right  ventricle  is  augmented  to  3/25  of  an  Ohm. 

Cardiotonic  medication  would  accentuate  the  dis- 
proportionate enfeeblement  of  the  ventricles. 

The  present  tendency  is  to  disregard  the  neurogenic 
cardiac  mechanism  (in  which  the  source  of  energy  is  in  the 
higher  centers  mediated  through  the  vagi  and  sympathetic 
nerves)  and  to  substitute  therefore,  the  myogenic  theory, 
which  places  the  source  of  action  of  the  heart  in  the  -muscle 
itself. 

This   is   unquestionably   a   source   of   error   which   can 


154     BIODYXAMGXOSIS  OF  DISEASES  OF  RESPIRATORY  SYSTEM 

easily  be  disproved  by  the  biod}TLamometer  when  energy 
measurements  are  made  after  an  atropin  injection  (page  25). 

The  measurement  of  vagtis  tone  also  proves  that  the 
visceral  sufficiency  of  the  heart  is  a  neuro-muscular  ques- 
tion. Aside  from  its  value  in  determining  the  neurogenic 
factor  in  cardiac  disease,  the  estimation  of  vagus  tone  is  of 
great  importance  in  a  variety  of  diseases  dependent  on 
hypertonia  or  hypotonia  of  this  nerve. 

To  measure  vagus  tone,  the  energ}'  is  taken  by  the 
electrode  from  the  7th  cervical  spine.  In  the  norm,  the 
vagus  tone  is  from  i  to  3  Ohms.  In  vagus  h}potonia, 
say  in  exophthalmic  goitre ^  it  varies  from  1/25  to  3/25  of 
an  Ohm.  In  vagus  M^ertonia,  say  in  bronchial  asthma, 
it  may  be  as  high  as  5  Ohms,  but  it  decreases  in  proportion 
to  the  abatement  of  the  symptoms. 

Fatty  overgrowth. — In  the  cor  adiposum  dependent 
on  an  excess  of  normal  subpericardial  fat,  the  biod\Tiamom- 
eter  may  or  may  not  show  insufficiency  of  the  organ. 

In  aU  instances  however,  the  normal  polarity  of  the 
ventricles  is  modified  (page  73),  and  the  reaction  from 
both  ventricles  is  a  neutral  duling  energy. 

This  same  condition  prevails  when  the  kidneys  are 
enveloped  in  an  excess  of  adipose  tissue,  the  normal 
positive  duling  energy  becoming  a  neutral  duling  energy. 

The  polarity  of  cardiac  energ\'  is  likewise  modified  in 
ANGINA  pectoris  whcn  the  coronary  vessels  are  calcified. 
A  neutral  duling  energ}-  is  obtained  over  a  very  limited 
area  corresponding  to  the  descending  branch  of  the  left 
coronary  arter\'  as  it  passes  along  the  anterior  interven- 
tricular groove  to  the  apex  of  the  heart,  and  an  equally 
narrow  area  of  neutral  duling  energy-  along  the  extreme 
right  border  of  the  heart  in  the  course  of  the  right  coronary 
artery. 


ANEURYSM  155 

Aneurysm. — This  may  be  topographically  defined 
(page  105).  The  normal  artery  yields  a  negative  duling 
energy,  but  when  the  arterial  lesion  is  s>^hilitic,  the  reaction 
is  a  neutral  duling  energy.  This  is  in  harmony  with  the 
observation  that  in  syphilitic  mesaortitis,  spirochetes  are 
demonstrable  in  the  lesions.  Aside  from  the  latter  all 
blood  vessels  in  syphilis  yield  a  neutral  duling  energy. 

In  the  employment  of  Abrams'  treatment  for  aneurysms,* 
antisyphilitic  medication  has  apparently  little  action  on 
the  mesaortitis  until  the  volume  of  the  aneurysm  is  slightly 
reduced. 

When  calcareous  plaques  are  present  in  the  aortic  wall 
in  the  aortitis  of  arteriosclerosis,  a  neutral  duHng  energy 
is  also  elicited.  The  absence  of  the  syphilitic  electronic 
reaction  (page  133)  however,  would  exclude  syphilis  as  an 
etiologic  factor. 

Auto-intoxication  yielding  a  like  reaction  from  the  ar- 
teries must  likewise  be  excluded. 

If  an  extremity  in  the  norm  is  exsanguinated  by  an  Es- 
march  bandage  there  is  no  duling  energy  from  the  blood 
vessels  and  any  energy  elicited  is  caused  by  calcareous 
plaques  or  syphilis  (if  the  vessel  is  invaded  by  spirochetes). 

*Vide  author's  contributions  on  this  subject:] 
British  Medical  Journal,  July  8,  191 1  and  La  Presse  Medicale,  Oct.  4,  191 1. 


156  BIODYXAMGNOSIS  OF  DISEASES  OF  KIDNEYS 


CHAPTER  XI. 

BIODYNAMGNOSIS    OF   DISEASES    OF   THE 
KIDNEYS   AND   DUCTLESS    GLANDS. 

The  functional  test  of  the  kidneys  is  similar  to  that  of 
the  heart  (page  153).  The  normal  kidney  yields  an  energy 
equal  to  from  3/2 5  to  4/2 5  of  an  Ohm.  In  disease  implicating 
the  functional  integrity  of  the  organ,  the  energy  output  is 
at  zero  of  the  biodynamometer. 

In  the  norm,  the  kidneys  yield  a  positive  duling  energy, 
which  fact  permits  of  their  accurate  location  by  the  elec- 
tronic test.  In  HYDRONEPHROSIS  and  nephrolithiasis, 
a  neutral  duling  energy  is  elicited.  It  must  be  recalled 
(page  154)  that  an  excessive  deposit  of  fat  may  yield  a  like 
reaction,  but  the  latter  would  be  elicited  from  both  kidneys. 

All  CALCULI  wherever  located  give  the  isoelectronic 
reaction  viz.,  a  neutral  duling  energ}^  If  the  reaction  for  a 
stone  in  the  bladder  is  executed,  this  organ  must  first  have 
its  contents  voided.  If  a  renal  calculus  were  present,  the 
neutral  duling  energy  would  be  limited,  the  balance  of  the 
kidney  region  however,  would  yield  its  normal  positive 
energ>^ 

The  energy  of  calculi  traverses  a  non-conductor  and  if 
the  latter  is  used  in  exploring  the  kidneys  and  a  reflex  is 
elicited,  it  suggests  a  pathological  lesion. 

The  presence  of  a  ureteral  calculus  would  yield 
a  neutral  duling  energy  somewhere  in  the  course  of  the 
ureter  which  is  indicated  on  the  posterior  aspect  of  the 
trunk,  by  a  line  drawn  vertically  upwards  from  the 


SUPRARENAL    BODIES 


157 


posterior  superior  iliac  spine  to  the  level  of  the  process 
of  the  2nd  lumbar  spine  (Fig.  52). 

Suprarenal  bodies. — Surmounting  the  kidneys  is  a 
small  area  (Fig.  53)  approximately  the  size  of  a  dime  from 
which  a  neutral  duling  energy  is  obtainable.  Directly  below 
is  the  positive  duling  kidney  energy.  The  pointed  electrode 
(Fig.  19)  is  used  for  conducting  energy  from  the  adrenal 
gland. 


Fig.  52. — Illustrating  the  course  of  the  ureter,  3;  i,  descending  colon;  2,  left 
kidney;  4,  spleen;  5,  posterior  superior  iliac  spine;  6,  12th  rib. 

Adrenal  energy  is  very  low  in  the  norm;  not  exceeding 
2/25th  of  an  Ohm.  One  may  artificially  increase  the  acti\it}- 
of  the  gland  up  to  io/25th  of  an  Ohm  by  brief  concussion 
of  the  2nd  and  3rd  cervical  spines  as  described  elsewhere. 

The  latter  vertebral  point,  corresponds  to  the  exit  of 
the  phrenic  nerve  which  it  is  assumed,  stimulates  the  su- 


158 


BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    DISEASES    OF    KIDNEYS 


prarenal    gland    secretion    by    its    phrenico-abdominal 

branches  wliich  innervate  the  gland. 

All  pharmaceutical  preparations  from  the  suprarenal 

gland  give  a  neutral  duling  energy. 
Hypertension  is  often  associated  with  h}per-adrenalism. 
H}'po-adrenalism  is  associated  with  asthenia,  low  blood- 
pressure,  profound  mental  depression  and  occasionally  by 
pigmentation .  We  have  already  noted  how  one  may  augment 
the  suprarenal  acti^'ity.  Cases  specified  as  psychasthenia, 
hysteria,  neurasthenia,  etc.,  are  often  dependent  on  adrenal 
insufficiency.  The  latter  condition  is  benefitted  by  adrenal 
substance. 


rig-  53' — Electronic  areas  of  duling  energy;  A,   suprarenal  gland  and  B, 
kidney. 


THYMUS    GLAND  159 

A  simple  test  for  adrenal  insufficiency  is  as  fol- 
lows: The  oral  administration  of  suprarenal  extract 
to  normal  individuals  does  not  cause  a  rise  of  blood- 
pressure,  and  when  a  rise  follows  exhibition  of  the  drug 
by  the  mouth,  it  indicates  suprarenal  inadequacy. 
Blood-pressure  is  first  determined  and  then  3  grain  doses 
of  the  extract  are  administered  thrice  daily  for  3  days. 
An  increase  of  pressure  suggests  Addison's  disease, 
if  there  is  no  valvular  cardiac  lesion.  A  pressure  rise 
of  more  than  10  per  cent,  is  absolutely  diagnostic  of  adre- 
nal insufiiciency.  No  drug  should  be  taken  for  3  days 
preceding  the  first  observation. 

Thymus  gland. — This  gland  yields  a  neutral  duling 
energy,  i.  e.,  the  energy  producing  stomach  dulness  is  dissi- 
pated by  both  poles  of  a  bar-magnet.  A  like  reaction  is 
obtainable  from  pharmaceutical  thymus  preparations. 

The  thymus  attains  its  maximum  size  at  the  end  of  the 
second  year,  then  it  atrophies  and  disappears  at  puberty. 

A  persistent  thymus  causes  localized  dulness  along  the 
left  sternal  border  from  the  2nd  to  the  4th  rib.  The  normal 
dulness  is  in  the  shape  of  a  truncated  cone  with  base  at  the 
sternoclavicular  junction  and  the  apex  at  the  level  of  the  2nd 
rib.  In  the  norm  the  gland  does  not  extend  more  than  6  cm. 
beyond  the  sternal  margins. 

Percussion  is  as  untrustworthy  in  defining  this  gland  as 
the  electronic  method  is  certain.  In  the  infant  of  8  months, 
the  distance  between  the  manubrium  sterni  and  the  vertebral 
column  is  only  2.2  cm,,  and  it  is  quite  evident  that  the  slight- 
est increase  in  the  size  of  the  gland  will  produce  pressure 
symptoms  on  important  structures. 

An  enlarged  thymus  is  associated  with  pertussis  (page  160) 
laryngismus  stridulus,  exophthalmic  goitre  (page  161),  etc. 

In  children,  an  enlarged  thymus  may  produce  aU  types 
of  embarrassed  respiration,  notably  an  asthmatic  t^-pe. 


160 


BIODYXAMGNOSIS    OF    DISEASES    OF    KIDNEYS 


To  fortify  the  electronic  diagnosis  of  an  enlarged  th>Tnus 
note  that  when  the  7th  cervical  spine  is  concussed  for  one- 
half  minute,  by  aid  of  a  plexor  and  pleximeter  (Fig.  54) ,  the 
electronic  area  of  th}Tnic  dulness  is  diminished.  The  latter 
fact  probably  explains  the  specificity  of  the  author's  treatment 
in  exophthalmic  goitre,  and  the  many  failures  of  operative 
treatment  owing  to  the  inability  of  influencing  the  thymus 
which  is  specially  concerned  in  the  s}'ndrome  of  this  affection. 


Fig.  54. — Plexor   and   pleximeter   employed   for   eliciting   mechanically   the 
visceral  reflexes  of  Abrams  {Vide  Spondylotherapy,  5th  edition,  p.  9). 


In  pertussis,  the  substernal  dulness  noted  elsewhere  is 
probably  caused  by  an  enlarged  thymus  and  not  an  aortec- 
tasis.  This  modified  conclusion  was  suggested  by  the 
electronic   reaction. 

Thyroid  gland. — This  yields  a  neutral  non-duling 
energ}'.  This  reaction  identifies  it  from  other  structures.  In 
the  norm  the  energ\'  discharge  ranges  from  1/25  to  5/25  of 
an  Ohm;  in  hyperthyroidism,  it  ranges  from  i  to  10  Ohms 
with  corresponding  reduction   in   vagus   tone   (page    154). 


DUCTLESS    GLANDS  161 

With  abatement  of  the  symptoms  of  h>perthyroidism,  vagus 
tone  is  augmented  and  thyroid  tnergy  discharge  is  decreased. 

To  measure  the  non-duUng  energ\'  from  the  thyroid  with 
the  biodynamometer,  one  recalls  that  either  pole  of  a  bar- 
magnet  will  produce  stomach  dulness.  Connection  by  aid 
of  the  electrodes  and  cord  is  made  in  the  usual  way  (page 
36).  Hold  either  pole  of  a  bar-magnet  in  front  of  the  stomach. 
Note  that  no  dulness  of  the  latter  is  produced  during  the 
time  energy  is  conducted  with  the  index  of  the  biodynamom- 
eter  at  zero  of  the  scale. 

Slide  index  along  until  dulness  of  the  stomach  is  produced. 
The  latter  point  indicates  the  potentiality  of  the  thyroid 
energy  discharge. 

When  a  duling  energy  from  the  thyroid  gland  is  elicited, 
one  must  suspect  malignancy. 

In  hypothyroidism  (cretinism  and  myxedema),  the 
energy  discharge  from  the  thyroid  is  usually  nil.  Th}Toid 
feeding  will  increase  the  energy  output.  The  electronic  test 
shows  that  the  thymus  is  invariably  enlarged  in  exophthalmic 
goitre,  a  condition  which  cannot  always  be  attributed  to  a 
process  of  compensation.  There  is  a  thymogenous  type 
of  exophthalmic  goitre  and  the  thymus  is  the  chief  structure 
implicated. 

Par.\thyroid  glands. — The  parathyroid  bodies  usuall\' 
in  two  pairs  on  either  side  of  the  lateral  lobes  of  the  thyroid 
gland,  yield  a  positive  non-duling  energy.  Hold  electrode 
in  juxtaposition  to  the  parathyroid  bodies  ^4  inch  away  so  as 
to  avoid  energy  from  the  adjacent  vein. 

Spleen. — This  yields  in  the  norm,  a  non-duling  neutral 
energy  with  a  potentiality  of  4/25  of  an  Ohm.  The  latter  is 
determined  like  all  non-duling  energies  (page  43). 

Pituitary  body.— In  the  norm  (excepting  the  7th  cervi- 
cal and  ist  lumbar),  there  is  no  duling  energ\-  from  the  spine. 


1()2  BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    DISEASES    OF    KIDNEYS 

For  convenience,  the  7th  dorsal  spine  is  employed  for  deter- 
mining the  pituitary  energ}'.  The  electronic  reaction  of 
pituitar}'  preparations  is  a  duling  positive  energ}-  (page  41). 

The  secretor}'  activity  of  the  pituitar\'  body  may  be 
determined  by  concussing  the  7th  cervical  spine  (Fig.  23) 
for  a  few  seconds  and  then  determining  by  aid  of  the  bio- 
dynamometer  the  potentiality  of  the  energ}-  discharge  from 
the  7th  dorsal  spine.  In  the  norm,  it  varies  from  i  25  to 
8  25  of  an  Ohm.  In  h}-perpituitarism  (asthma)  it  may  be 
as  high  as  i  Ohm.  The  pituitary  spinal  reaction  lasts  several 
minutes  after  concussion  (]'idc  asthma). 

In  two  cases  of  the  Frolich  t^-pe  of  h\-popituitarism 
with  adiposity  and  sexual  infantilism,  no  reaction  at  all 
was  obtainable  from  the  7th  dorsal  spine  after  con- 
cussion of  the  7th  cervical  spine.  In  the  norm,  after 
concussing  the  7th  cervical  spine,  the  electronic  reaction 
from  the  7th  dorsal  spine  is  a  duling  positive  energy. 

The  wavemetric  index  of  the  pituitary  secretion  with  the 
variable  condenser  (page  272)  is  at  15.  Even  in  the  absence 
of  h}'pophysial  symptoms,  increased  function  of  the  pituitary 
gland  (hyperpituitarism),  conduces  to  remarkable  changes 
in  growth  (gigantism)  whereas  the  converse  condition 
(h}-popituitarism) ,  results  in  adiposity  with  skeletal  and 
sexual  infantilism.  The  \'arious  types  of  infantilism  are 
with  difficulty  differentiated,  but  my  observations  indicate 
that  the  majority  of  cases  are  identified  with  functional 
insufficiency  of  the  pituitary  gland. 

The  intensity  of  the  pituitary  spinal  reaction  bears  an 
important  relation  to  the  size  of  the  individual,  and  it  is  not 
impossible  to  anticipate  that,  by  this  means  the  stature  of 
an  individual  may  be  predicted.  The  following  estimates 
made  in  adults  indicate  the  trend  of  mv  arsjument: 


PITT'TTAKY    HKACTTOX 


163 


HEIGHT 

SEX 

BIODYXAMOMETRIC    INDEX 

5  feet  7  inches 

Female 

23/25 

5  feet  2  inches 

Female 

3.  25 

4  feet  9  inches 

Feniale 

Reaction    not    be\'ond    zero. 

6  feet  2  inches 

Male 

22  •  25 

Midgets  (3  examined) 

No  pituitary  reaction. 

Giant 

Male 

1 . 5  Ohms. 

In  s}^hilis  and  autointoxication,  duling  energ>^  is  obtain- 
able from  the  spine  hence  a  pituitary  reaction  cannot  be 
made.  The  energy  from  the  spine  may  be  ehminated  tem- 
porarily in  both  affections  (pages  131  and  144). 


164  BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    NERVOUS    DISORDERS 


CHAPTER  XII. 

BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    X'ERVOUS   DISORDERS   AXT)   NEOPLASMS. 

TOPOGXOSIS. — The  recognition  and  absolute  location  of 
Paix  objectively  may  be  attained  by  the  electronic  test. 
The  value  of  the  latter  in  forensic  medicine  can  be  appre- 
ciated. To  economize  time,  the  patient  is  only  requested  to 
specify  the  region  of  the  body  where  the  pain  is  experienced. 
The  discharge  in  pain  is  a  neutral  duling  energ}'.  For  all 
practical  purposes  it  sufl&ces  to  remember  that,  if  from  a 
definite  region  no  duling  energv'  is  produced  in  the  norm, 
any  duling  of  the  stomach  is  caused  by  pain  (excluding  of 
course  any  energ}'  from  pathological  sources). 

With  a  pointed  electrode  (page  45),  the  area  of  pain  can 
be  accurately  defined  and  marked  with  a  dermograph.  The 
intensity  of  pain  may  be  estimated  by  the  biod\Tiamometer, 
thus  excluding  the  personal  equation  of  the  patient  respect- 
ing the  progression  or  retrogression  of  his  pains. 

Reflex  paixs  yield  no  reaction,  a  matter  of  importance 
when  pains  are  to  be  traced  to  their  source. 

Roughly,  and  without  the  aid  of  the  biod^Tiamometer, 
one  may  locate  the  site  of  the  greatest  pain  intensity  by 
noting  at  what  distance  the  electrode  from  the  painful  area 
can  produce  stomach  dulness.  The  greater  the  distance  of 
the  electrode,  the  greater  is  the  intensity  of  the  pain. 

Administer  an  analgesic  or  inhale  sufiicient  chloroform 
to  subdue  the  pain  and  the  electronic  reaction  of  pain  evan- 
esces; only  to  return  when  the  pain  recurs. 

Pain  energy  tra\'ersing  a  non-conductor  will  not  produce 


NERVOUS    DISORDERS  165 

Stomach  dulness.  Thus,  if  there  is  pain  over  a  neoplasm 
or  a  tuberculous  area,  by  conducting  the  energ}'  through  a 
non-conductor,  any  stomach  dulness  ensuing,  is  from  the 
morbid  tissue  and  not  from  the  pain. 

Anesthesia. — This  is  likewise  capable  of  objective 
demonstration.  The  normal  skin  yields  a  negati\'e  non- 
duling  energ>^  on  the  left  side  in  a  male  in  accordance  with 
aural  polarity  (g.  v.);  the  anesthetic  skin,  a  positive  non- 
duling  energy. 

Paralysis. — When  connection  is  made  between  the 
skin  over  a  normal  muscle  and  the  stomach,  only  the  normal 
skin  reaction  is  obtainable.  If  the  muscle  in  proximity  to 
the  electrode  is  struck,  a  neutral  duling  energy  of  the  stomach 
is  elicited.  This  is  the  normal  electronic  muscle  reaction. 
If  this  same  test  is  executed  over  a  paralyzed  muscle,  the 
foregoing  reaction  is  negative. 

In  functional  paralysis  however,  the  normal  electronic 
muscle  reaction  is  present. 

Epilepsy. — All  theories  concerning  epilepsy  aire  unproved 
h3^potheses.  The  majority  of  writers  concede  that  the 
paroxysms  are  discharged  from  the  cerebral  cortex,  notably 
the  cortical  motor  regions. 

Before  presenting  my  conclusions  concerning  a  large 
number  of  epileptics  whom  I  examined,  certain  fundamental 
facts  must  be  reviewed. 

We  know  that  from  the  left  psychomotor  area  (page  72) 
in  the  male  and  from  the  right  psychomotor  area  in  the 
female,  suflficient  energy  can  be  conveyed  to  the  stomach 
to  evoke  dulness  of  the  latter. 

We  also  know  that,  when  the  end  of  the  connecting  wire 
is  distant  beyond  J4  inch  from  the  psychomotor  area,  the 
energy  is  insufhcient  to  elicit  stomach-dulness. 

All  epileptics  discharge  a  neutral  duling  energy  from 


166 


BIODYNAMGXOSIS    OF    NERVOUS    DISORDERS 


both  psychomotor  areas  and  this  electronic  reaction  is  char- 
acteristic of  this  affection.  My  measurements  show  no 
increase  in  the  energy  discharge  either  from  the  psychomotor 
area  normally  discharging  energy  nor  from  the  area  which 
in  the  norm  discharges  no  energy.  ? 

Before  puberty  where  polarity  is  not  yet  expressed,  there 
is  nevertheless  a  discharge  from  the  right  psychomotor  area 
in  the  male  and  from  the  left  psychomotor  area  in  the  female. 

In  JACKS0NL4N  EPILEPSY,  the  Same  reaction  is  obtainable, 
but  the  energy  discharge  is  augmented.  Thus,  in  a  case  seen 
with  the  neurologist.  Dr.  C.  C.  Beling  (Newark,  New  Jersey) 
the  energy  discharge  from  the  right  psychomotor  region  was 
18/25  of  an  Ohm  and  from  the  left  psychomotor  region, 
8/25  of  an  (3hm.  In  this  patient  the  localized  convulsions 
were  on  the  left  side  {Vide  electro-pathology,  page  12). 

The  psychomotor  discharge  varies  in  the  norm  with  the 
intellectual  activity  of  the  subject.  The  following  are  a  few 
estimations  made  with  the  biodynamometer  selecting  the 
left  psychomotor  area  in  the  male  and  the  right  in  the  female: 


Female 

Male 

Male 

Male 

Male 

Male 

Male 

Male 

Female 

Female 

Female 

Female 


Average  intellection  but  placid 

Diminished  intellection  and  very  placid 

Highest  grade  of  intellection  and  intellectually 

active 

Same  subject,  but  after  2  hours  of  intellectual  rest 

Intellectual  but  placid 

Physician,  intellectually  active 

Physician,  average  intellection 

Physician,  age  72  years,  intellectually  active.  .  .  . 

Intellectual  and  mentally  active 

\'er)'  restless 

Same  subject  after  several  days  use  of  bromides 
Psychasthenic  with  brain  constantly  active 


4/25  of  an  Ohm. 
2/25  of  an  Ohm. 


4  Ohms. 

2  Ohms. 
14/25  of  an 

I  Ohm. 
14/25  of  an 
17/25  of  an 
16/25  of  ^r> 
20/25  of  an 

1/25  of  an 

^}4  Ohms. 


Ohm. 

Ohm. 
Ohm. 
Ohm. 
Ohm. 
Ohm. 


The  epileptologist  will  find  in  the  petit  mat  type  in  atypi- 
cal epilepsy,  and  in  the  epileptoid  attacks  of  dementia  precox, 
a  ready  means  of  diagnosis  with  the  electronic  test.  If  we 
agree   with    Fournier,    epilepsy    ma}'   be   a   paras^philitic 

affection. 


NERVOUS    DISORDERS  107 

The  intestinal  autointoxication  reaction  (page  143)  is 
frequent  in  epilepsy. 

RAYXAirD's  DISEASE. — The  writer  has  had  an  oppor- 
tunity of  examining  a  number  of  these  individuals,  and  has 
noted  the  reaction  of  autointoxication  (page  143).  Therefore 
he  is  inclined  to  the  belief  that  enterosepsis  plays  an  impor- 
tant part  in  this  disease.  In  several  patients,  intensive 
treatment  with  the  object  of  ridding  the  alimentary  canal 
of  -enterotoxins,  eventuated  in  cure. 

Neurasthenia. — This  is  essentially  a  cerebrasthenia. 
Fatigability  is  the  main  symptom  in  this  disease  and  must 
be  referred  to  the  brain  centers.  Sustaining  a  voluntary 
muscle  contraction  is  determined  by  the  endurance  of  the 
brain  centers  and  not  the  muscles.  The  moment  exhaustion 
of  the  centers  occurs,  the  muscle  contraction  ceases.* 

Fatigue*  is  caused  by  the  accumulation  of  fatigue  prod- 
ucts and  all  work  is  the  translation  of  chemical  energy.  In 
neurasthenia,  an  energy  which  is  positive  and  negati\'e  is 
obtainable  over  the  entire  occipital  region  with  the  maxi- 
mum intensity  of  the  reaction  at  the  external  occipital 
protuberance  (Fig.  57).  This  reaction  is  evocable  arti- 
ficially by  subjecting  an  individual  to  intense  cerebral 
activity  but  soon  disappears  with  brain  rest. 

Fatigued  muscles  yield  a  like  reaction.  The  intensit}'  of 
the  head  sensation  (casque  nenrastheniqiie)  in  neurasthenia 
corresponds  with  the  intensity  of  the  electronic  reaction. 
Vide,  psychasthenic  reaction  (page  174). 

Paralysis  agitans. — Neutral  duKng  energy  from  the 
spine,  but  unlike  the  reaction  in  s>philis,  there  is  no  duling 
energy  from  the  liver.  Neither  psychomotor  region  yields 
any  duling  energy  in  advanced  cases.  The  latter  suggests 
senility  of  the  cerebral  cortex. 

*Abrams,  .VuloiiiloxiciUion,  K.  B.  Treat  &  Co..  New  York. 


168  BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    XERVOUS    DISORDERS 

Atoxia  sympathetica. — This  neonym  suggested  itself 
to  the  writer  in  response  to  the  new  methods  of  recognizing 
disease  by  the  electronic  methods.  Affections  of  the  cervical 
sympathetic  are  readily  recognized  but  implication  of  the 
thoracic  and  abdominal  portions,  are  beyond  the  ken  of  our 
diagnostic  acumen.  The  patholog}'  of  the  sympathetic  is 
expressed  in  functional  anomalies;  that  of  the  cerebrospinal 
nerves,  by  pain.  From  the  subjective  viewpoint,  the  former 
is  subconscious  and  the  latter  conscious  patholog}'. 

Clinically,  irritation  of  the  cardiac  plexus  produces 
anginal  symptoms;  of  the  solar  plexus,  the  pain  of  lead  colic, 
hj-pertension  and  constipation.  The  reverse  condition 
(paralysis)  results  in  acute  gastrectasis,  intestinal  paralysis 
and  collapse.  Mucomembranous  colitis,  the  visceral  crises 
of  tabes,  orthostatic  albuminuria,  some  forms  of  glycosuria, 
pigmentary  cutaneous  changes,  etc.,  have  likewise  been 
attributed  to  disease  of  the  abdominal  sympathetic. 

The  oriiicialists,  constantly  report  extraordinary'  cures 
by  their  methods  but  the  conception  of  the  latter,  by  the 
introspectionist,  cannot  merit  the  imprimatur  of  the  scientist. 

The  writer  has  approached  this  subject  in  another  direc- 
tion. When  the  sphincter  ani  or  urethra  is  dilated  so  as  to 
produce  irritation,  or  dilated  to  the  point  of  exhaustion,  one 
linds  that,  in  irritation  only,  a  neutral  discharge  of  energy 
is  obtainable  in  the  entire  region  of  the  dorsal  vertebrae  at  a 
distance  of  5.6  cm.  on  both  sides  from  the  spinous  processes. 

In  the  norm,  there  is  a  discharge  of  energy  from  the 
7th  cervical  and  ist  lumbar  spines.  From  these  situa- 
tions, the  area  discharging  energy  extends  on  either 
side  to  a  distance  not  exceeding  3  cm.  from  the  spinous 
process. 

\\Tien  the  orifices  are  dilated  to  exhaustion,  no  energy 
discharge  can  be  elicited,  as  in  the  norm  from  the  7th  cervical 


SPLAXCHXIC    COXGESTIOX  1(39 

and  I  St  lumbar  spines  and  from  the  epigastric  area,  (Fig. 

26). 

The  middle  cer\-ical  ganglion  corresponds  approxi- 
mately to  the  7th  cervical  spine  and  the  solar  plexus,  to 
the  ist  lumbar  spine  and  epigastric  area. 


Fig-  55. — Area  of  abdominal  dulness  in  Splanchnic  Congestion. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing,  the  splanchnic  mechanism 
(page  81)  is  implicated.  From  a  clinical  viewpoint  the 
contraction  of  the  vessels  is  maintained  by  the  autonomic 
system  {vagtis)  and  the  dilatation  by  the  sympathetic  system. 
Irritation  of  the  latter  conduces  to  dilatation  of  the  vessels 
and  abdominal  areas  of  dulness  (Fig.  55)  are  demonstrable. 
When  the  sympathetic  is  enervated  from  overstimulation, 
the  converse  condition  (Splanchnic  Anemia)  is  present.  The 
symptomatology  of  splanchnic  angioneuroses  is  discussed 
elsewhere. 


]70  BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    XERVOUS    DISORDERS 

In  irritation  of  the  solar  plexus,  an  epigastric  area  of  ten- 
derness is  demonstrable  directly  over  the  celiac  axis  dy^ 
linger  breadths  to  the  right  of  the  median  line). 

Alcoholism. — When  a  small  ciuantity  of  alcohol  is 
taken,  a  positre  duling  energ}-  may  be  elicited  (within  a 
minute)  from  the  liver  and  spleen  but  it  soon  disappears. 
The  reaction  is  permanent  in  chronic  alcoholism.  From 
the  metopion,  there  is  a  negative  duling  energ}'  (page  145). 

\'isiox. — Reference  has  already  been  made  to  visceral 
sufficiency  (page  152).  In  the  norm,  the  left  eye  in  the  male 
yields  a  positive,  and  the  right  e}"e  a  negative  duling  energ}'. 
This  polarity  is  reversed  in  the  female  (page  72). 

Disregarding  polarity,  and  only  measuring  the  energ}^ 
discharge  from  the  eye  with  the  biod}'namometer,  one  is 
enabled  to  say  that,  the  energ}'  discharge  is  in  direct  propor- 
tion to  \'isual  acuity. 

The  following  citations  establish  my  viewpoint: 


Subject  I 

Normal  vision 

Both  eyes,  9.  25  of  an  Ohm. 

2, 
(Microsc 

opist) 

Extraordinary  \-ision 

15/25  of  an  Ohm. 

Subject  3 

Right  eye  (normal  vision) 

Left  eye  blind  from  panophthal- 

9/ 25  of  an  Ohm. 

mitis 

Xo  duling  energ},-. 

Subject  3 

Right  eye  (vision  normal) 

9/25  of  an  Ohm. 

Left  e\-e  (vision  reduced) 

3/25  of  an  Ohm. 

Subject  4 

Right  eye  (normal  \-ision) 
Left  eye  (^-ision  very  much  re- 

12/25 of  ^D  Ohm. 

duced 

2/25  of  an  Ohm. 

OPHTILA.LMOATOXLA. — This  neologism  refers  to  ocular 
affections  caused  by  vagus  hypotonia.  ^Modifications  of  vagus 
tone  are  identified  with  hysterical  and  neurasthenic  forms  of 
amblyopia  and  asthenopia.  Recognition  of  the  latter  is 
possible  by  the  maneuvers  suggested  on  page  154.  Ener- 
gizing the  A'agus  may  be  effected  by  human  energ}-.  The 
diagnosis  of  hypotonic  disturbances  of  alditiox  are  amen- 
able to  like  maneuvers  (page  171). 


PSYCHOSES  171 

Cataracts. — The  pathology  of  this  condition  is  obscure. 
The  usual  hypothesis  assumes  changes  of  the  lens  protein  by 
nutritional  disorders  but  a  more  recent  theory  suggests  that, 
salts  of  calcium,  magnesium  and  silicates  (present  in  senile 
cataractous  human  lenses),  so  modify  the  lens  protein  that 
the  short  waves  of  the  spectrum  precipitate  the  protein 
resulting  in  the  opacity  of  cataract. 

In  the  very  few  electronic  studies  made  by  the  writer, 
a  NEUTRAL  duling  energy  was  obtained,  and  the  vibratory 
energy  rate  suggested  tuberculosis.  It  is  not  unlikely  that 
the  cataract  in  some  instances  is  a  paratuberculosis  (page 
141). 

Hearing. — This,  like  vision,  may  be  determined  objec- 
tively. No  duling  energy  is  obtainable  from  the  ears;  only 
a  non-duling  negative  energy.  One  electrode  is  placed  at 
the  meatus  of  the  ear  to  be  examined,  the  other  in  the  usual 
situation.  Note  at  what  point  on  the  scale  of  the  biod}-na- 
mometer,  the  positive  pole  of  a  bar-magnet  produces  stomach 
dulness  after  the  method  described  on  page  45. 

In  the  norm,  the  registration  is  20/25  of  ^^  Ohm  whereas 
in  diminished  audition,  it  may  be  reduced  to  1/25  of  an  Ohm 
or  to  zero  in  absolute  deafness. 

PSYCHOSES 

Bolton,  in  "The  Brain  in  Health  and  Disease,"  a  book 
just  issued,  makes  the  following  significant  statement:  "Our 
present-day  knowledge  of  the  functions  of  the  brain,  and  of 
the  subject  of  mental  disease  is  at  least  a  century  behind  that 
of  other  branches  of  physiology  and  medicine." 

A  careful  study  of  the  work  of  this  eminent  authority, 
which  is  based  on  clinico-histo-pathological  proof  of  cerebral 
function,  establishes  a  reason  why  my  psychotic  reactions 
are  demonstrable  over  definite  cerebral  regions. 


il'J.  BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    NERVOUS    DISORDERS 

Dementia  par.\lytica. — Noguchi,  demonstrated  the 
spirocheta  pallida  in  the  stained  specimens  of  the  brain  in 
general  paralysis.  Forster  and  Tomasczewski,  demonstrated 
living  spirochetes  in  8  out  of  20  cases  examined  by  aspiration 
of  the  cortical  substance.  The  author  has  examined  a  large 
number  of  paretics,  and  ascertained  the  following  invariable 
electronic  reaction;  when  a  connection  is  made  between 
either  frontal  eminence  of  the  subject  and  the  gastric  area, 
dulness  of  the  stomach  immediately  ensues  and  the  dulness 
is  dissipated  by  both  poles  of  a  bar-magnet.  Aside  from  this 
neutral  energy,  one  may  obtain  the  same  reaction  from  the 
liver,  spleen  and  spine  (page  133)  i.  e.,  the  general  s>TDhilitic 
reaction. 

In  the  norm  and  in  syphilis  (without  cerebral  involv- 
ment),  no  energy  sufficient  to  dull  the  stomach  is  obtainable 
from  the  frontal  eminences.  Great  care  must  be  exercised  in 
recognizing  the  many  areas  on  the  head  from  which  energ}^ 
is  normally  discharged  (Fig.  56). 

Error  may  be  eliminated  by  consulting  page  144,  and 
furthermore,  by  recalling  the  fact  that,  the  energy  discharge 
of  other  areas  is  positive  or  negative  and  not  neutral  as  in 
syphilis  (excepting  psychasthenia) .  It  is  true  however, 
that  if  the  tip  of  the  electrode  is  directly  over  an  artery  or 
vein,  one  may  elicit  the  reaction  of  a  neutral  energy  (in 
syphilis)  but  if  the  frontal  eminence  is  alone  selected,  errors 
of  interpretation  may  be  avoided. 

The  syphilitic  shows  no  polarity  and  it  is  impossible  to 
obtain  sufficient  energy  to  dull  the  stomach  (as  in  the  norm) 
from  the  left  psychomotor  area  in  the  male  and  from  the 
right  psychomotor  area  in  the  female  (page  72). 

Many  cases  of  insanity  examined  by  me  at  the  asylums 
were  found  to  be  cases  of  brain-sjphilis,  and  this  was  notably 
the  case  in  patients  diagnosticated  as  dementia  precox. 


PABASYPHILIS  1  /  O 

The  electronic  test  is  destined  to  serve  of  great  value  in 
the  differentiation  of  a  host  of  mental  maladies.  .Already 
the  serological  diagnosis  of  s}^hilis  bears  results  in  the  pass- 
ing of  paresis.  The  close  relationship  between  s\philis  and 
the  latter  has  always  been  recognized,  but  with  the  distinc- 


v^^^^^^Z2^^^>\ 

PSYC  vtenoTOH 

Vr         AREA 

y'    i^r  POSITIVt   OULlKli,  CNERCY  ON  Ltfl 

vA 

f     L^f  SIDE    m    MALE       .  AND    ME6flTlv£    CN 

v^\ 

/      f/l      Rl&MT       SIDE             .        IN      FEMALE 

\\ 

\Mmm(0    '"^^ 

\ 

/^^ 

MASTOID \ \         / 

MO    DISCHARGE         \ 

2 

OF  OU  L 1  M  0     t  N£  n&f  -\ 

) 

Fig.  56. — Cerebral  sinuses  and  psychomotor  region  (4x6  cm.  in  area  as  elicited 
electronically).  As  a  rule,  only  the  psychomotor  region  (left  side  in  a  normal  male 
and  on  right  side  in  a  normal  female)  yields  a  duling  energy.  There  is  no  energy 
discharge  from  the  mastoid,  a  fact  of  importance  in  eliciting  the  reaction  for  pus. 


tion  however  that  paresis  was  a  paras}'philitic  affection  due 
to  the  indirect  action  of  toxins,  whereas  it  is  now  kno^^Tl  that 
the  treponema  pallidum  is  indirectly  concerned  in  its  pro- 
duction. 

The  passing  of  paras}'philis  emphasizes  the  fact  that, 
within  a  few  weeks  after  the  primary  inoculation,  the 
spirochetes  invade  every  tissue  of  the  body,  and  to  prevent 
spirilloses  of  the  nervous  system  heretofore  designated  as 


174  BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    XERTOUS    DISORDERS 

parasyphilitic,  energetic  treatment  must  be  commenced  at 
the  time  of  the  primar\'  inoculation. 

The  foregoing  suggest  the  value  of  the  electronic  reaction 
in  the  early  diagnosis  of  s\'philis  (page  133). 

The  observations  of  Bolton,  show  that,  in  paralytic 
dementia,  the  brunt  of  the  cortical  lesion  is  borne  by  the 

PREFRONTAL    REGION. 

FamiHal  s}'philitic  infection  in  general  paresis  has 
recently  been  emphasized  by  Haskell,  who  tinds  that  in 
38.18  per  cent,  of  conjugal  mates  of  paretic  patients, 
SA.'philis  was  demonstrable  and  that,  paresis  from  this 
cause  is  more  frequent  than  when  the  infection  is  from 
non-metas}'philitic  sources. 

Dementla.  precox. — A  negatr'e  duling  energy-  is 
obtainable  from  the  frontal  eminences.  The  main  area  of 
wasting  in  dementia  lies  in  the  prefrontal  region  (Bolton). 

Par.\noia. — In  either  sex  the  electronic  reaction  is  as 
follows : 

Right  psychomotor  region — Neutral  duling  energy; 
Left  psychomotor  region — Duling  energy  which  is 
positive  and  negative. 

The  reaction  from  the  latter  area  signifies  that,  the 
energ}'  dulls  the  stomach,  and  that  it  is  dissipated  by  neither 
pole  of  the  bar-magnet  (page  41). 

The  male  and  female  t}'pes  of  polarity  coexist  (epicene 
reaction,  page  115).  No  reaction  is  obtainable  from  the 
frontal  eminences. 

PSYCILA.STHENLA.. — At  a  distance  of  5.6  cm.  on  either  side 
of  the  external  occipital  protuberance,  a  neutral  duling 
energ}'  is  obtainable  in  this  affection  (Fig.  57 j. 

The  writer  has  examined  a  large  number  of  these  patients 
at  various  periods  of  life  and  has  found  the  same  reaction; 
In  consequence  of  which,  he  is  inclined  to  the  belief  that, 


PSVCHASTHEXIA 


175 


psychasthenia  is  congenital  and  due  to  some  inherent 
weakness  or  stigma  in  the  geography  of  the  cerebral  cortex. 
No  definite  line  of  demarcation  exists  between  what  we 
call  normal  and  that  of  confirmed  insanity.  "It  is  impossible 
to  make  of  pathological  states  of  the  mind,  morbid  entities" 
(Dubois.)  The  intensity  of  the  psychasthenic  reaction  varies 
with  the  condition  of  the  subject,  but  the  electronic  reaction 
is  invariably  present. 


Fig.  57. — Electronic  craniogniphy.  i  (A, A,),  Energy  discharge  in  dementia 
precox  and  dementia  paralytica  and  B,  Metopion,  which  yields  an  energy  discharge 
in  colisepsis  and  alcoholism;  2  (A),  Modified  electronic  energy  in  jjaranoia  and  epi- 
lepsy; B,  energy  discharge  in  some  cases  of  hysteria;  C,  energy  discharge  in  neu- 
rasthenia; 3  (XX),  Energy  discharge  in  psychasthenia. 

To  illustrate  the  accuracy  of  diagnosis  in  psychoses 
by  the  electronic  reactions,  the  following  incident  may 
be  cited:  At  the  suggestion  of  Dr.  C.  C.  Beling  (Newark, 
New  Jersey),  the  writer  visited  the  asylum  for  the  insane 
at  Essex  County  in  the  same  State.  The  superintend- 
ent, Dr.  Guy  Payne,  courteously  placed  his  patients 
at  our  disposal.  He  was  requested  to  place  his  patients 
behind  a  screen,  so  the  the  writer  could  be  given  no  clue 
concerning  the  patients  from  whom  the  electronic  re- 
actions were  obtained. 

The  group  of  patients  included  paranoiacs,  epileptics, 
dements,  etc.  One  of  the  physicians  in  attendance  was 
selected  (as  the  subject)  owing  to  his  efficient  stomach 
refle.x. 


176  BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    NERVOUS    DISORDERS 

The  energy  from  the  patients  behind  the  screen  was 
conducted  by  a  long  insulated  cord.  No  error  in  diag- 
nosis was  made.  In  one  patient,  a  chronic  epileptic,  the 
reaction  for  dementia  in  lieu  of  epilepsy  was  elicited. 

The  superintendant  admitted  however,  the  coexis- 
tence of  epilepsy  and  mental  disease,  and  that  the  occur- 
rence of  epilepsy  in  the  subjects  of  dementia  is  not  infre- 
quent.    Alopecia  may  modify  head  reactions  (p.  297). 

Hysteria. — The  author's  conception  of  hysteria  has 
been  discussed  elsewhere.  In  this  affection,  a  reaction  is 
eHcited  (negative  duling  energy  from  the  center  of  the 
sagittal  suture,  Fig.  57),  which  may  be  reproduced  arti- 
ficially by  short  circuiting  the  brain  (page  109). 

When  the  latter  is  effected,  changes  in  the  pulse  are 
noted  (page  109).  In  addition,  the  texdox  reflexes  are 
ACCENTUATED.  Here,  three  stages  may  be  noted;  i.  A 
refractory  period  of  diminished  reflexes  lasting  one  minute 
or  less;  2.  A  refiexophilic  period  during  the  time  of  short 
circuiting;  3.  A  variable  period  of  exaggerated  reflexes 
surviving  the  discontinuance  of  short  circuiting.  It  is  as- 
sumed that  the  cortical  centers  which  act  inhibitorily  in 
restraining  undue  reflexes  are  temporarily  deprived  of  their 
function  by  short  circuiting.  When  short  circuiting  is 
effected  after  the  manner  cited,  one  may  lead  energ}^ 
(sufficient  to  evoke  the  stomach  reflex)  from  a  definite  brain 
area  (Fig.  57).  This  area,  strange  to  say,  corresponds  to 
the  claims  hystericus;  the  supposititious  safet}'  \'ah'e  in 
this  disease. 

Thyroigenous  psychoses. — The  majorit}-  of  patients 
with  hyperthyroidism  suffer  in  some  degree  from  mental 
symptoms.  The  latter  may  prove  to  be  the  frontier  signs  of 
a  psychosis  (intense  and  indefinite  agitation  and  mental 
and  motor  restlessness).  Recurrent  insanity  associated  with 
an  enlarged  thyroid  is  not  infrequent;  the  s}Tnptoms  sub- 


NEOPLASMS  177 

siding  with  diminution  in  the  size  of  the  goitre.  ^lental 
symptoms,  notably  hallucinations,  can  be  produced  in 
susceptible  subjects  by  the  use  of  thyroid  extract. 

Lemel,  attributes  dementia  precox  developing  dur- 
ing puberty  to  an  anomaly  of  the  thyroid  gland,  and 
excellent  results  were  attained  by  thyroid  treatment. 

Now  that  the  functional  activity  of  the  thyroid  can  be 
determined  (page  i6i),  the  implication  of  this  structure  in 
psychoneuroses  is  a  matter  capable  of  solution. 

Luetic  psychoses. — The  mere  electronic  diagnosis  of 
syphilis  may  establish  the  etiology  of  a  psychic  anomaly. 
Syphilis  may  be  the  cause  of  a  congenital  mental  defect, 
retarded  cerebral  development,  hypochondriasis  and  de- 
mentia due  to  arterial  degeneration. 

Pseudo-epilepsy. — Persons  addicted  to  reversed  t>pes 
of  breathing  {respiratory  ataxia)  may  show  the  epileptic 
reaction  (p.  165)  which  disappears  temporarily  when  the 
normal  type  of  respiration  is  resumed. 

neoplasms 

Electronic  pathology. — The  creation  of  a  modern 
pathology  based  on  my  investigations  respecting  the  recog- 
nition of  energy  and  its  polarity  evolved  in  different  diseases 
seems  apposite.  Each  atom  of  our  organism  is  endowed 
with  a  definite  vibration-rate. 

Just  as  there  is  a  "Periodic  Law,"  (page  49)  with  refer- 
ence to  the  periodicity  of  the  atoms  of  the  elements,  so  may 
we  anticipate  a  law  with  relation  to  morbid  processes.  We 
must  not  only  content  ourselves  in  determining  the  energy 
evolved  in  a  quantitative  and  qualitative  direction,  but 
also  determine  its  polarity,  vibration  rate  and  wavemetric 
index. 


178  BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    XERVOUS    DISORDERS 

Roughly,  the  quantitative  factor  is  determined  by  the 
intensity  of  the  stomach  reflex  (retraction  of  the  organ) 
plus  the  distance  the  discharge  of  the  reflex  from  the  source 
of  energy.  The  quaUtatiye  factor  refers  to  the  polarity  of 
the  energ}-. 

All  the  forces  in  nature  are  positive  and  negative.  We 
do  not  know  what  positive  electricity  really  is.  However, 
if  one  conducts  the  energ}-  evolved  from  the  positive  pole  of 
a  Galvanic  current  by  means  of  a  single  cord  to  the  stomach- 
region,  a  stomach  reflex  is  evoked,  and  it  can  be  sho^^■n  that 
the  conveyed  energ}'  is  actually  positive  in  character.  By 
aid  of  the  commutator  one  can  produce  a  negative  form  of 
energ}'. 

A  unit  of  negative  electricity  in  motion  carries  with  it 
some  of  the  surrounding  ether.  It  is  this  bound  ether  plus 
the  moving  negative  unit  which  we  call  mass.  As  before 
remarked,  the  atom  is  a  sphere  of  positive  electrification 
enclosing  negatively  electrified  corpuscles,  and  the  negative 
electricity  of  the  corpuscles  exactly  balances  the  positive 
electricity  of  the  enclosing  sphere. 

We  are  confronted  with  another  problem,  viz.,  the 
arrangement  of  the  corpuscles  in  the  sphere.  The  arrange- 
ment of  the  corpuscles  in  groups  to  form  atoms,  confers  on 
the  latter  their  specific  attributes. 

If,  owing  to  some  external  disturbance,  one  or  more  cor- 
puscles within  the  sphere  is  detached,  then  the  atom  will 
assume  a  positive  charge  owing  to  the  loss  of  a  negative 
corpuscle. 

The  stability  of  an  atom  is  dependent  on  the  number  of 
corpuscles  it  contains. 

WTien  the  stability  of  an  atom  becomes  extreme,  the  cor- 
puscles of  the  outer  ring  may  lie  on  the  surface  of  the  atom 
in  which  case,  it  assumes  a  negative  charge. 


XEOPLASMS  179 

In  other  instances  the  atom  becomes  neither  electro- 
positive nor  electro-negative. 

The  configurations  of  the  corpuscles  in  an  atom  depend 
in  general  on  the  energy  they  contain.  If  the  corpuscles 
rotate  with  a  velocity  beyond  a  critical  period,  they  slowly 
but  surely  lose  their  energy,  and  then  there  occurs  a  sudden 
convulsion  or  explosion  with  the  evolution  of  a  large  quan- 
tity of  kinetic  energ}'. 

When  the  crash  comes,  this  atomic  cataclysm  results  in 
disintegration.  The  writer  fully  realizes  that  he  has  given 
an  incomplete  picture  of  intra-atomic  energ}'^  and  atomic 
disintegration.  His  real  object  in  exploiting  the  electronic 
theory  is  to  account  for  the  augmented  energy  and  changes 
in  the  polarity  of  the  latter  occurring  in  certain  diseases. 

The  molecules  of  our  body  consist  of  more  than  a  thou-    fyi^iT'Co  S^*"^^ 
sand  atoms,  and  the  atoms  themselves  are  grouped  and  re-  f- 

grouped  and  then  grouped  again,  in  such  a  way  as  to  make  /2/,Zyi/iy<L 
the  molecules  of  the  body  highly  mobile  and  finite  unstable. 
The  slightest  external  disturbance  will  change  the  stability 
of  the  atom,  and  it  will  assume  a  positive,  neutral  or  negative 
discharge  of  energy. 

With  the  discovery  of  radium,  a  new  })roperty  of  matter 
known  as  radioactivity  was  discovered.  It  meant  that 
matter  possessed  the  property  of  emitting  rays. 

Then  followed  a  differentiation  of  the  rays  into  alpha 
(positively  charged),  beta  (negatively  charged)  and  gamma 
(neutral)   rays. 

My  physiologic  reaction  (stomach  and  other  visceral 
reflexes),  shows  that  radioactivity  is  not  limited  to  radio- 
active elements,  but  that  it  is  a  universal  property  of  matter. 

Sgier'",  presents  an  electric  conception  in  the  growth 
of  neoplasms.  Metabolism,  he  argues,  is  the  result  of 
tissue  currents  clue  to  the  chemical  dissociation  of  mole- 


180  BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    XERVOVS    DISOEDERS 

cules  and  atoms  into  negative  and  positive  ions  and 
electrons.  When  the  equiHbrium  (isoelectric)  is  dis- 
turbed, anaboHsm  causes  a  positive  and  catabolism,  a 
negative  electric  condition  of  the  parts. 

The  vis  medicatrix  of  a  granulating  wound  is  sim[)ly 
the  electric  current  generated  by  the  difference  in  poten- 
tial between  the  injured  and  healthy  tissues. 

"Applying  the  foregoing  to  cancer  or  other  tumors, 
the  deduction  leads  to  the  following  conclusion  or  theory. 
A  traumatism  (mechanical,  chemical,  or  thermal) 
exerted  on  a  part  of  an  organ  or  a  tissue,  devitalizes  the 
tissue  affected,  lowering  its  vitality  (altering  its  metab- 
olism) and  consequently  generating  because  of  the 
difference  in  potential,  an  electric  current  or  vis  con- 
servatrix. 

This  electrical  stimulation  causes  an  increased 
growth  of  cells,  which  by  their  very  presence  further 
lower  the  \dtality  (by  the  added  pressure  which  they 
exert  on  the  blood  supply,  etc.,)  and  thereby  increase 
the  electrical  discrepancy  (and  consequently  the  strength 
of  the  current)  and  augment  or  hasten  the  metabolism 
of  the  growth. 

It  is  a  well  known  fact  that  cancer  flourishes  only 
after  forty  years  of  age,  when  the  vitality  is  beginning 
to  wane,  and  when  the  recuperative  powers  are  no  longer 
far  in  excess  of  the  injury,  so  that  the  part  of  the  lowered 
metabolism  has  a  chance  to  start  (and  thus  add  its 
weight  to  the  metabolic  discrepancy)  at  a  time  when 
any  organ  or  tissue  that  has  recently  or  even  remotely 
been  injured  or  devitalized  in  any  way  (whether  directly 
by  traumatism  or  irritation  or  indirectly,  by  interference 
with  its  nutrition  or  blood  supply)  has  a  poorer  chance 
of  a  restitutio  ad  integrum  than  in  early  life,  because  of  the 
general  senile  changes  in  blood  vessels  and  tissues.  Is  it 
not  possible  that  these  senile  changes  may  be  reduced  to  a 
chemical  basis,  whereby  new  chemical  combinations, 
(ions  and  electrons)  are  formed,  producing  a  state  of 
metabolic  equilibrium  which  is  more  readily  altered  or 


NEOPLASMS  181 

destroyed,  and  hence  creating  a  condition  in  which  these 
electric  currents  are  more  easily  generated,  and  counter- 
acted or  destroyed  with  great  difficulty,  if  at  all? 

Pursuing  the  same  course  of  explanation  further, 
Sgier  regards  metastasis  merely  as  a  process  of  autoinoc- 
ulation  with  the  products  of  metabolism  from  the  pri- 
mary growth,  which  are  taken  up  and  transported  by 
the  lymphatics.  At  the  point  where  they  lodge,  the 
tissues  undergo  chemical  alteration,  with  the  production 
of  lowered  vitality,  in  turn  becoming  negative  to  their 
surrounding  tissues  and  stimulating  cell  proliferation  as 
at  the  original  focus.  Sgier  offers  the  foregoing  hypothe- 
sis purely  as  an  hypothesis  which  may  possibly  offer  a 
clue  to  others,  or  which  may  stimulate  others  to  profit- 
able research  along  similar  lines." 

Carcinoma. — A  carcinoma  }'ields  a  positive  duling 
energ}'  when  a  male  stomach  is  employed  for  the  reaction 
(page  43). 

The  method  of  procedure  in  diagnosis  may  be  illustrated 
by  the  citation  of  three  cases: 

A  patient  has  only  recently  observed  a  \aginal  discharge. 
One  end  of  a  conducting  cord  was  fixed  by  the  patient  in  the 
region  of  the  lower  border  of  the  stomach*  which  was  pre- 
viously defined  by  percussion  and  its  border  marked  })y  a 
dermograph. 

The  other  metallic  end  (which  is  insulated  except  at 
its  extremity  which  is  brought  into  apposition  with  the  skin) 
was  gradually  passed  over  the  abdomen  until  a  site  was 
attained  which  yielded  stomach  dulness.  The  latter  was 
demonstrated  just  above  the  sympliysis  pubis  occupying  an 
area  about  the  size  of  a  dime. 

*This  metallic  tip  may  be  fixed  to  the  skin  by  means  ot  adhesive  plaster.  Tlie 
patient  must  stand  on  a  flooring  of  wood  or  other  non-insulated  substance  and 
face  West. 


182  BIODrXAMGXOSIS    OF    NERVOUS    DISORDERS 

The  polarity  of  the  energ}'  discharge  was  found  to  be 
positive.* 

Dr.  C.  G.  Levison,  made  the  gynecologic  examination 
and  found  a  pohpoid  mass  protruding  from  the  ccnix  uteri, 
which  on  examination  by  the  pathologist.  Dr.  Dannenbaum, 
was  found  to  be  a  perithelioma.  At  the  operation  (per- 
formed by  Dr.  \\  G.  A'ecki),  the  cervix  was  densely  infil- 
trated and  indurated  throughout  its  entirety.  The  body  of 
the  uterus  was  not  implicated. 

A  woman  occasionally  passes  blood  in  the  urine  with 
symptoms  suggestive  of  vesical  hematuria. 

A  positive  discharge  of  energ\-  may  be  led  off  at  a  point 
to  the  left  side  one  inch  above  the  symphysis  pubis  as  revealed 
by  stomach  dulness  plus  retraction  of  the  lower  border  of 
the  organ.  A  cystoscopic  examination  by  Dr.  V.  G.  \'ecki, 
revealed  a  supposititious  malignant  growth  at  the  left 
ureteral    opening.! 

One  could  multiply  such  records  in  carcinoma  and  other 
affections  corroborated  by  necropsy,  skiagrams,  operations 
and  histologic  examinations.  Thus,  Dr.  Geo.  O.  Jarvis, 
writes;  "Diagnosticated  cancer  of  the  uterus  which  was 
confirmed  at  the  operation.  It  ga\-e  little  evidence  of  its 
presence  beyond  the  electronic  reaction.'' 

In  the  diagnosis  of  \-isceral  malignancy,  there  are  at 
least  eleven  diagnostic  methods  ranging  from  the  anti- 
tr},-psinic  properties  of  the  blood  to  the  meiostagmin 

*The  polarit\-  of  energy  may  be  determined  by  a  bar-magnet.  If  dulness  of 
the  stomach  is  eUcited  by  conveyed  energ}"  from  the  morbid  site,  have  an  assistant 
or  the  patient  hold  first  one  end  marked  X  (positive)  and  then  the  other  end  marked 
S  (negative  pole)  in  the  direction  of  the  stomach  during  percussion.  If  the  dulness 
persists  with  the  X  pole  and  is  dissipated  by  the  S  pole,  the  energy  conveyed  is 
positive.    The  opposite  also  holds  good. 

jSLx  weeks  after  transference  of  autogenous  energy  (neutral  energy  from  the 
epigastrium)  to  the  site  of  the  lesion,  a  cj'stoscopic  examination  by  Dr.  \'ecki, 
revealed  the  disappearance  of  the  bladder  tumor. 


NEOPLASMS  183 

test.  It  is  not  my  purpose  to  deprecate  these  methods 
as  impracticable  or  unreliable,  but  to  emphasize  the 
fact  that,  the  methods  aim  at  generalized  in  lieu  of 
localized  diagnoses. 

My  observations  on  polarity  seem  to  clarify  se\'eral 
problematic  questions  concerning  neoplasms.  "The  vast 
assemblages  of  atoms  comprising  the  heaviest  atoms  are 
unstable.  As  their  kinetic  energ}-  decreases  the  aggregation 
explodes  and  the  corpuscles  rearrange  themselves  with  the 
evolution  of  energ\'  and  the  projection  of  some  of  the  prod- 
ucts of  the  rearrangement."  The  slightest  external  distur- 
bance will  alter  the  stability  of  the  atom.  In  other  words, 
IRRITATION  (page  185)  is  the  most  frequent  etiologic  factor 
in  carcinoma.  At  the  period  of  life  when  neoplasms  develop 
most  frequently,  one  finds  a  decrease  in  the  discharge  of 
energy. 

If  we  apprehend  malignancy  from  the  view  point  of  the 
physicist,  one  must  assume  that  the  discharged  energy-  is 
due  to  chemical  dissociation  of  atoms  into  negative  and  posi- 
tive ions  and  electrons. 

A  tissue  at  rest  is  in  a  condition  of  electric  ecjuilibrium 
(isoelectric). 

If  this  equilibrium  is  disturbed  by  some  traumatic  factor, 
a  difference  of  potential  is  established  and  the  altered  tissue 
becomes  electronically  positive  to  the  normal  (stomach 
reflex).  The  sensitive  living  cells  are  at  the  mercy  of  their 
environment,  and  this  refers  in  all  cogency  to  changes  in 
the  constituent  elements  of  the  fluids  in  which  the)'  are 
bathed. 

The  beneficent  action  of  radium  on  new  growths  is  not 
explained. 

The  gamma  or  neutral  rays  are  the  most  efficient  in  re- 
estabhshing  a  normal  cell-balance  in  carcinomata. 


184  BIODYXAMGXaSIS    OF    XERVOUS    DISORDEES 

Cancer  developing  in  people  who  li\-e  together  {cancer 
a  deux)  suggests  contagion. 

Just  as  radium  confers  radioactivity  on  other  substances, 
so  may  a  cancerous  person  by  induction  alter  the  polarity 
of  another  individual. 

Thus,  if  the  energy  from  a  cancer  is  conveyed  to  the  stom- 
ach of  a  normal  individual,  the  stomach-dulness  of  the  latter 
may  persist  for  some  time  after  the  source  of  energy  is 
removed,  and  it  will  be  found  to  possess  a  positive  polarity. 

This  RETENTiviTY  OF  DULNESS  is  characteristic  when  any 
energy^  of  high  voltage  is  carried  to  the  stomach  region.  It 
persists  for  a  variable  period  in  cancer  until  the  negative 
energ}^  from  a  bar-magnet  is  conveyed  to  the  stomach  or, 
if  the  energy  was  primarily  neutral,  it  may  be  dissipated 
with  either  pole. 

In  CARCINOMATOSIS  (generalization  of  cancerous  growths), 
the  arteries  which  in  the  norm  yield  a  negati\'e  energ}', 
demonstrate  a  positive  energ}\ 

Suggestive  of  a  carcinoma  somewhere  in  the  organism 
is  apolarity  (page  115).  Polarity  is  maintained  in  chronic 
inflammations  and  sarcoma. 

Summary.- — i.  The  electronic  diagnosis  of  cancer  is  an 
early  sign.  Cancer  in  its  early  stage  irrespective  of  its  locali- 
zation is  apparently  an  insignificant  lesion  (Bloodgood), 
hence  the  importance  of  an  early  diagnosis. 

The  condition  in  question  corresponds  to  what  was  once 
called  the  pre-cancerous  stage  which  is  in  reality  cancer 
without  positive  signs. 

Morbid  cell-activity  may  temporarily  discharge  a  posi- 
tive energ}^  as  I  have  occasionally  observed  in  gastric  and 
duodenal  ulcer  and  in  chronic  inflammations,  but  this 
variety  of  energy  ceases  when  the  condition  is  improved. 


NEOPLASMS  1S5 

If  the  skin  is  artificially  irritated,  a  positive  energy 
may  be  withdrawn  from  the  irritated  area,  and  this 
energy  discharge  may  last  for  hours  in  elderly  persons. 
Any  irritated  area  will  yield  the  same  reaction  hence, 
the  liability  of  error  in  the  differentiation  of  this,  and 
the  carcinomatous  reaction. 

With  the  sphygmobiometer  however,  the  pulse  is 
arrested  at  15,  (index)  in  chronic  inflammations  and  at 
6,   in   carcinoma. 

Like  indices  in  the  two  conditions  will  likewise  pro- 
duce the  stomach  reflex. 

The  irritated  skin  area  will  no  longer  discharge 
energy  if  the  negative  pole  of  a  bar-magnet  is  directed 
for  several  seconds  to  the  area  in  question,  or  the  latter 
is  subjected  to  the  energy  discharge  of  EOSIN  (page  207). 

The  foregoing  suggests  an  electronic  explanation  for 
the  creation  of  at)'j:)ic  epithelial  proliferation  and  a 
prophylactic  procedure  in  all  foci  of  irritation; — the 
local  employment  of  eosin.  If  the  skin  is  exposed  for  a 
a  few  seconds  to  the  A' -rays,  a  positive  discharge  of 
energy  may  be  obtained  from  the  exposed  area  for  a  var- 
iable period  of  time.  In  this  way  the  storage  capacity  of 
the  skin  may  account  for  the  etiology  of  the  rays  in  cancer. 

The  present  morphologic  conception  of  a  neoplasm,  is 
destined  to  be  supplanted  by  an  electronic  conception  when 
energy  discharge,  will  signalize  a  tendency  toward  the 
development  of  a  neoplasm. 

2.  The  energ}^  discharge  in  cancer  is  positive  and  pro- 
vokes the  stomach  reflex  of  contraction.  The  degree  of 
malignancy  may  be  roughly  gauged  b>-  the  amplitude  of 
retraction  of  the  lower  border  of  the  stomach. 

3.  The  electronic  test  localizes  with  exactitude  the  area 
involved  and  metastases  if  present,  may  be  demonstrated. 

4.  At  the  time  of  the  operation,  the  electronic  test  may 
be  employed  to  indicate  the  extent  of  invasion  and  to  show 
that  the  involved  tissues  have  been  extirj^ated. 


186  BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    XERVOUS    DISORDERS 

5.  It  is  best  to  employ  another  subject  in  executing  the 
test  and  to  select  one  in  whom  the  stomach  reflex  is  normal 
and  not  easily  exhausted. 

6.  In  eliciting  the  electronic  reaction  proximit}'  of  the 
subject  to  intense  light  must  be  avoided;  light  being  a  form 
of  energ}'  is  capable  in  itself  of  e\'oking  the  stomach  reflex. 

7.  When  pain  is  present,  a  neutral  energ}'  may  be 
elicited  (page  164).  The  energ}'  from  cancer  can  produce 
stomach  dulness  even  though  it  traverses  glass  or  other 
insulator  (page  124). 

8.  In  testing  for  normal  or  abnormal  energ}',  the  subject 
must  be  grounded  (either  patient  or  subject  on  whom  the 
test  is  made).  If  the  patient  or  the  subject  stands  on  insu- 
lated material  (porcelain,  varnished  floor,  glass,  etc.),  no 
stomach  reflex  is  obtainable.  The  latter  is  important  when 
the  tests  are  executed  in  an  operating  room  with  a  floor  of 
porcelain  tiling.  In  such  instances  the  subject  and  patient 
must  be  grounded  by  a  single  wire  from  the  foot  to  a  con- 
venient faucet  or  radiator  (page  35). 

9.  The  presence  of  fluid  in  the  stomach  or  bladder 
yields  a  neutral  discharge  of  energ}',  hence  these  organs  must 
be  empty  before  conclusions  are  formulated. 

10.  The  process  of  elimination  must  be  exercised  in 
ever>^  possible  direction.  Thus,  a  kidney  which  yields  in 
the  norm  a  positive  energ}',  may  simulate  a  neoplasm  if 
luxated. 

11.  The  carcinomatous  energ}'  conducted  in  the  usual 
way  to  the  stomach  region  not  only  produces  stomach  dul- 
ness but  also  sigmoid  dulness  (page  135). 

12.  The  vibrod}'namometer  shows  the  constant  vibra- 
tor}^ rate  in  cancer  at  50  Ohms.  Transitorv'  dulness  may 
occur  during  the  time  the  index  of  the  scale  is  shifted  but 
the  dulness  is  only  persistent  at  50. 


NEOPLASMS  187 

In  differential  diagnosis  place  the  index  of  the  scale  at 
50  Ohms,  then  any  dulness  elicited  from  the  stomach  is 
caused  by  carcinomatous  energy. 

13.  The  voltage  of  the  latter  is  usually  very  high  and 
varies  from  2  to  17  Ohms.  The  voltage  bears  a  definite 
relation  to  the  grade  of  malignancy.  Diminution  in  the 
voltage  demonstrates  amelioration. 

14.  In  mammary  carcinomata  overlying  the  heart,  an 
error  in  diagnosis  may  ensue.  The  energy  from  the  left 
ventricle  is  negative  and  may  neutralize  the  positive  car- 
cinomatous energy.  If  the  energv'  in  a  condition  like  this  is 
conve}ed  through  a  non-conductor,  the  non-conveyance  of 
normal  energy  will  not  interfere  with  the  elicitation  of  the 
stomach  reflex  provoked  by  the  carcinomatous  energy. 

15.  Augmented  activity  of  the  mammae  '  (lactation) 
yields  no  duling  energ}%  hence  this  physiologic  phase  is 
negligible  in  electronic  diagnosis. 

16.  The  carcinomatous  energ}^  may  be  so  intense  as  to 
cause  stomach  retraction  approximating  the  liver  (page  39) 
and  unless  this  fact  is  recalled,  no  stomach  dulness  is  demon- 
strable. \Vlien  there  is  any  doubt,  the  electrode  must  be 
held  primarily  several  inches  from  the  energy  source  and  if 
no  stomach  dulness  is  in  evidence,  the  electrode  may  finally 
be  brought  into  apposition  with  the  source  of  energy. 

Polarity  reaction. — The  polarity  of  energy  is  modi- 
fied by  the  aural  polarity  (page  79).  If  the  psychomotor 
regions  are  short  circuited  (page  109),  the  polarity  say  of 
cancer,  is  the  same  whether  the  stomach  or  liver  reflex  is 
employed — A  negative  duling  energy.  In  children  (no 
polarity),  cancer  energ}^  is  negative  (stomach  or  liver)  and 
in  females  (reverse  polarity  of  male),  cancer  energy  is  nega- 
tive (stomach  reflex)  or  positive  (liver  reflex). 

Sarcoma. — This  yields  a  duling  energy  which  is  positive 


188  BIODYXAMGXOSIS    OF    XERVOUS    DISORDERS 

and  negative,  /.  c,  neither  pole  of  the  bar-magnet  dissipates 
the  stomach  dubiess  during  the  time  the  Sarcomatous  Energy 
is  conveyed.  The  energ\-  traverses  a  non-conductor.  No 
sigmoid  duhiess  is  produced  (page  135). 

A  GLIOMA  yields  the  same  reaction  as  sarcoma.  This 
reaction  establishes  electronically,  the  identity  of  the 
growths. 

Comments  ox  electronic  dl\gnosis. — Dr.  George 
Starr  White, '^  comments  as  follows:  "The  electronic 
method  of  diagnosis  and  treatment  may  mean  that  we  have 
found  a  method  of  curing  many  diseases  that  have  been 
considered  incurable.  The  fact  that  the  polarity  of  radio- 
active energ}'  is  changed,  proves  that  we  must  bring  about 
normal  polarity  before  the  disease  can  be  eradicated.  The 
method  has  opened  up  a  new  field  for  research  in  diagnosis 
and  in  treatment.  Now,  the  etiolog}'  of  many  obscure  com- 
plaints can  be  determined,  and  we  can  see  reasons  for  many 
cures,  and  for  many  remedial  measures,  that  have  been  em- 
ployed empirically.  The}-  can  now  be  applied  in  a  scientific 
way,  and  with  a  definite  object  in  mind.  The  electronic 
methods  of  diagnosis  have  been  extensively  tried  by  some  of 
the  most  trustworthy  medical  observers." 

Dr.  Chas.  R.  Clapp  (Los  .Angeles),  referring  to  his  son 
whom  I  saw  in  consultation  with  Dr.  James  Ward,  of  this 
City,  comments  as  follows:  "With  your  electronic  test  you 
defined  two  areas  of  pus  near  the  sigmoid  and  anterior  to  the 
left  kidney.  The  autopsy  demonstrated  as  correct,  your 
clinical  findings." 

A  patient  seen  in  consultation  with  Dr.  Chas.  A'.  Cross, 
(San    Francisco),    had    obscure    hepatic    symptoms.      The 
electronic  test  gave  a  reaction  for  pus  at  a  definite  area. 
Pus  was  aspirated  in  the  latter  situation. 
1  Dr.  E.  ]M.  Perdue,  in  charge  of  the  largest  laboratory  for 


NEOPLASMS  189 

cancer  research  in  America,  refers  to  the  subject  as  follows: 
*'The  work  of  Abrams,  on  human  energ}'  is  so  exact,  and  so 
true  that  it  is  aheady  working  a  revolution  in  the  practice 
of  the  healing  art.  In  our  University,  instruments  of  pre- 
cision have  been  constructed  by  which  we  demonstrate, 
measure,  control  and  test  the  intensity  and  polarity  of  the 
emanation  of  human  energy.  These  methods  have  been  con- 
firmed by  microscopical  examinations  of  the  tumors.  I 
have  never  seen  the  Abrams  reaction  fail  or  be  misleading. 
I  can  say  the  same  for  the  syphilitic  reaction  and  reaction 
for  the  predetermination  of  sex. 

These  methods  are  so  simple,  scientific,  exact  and  practi- 
cal as  to  make  the  methods  of  the  laboratory,  obsolete  and 
historic  in  medicine." 

In  a  personal  communication.  Dr.  George  O.  Jarvis, 
reports  a  large  number  of  cases  in  which  cancer  was  diag- 
nosed by  the  electronic  test,  and  confirmed  at  the  operation 
and  subsequent  microscopical  examinations.  He  places 
absolute  reliance  on  the  electronic  reactions  in  tubercu- 
losis AND  SYPHILIS.     Dr.  Prouty,  presents  the  following: 

"Farmer  had  a  history  of  lumbago  over  a  period  of  one 
year.  At  the  clinic  of  Dr.  Abrams  in  191 3,  the  latter  by  aid 
of  his  electronic  test  elicited  the  reaction  of  sarcoma  which 
was  localized  by  the  test  in  question.  A  subsequent  radio- 
graph verified  the  exact  location  of  the  growth.  The  patient 
died  Feb.  7,  1914,  from  a  sarcomatous  metastasis  in  the 
brain." 

Dr.  J.  A.  Elliot  (Chicago),  presents  the  following: 

"Respecting  the  patient  whom  you  examined,  and  in 
whom  the  general  s}philitic  electronic  reaction  was  obtained 
at  the  time  of  the  primary  sore,  permit  me  to  say  that  the 
patient  is  now  manifesting  the  t>pical  secondary  symptoms. 
You  will  recall  this  patient  no  doubt  by  the  fact  that,  you 


190  BIODYXAMGXOSIS  OF  NERVOUS  DISORDERS 

located  the  site  of  the  priman'  sore  during  the  time  the 
patient  was  behind  a  screen,  and  had  no  previous  knowledge 
of  the  site  of  the  lesion." 

In  the  latest  edition  (1915)  of  his  classic  monograph 
(Sexual  Impotence,  \V.  B.  Saunders  &  Co.),  Dr.  \\  G. 
Vecki,  whose  international  reputation  as  a  sx-philologist 
is  conceded,  refers  to  the  marvelous  results  which  he  has 
•^^tnessed  (and  controlled  by  serological  tests)  in  the  diag- 
nosis of  syphilis  by  the  "Electronic  Tests  of  Abrams". 

In  the  early  application  of  the  electronic  tests,  several 
errors  were  perpetrated  notably  in  the  differentiation  of 
chronic  inflammations,  cholecystitis,  uterine  aft'ections,  etc. 
These  errors  can  now  be  eliminated  by  establishing  the 
vibrator}-  rate  (increase  of)  etc. 

In  a  patient  seen  with  Dr.  Ward,  there  was  an  electronic 
reaction  for  carcinoma  just  below  the  splenic  flexure  of  the 
colon,  with  a  low  voltage  (2  25  Ohm).  The  laparotomy 
for  another  purpose  revealed  at  the  area  in  question  a  stric- 
ture of  the  descending  colon  fiUed  with  fecal  matter. 

WTien  a  carcinomatous  reaction  is  obtained,  we  cannot 
deny  a  condition  preceding  the  neoplasm  and  favoring  its 
development.  The  locus  of  a  neoplasm  is  determined  by 
irritation  which  conciliates  at\-pic  growth. 

WTien  a  reaction  suggesting  a  neoplasm  is  obtained  from 
chronic  inflammations  and  ulcers  (page  184),  immediate  con- 
tact of  the  electrode  with  the  part  must  be  established.  In 
neoplasms  with  high  voltages,  the  writer  has  obtained  reac- 
tions when  the  electrode  was  at  a  distance  of  12  inches  from 
the  site  of  malignancy. 

Acute  inflammatory  conditions  clinically  suggestive 
of  cancer  have  been  referred  to  by  Moynihan  as,  "Mimi- 
crv  of  malignant  disease." 


ELECTRONIC    REACTIONS 


191 


tfi  _  y 

■5       V 


o 


b  t« 


go  aJ 
^   rt   > 

<:/2  g  i; 


r?Td 

>, 

•c'o 

W) 

h     Clj 

tH 

"o  c 

c 

a-" 

< 

AHOXvaaiA 


jxaaNLi 

a3X3K3AVA\ 


w 


o  ° 


o  ~ 


S  >.  >.  «i 


g  !^  p  oj  c  'S  X  £ 

1)  -?  "~  "^ 


O    CJ 


M  rt 


tc  o 


O  j2 


s-giiss^ 


CI,  o  c  2  tjj     _^ 


tl 


c  £i  2  fe  g  S  c^O 
-3_g  E  £  fe  ?i      c 

Sacrtao.Soi- 


c  i-  y  £  Is 

■^  e  S'  -^  !=! 

.5  ^  <^  >-   rt 

S.  —  '^  jj 

r-  O    C  O    1> 

g  o .  2  g  £^ 


-t;-;^  rt  p 


.-E 


O    O    o 


u,    c  •—  •-■    ^3 


O, 


'>'. 

0 

H 

<: 

«: 

S 

0 

y? 

u 

^^ 

M 

«  ^ 

< 

tCHH 

U 

u 

c 
.2 

0 

0 

c^e^ 

u 

OS 

aj 

r1 

(li 

S 

rt 

E 

Ui 

0 

c 

rt 

rt 

-rt 

b 

oT 

c 

.1:    rt    ^  ^ 
-    -    >-  -S 


.2  rt 

C^     L^     U< 


g  o  o 
c  35  E 

^  S  E 


-Co. 


O  -2  2 
>    rt   t/3 


5-c:E  2 

5  8  &  - 

o  c  o  o 

C    c    O  -J 
"    O    >>  O 

S  c  S  ^ 


E  E 


^  rt  b£.g 


S    tr.    ^  ^ 

■^  Ji  c  i; 


so 

^% 

r. 

c 
E 

— 

-^ 

>> 

If 

0 

j= 

w 

, 

>. 

P 

rt 

0 

> 

ttl 

>.  c 

F= 

c 

3 

>.  n 

Q 

i 

•7 

fi 

a 

J= 

■a 

ass 


i-  i:  H 


0!  O  rt 

2£H 


•a  j=- 


S  o  c 

|-^   3 
*"  «»« 

^^-& 

O  Sg  « 

C  1) 

u      aS 
«  fe  " 
I^E-o 


ic  •-  c  ^ 

4J    .«•?■ 


192  BIODYXAMGXOSIS  OF  XERVOUS  DISORDERS 

J'^ide  SPLANCHXo-DiAGXosis  (page  291). 

These  energy  reactions  are  obtainable  through  a  non- 
conductor (page  125),  excepting  the  reactions  in  splanchno- 
diagnosis  (page  292)  and  chronic  inflammation. 


NEW  CONCEPTS  IN   TREATMENT  193 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

NEW   CONCEPTS   IN   TREATMENT. 

Bactericidal  therapy. — In  a  paper  presented  to  the 
^^San  Francisco  County  Medical  Society,^''  August  9,  1904, 
the  author  referring  to  phthisiotherapy,  made  the  follow- 
ing comments  which  have  in  no  wise  been  modified  by  time. 

"The  physician  who  rehes  on  the  healing  power  of 
nature  in  phthisis  displays  his  erudition.  By  so  doing 
the  discerning  physician  is  afforded  an  opportunity  of 
knowing  what  not  to  do,  a  feat  often  more  difficult  than 
doing,  and  enables  him  to  apply  the  highest  principles 
of  the  therapeutic  art.  The  patient  must  be  put  ill  na- 
ture's place  and  work  as  nature  works.  The  nearer  and 
truer  he  is  placed  to  Mother  Earth,  and  the  closer  his 
intercourse  with  nature,  the  more  certain  he  is  to  attain 
health,  for  "Diseased  nature  oftentimes  breaks  forth  in 
strange  eruptions."  The  medical  treatment  of  tubercu- 
losis is  a  monument  to  sepulchred  theories.  Specific 
medication  in  phthisis  is  therapeutic  optimism  not  yet 
realized,  and  the  so-called  specifics  are  substances  which 
decrease  in  number  with  the  advancement  of  medicine. 
The  tale  of  a  consumptive  does  not  begin  and  end  with 
•  the  tubercle  bacilli.  Germs  are  the  specific  constituents 
of  dirt,  the  complete  annihilation  of  which  can  only  be 
attained  by  cleanliness,  although  a  modified  though 
incomplete  procedure  is  known  as  antisepsis.  Drugs 
have  been  invented  for  the  patient  and  the  physician — 
to  relieve  the  former  of  obeying  the  laws  of  hygiene,  and 
the  latter  of  inculcating  them.  To  select  judiciously 
among  the  old  drugs  is  equal  to  inventing  new  ones. 

Bactericides  may  be  effectual  in  the  laboratory,  but 
not  at  the  bedside.    There  is  a  vast  difference  between  a 


194  XEW    COXCEPTS    IX    TREATMEXT 

culture  tube  of  bacilli  and  a  patient.  The  treatment  of 
phthisis  is  not  based  on  the  destruction  of  the  bacilli, 
but  in  fortifying  the  organism  against  the  bacillar}- 
invasion.  In  other  words,  our  aim  is  to  pro\-ide  defensive 
works  against  hostile  attacks.  We  must  cherish  the 
stomach  of  the  consumptive  as  our  most  powerful  ally 
in  the  treatment  of  his  disease ;  for  if  we  are  inconsistent 
in  dietetics  and  injudicious  in  medication,  we  will  have 
created  a  foe  incapable  of  subjection.  If  we  are  unable 
to  cure  an  accessible  tuberculous  lesion,  like  lupus,  by 
means  of  bactericides,  is  it  not  chimerical  to  assume,  or 
even  hope,  that  such  agents  "vstH  ever  be  effectual  in 
pulmonar}'  tuberculosis?  The  latter  statement  does  not 
refer  to  the  marvelous  bactericidal  properites  of  the 
solar  rays.  Accept  as  a  paradigm,  lar^Tigeal  tuberculosis, 
an  easily  accessible  region  (larjmx)  for  local  medication, 
and  we  obser^-e  that  the  great  variety  of  treatment  sug- 
gested eloquently  proclaims  the  futihty  of  drug  delirium. 
Lar}Tigologists  are  constrained  to  conclude  that  laryn- 
geal tuberculosis  can  be  healed  without  any  local  treat- 
ment, and  that  the  chief  method  of  cure  is  the  hygienic- 
dietetic  treatment.  Of  many  of  the  recent  remedies  em- 
ployed, one  may  say  of  them,  as  does  Lindsay,  of  intra- 
tracheal and  intravenous  injections,  that  "They  have  at 
least  the  merit  of  courage,  not  to  say  audacity."  Let 
us  retreat  from  the  delirium  of  new  drugs  which  threaten 
to  annihilate  rational  therapeutics.  Let  us  prove  loyal 
to  the  old,  yet  not  insensible  to  but  \\-isely  discriminate 
in  the  emplojTnent  of  new  drugs.  Prescriptions  should 
be  written  "With  a  pen  of  iron  and  with  the  point  of  a 
diamond." 

With  our  scientific  proclivities  and  a  test  tube,  we  are 
drifting  back  to  the  Skodaic  pessimism  when  Skoda,  pro- 
claimed his  contempt  for  treatment  as  follows:  "We  can 
diagnose  disease,  describe  it,  and  get  a  grasp  of  it,  but  we 
dare  not  by  any  means  expect  to  cure  it."  From  the  same 
school  of  therapeutic  nihilism,  we  recall  Hebra,  who  said 


VITAL    SOIL  195 

that  ten  thousand  cases  were  required  before  a  therapeutic 
opinion  could  be  justly  formed.  Toxicotherapy  is  substituted 
for  pharmacotherapy  by  our  deriders  and  our  therapeutic 
methods  have  been  referred  to  as  a  ''Meditation  on  death," 
as  Asclepiades,  said  of  the  Hippocratic  treatise  on  thera- 
peutics. "To  obviate  this  tendency  to  death,"  as  the  old 
therapeutists  put  it,  can  only  be  made  the  object  of  intelli- 
gent effort  with  a  just  regard  for  progress  and  the  elimination 
of  traditional  lore. 

Moliere,  the  most  trenchant  of  satirists  in  customs  medi- 
cal, asserted  that,  the  authorities  of  his  time  exacted  an 
oath  from  medical  candidates  that  they  would  never  alter 
the  practice  of  physic.  Those  "in  authority?"  who  regard 
innovation  from  the  viewpoint  of  heresy,  recalls  the  bon 
mot  by  a  witty  compatriot  of  Talleyrand,  who,  in  com- 
menting on  the  conservatism  of  the  latter  said,  if  Talley- 
rand, had  been  present  at  the  creation,  he  would  have  ex- 
claimed; "Good  gracious!  chaos  will  be  destroyed." 

"He  who  dreads  new  remedies  must  abide  old  evils." 

The  vital  soil. — Without  a  propitious  substratum, 
"The  seed  falls  by  the  w^ayside."  Germs  thriving  on  certain 
media  perish  or  cease  to  grow  on  other  media. 

"If  we  could  succeed  in  limiting  more  precisely  the  con- 
ditions under  which  certain  bacteria  can  exist,  mainly  on 
the  basis  of  more  exact  studies  on  the  composition  of  the 
medium  then  we  should  undoubtedly  be  in  a  position  to 
employ  more  objective  therapeutic  methods."  (Abder- 
halden^^). 

Any  change  of  a  nutritive  medium  deprives  certain 
organisms  of  their  means  of  existence.  In  infection  with  the 
trichophyton  fungi,  spontaneous  cure  is  effected  at  puberty 
owing  to  some  modification  in  the  cutaneous  soil. 

After  this  fashion,  cure  is  often  achieved;  not  bv  the 


196  NEW    COXCEPTS    IX    TREATMEXT 

anniliilation  of  adventitious  cells  which  subsist  on  the  organ- 
ism, nor  by  bactericidal  action,  but  merely  by  modifjdng 
the  \dtal  soil. 

Humoral  patholog}',  the  diatheses  and  the  habitus  must 
be  revived. 

An  attempt  in  this  direction  has  been  made  elsewhere  by 
the  author  in  his  reference  to  phylogenetic  diseases. 

The  idiosyncratic  reaction  to  certain  drugs  or  foods  is  an 
allergic  condition  precipitated  by  the  character  of  the  soil. 

The  foregoing  supersensibility  is  likewise  observed  in 
Addison's  disease  which  brings  about  a  supersentive- 
ness  to  arsenical  compounds.  Supersensibility  is  also 
noted  as  a  local  reaction  in  the  focal  tuberculin  reaction 
and  in  sAphilis  (Herxheimer  reaction). 

Microbial  dermatoses,  are  influenced  by  age,  habits  and 
a  multitude  of  other  factors  and  cure  is  only  achieved  by 
modifying  the  soil  and  improving  the  general  health. 

In  treatment,  the  primary  effort  is  to  modify  the  con- 
ditions which  caused  the  disease. 

Improvement  in  general  health  improves  recover}^  from 
a  definite  disease. 

"The  attempt  to  reach  the  microbe  in  the  living  tissues 
has  been  abandoned,  its  destruction  being  accomplished 
indirectly  by  rendering  the  tissues  unsuitable  for  its  multi- 
plication and  by  modifying  individual  receptivity,  that  is  to 
say,  the  soil"  (Brocqj.  The  "cellular  factor"  in  infectious 
diseases  has  been  recently  emphasized  by  Riesman"*,  who 
contravenes  the  prevailing  conception  that  an  infectious 
disease  is  due  to  the  poison  of  a  parasitic  microorganism. 
He  contends  that  the  toxemia  is  caused  by  the  prohferation 
and  disintegration  of  myriads  of  new  cells. 

In  the  study  of  plant  life  and  growth,  the  United  States 
Bureau  of  Soils  found  that  changes  in  the  soil  (diseases) 


CYTOLOGY  197 

accounted  for  diminished  crops — agricultural  chemists  find 
in  this  "sick  soil"  'certain  substances  (carboxylic  acid, 
picolin,  etc.)  which  interfered  with  plant  metabolism. 

"The  soil  has  vital  functions.  It  cannot  be  con- 
sidered as  the  dead,  inert  remains  of  rocks  and  previous 
vegetation.  It  is  not  dead,  but  is  endowed  with  functions 
analogous  to  those  of  life  itself.  In  it  go  on  the  same 
processes  of  solution  and  deposition  that  have  taken 
place  in  past  ages  in  connection  with  the  geologic  action 
upon  the  rocks  and  minerals  in  the  earth's  crust;  the 
same  chemical  and  physical  interactions  as  those  through 
which  the  movement  of  subsurface  waters  generally  have 
formed  ore  deposits;  the  same  processes  of  fermentation, 
digestion  and  decay  of  organic  materials  as  those  that 
take  place  in  animals  and  plants  through  the  agency  of 
enzymes,  bacteria,  fungi,  and  molds  -■\" 

The  cell. — The  study  of  this  structure,  the  living  and 
active  basis  of  animal  and  plant  organization,  created  our 
modern  pathology  (page  2). 

It  is  necessary,  however,  to  penetrate  further  into  the 
ultimate  structure  of  the  cell  to  justify  the  creation  of  a 
"new  therapy"  which  the  author  has  neologized,  Electrono- 
therapy.  The  latter  has  for  its  object  the  modification  of  the 
physical  conditions  of  cell  life.  The  cell  function  is  repre- 
sented by  its  energic  metabolism  which  it  regulates  auto- 
matically. 

The  survival  of  the  cell  predicates  a  substratum  qualita- 
tively and  quantitatively  fit  for  nutritional  purposes. 

Each  cell  is  endowed  with  a  specific  attribute. 

Physiologically,  this  attribute  is  noted  in  the  hepatic 
cells  which  only  secrete  bile. 

Pathologically,  it  is  noted  in  parasyphilis  which  evokes 
system  diseases  by  implicating  definite  spinal  and  cerebral 
regions. 


198  NEW    CONCEPTS    IN    TREATMENT 

The  specific  selective  attributes  of  cells  are  observed 
in  the  bullfinch  '^  with  a  testicle  on  one  side  and  an  ovary 
on  the  other  side  {Hermaphroditismus  Verus).  In  this 
animal,  male  plumage  exists  on  one  side  and  female 
plumage  on  the  other  side  (accurately  delimited  in  the 
median  line  of  the  body). 

Despite  the  fact  that  the  sexual  glandular  secretions 
are  carried  by  the  blood  to  all  the  body  cells,  the  cells 
only  endowed  with  male  and  those  with  female  proper- 
ties alone  appropriate  the  secretions  destined  for  their 
growth. 

''Each  cell  has  a  specific  fabric  of  its  own,  which  is 
dependent  on  the  nature  of  its  separate  units  and  on  the 
manner  in  which  they  combine  together." 

The  cell  function  has  been  chiefly  studied  from  the  chem- 
ical viewpoint  and  only  meagre  attention  has  been  accorded 
to  the  physical  attributes  of  the  cell.  Since  the  discovery  of 
radioactivity,  it  has  been  demonstrated  that  chemistry  is  not 
the  most  fundamental  knowable  science  of  matter. 

The  specific  property  of  a  cell  is  shown  by  its  definite 
reaction  to  stimuli;  the  salivary  cell  only  secretes  saliva, 
the  muscle  cell  responds  by  contracting,  etc. 

In  CHEMICAL  STIMULATION,  the  Stimuli  have  a  higher 
osmotic  tension  than  that  of  the  stimulated  structure 
and  equimolecular  solutions  stimulate  more  pronounc- 
edly the  higher  the  molecular  weight. 

IncHEMOTAXis  (positivc  and  negative),  certain  sub- 
stances attract  or  repel  free  living  cells.  In  rheotaxis, 
changes  in  position  are  due  to  flowing  water  or  air  currents. 

Changes  in  locomotion  due  to  gravitation  are  known 
as  geotactic. 

The  tendency  of  cells  to  establish  contact  with  solid 
bodies  is  known  as  thigmotaxis.  In  phototaxis,  the 
effects  on  the  direction  of  movements  is  instigated  by 
light. 

In  the  microspectrum,  the  ''''bacterium  photonietri- 
cum,"   wanders   into    the    ultra-red,    whereas   another 


ELECTRONOTHERAPY  199 

collection  is  formed  in  the  orange  and  yellow.  In  the 
various  colors  ranging  from  white  to  black,  the  former 
is  the  least  and  the  latter  most  attractive  to  the 
mosquito. 

It  is  impossible  at  this  time  to  review  how  different 
stimuli  effect  destruction  of  living  things. 

The  X —  and  Becquerel  rays,  heat,  electric  stimulation 
etc.,  exert  a  puissant  influence  for  either  weal  or  woe  owing 
to  their  indiscriminate  employment  which  the  author  has 
endeavored  to  regularize.  One  knows  the  effects  of  cosmic 
influences  on  gouty  and  rheumatic  pains  and  Arrhenius,  has 
sought  to  bring  various  physiological  processes,  notably 
menstruation,  into  relation  with  atmospheric  electrical 
variations. 

All  problems  in  biolog}'  not  in  accord  with  the  progress 
made  in  physical  science  are  doomed  to  perish. 

The  laws  of  the  latter  are  obeyed  universally  by  living 
organisms  and  inanimate  things.  Dr.  George  Starr  White, 
in  a  contribution  1^  on  the  author's  method  of  electronic 
diagnosis  refers  in  electrical  terms  to  a  discussion  of  the  cell : 
"Cell  division  by  mitosis  suggests  the  appearance  of  iron 
filings  in  a  magnetic  field.  Each  cell  is  an  electrical  entity 
(electron)  with  positive  and  negative  properties.  The  lines 
of  force  of  electrons  depend  on  their  specific  arrangement. 
The  molecules  represent  an  aggregation  of  electric  batteries." 

ELECTRONOTHERAPY. — This  proccdure  finds  its  ex- 
pression in  a  modification  of  the  soil  by  change  in  vibratory 
rate  or  polarity.  Data  concerning  atoms  in  vibration  have 
been  discussed  on  page  5. 

Therapeutic  action  must  be  measured  and  computed  in 
chemico-physical  terms. 

Electrons  can  be  conceived  as  bombarding  space 
with  terrific  speed  thus  creating  all  kinds  of  etheric 


200  XEW    COXCEPTS    IX    TREATMEXT 

perturbations.  The  latter  are  practically  infinitesimal 
blows.  This  conception  of  energ}-  action  has  suggested 
the  neologism,  electronotherapy. 

Radium  and  other  radioactive  substances  produce  etheric 
vibrations-,  the  vibratory  rate  and  polarity  differing  in  the 
alpha   beta  or  gamma  rays. 

We  are  cognizant  of  the  profound  physiologic  action  of 
the  foregoing  and  our  faihires  in  radiotherapy  are  due  to  the 
indiscriminate  employment  with  rays  of  kno\\Ti  polarity  in 
diseases  in  which  the  polarity  is  unrecognized. 

Theory  of  ionization. — Electrons  are  united  with  salt 
molecule  constituents;  the  positive  electron  is  combined  with 
the  H,  metal  or  basic  constituents  and  carries  a  positive 
charge.  If  a  current  passes  through  the  solution,  the  positive 
electrons  wander  to  the  negative  pole  or  cathode  and  are 
called  cathions.  The  negative  electrons  combine  with  the 
acid  radicles  of  a  salt  carrying  a  negative  charge  to  the 
anode  and  are  specified  as  anions.  Some  assume  the  existence 
of  a  negative  electron  only;  the  positive  electron  representing 
an  unsaturated  affinity  for  a  charge. 

The  electric  charges  leaving  the  ions  combine  with  the 
tissue  elements  and  cause  electric  stimulation  of  the  proto- 
plasm. 

Specificity  in  therapeutics  is  Electronotherapy. 

The  action  of  an  electrolyte  equals  the  algebraic  sum  of 
the  action  of  its  ions. 

Toxicity  generally  increases  with  the  atomic  weight  and 
valency  of  the  ion. 

Xo  cell  can  remain  active  unless  it  contains  some  elec- 
trolytes (iMacallum).  The  toxicity  of  an  electrolyte  is 
lessened  by  the  addition  of  another  electrolyte  (Loeb). 

Anions  (alkalies)  stimulate  and  cathions  (acids),  lower 
the  irritabilitv  of  the  sciatic  nerve  of  the  frog. 


VIBRATION  201 

Vibration. — The  following  excerpts  are  from  the  author's 
book  on  ''Autointoxication.''*  The  science  which  spans  the 
gap  between  chemistry  and  physics  is  physical  chemistry. 
Matter  is  an  accumulation  of  positive  and  negative  electric 
charges  and  the  chemical  elements  are  merely  varying 
numbers  and  arrangements  of  these  charges. 

Atoms  are  oppositely  charged  electrons  which  move  in 
orbits  and  are  thrown  off  from  all  highly  heated  or  electrified 
bodies. 

The  ultimate  particles  of  matter  and  energy  are  identical 
and  mind  and  matter  are  but  two  aspects  of  the  same  thing. 

Every  phenomenon  in  nature  is  dependent  upon  matter 
in  motion  or  vibration. 

A  familiar  example  of  specific  response  is  noted  when  a 
Galvanic  current  is  passed  through  the  cheek;  taste  percep- 
tion is  produced  and  the  percipient  can  recognize  the  specific 
quality  of  each  pole.  Through  the  head,  the  same  current 
provokes  a  sensation  of  light  with  color  perception  and 
stimulation  of  the  auditory  nerve  with  the  same  current 
induces  sound  effects.  Color  is  determined  by  the  number  of 
waves  emitted  by  a  luminous  body  in  a  second  of  time  or  by 
the  corresponding  wave  length. 

Just  as  we  can  modify  the  vibrations  of  stringed  instru- 
ments, what  we  call  inhibition  is  nought  else  but  the  inhibi- 
tory influence  of  the  nervous  system  on  the  vibrations  of 
atoms  in  the  nerve  molecules. 

In  this  way,  atomic  vibration  is  so  influenced  that  sen- 
sation is  either  dulled  or  unperceived. 

Narcotic  action  is  probably  of  this  character.  Martyr- 
dom connotes  inhibition.  I  have  seen  fakirs  in  India  and 
Africa  submit  themselves  to  all  kinds  of  physical  torture 
without  the  least  outward  evidence  of  pain.     Insensibility 

*E.  B.  Treat  and  Co.,  New  York.     iqo6.    Page  31  d  seq. 


202  NEW    CONCEPTS    IX    TREATMENT 

to  the  latter,  attributable  to  self -induced  hypnotism,  may 
signify  nought  else  than  acquired  master^"  of  atomic  vibra- 
tion. The  ultra-violet,  like  the  X-rays,  possess  an  analgesic 
action. 

Is  the  latter  effect  an  induced  vibratory  rate  of  nerve 
electrons? 

Does  spectroscopy  of  sodium  vapor  (page  49)  aid  us 
analogically  in  appreciating  the  foregoing? 

The  action  cited  has  likewise  its  analogy  to  tone  vibra- 
tions which  set  other  bodies  in  motion. 

If  the  A  string  of  a  violin  is  struck,  the  A  string  of  a 
piano  standing  near  sounds  in  harmony  with  it. 

The  therapeutic  application  of  vibration  aims  to  restore 
the  equipoise  of  disease  by  a  rearrangement  of  the  molecules 
or  by  raising  their  vibration  to  a  normal  standard  of  fre- 
quency. Harmony  in  nature  is  achieved  by  the  neutraliza- 
tion of  opposing  elements.  One  form  of  hemihedral  partar- 
trate  crystal  diverts  a  reflected  ray  to  the  left  and  another 
to  the  right. 

This,  as  Pasteur,  has  shown,  is  dependent  on  a 
special  molecular  arrangement  pervading  the  entire 
crystal;  a  molecular  differentiation  which  causes  fer- 
mentation and  growth  in  one  instance  and  failure  to  do 
so  in  another. 

The  solution  of  an  equal  number  of  the  two  forms  of 
crystal  has  no  effect  on  the  polarized  ray. 

The  therapeutic  theor}^  of  vibration  is  not  chimerical;  it 
only  lacks  precision  in  its  present  stage  of  imperfect  devel- 
opment. 

The  property  of  assuming  more  than  one  elementary 
form  in  chemistry  is  known  as  allotropism.  The  diamond, 
amorphous  carbon  and  graphite  are  identical  in  composition 
although  showing  different  properties. 


CHROMOTHERAPY  203 

Red  and  white  phosphorus  are  like  elements  yet  one  is  a 
poison  and  the  other  innocuous. 

Allotropism  is  supposedly  due  to  a  difference  in  the 
number  of  or  arrangement  (Stereo-Chemistry)  of  atoms  in  a 
molecule  of  the  element. 

Berthelot,  supposes  that  the  difference  in  the  allotropes 
depends  simply  in  the  amount  of  bound  up  energy. 

Chemism,  heat  and  light  are  directly  interchangeable  in 
rapidity  and  direction  of  the  molecular  vibrations. 

Just  as  vibratory  rate  can  be  demonstrated  in  disease 
(page  51),  so  can  one  proceed  with  material  objects. 

In  lieu  of  the  application  of  the  electrode  to  the  source  of 
energy  in  disease,  one  brings  it  in  apposition  with  the  object 
and  approximates  the  other  electrode  to  the  stomach  in  the 
usual  way. 

This  is  the  method  likewise  pursued  in  gauging  the  poten- 
tiality and  polarity  of  drugs  (page  207). 

The  latter  must  be  used  in  bulk  and  placed  on  a  porcelain 
dish  (which  has  a  vibratory  rate  at  about  250  Ohms). 

Allotropism  is  chiefly  a  question  of  vibratory  rate  and 
by  the  latter,  the  identification  of  objects  is  practically 
absolute. 

The  diamond  has  a  vibratory  rate  at  150  Ohms; 
Lampblack  has  a  vibratory  rate  at  125  Ohms; 
Charcoal  has  a  vibratory  rate  at  112^  Ohms. 

Allotropism  doubtless  exists  in  the  living  tissues  and  some 
diseases  may  be  said  to  be  allotropic  modifications  of  each 
other. 

Pathology  is  the  physiology  of  the  sick.  From  our  view- 
point it  could  be  called  the  physics  of  disharmonious  vibra- 
tions. 

Chromo therapy,    like    chromodiagnosis    (page   67),     is 


204  NEW    CONCEPTS    IN    TREATMENT 

based  on  an  unrecognized  foundation  of  polarity  and  vibra- 
tion rate. 

"The  abiotic  action  of  ultra-violet  light  increases  as 
the  vibration  frequency  increases  -^" 

The  photodynamic  effect  of  fluorescent  substances 
was  illustrated  primarily  by  the  addition  of  fluorescent 
stains  to  photographic  plates,  thus  rendering  the  latter 
more  sensitive  to  those  colors  which  these  stains  absorb. 
Living  protoplasm  contains  sensitizers  which  have  a 
puissant  influence  on  physiologic  reactions  (Photo- 
sensitiveness).  Nerve  tissue  does  not  react  to  light 
influences  unless  pigment  is  present  (Hertel).  Chloro- 
phyll in  plant,  and  hemoglobin  in  animal  life,  are  char- 
.acteristic  sensitizers.  Eosin  and  pheno-safranin  have  a 
photodynamic  action  on  the  light  hemolysis  of  red 
blood  corpuscles  (Harzbecker).  Bovie  contends  that 
electromagnetic  waves  have  no  effect  on  objects  which 
are  incapable  of  vibrating  in  resonance  with  them.  Such 
objects  are  transparent  to  the  particular  wave  length 
in  question.  Thus  rock  salt  is  transparent  to  heat  and 
ultraviolet  waves  and  ruby  glass  to  red  light  waves. 
The  substances  of  which  living  organisms  are  composed 
are  capable  of  resonant  vibrations  over  a  consideraale 
range  of  vibration  frequency  and  in  this  sense,  the  pro- 
toplasmic component  of  the  tissues  acts  as  a  natural 
detector  of  energy  as  evident  in  the  \'isceral  reflexes. 
Bodies  out  of  harmony  with  the  tissues  are  either  not 
absorbed  or  changed  before  absorption  (Abderhalden). 

In  Musicotherapy,  we  are  dealing  with  a  series  of  vibra- 
tions which  create  pleasant  images  and  emotions. 

The  rendition  of  the  overture  of  "Tannhauser,"  will 
increase  the  pulse  rate  from  lo  to  25  beats  whereas  "Medita- 
tion," a  quiet,  restful  number,  diminishes  the  blood-pressure 
and  the  rate  of  the  pulse. 

In  dogs,  music  augments  elimination  of  carbonic  acid 
and  increases  the  consumption  of  oxygen. 


MUSICOTHERAPY  205 

Horace,  in  his  32nd  Ode,  Book  I.,  concludes  his  address 
to  the  lyre : 

"0  laborum,  dulce  lenimen,  mihicumque  salve,  Rite 
vocanti.^' 

(O,  of  our  troubles  the  sweet,  the  healing  sedative). 

In  the  classics,  we  recall  that  the  singing  of  birds  cured 
the  insomnia  of  Maecenas. 

Chemotherapy. — This  departure  spans  the  gap  between 
the  new  and  old  pharmacology  and  represents  the  "Therapia 
sterilisans  magna. ^^ 

Parasititotropic  chemicals,  have  apowerfu'  avidity  for  the 
parasites,  and  are  destructive  to  them  in  the  living  subject 
without  injury  to  the  tissues,  in  contradistinction  to  organo- 
tropic substances. 

Electronic  pharivl-vcology. — Physio -and  pharmaco- 
therapy founded  on  physiologic  investigations  have  ignored 
the  electronic  factor  (vibratory  rate  and  polarity),  the  fun- 
damental principle  in  physical  science. 

"Chemical  afhnity"  is  probably  nought  else  but  the 
magnetic  property  of  electrified  molecules  {vide  magnetons). 

All  matter  has  the  same  attractive  force  and  the  invaria- 
ble property  of  matter  is  electricity. 

Gravitational  energy,  compared  with  the  enormous 
electrical  energ>^  of  molecules,  is  exceedingly  feeble. 

A  simple  conception  of  Arrhenius,  has  revolutionized 
modern  chemistry.  When  salt  is  dissolved  in  water  an 
enormous  electrical  charge  ensues  on  the  atoms.  Sodium 
takes  a  positive  and  the  chlorin,  a  negative  charge.  These 
charged  atoms  are  called  ions.  Negative  ions  incite  muscular 
contractions  and  positive  ions  inhibit  them  (page  26). 

The  "Royal  Touch"  and  the  laying  on  of  hands  for  the 
cure  of  disease  may  be  regarded  as  mythical  b>'  those  who 


206  NEW    CONCEPTS    IN    TREATMENT 

are  ignorant  of  the  visceral  reflexes  and  the  potency  of 
human  energy  (page  i). 

It  is  asserted  that  external  applications  do  no  good  for 
the  reason  that  there  is  no  cutaneous  absorption. 

The  latter  plays  only  a  minor  ro/e  in  the  foregoing  method; 
it  is  chiefly  a  matter  of  ehciting  energy  and  discharging 
reflexes. 

Electrification  is  the  invariable  result  of  friction  between 
two  different  substances,  one  becoming  positively  and  the 
other  negatively  charged.  The  process  is  not  restricted  to 
soHds. 

If,  during  the  time  any  part  of  the  hand  or  arm  placed 
in  proximity  to  the  stomach,  is  anointed  with  an  indifferent 
liniment,  the  stomach  reflex  is  ehcited  at  once  owing  to  the 
generation  of  frictional  energy.  With  the  aid  of  the  reflex 
in  question,  many  interesting  data  can  be  gleaned  concern- 
ing A"-rays. 

The  latter  yield  a  neutral  duling  energy.  When  the  skin 
in  any  part  of  the  body  is  exposed  to  the  rays  for  say  about 
thirty  seconds,  the  energy  of  the  rays  is  stored  by  the  skin 
and  from  the  skin  thus  exposed,  one  may  convey  this 
induced  radio-activity  (for  several  hours  depending  on  the 
charge)  in  sufficient  quantity  to  elicit  the  stomach  or  other 
visceral  reflex. 

The  energ}'  thus  conveyed  is  a  negatwe  duling  energy. 

The  ver>^  moment  this  stored  skin  energy  is  neutralized 
with  the  POSITIVE  pole  of  a  bar-magnet,  it  is  no  longer 
possible  to  elicit  the  stomach  reflex  from  the  same  skin 
area. 

Here,  is  an  important  fact  utilizable  in  prophylaxis;  the 
skin  condenses  the  X-rays  as  negative  energy  and  the  skin 
condenser  may  be  neutrahzed  by  positive  energy. 

The  skin  energy  thus  stored  has  little  or  no  penetrating 


ELECTRONIC    PHARMACOLOGY  207 

action;  a  fact  tending  to  explain  the  inefficiency  of  the  rays 
in  the  treatment  of  neoplasms. 

Exposing  a  definite  skin  area  on  the  back  of  the  chest  to 
the  rays  in  question  and  then  attempting  to  conduct  energy 
from  an  area  on  the  anterior  chest  surface  corresponding  to 
the  area  exposed  on  the  posterior  surface,  no  energ>^  can  be 
conducted. 

If  a  like  procedure  is  attempted  with  a  saturated  aqueous 
solution  of  Eosin,  a  neutral  duling  energy  with  a  potentiality 
of  11/25  of  3,n  Ohm  can  be  led  off  from  the  anterior  chest 
surface. 

The  efficacy  of  our  Electronotherapeutic  methods  is  deter- 
mined by  the  following  law: 

An  energy  effect  is  directly  proportional  to  the 
intensity  of  the  energy  multiplied  by  the  time  during 
which  it  acts  and  varies  as  the  squares  of  distances 
from  the  energy  source. 

It  cannot  be  regarded  as  a  coincidence  that  the  vibra- 
tory rate  of  syphilis  is  at  20  Ohms  and  that  the  rate  for 
MERCURY  and  POTASSIUM  lODiD  is  at  50  Ohms. 

That  the  rate  for  pain  is  at  20  Ohms  and  that  morphin 
and  COCAIN  have  a  like  rate  at  35  Ohms. 

In  addition  to  rate,  polarity  of  the  medicament  demands 
consideration. 

CocAiN,  morphin  and  opium  yield  a  non-duling  positive 
energy  whereas  pain  (page  164)  yields  a  neutral  duling 
energy. 

Now,  an  apparent  discrepancy  is  attained  in  our  theory. 
SYPHILIS  yields  a  duling  neutral  energy  and  the  two  specifics 
for  this  disease  (mercury  and  potassiuivi  iodid)  yield  the 
same  energy  (non-duling.)  Either  this  theory  must  be  dis- 
missed as  untenable,  or  we  must  invoke  the  vibratory  rate 
(and  not  polarity),  as  the  curative  factor.    Again,  the  solar 


208  NEW    CONCEPTS    IX    TREATMENT 

rays  are  effective  in  tl'berculosis  despite  the  fact  that  a 
duHng  neutral  energ}*  is  common  to  both. 

The  LUNAR  rays  yield  a  duling  neutral  energy. 

Just  as  energ}-  does  not  appear  as  hght  and  heat  until  it 
hits  matter,  so  it  is  with  polar  changes  in  energy. 

The  solar  rays  yield  a  neutral  duling  energ\-  but  they  are 
stored  in  the  skin  as  negative  duling  energx'. 

]\Iercur\-  and  iodin,  like  syphilis  yield  a  neutral  duling 
energy. 

\Mien  the  skin  is  anointed  mth  mercurial  ointment,  a 
biochemic  change  ensues  and  the  skin  yields  a  positive 
duling  energy- . 

lodids,  \yhen  ingested,  change  into  hydriodic  acid  and 
free  iodin  which  entering  directly  into  the  protein  molecules 
form  compounds  with  new  properties. 

Hydriodic  acid  yields  a  negative  duling  energy. 

After  this  manner,  one  may  reconcile  the  action  of  the 
drugs  in  question  in  s\philis. 

Is  it  merely  a  coincidence  that  the  normal  joint  yields  a 
non-duling  neutral  energy  and  that  oil  of  gaultherla  (duling 
neutral  energ}-)  and  salicylates  (non-duling  neutral  energ}') 
vaunted  specifics  in  polyarthritis  rhelt^atica  }'ield  the 
same  energ}-? 

Here,  the  action  of  the  drugs  in  question  would  be  to 
restore  the  joints  to  their  normal  polarity. 

Is  it  a  coincidence  that  :nla.larla.  yielding  a  positi\-e  dul- 
ing energ}'  from  the  spleen  is  combated  by  quixix  which 
discharges  a  negati\-e  non-duling  energ}'? 

In  employing  enei;g}'  for  its  polar  action  in  the  treat- 
ment of  disease,  the  author  primarily  employed  the  patients' 
energ}'   (auto-conduction)    as   cited   elsewhere    (page    182.) 

The  latter  method  was  abandoned  for  a  more  effective 
procedure — the  use  of  drugs. 


ELECTRONIC    PHARMACOLOGY  209 

The  neutral  energy  from  the  epigastrium  has  a  po- 
tentiality (with  the  biodynamometer)  of  24/25  of  an 
Ohm,  whereas  eosin  which  discharges  a  like  energy  has 
an  energy  value  of  2J/2  Ohms. 

Aside  from  the  potentiality,  the  degree  of  energ}-  pene- 
tration is  of  grea.t  importance.  One  may  test  the  energ\^ 
value  of  different  drugs  by  noting  the  amplitude  of  the 
heart  reflex  when  a  drug  is  brought  into  apposition  with  the 
cardiac  region.  Different  drugs  yield  visceral  reflexes  of 
varying  amplitude  when  directed  toward  different  spinal 
regions  (page  )65.  Perhaps  the  most  effective  source  of 
energy  for  practical  purposes  in  treatment  would  be  the 
GALVANIC  current. 

An  ordinary  dry  cell  of  i^  volts  and  12  amperes 
discharges  from  the  negative  pole,  an  energy  value  of  70 
Ohms  (with  biodynamometer). 

This  energy  discharge  occurs  during  the  flow  of  the 
current  irrespective  of  the  distance  of  the  poles  on  the 
body  of  the  subject. 

A  small  and  effective  dry  cell  could  easily  be  carried 
on  the  body  of  the  patient  and  concealed. 

The  author  has  never  given  this  method  a  trial. 
Though  the  energy  discharge  may  be  more  effective,  the 
vibratory  rate  may  militate  against  results. 

AGENTS  YIELDING  A  POSITIVE  DULING  ENERGY* 

AGENT.  POTF.NTIALITY    OF    ENERGY. 

Selenium  (only  effective  in  the  light) 8  Ohms. 

.  FuCHSINf 16     " 

Potassium  chlorate 17     " 

*The  list  is  only  partial.  Polarity  was  determinctl  by  the  stomach  retlex  with 
a  male  subject.     Polentialit^'  was  determined  by  the  biodynamometer. 

fDr.  v.  G.  Ve<  ki  (San  Francisco),  in  a  communication  just  read  before  the 
A.  M.  A.  (June,  1915),  referred  to  the  injection  of  a  Solution  of  Fuchsin  (J3  to  i 
per  cent.)  into  the  urethra  and  bladder  for  inhibiting  bacterial  invasion  of  the 
genito-urinary  tract.  The  results  were  uniformly  remarkable  and  were  attributed 
to  fuchsinophilic  action.  As  a  matrer  of  fact,  the  polar  energy  of  fuchsin  cannot 
be  ignored  insomuch  as  many  antiseptics  which  are  even  more  deistructive  to 
bacteria  are  relatively  inert. 


210  NEW    CONCEPTS    IN    TREATMENT 

AGENTS  YIELDING  A  NEGATIVE  DULING  ENERGY 

AGENT.  POTEXTI.AXITY  OF  EKEEGY. 

Safranin 1 1  Ohms. 

Potassium  Permanganate 17     " 

Paraform 16     " 

Dimethyl 

Oil  of  Sassafras 

!Methyl  Blue  (medicinal) 58 

AGENTS  \TELDING  A  NEUTRAL  DULING  ENERGY 

AGEXT  POTEXTIALITY   OF   ENERGY 

Eosin 2^  Ohms. 

Turpentine  (Venice) 16  " 

Condurango ■ 

Bismuth  Subnitrate* 

]SIetalUc  Cobalt 

]Metalhc  Nickel 

Methyl  Violet  (not  durable) 45 

Picric  Acid  (saturated  solution) 50 

AGENTS  ITELDING  A  POSITIVE  AND  NEGATIVE  DULING  ENERGY 

AGENT  POTENTIALITY   OF   ENERGY 

Fluorescein 11  Ohms. 

Iodoform 17     '" 

POLARITY  OF  COLORS  \MTH  ELECTRIC  LIGHT 

\Miite  electric  hght neutral  duhng  energj'. 

YeUow negative     "'  '' 

Blue neutral       "  *' 

Violet positive      "  " 

Green neutral       "  " 

Red positive  and  negative 

PENETRATION   OF    COLORS   WITH   ELECTRIC   LIGHT. — ^DEPTH 
OF    AN  AVEILAGE    CHEST    SELECTED. 

All  colors  fail  to  penetrate  excepting  green.  Either  pole 
of  a  slow  or  rapid  sinusoidal  current  yields  a  neutral 
energ}'  discharge. 

The  efhciency  of  the  foregoing  agents  is  accentuated  by 
permitting  the  energ}'  to  pass  through  aluminum  (page 
55).    To  further  facihtate  the  energy"  value  of  a  drug  (used 

*By  aid  of  ingested  bismuth  one  may  outline  the  stomach  using  another  as  a 
test  subject  (page  223).  The  course  of  listulae  after  injection  with  bismuth  may 
be  similarly  traced. 


MAGNETONS  211 

for  its  polar  action),  it  should  be  covered  (when  dried  after 
application)  with  rubber  cement. 

This  insulation  of  energy'  prevents  its  external  dissipation. 

An  aqueous  solution  of  eosin  painted  on  the  back  of 
the  chest  yields  a  potentiality  (when  measured  from  an 
opposite  area  on  the  anterior  chest  surface,  a  distance 
of  12  cm.)  of  11/25  of  an  Ohm.  When  the  eosin  on  the 
back  is  insulated  with  rubber  cement,  the  energy  yield 
from  the  anterior  surface  is  increased  to  22/25  of  an  Ohm. 

In  Electronotherapy,  the  general  method  employed  when 
polarity  action  is  to  be  achieved  is  to  determine  the  polarity 
of  the  particular  disease  and  then  employ  an  opposite  or 
neutral  polarity  or,  one  attempts  to  secure  a  return  of  the 
normal  tissue  polarity. 

Thus,  in  acute  polyarthritis,  one  would  paint  the  impli- 
cated joints  with  Eosin.  The  normal  joint  has  a  neutral 
non-duling  energy  and  so  have  the  salicylates  (page  208). 

Eosin  yields  a  neutral  duling  energy. 

Magnetons. — Vigneron-',  refers  to  a  new  constit- 
uent of  matter — the  magneton  or  magnetic  atomic 
element.  This  discovery  interests  us  to  the  extent  that 
its  conception  suggests  that  magnetic  phenomena  are 
concerned  in  chemical  combinations  and  that  chemical 
forces  are  supposedly  the  attractions  of  elementary 
magnets. 

After  the  electron  symbolizing  the  new  ideas  of  the 
discontinuous  structure  of  electricity,  the  magneton 
embraces  an  analogous  evolution  in  our  conception  of 
magnetic  phenomena. 

Cultural  investigations  by  the  writer  with 
various  microorganisms  demonstrated  in  brief  what 
was  anticipated  theoretically,  viz.,  that  the  energy  dis- 
charge of  different  chemicals  (efficacious  clinically)  had 
no  visible  influence  on  the  cultures.  It  would  be  folly 
to  correlate  the  energic  metabolism  of  cells  with  a  cul- 
ture medium. 


212  XEW    COXCEPTS    IX    TREATMEXT 

The  reflex  factors  so  essential  in  the  study  of  the 
protoplasmic  reaction  to  energy  cannot  be  solved  by 
investigations  on  isolated  protoplasm. 

Similarly,  it  has  been  shown  that  numerous  halogen 
combinations  with  benzene  derivatives  are  exceedingly 
active  against  certain  organisms  in  a  test  tube  but  prove 
innocuous  even  in  greater  concentration  when  employed 
in  the  body.  Test  tube  demonstrations  of  drugs  yield 
no  index  of  therapeutic  value. 

The  author's  method  of  treatment  will  be  illustrated  in 
tuberculosis  and  carcinoma,  in  which  diseases  he  has  had 
the  most  experience. 

The  author  has  abandoned  his  method  of  auto-con- 
duction (page  182). 

Tuberculosis. — The  lesions  in  this  disease  yield  a 
neutral  duling  energ}-  (page  137).  If  the  skin  over  the  site 
of  the  lesion  is  painted  with  an  alcoholic  solution  of  safranin, 
the  tuberculous  soil  is  modified  by  a  negative  energ\^  (page 
210). 

To  augment  the  negative  energy  value  of  the  safranin 
(after  dr\-ing  of  the  latter),  it  is  covered  with  an  insulating 
material  like  rubber  cement  (page  61). 

The  application  is  made  ever>'  other  day  but  before 
reapplication,  the  skin  must  be  thoroughly  cleansed  with 
benzine. 

In  pulmonary  tuberculosis,  the  skin  over  both  lungs  is 
painted  with  safranin  and  the  patient  is  instructed  to  wear 
an  undergarment  of  silk.  The  latter  is  a  non-conductor  and 
when  worn,  rubber  cement  is"  unnecessary. 

In  addition  to  this  treatment,  the  patient  must  pursue 
most  rigorously,  the  fresh-air  hygienic  dietetic  treatment. 
My  results  with  this  electronotherapeutic  method  have  been 
phenomenal  in  incipient  puhnonar}^  tuberculosis.  \Vhen 
there  was  no  mixed  infection,   a   syinptomatic   cure  was 


TUBERCULOTHERAPY  213 

usually  achieved  within  six  weeks.  The  author  believes 
in  his  competency  to  formulate  the  preceding  conclusion. 
For  a  duration  of  time  exceeding  twenty-five  years,  his 
clientele  consisted  largely  of  tuberculous  patients. 

He  believes  that  his  results  were  also  dependent  on  an 
early  diagnosis  (electronic  test)  based  on  the  principle, 
^^Tuberculosis  primis  in  stadiis  semper  curabilis'^  and, 
"Qui  bene  dignoscit  bene  cur  at. ^^ 

Even  in  advanced  cases  of  pulmonary  tuberculosis, 
excellent  results  were  attained  by  the  method  of  treatment 
cited. 

In  laryngeal  tuberculosis,  the  infiltration  evanesced 
in  the  majority  of  patients  within  three  months  by  the  use 
of  safranin  painted  on  the  skin  (daily)  over  the  larynx. 

If  re-enforcement  of  the  negative  energy  of  safranin  is 
desirable,  menthol  (yielding  a  like  polar  energ>^  after 
ingestion)  may  be  administered. 

Dr.  Geo.  Jarvis  reports  as  symptomatically  cured  within 
two  months  two  patients  with  pulmonary  tuberculosis  (t.  b. 
in  sputum  at  the  commencement)  by  aid  of  the  safranin 
treatment. 

Even  when  the  pathology  of  a  disease  is  obscure  the 
polarity  reaction  may  serve  as  a  guide  to  treatment. 

For  many  years  a  patient  has  consulted  dermatologists 
without  relief  for  an  erythema  multiforme.  Over  the 
lesions  a  neutral  duling  energy  is  obtainable.  Applications 
of  safranin  give  immediate  relief. 

In  arthritis  deformans  (if  paratuberculous,  page  141), 
safranin  may  be  painted  on  silk  gloves  and  the  later  may  be 
worn  at  night  if  the  articulations  of  the  hand  are  implicated. 
When  the  lesions  are  multiple,  the  safranin  is  painted  on  the 
skin  over  the  involved  joints.  Menthol  may  be  employed  as 
a  synergist. 


214  NEW    CONCEPTS    IN    TREATMENT 

In  Electronotherapy,  one  must  be  assured  concerning 
the  predominent  polar  reaction.  Thus,  in  appendicitis 
(acute  and  chronic),  the  electronic  reaction  demonstrates 
the  predominance  of  the  Streptococcic  reaction. 


Figs.  58  and  59. — Patient  of  Dr.  Evans.  Showing  the  effects  of  safranin 
treatment. 

Figs  58  and  59,  illustrate  the  effects  of  safranin  treatment 
in  a  young  lady  with  tuberculous  adenitis  (cervical)  referred 
to  me  by  Dr.  M.  Evans  (San  Francisco).  The  duration  of 
the  affection  was  two  years  and  failed  to  yield  to  medical 
and  surgical  treatment. 

Within  one  week  after  the  daily  application,  the  im- 
plicated glands  in  the  lower  cervical  region  evanesced. 

One  gland  in  the  upper  cervical  region  had  passed  on  to 
suppuration  when  my  treatment  was  begun. 

This  gland  (as  sho^^^l  in  the  picture)  is  still  enlarged 
(shghtly)  owing  to  the  presence  of  cicatricial  tissue. 

In  a  like  case  referred  to  me  by  Dr.  J.  H.  East  (Denver), 
there  was  an  equally  rapid  evanescence  of  the  glands. 


CARCINOMA  215 

The  only  untoward  effect  noted  from  safranin  was  slight 
itching  of  the  skin  confined  to  the  painted  area  and  the  same 
may  be  said  of  eosin  (to  be  described  presently). 

Carcinoma. — ^The  polarity  of  this  neoplasm  is  positive 
yet,  the  best  results  were  achieved  in  treatment  by  the  use 
of  neutral  energy  producing  agents,  viz.,  eosin  (aqueous 
solution)  or  Venice  turpentine. 

Either  agent  is  employed  over  the  site  of  the  neoplasm 
after  the  manner  indicated  in  the  use  of  safranin  {q.  v.). 
The  polarity  of  eosin  energy  is  uninfluenced  by  any 
color  on  the  body  of  the  subject. 

Eosin  is  more  penetrating  than  the  x-rays.  Although 
comparatively  good  results  were  attained  with  either  of  the 
foregoing  alone,  yet  of  late,  I  have  had  recourse  to  the 
synergistic  employment  of  potassium  acetate  and  sodium 
BICARBONATE  (one  drachm  of  each,  three  or  four  times  a  day). 
The  latter  impart  to  the  blood  a  neutral  duling  energy. 
Within  a  few  minutes  after  the  ingestion  of  a  single  dose 
of  the  agents  in  question,  the  polarity  of  the  blood  and  both 
cardiac  ventricles  becomes  neutral. 

Ross,  of  London,  and  Packard  of  Boston,  attribute 
cancer  to  a  lack  of  balance  of  the  potassium  and  other 
body  salts  and  that  this  disturbance  conduces  to  the 
malignant  growth  of  epithelial  cells  (epiblastic  and 
hypoblastic) .  Perdue,  an  investigator  of  great  acumen 
ascribes  hyperalkalinity  as  a  condition  precedent  to  the 
development  of  cancer. 

Reference  has  already  been  made  to  the  problematic 
action  of  potassium  iodid  (page  207).  My  investigations 
show  however,  that  when  it  is  first  absorbed,  the  veins, 
arteries  and  both  ventricles  yield  a  neutral  energ}\ 

"Mikhailoff'^,  urges  the  employment  of  potassium 
iodid  in  internal  cancer,  preferably  in  the  form  of  rectal 
injections  (4  gm.  potassium  iodid;  2  gm.  sodium  carbon- 


216  NEW    CONCEPTS    IN    TREATMENT 

ate  and  80  or  100  c.c.  distilled  water).  This  he  supple- 
ments with  I  per  cent,  solution  of  sodium  arsenate 
(sodium  arsenici)  hypodermically,  which  solution  must 
be  made  with  0.25  per  cent,  phenol.  He  found  that  if 
the  temperature  rises  one  or  two  hours  after  the  rectal 
injection  of  the  potassium  iodid,  then  we  positively  have 
to  do  with  a  malignant  growth  (carcinoma  or  sarcoma). 
If  the  temperature  remains  stationary  or  even  declines, 
then  cancer  can  be  excluded  and  syphilis  is  probable.  He 
sees  in  the  action  of  potassium  iodid  in  this  respect  an 
analogy  to  the  action  of  tuberculin  in  tuberculosis,  and 
claims  that  carcinoma  can  be  cured  in  certain  stages  of 
malignant  disease  with  this  method  of  treatment.  It 
reveals  the  presence  of  cancer  like  the  positive  response 
to  the  tuberculin  test  in  tuberculosis,  and  a  systematic 
course  of  treatment  with  it  has  a  curative  influence  like 
that  of  tuberculin. 

He  states  that  potassium  iodid  seems  to  display  a 
special  affinity  for  cancer  cells  in  the  test-tube,  and  his 
clinical  experience  apparently  indicates  that  this  is  the 
case  also  in  the  human  body.  For  the  differential  diag- 
nosis, he  gives  the  rectal  injection  as  above  described, 
and  repeats  it  after  an  hour  or  hour  and  a  half  to  a  maxi- 
mum of  three  injections,  but  one  is  generally  sufficient. 
The  temperature  reaction  becomes  manifest  in  one  or 
two  hours.  He  does  not  give  specific  instances  or  figures, 
but  relates  that  after  his  course  of  treatment  with  potas- 
sium iodid  supplemented  by  subcutaneous  injection  of 
a  I  per  cent,  solution  of  sodium  arsenate,  some  of  the 
patients  are  still  living  who  had  been  told  years  before 
by  leading  clinicians  that  they  had  internal  and  hence 
inaccessible  cancer.  All  his  patients  thus  treated  were 
in  this  inoperable  class,  as  he  always  operates  for  accessi- 
ble cancer." 

An  hypodermatic  injection  of  sodium  cacodylate  (3 
grains)  will  be  followed  like  potassium  iodid,  with  a  neutral 
energy  from  the  ventricles  and  blood  vessels. 


CARCINOMA  217 

It  is  interesting  to  observe  that  when  a  neutral  energy 
from  the  blood  is  evoked  by  drugs,  the  positive  cancer 
energy  is  reversed  (negative)  when  polarity  is  determined 
by  the  stomach  reflex  (in  a  male). 

The  physico-pharmacologic  trend  of  therapeutics  is 
illustrated  by  the  method  of  Sprude-".  Injection  is  first 
made  into  the  growth  of  atoxyl  after  which,  over  the 
growth  and  its  environment,  iron  filings  are  spread.  The 
latter  are  then  subjected  to  the  action  of  a  magnet  con- 
nected with  an  alternating  current.  This  electro-mag- 
netic irritation  is  provoked  by  the  vibration  of  the  filings 
which  fortifies  the  action  of  arsenic- — destruction  of  the 
cancer  cells  by  evoking  a  pronounced  grade  of  h^qaer- 
emia  plus  fibrinous  transudation. 

In  testing  for  the  carcinomatous  reaction  (electronic)  or 
determining  the  progress  of  the  neoplasm  by  the  biodyn- 
amometer,  the  energy  of  the  eosin  on  the  skin  (or  safranin  in 
tuberculosis)  may  be  excluded  by  passing  it  through  a  non- 
conductor (page  6i).  Neither  the  energy^  of  eosin  nor 
safranin  will  traverse  an  insulating  material. 

From  what  has  preceded,  some  of  the  efficacy  of  our 
therapeutic  methods  has  been  referred  to  the  potentiality  of 
the  evolved  energy. 

In  this  respect,  the  energy  coefficiency  of  radium  is  rela- 
tively small  when  compared  to  some  inexpensi\'e  drugs 
(page  209).  Radium  (10  milligrams)  yields  an  energy 
potentiality  of  22/25  of  an  Ohm;  solar  rays,  5/25  of  an 
Ohm  and  the  X-rays,  11/25  of  an  Ohm.  Just  as  the  ther- 
mometer and  estimation  of  waste  output  may  be  accepted 
as  absolute  indices  of  metabolism,  so  by  the  aid  of  the  bio- 
dynamometer  coupled  with  the  visceral  reflexes,  we  are  in 
a  position  to  eliminate  equivocation  respecting  the  potency 
of  energy  whether  expressed  by  an  electric  current,  light, 
heat  or  the  .Y-rays. 


218  XEW    CONCEPTS    IX    TREATMENT 

The  modalities  (different  forms  of  energ}-)  in  physio- 
therapy may  thus  be  placed  on  a  rational  basis.  Human 
energ}'  is  a  high  potential  unidirectional  current  and  it  is 
easily  demonstrated  that  the  average  person  discharges  an 
energ}'  of  greater  potency  than  that  evolved  from  a  bar- 
magnet  (of  average  length). 

WTien  we  refer  to  the  remedial  value  of  radio-active 
mineral  springs,  let  us  say  in  the  treatment  of  rheu- 
MATon)  ARTHRITIS,  we  are  contented  with  the  belief  that, 
we  are  dealing  with  an  ionization  of  atoms,  whereby 
electrical  energy  is  conve3'ed  into  the  body  (internal 
electrotherapy.) 

\Mien  4  oz.  of  water  containing  approximately  400 
Mache  units*  are  ingested,  the  normal  joints  (which  in 
the  norm  yield  a  neutral  non-duLing  energj^)  evolve  a 
positive  and  negative  duling  energ}'.  The  same  is  true  of 
the  implicated  joints  in  arthritis  deformans.  These 
reactions  are  obtainable  for  at  least  one  hour  with  this 
quantity  of  water.  The  results  in  the  latter  affection 
must  be  referred  to  an  electronic  polar  modification  of 
the  soil  of  the  joints. 

Groxixdixg  exerglAlGexic  cexters. — Vagus  tone  is 
diminished  by  grounding  the  7th  cen.dcal  spine  and  increased, 
by  grounding  the  region  between  the  3rd  and  4th  dorsal 
spines. 

One  end  of  the  insulated  conducting  cord  from  either 
region  in  question  may  be  fixed  below  by  plaster  to  any 
part  of  the  trunk. 

The  foregoing  is  readily  illustrated  by  percussion  of  the 
viscera  (Fig.  43). 

By  grounding  the  region  between  the  3rd  and  4th  dorsal 
spines,  dulness  of  the  stomach  is  at  once  evoked  without 
the  aid  of  extraneous  energ}'.  Coincident  with  this  ground- 
ing, there  is  a  momentar}'  inhibition  of  the  pulse. 

*Radio-Rem  (Schieffelin  &  Co.)  was  employed  in  my  investigations. 


GROUNDING  219 

Grounding  the  7th  cervical  spine  prevents  the  eHcitation 
of  the  stomach  reflex  by  all  kinds  of  energy. 

These  clinical  phenomena  (important  in  treatment)  are 
explained  elsewhere. 

Paroxysmal  symptoms  may  often  be  interpreted  in  the 
terms  of  the  physicist. 

One  may  assume  the  banking  of  potential  in  the  gang- 
lionic cells,  the  receptors  of  afferent  stimuli. 

In  the  norm,  the  sum  of  the  negative  charges  of  the  elec- 
trons of  the  cell  equals  its  positive  charge  and  in  consequence, 
it  is  neutral  or  uncharged. 

When  the  neurons  become  surcharged,  a  neuro-electrical 
discharge  occurs  and  the  impulses  attaining  the  brain, 
create  symptoms.  The  neuronic  discharge  is  succeeded  by 
fatigue  which  is  practically  a  fall  of  potential. 

Such  neuro-electrical  storms  are  usually  aborted  by 
analgesics  (page  17). 

In  tabes,  one  may  predict  a  crisis  by  determining  the 
augmented  energ}^  discharge  by  aid  of  the  biod>'namometer 
(g.  2;.)  at  a  site  distal  to  the  lesion. 

In  several  instances,  the  writer  has  thwarted  the  crises 
by  grounding  the  area  of  augmented  energy  discharge. 


APPENDIX 


APPENDIX 

NOTE  I. 

ELECTRONIC   DELIMITATION   OF   THE   LOWER   BORDER 
OF   THE   STOMACH. 

Urotropin,  yields  a  powerful  negative  duling  energy. 
If  a  tablet  of  urotropin  (7^  grains)  is  coated  with  keratin 
and  swallowed,  the  lower  stomach  border  may  be  deter- 
mined. Use  primarily  a  large  receiving  electrode  and  later, 
for  better  localization,  a  pointed  electrode.  The  same  sub- 
ject may  be  employed  and  the  heart  or  liver  reflex  utilized. 

If  the  latter  reflexes  are  sought,  percuss  in  the  conven- 
tional way  the  lower  border  of  the  right  lobe  of  the  liver  or 
the  left  heart  border  and  mark  with  a  dermograph. 

Direct  a  bar-magnet  to  the  heart  or  liver  border,  and 
note  (by  percussion)  the  increased  area  of  the  heart  to  the 
left,  or  the  liver  below,  and  likewise  mark. 

If  increased  energy  from  the  urotropin  is  conveyed  by 
the  receiving  or  distal  electrode  to  the  proximal  electrode 
in  juxtaposition  to  either  the  heart  or  liver  border,  there 
wiU  be  augmented  dulness  to  the  line  established  by  the 
conveyed  energy  of  the  magnet  {vide  bismuth,  page  210). 

NOTE  II. 

The  Ether  Theory — The  Electro-magnetic  Theory  of 
Light — Gravitation — Polarity. 

The  Ether  theory,  may  be  seriously  questioned  in  the 
light  of  the  author's  methods  for  the  detection  of  energy. 
The  Ether  is  "the  supreme  paradox  of  modern  physics" 


224  APPENDIX 

and  is  suggested  as  a  vehicle  for  the  transmission  of  various 
forms  of  force. 

The  idea  of  energ}-  passing  through  an  absolute  vacuum 
has  always  been  repugnant  to  science.  The  Ether  theory 
is  not  necessary  in  explanation  of  magnetic  lines  of  force,  the 
flow  of  electrical  currents  and  the  forces  of  gravity. 

It  can  be  shown  by  aid  of  the  reflexes  that  the 
substance  of  a  magnet  passes  out  antd  through  space. 

The  space  surrounding  an  electron  is  an  intense  electric 
field. 

A  magnet  in  proximity  to  the  stomach,  liver  or  heart 
will  evoke  a  reflex. 

The  latter  is  discharged  b}'  the  escape  of  electrons  from 
the  magnet. 

There  is  no  instrument  kno^\^l  to  science  that  can  detect 
this  infinitesimal  electronic  escape  and  were  it  not  for  the 
visceral  reflexes,  the  author  would  not  dare  to  substitute  a 
fact  for  a  theory. 

Measuring  this  electronic  escape  with  the  biodynamo- 
meter,  it  can  be  easily  demonstrated  that  like  the  body 
(page  51)  or  radium  (page  269),  the  energy  discharge  of  the 
magnet  is  greater  in  the  light  than  in  the  dark  hence,  the 
warranted  conclusion,  that  there  is  a  constant  circulation 
of  electrons  throughout  nature.  Electrons  scattered  in  space 
substitute  the  imaginary  ether. 

The  sun,  is  an  inexhaustible  source  of  physical  energ}^ 
which  pours  upon  our  earth  and  the  latter  is  only  a  huge 
armature  rotating  at  high  speed  in  the  sun's  magnetic  field. 

The  study  of  electro-magnetic  radiations,  show  that 
they  possess  all  the  properties  of  light  waves,  the  only 
apparent  difference  being  in  their  greater  wave  length. 

Therefore,  the  modern  ph^^sicist  regards  light  as  an 
electro-magnetic  phenomenon. 


GRAVITATION  225 

By  aid  of  the  Sphygmobiometer  (g.  v.)  and  a  visceral 
reflex,  it  can  be  shown  that  the  wavemetric  index  of  magnetic 
energy  is  8,  and  that  of  a  current  of  electricity  is  3. 

If  light,  by  aid  of  a  lens,  is  concentrated  on  the  receiving 
electrode  for  several  minutes  (to  allow  of  a  concentration  of 
energy  in  the  variable  condenser),  and  an  attempt  is  then 
made  to  elicit  a  visceral  reflex,  the  latter  is  discharged  at  3 
and  8  of  the  condenser.  The  latter  fact  confirms  the  elec- 
tromagnetic theory  of  light.  Human  energy  conforms  to 
THE  SAME  WAVEMETRIC  INDICES.  Therefore,  human  energy 
is  probably  electro-magnetic. 

Gravitation. — This  is  one  of  the  greatest  sources  of  the 
various  forms  of  energy  whose  continual  transformations 
make  up  the  activity  of  the  universe. 

The  intermolecular  forms  of  chemical  affinity  is  probably 
of  the  same  character  as  the  gravitational  forces. 

The  secret  of  gravitation  is  probably  the  greatest  prob- 
lem still  unsolved. 

All  theories  ranging  from  the  dynamical  hypothesis  of 
Kelvin,  and  the  ultramundane  theory  of  Le  Sage,  to  the 
theories  of  Maxwell  and  Reynolds  have  proved  pregnable. 

In  venturing  an  hypothesis,  the  author  does  so  with  the 
firm  conviction  that,  in  the  visceral  reflexes  objective 
EVIDENCE  is  at  our  command  which  appears  absolute  and 
undeniable. 

The  premises  upon  which  the  author's  hypothesis  are 
formulated  are  as  follows: 

The  first  proposition,  is  that  gravitation  is  an  electrical 
attraction  corresponding  to  chemical,  magnetic  and  electri- 
cal attraction. 

The  second  proposition,  is  that  the  supposititious  ether 
through  which  these  attractions  act  is  in  itself  an  electric 
charge. 


226  APPEXDIX 

Kinetic  energ}'  invariably  appears  as  a  result  of  a  change 
of  position. 

Bodies  in  their  original  position  possess  potential  energ}^ 
(page  8). 

Center  of  gravity. — This  force  counteracts  entirely 
the  weight  of  the  body  and  is  equal  and  opposite  to  the  result- 
ant of  all  the  small  forces  which  gravity  is  exerting  upon  the 
different  parts  of  the  body. 

Employing  the  heart  as  a  detector  and  the  sphygmobio- 
meter  iq.  v.)  as  the  receiving  apparatus,  the  following  may 
be  observed.  WTien  an  object  is  suspended  and  given  a  pen- 
dulum motion  and  the  receiving  electrode  is  gradually 
passed  below  the  area  described  by  the  moving  body,  the 
moment  the  center  of  gravity  is  attained,  the  buzzing  of  the 
instrument  ceases. 

If  the  positive  pole  of  a  bar-magnet  is  directed  upward 
and  accompanies  the  movements  of  the  receiving  electrode, 
the  buzzing  of  the  instrument  is  not  arrested  until  the  center 
of  gravity  (or  adjacent  to  it)  is  reached  owing  to  the  neutral- 
ization of  negative  energy-  at  the  gra\'ity  center. 

The  negative  pole  of  the  magnet  when  similarly  em- 
ployed inhibits  the  buzzing  when  the  center  of  gravity 
is  attained  (Fig.  60).  Thus  the  energ}-  acting  at  the  center 
of  gravity  is  negative  energ}'. 

In  this  respect  gravitational  energ}-  has  its  analogue  in 
action  currents  (page  12). 

The  stomach  reflex  used  independently  of  the  sphygmo- 
biometer  is  more  sensitive  than  the  heart  as  a  detector  of 
energy  reactions.  When  a  body  is  raised  (employing  the 
electrode  after  the  manner  cited  and  using  only  the  stomach 
reflex),  a  negative  energy  discharge  is  demonstrated  at  the 
center  of  gravity  (and  adjacent  to  it)  and  a  positive  discharge 
in  the  immediate  environment  (Fig.  60). 


GRAVITATION 


227 


When  the  negative  energy  discharge  is  quantitatively 
determined  by  the  biodynamometer  (Fig.  i8),  its  maximum 
potentiaHty  is  at  the  center  of  gravity. 

Gravitational  energy  traverses  all  non-conductors  and 
responds  to  the  reaction  of  electro-magnetic  radiations 
(page  224).  Hence,  gravitational  energy  is  electro-mag- 
netic and  cannot  be  insulated. 


Fig.  60. — Illustrating  the  author's  theory  of  gravitation  when  a  mass  is  raised 
or  is  given  a  pendulum  motion.  This  disequilibrated  electronic  energy  is  also 
demonstrable  with  the  rellcxophone  (p.  298). 

Whether  the  sphygmobiometer  or  stomach  reflex  is 
used,  it  may  be  demonstrated  that  gravitational  energy  is 
in  direct  proportion  to  the  product  of  the  mass  and  the 
velocity  of  the  body  and  inversely  proportional  to  the 
square  of  the  distance  from  the  body  to  the  ground. 

Our  microcosm  differs  in  no  respect  from  the  solar 
system.    The  relation  of  our  organs  as  the  author  has  shown 


228  APPENDIX 

elsewhere  (page  105),  conforms  to  the  Xewtonian  law  that, 
bodies  attract  each  other  with  a  force  proportional  to  the 
product  of  their  masses,  and  inversely  proportional  to  the 
square  of  their  distance  apart.  My  hypothesis  of  gravita- 
tion supports  the  electron  theory  with  its  logical  corrollar^' — 
the  recognition  of  electricity  as  a  fundamental  quantity. 
The  foregoing  proof  appears  to  have  been  anticipated  by 
Sir  Oliver  Lodge,  who  believed  that  positive  and  negative 
electricity  together  made  up  the  ether.  The  ether  may  be 
sheared  by  electro-moti\'e  forces  into  positive  and  negative 
electricity  if  they  were  really  separated.  A  continuous 
shearing  force  applied  to  the  ether  in  metals  produces  a 
conduction  current.  The  ether  cannot  be  directly  affected. 
In  a  conductor  the  bound  ether  is  not  rigid.  In  an  insulator 
it  is  resihent,  when  displaced  it  springs  back  again. 

Polarity. — ''The  universe  is  a  unit."  Polarity  is  not 
the  exclusive  prerogative  of  magnetic  materials.  The  earth 
acts  like  a  great  magnet  and  by  its  inductive  action  confers 
polarity  on  all  things  in  nature.  This  may  be  readily  sho^^^l 
by  taking  a  rod  of  wood,  or  non-magnetic  metal  and  holding 
either  end  in  front  of  the  stomach.  A  non-duling  energ}' 
(page  43)  positive,  at  one  end  and  negative,  at  the  other 
end  and  neutral,  in  the  center  ma}'  be  easily  demonstrated. 

NOTE  III. 
Brain  and  Spinal  Centers — The  new  Psychology. 

In  1870,  Herbert  Spencer,  declared  that  different  parts 
of  the  cerebrum  must  subserve  different  kinds  of  mental 
action. 

Later,  numerous  investigations  confirmed  this  pronun- 
ciamento  of  cortical  localization  b}'  physiological,  histo- 
logical and  clinical  methods.    Elsewhere,  the  writer  has  shown 


THE    NEW    PSYCHOLOGY  229 

that  direct  electrical  stimulation  of  the  cerebral  cortex  and 
spinal  cord  for  locating  centers  may  be  substituted  by  sinu- 
soidalization  of  the  skin  over  the  brain  and  cord  without 
vivisectional  aid. 

The  concept  of  centers  is  variously  interpreted  by  physi- 
ologists and  physiologizing  psychologists.  The  phrenologi- 
cal theory  of  centers  supposes  that  certain  functions  of  con- 
sciousness and  motor  control  are  located  in  particular  cell 
groups. 

Another  theory  abandons  the  concept  center  unless 
restricted  in  its  meaning  to  a  group  of  cells  from  which  im- 
pulses are  sent  (sensory)  or  collected  (motor). 

The  author's  method  of  locating  centers  is  as  follows: 

To  locate  the  center  of  taste  or  smell,  the  protruded 
tongue  of  the  subject  is  touched  with  a  drop  of  some  essential 
oil  or  the  subject  smells  the  latter. 

With  a  pointed  electrode  for  receiving  energy  (the 
proximal  electrode  at  the  stomach  region),  the  skin  of  the 
cranium  is  explored  and  the  moment  the  center  (engaged  in 
specific  sense  function)  is  attained,  the  stomach  or  other 
visceral  reflex  is  elicited.  The  centers  of  smell  and  taste 
thus  determined  are  shown  in  Fig.  6i. 

The  foregoing  method  may  be  employed  by  the  psychia- 
trist in  determining  objectively  the  subjective  perceptions 
of  the  insane. 

The  SPINAL  CENTERS  may  be  similarly  localized.  Thus, 
the  spinal  segment  related  to  a  peripheral  skin  area  will  when 
irritated  yield  a  stomach  or  other  visceral  reflex  (sensory 
localization).  If  the  musculus  quadriceps  femoris  is  struck, 
its  contraction  yields  an  energy  emanating  from  the  loth 
dorsal  spine  (motor  localization). 

In  the  utilization  of  a  visceral  reflex  for  determining  ner- 
vous energy,  one  is  in  a  position  to  say  what  could  not  have 


230 


APPENDIX 


been  said  before  that,  there  is  a  correlation  between  nervous 
and  physical  energ}'  and  that,  nerve  tissue  is  simply  a  bit  of 
machinery  adapted  to  the  conversion  of  definite  kinds  of 
physical  into  nervous  energ}'. 


HEARIN(iV-- 


Fig.  6r. — Illustrating  the  location  of  the  centers  of  smell,  taste  and  hearing 
according  to  the  electronophysiologic  method.  The  psychose.xual  center  is  located 
on  both  sides  in  the  sexes  at  the  external  angular  process.  The  smell  center  is 
located  at  a  point  on  a  straight  line  drawn  upward  4.6  cm.  from  the  tragus  and  the 
taste  center,  distant  4  cm.  from  the  latter  point.  The  center  of  hearing  is  located 
by  dramng  a  straight  line  5.2  cm.  posteriorly  from  the  tip  of  the  mastoid  process 
and  an  equidistance  from  the  latter  point. 

To  the  neurologist,  the  method  cited  for  cerebral  and 
spinal  localization  is  destined  to  be  of  the  greatest  practical 
value.  It  will  enable  him  to  study  reflexes  as  they  have 
never  before  been  investigated.  To  conduct,  protoplasm 
must  be  continuous.  Any  break  in  the  physiologic  conti- 
nuity of  protoplasm  bars  the  conduction  process. 

The  new  psycho-analysis. — A  dominant  idea  is  re- 
vealed by  the  discharge  of  energ}'  from  specific  centers. 
This  energy  discharge  will  evoke  the  stomach  reflex.    If  the 


PHYSICS    OF   LOVE  231 

dominant  idea  is  sexual,  a  discharge  may  be  led  off  from  the 
external  angular  process  of  the  frontal  bone  (Fig.  6i).  The 
thought  concept  of  murder  is  revealed  by  an  energy  dis- 
charge at  a  point  on  a  line  drawn  upward  2.6  cm.  from  the 
tragus.  The  line  must  just  avoid  the  helix.  The  centers  in 
question  are  bilateral. 

The  value  of  the  latter  fact  awaits  confirmation  by 
criminological  investigations. 

The  physics  of  love. — Sexual  feelings  contribute  weal 
or  woe  to  the  human  race  and  the  inculcations  of  ethical 
principles  are  not  alone  sufficient  to  abrogate  an  animal 
instinct.  To  paraphrase  Livy,  "Whenever  we  become 
ashamed  of  the  things  we  should  not  be  ashamed  of,  it  will 
not  be  long  before  we  will  begin  not  to  be  ashamed  of  the 
things  we  should  be  ashamed  of". 

The  Freudian  methods  of  psychoanalysis  by  translating 
a  dominant  sexual  idea  from  the  subconscious  to  the  con- 
scious mind  has  been  of  value  in  some  cases. 

By  the  author's  method  of  cerebral  localization  (page 
229),  mind  searching  is  an  objective  procedure  and  excludes 
the  personal  equation,  a  fact  of  importance  in  all  scientific 
investigations. 

Love,  like  every  other  phenomenon  in  nature,  is  de- 
pendent upon  matter  in  vibration  and  the  passional  com- 
ponent has  a  wave-metric  index  (page  286)  of  14  in  both 
sexes.     Vide  Baraduc's  hypothesis  (page  11). 

The  subsidiary  sexual  center  in  the  spinal  cord  in  the 
male  determinable  after  the  manner  cited  on  page  229,  is 
between  the  loth  and  12th  dorsal  spines. 

Pathology  of  love, — What  was  formerly  regarded  as 
the  love  and  hates  of  the  chemical  "  affinities  "  was  but  a 
name  for  the  action  of  electrically  charged  atoms.  All  mat- 
ter has  the  same  attractive  force  and  the  invariable  property 


232  APPENDIX 

of  matter  is  electricity.  Personal  likes  and  dislikes  are 
only  questions  of  individuals  in  or  out  of  tune. 

The  physical  reaction  of  the  organism  in  subconscious 
love  has  its  periods  of  incubation  ("  out  of  sorts  ")  and  its 
symptomatology  (irrationality).  Its  cure  may  eventually 
be  factitious  —  charging  he  organism  with  electrons  of  like 
affinity. 

The  new  psychology. — The  progress  of  psychology 
must  be  dependent  on  science  as  a  whole  and  its  real  advent 
began  when  an  anatomist  (Weber),  a  physicist  (Fechner), 
and  a  physiologist  (Wundt)  cooperated  in  its  development. 

The  psychologist  acquires  his  knowledge  of  mental 
states  and  the  experience  of  others  by  means  of  physical 
effects  (words,  movements,  gestures).  Thus  it  is  that,  this 
method  of  analysis  must  debar  the  mental  state  of  creatures 
whose  methods  of  expression  do  not  resemble  our  own.  The 
disparity  of  man's  brain  and  that  of  an  anthropoid  ape  is 
relatively  insignificant  and  the  only  physiological  standard 
between  man  and  every  other  animal  is  the  faculty  of  speech. 

As  Huxley  puts  it;  "Our  reverence  for  the  nobility  of 
manhood  will  not  be  lessened  by  the  knowledge  that  Man  is 
in  substance  and  in  structure  one  with  the  brutes,  for  he 
alone  possesses  the  marvelous  endowment  of  intelligible 
and  rational  speech." 

In  our  investigations  of  the  subliminal  mind  iq.  v.),  the 
possible  communion  without  language  between  every  sen- 
tient creature  relegates  speech  to  a  maladroit  mechanism. 
To  the  phonologist,  the  phonetics  of  animals  represent  gate- 
ways to  the  mind. 

The  constitution  of  mind  is  identified  with  the  history 
and  destiny  of  matter  and  like  the  material  world,  can  only 
be  understood  quantitatively  as  a  system  of  matter  and 
energy.     Having  thus  evolved  our  contention,  we  are  in  a 


BICEREBRATION  '2'S'S 

position  to  suggest  in  the  new  psychology,  a  method  in 
accordance  with  the  electron  theory  for  the  investigation  of 
cerebration. 

Brain  waves. — The  scientific  world  neither  recognizes 
the  existence  of  brain  waves  nor  the  presence  in  the  brain  of 
a  "detector"  capable  of  converting  the  waves  into  a  sensible 
form  as  is  necessary  in  the  operation  of  wireless  telegraphy. 

The  foregoing  contention  is  easily  disproved  by  any  one 
capable  of  recognizing  a  visceral  reflex. 

In  our  experiments  (page  247)  the  heart,  a  crude  substi- 
tute for  the  brain,  gave  positive  demonstration  of  the  fact  of 
psychodynamic  effects  and  revealed  the  specificity  of 
thought. 

What  is  regarded  as  matter,  is  only  an  effect  of  a  particu- 
lar kind  of  motion  and  without  vibrations,  we  would  know 
nothing  of  the  world  and  the  universe  about  us.  The  move- 
ments of  the  universe  are  the  manifestations  of  a  single 
agent  which  is  called  energy. 

Man  is  made  up  of  vibrations  and  personality  is  identified 
with  atomic  combinations.  Every  living  being  is  a  trans- 
former of  energy  and  speaking  specifically  when  a  man 
thinks,  he  changes  the  energy  of  his  environment  (earth, 
air,  sun)  into  nervous  energy. 

That  some  individuals  cannot  think  well  in  the  dark 
(page  60).  is  capable  of  understanding. 

BiCEREBRATiON. — This  neologism  was  suggested  to  con- 
firm the  hypothesis  of  Herbert  Spencer,  who  contended  that 
in  good  thinkers  the  two  sides  of  the  brain  were  probably  used 
together  much  more  than  in  ordinary  people.  This,  as  his 
commentator  affirms  may  be  proved  to  be  true  not  only  in 
regard  to  thinking  but  in  understanding. 

With  the  brain  at  rest,  energy  is  discharged  (to  evoke  a 
visceral  reflex)  from  the  left  psychomotor  area  in  the  male 


234  APPENDIX 

and  from  the  right  psychomotor  area  in  the  female  (page  72) 
In  the  average  thinker  while  engaged  in  increased  mental 
activity,  there  is  only  an  increased  potentiality  of  energy 
discharged  from  one  psychomotor  area  with  a  corresponding 
increase  of  energy  from  the  finger  tips  as  the  following  figures 
illustrate : 

MEASUREMENTS  MADE  WITH  THE  BIODYNAMOMETER 
(page  44)  IN  A  MALE  SUBJECT  FROM  THE  LEFT  PSYCHO- 
MOTOR AREA  AND  FROM  THE  FINGER  TIPS  OF  THE 
RIGHT    HAND. 

ENERGY  DISCHARGE 

BRAIN   AT   REST  FROM  THE  FINGER  TIPS 

7/25  of  an  Ohm.  3/25  of  an  Ohm. 

ENERGY   DISCHARGE 
BRAIN   IN   ACTIVITY  FROM  THE  FINGER  TIPS 

2^  Ohms.  12/25  of  an  Ohm. 

In  the  great  thinker,  there  is  an  energy  discharge  of  great 
potentiality  from  both  psychomotor  regions. 

Thus,  in  Edwin  Markham,  the  poet*,  the  energy  dis- 
charge from  the  left  psychomotor  region  was  equivalent  to 
60  Ohms. 

The  potentiality  of  this  energy  discharge  can  only  be 
fully  appreciated  by  comparison. 

The  energy  discharge  from  a  giant  magnet  with  a  lifting 
power  of  approximately  400  pounds  to  the  square  inch  has 
an  energy  discharge  of  only  32  Ohms. 

The  energy  discharge  from  the  finger  tips  of  an  ordinary 
individual  exceeds  that  from  a  bar-magnet. 

Nerve-force. — The  nature  of  the  conduction  processes 
in  nerves  has  been  the  subject  of  numerous  theories.  The 
most  recent  investigations  by  Tashiro  and  Adams, f  suggest 

♦Author  of.  "The  Man  with  the  Hoe." 
iThe  biometer  employed  measures  carbon  dioxid  in  amounts  as  small  as 
0.0000001  gram. 


HYPNOSIS  235 

the  correctness  of  a  metabolic  or  chemical  theory.  My 
investigations  show  that  the  latter,  as  well  as  the  physical 
theory,  is  correct. 

When  potential,  is  transformed  into  actual  energy  (page 
8),  a  stimulating  energy  from  without  is  required  and  the 
latter  bears  no  quantitative  relation  (page  25)  to  the  amount 
of  transformed  energy. 

Energy  is  work  and  as  the  latter  is  a  function  of  motion, 
it  is  impossible  to  conceive  of  energy  production  without  an 
increase  of  metabolism.  Human  energy  is  an  electro-mag- 
netic phenomenon  (page  225). 

If  the  tip  of  a  receiving  electrode  is  placed  o\'er  the  ulnar 
nerve,  no  energy  sufficient  to  elicit  a  visceral  reflex  is  obtain- 
able. If  now,  any  skin  area  innervated  by  this  nerve  is 
irritated  there  is  an  immediate  discharge  of  positive  duling 
energy  and  stomach  dulness  ensues. 

If,  to  the  mechanistic  conception  of  vital  phenomena, 
the  functional  unit  of  the  reflex  arc  is  superimposed  by  the 
physiologist,  it  is  a  concept  of  convenience  and  does  not 
absolve  us  from  believing  that,  the  effect  of  a  stimulus  is 
attained  by  physico-chemical  means. 

Hypnosis. — By  aid  of  the  visceral  reflexes  the  true 
pscho-physiologic  status  of  hypnotism  may  be  determined. 

To  refer  the  phenomenon  to  "suggestion"  is  a  mere 
matter  of  logomachy  and  conceals  our  ignorance  of  the  pro- 
cess involved. 

There  is  a  normal  discharge  of  energy  emanating  from 
the  psychomotor  region  (page  72).  Suggestion  plays  a 
dominant  part  in  the  development  of  h\'pnotic  sleep. 

Irrespective  of  the  method  employed  in  inducing  the 
latter,  it  is  always  characterized  by  some  repetitious  monoto- 
nous performance  conducive  to  sleep  like  the  rhythmic  swing 
of  the  cradle,  hammock  or  rocking  chair. 


236  appendix 

In  the  hypnotic  state,  like  in  natur.\l  sleep,  it  is 
impossible  to  conduct  any  energy  from  the  psychomo- 
tor region  to  evoke  a  visceral  reflex. 

Thus,  in  h}^nosis  there  is  a  temporary  paralysis  of 
psychical  activity.  Contrary  to  the  current  belief,  the 
writer  has  found  by  the  method  already  described  (page  229) 
absolutely  no  reflex  reaction  of  subconsciousness  to  stimuli 
acting  on  the  senses  during  h>^nosis.  The  hypnotized  brain 
is  a  receptive  and  not  a  productive  organ. 

Psychic  impressions  are  tantamount  to  an  undeveloped 
photographic  plate.  The  latter  requires  a  developer  to 
e\^olve  the  impressions.  Similarly,  consciousness  in  some 
form  is  necessary  for  developing  sense  impressions. 

When  reference  is  made  to  consciousness,  it  is  with 
the  avowed  purpose  of  endowing  it  with  electronic  attributes ; 
that  of  knowing  (in  respect  to  the  electrons)  how  to  arrange 
themselves  to  form  matter,  directivity,  speed,  reflex 
responses,  etc.  The  electronic  reactions  elicited  serve  to 
explain  some  of  the  phenomena  of  hypnosis  in  some  indi- 
viduals and  eliminate  what  was  regarded  as  apocryphal  in 
connection  therewith. 

Concentration  of  the  mind. — This  phrase  can  be 
demonstrated  as  literally  true.  When  a  subject  engages  in 
thought  with  red  material  across  the  head  (page  69),  the 
brain  waves  are  scattered  in  all  directions  and  a  visceral 
reflex  is  evoked.  This  is  not  the  case  when  thought  is  di- 
rected to  a  specific  object.  To  prove  this  brain  focusing, 
all  that  is  necessary  is  to  use  the  electrodes  and  cord 
(page  45).  Let  several  wooden  objects  (used  to  elim- 
inate autochthonous  energy)  be  placed  in  different 
parts  of  a  room  and  while  the  subject  is  concentrat- 
ing on  an  object  let  an  assistant  touch  each  object  in 
succession  with  the    distal    electrode    (proximal    electrode 


SENSES  237 

to  the  stomach  regson  of  the  person  on  whom  the  reflex 
is  elicited. 

The  moment  the  object  thought  of  is  touched  an  im- 
mediate stomach  dulness  ensues.  All  the  phenomena  noted 
with  the  stomach  are  demonstrable  with  the  reflexophone 
(q.v.). 

Dextral  or  SINISTR.4L  SYMPTOMS. — Reference  to  this 
subject  has  been  discussed  elsewhere.  For  some  reason, 
patients  will  complain  of  symptoms  predominating  either 
on  the  right  or  the  left  side  of  the  body.  Such  complaints 
I  have  heretofore  regarded  as  ridiculous. 

The  distribution  of  energy  to  both  sides  of  the  body  is 
neither  of  the  same  potentiality  nor  of  the  same  polarity 
(page  80). 

Let  us  select  as  a  paradigm  the  barometric  neuroses. 

We  shall  learn  later  (page  270)  that,  weather  changes  are 
identified  with  electrical  disturbances  and  while  the  polarity 
and  potentiality  of  energy  produced  in  the  organism  may 
cope  with  such  anomalies  on  one  side  of  the  body,  they  can- 
not do  so  on  the  other  side. 

Senses. — "Delicacy  of  the  senses  is  the  foundation  on 
which  are  built  the  highest  and  best  developments  of  human 
character"  (Ruskin).  Science  contents  itself  in  saying  that 
a  difference  in  smell  is  dependent  on  a  kind  of  chemical  sense 
and  things  smell  differently  because  they  differ  chemically. 

It  can  easily  be  demonstrated  that  the  question  of  odor 
like  color,  is  a  matter  of  rate  vibration  and  differentiation  is 
possible  by  vibrodynamometry  (page  49)  and  the  use  of  the 
variable  condenser  of  the  sphygmobiometcr  (page  272). 

Smell,  like  taste,  is  regarded  as  a  contact  sense  and  is  not 
due  to  etheric  waves.  The  later  contention  may  be  dis- 
proved by  the  use  of  the  sphygmobiometcr  (q.  v.). 

Place  at  some  distance  from  the  subject  an  hermetically 


238  APPENDIX 

closed  bottle  (corked)  containing  oil  of  orange.  In  contact 
with  the  cork  place  the  receiving  electrode. 

The  subject  places  the  other  electrode  within  several 
inches  from  the  nose. 

Permit  the  energy  from  the  corked  bottle  to  accumulate 
for  several  minutes  with  the  index  of  the  variable  condenser 
at  90  on  the  scale.  Next,  move  the  index  along  the  scale 
very  gradually  and  almost  invariably  at  17  of  the  scale,  the 
subject  perceives  not  an  odor  but  a  sense  of  warmth  or  a 
breeze.  This  is  not  a  matter  of  suggestion  for  the  subject 
with  closed  eyes  does  not  know  the  position  of  the  index. 

A  repetition  of  the  experiment  with  the  same  subject 
nearly  always  leads  to  uniform  results. 

A  keen  sense  of  smell  is  necessary  in  conducting  this 
experiment. 

In  conducting  a  number  of  experiments  the  nasal  sensa- 
tion may  vary  between  17  and  22  of  the  scale  for  reasons 
cited  on  page  286. 

If  the  energy  from  the  oil  of  orange  is  permitted  to  con- 
dense for  several  hours,  some  subjects  will  at  once  detect 
the  real  odor  of  the  oil  when  the  index  attains  a  definite 
point  on  the  scale. 

When  other  odors  are  employed  for  experimental  pur- 
poses, nasal  sensations  will  be  perceived  at  other  points  on 
the  scale.  Thus,  carbon  disulphide  is  perceived  between 
72  and  77  of  the  scale. 

NOTE  IV. 

GYROGRAPHY. 

The  discussion  of  this  neologism  is  approached  with 
diffidence. 

Any    theory    however    erroneous,    though    capable    of 


GYROGRAPHY  239 

experimental  test,  eventually  contributes  something  to 
experimental  knowledge. 

The  forces  of  nature  always  move  by  alternate  deviations 
first  to  one  and  then  the  other  side  of  a  common  mean. 
What  we  call  rest  is  unperceived  activity  (Huxley). 

All  locomotion  results  from  oscillating  movements 
(Herbert  Spencer). 

The  sense  of  rhythm  is  a  fundamental  quality  of  neuro- 
muscular tissue  (Havelock  Ellis). 

Rhythmicity  in  nature  is  illustrated  physiologically  in 
menstruation  sexual  rhythms  etc. ;  in  pathology,  by  alternat- 
ing emotional  states  which  have  an  important  bearing  on  the 
psychology  of  disease. 

Unconscious  muscular  action  or  motor  automatism  is 
supposed  to  explain  the  movements  of  the  "magic  pendu- 
lum" or  pendule  exploratcur . 

The  oscillations  of  a  little  ball  suspended  from  a  thread 
which  held  between  the  fingers  by  a  sensitive  known  as 
"automatist"  were  variously  interpreted  in  all  ages.  The 
augurs  in  ancient  Rome  employed  this  method  in  divination. 

Interest  in  the  supposed  occult  force  directing  the  move- 
ments of  the  pendulum  is  periodically  revived  even  by  men 
of  erudition. 

The  gyrations  of  the  ball  were  invoked  to  explain  the 
planetary  motions,  to  predetermine  the  sex  of  eggs,  to 
locate  underground  ores  or  springs  and  were  also  recognized 
as  a  new  force  (odyle). 

A  more  recent  study  of  these  unconscious  movements  by 
Janet,  shows  that  in  certain  instances  more  knowledge  is 
exhibited  in  these  gyrations  than  is  possessed  by  our  con- 
scious personality  and  the  investigation  of  the  source  of  this 
knowledge  constitutes  an  important  phase  of  psychical 
research. 


240  APPENDIX 

It  is  still  difficult  to  say  whether  the  intelligent  automatic 
movements  exceed  the  knowledge  derived  from  a  known 
environment. 

Man  is  an  ideo-motor  being  whose  idea  is  expressed  in 
some  kind  of  external  motion;  consciously,  in  articulate 
language  and  unconsciously,  in  unrecognized  muscular 
actions.  The  activities  of  man  are  the  sum  of  the  activities 
of  his  component  electrons.  Electrons  have  a  fixed  standard 
of  directivity  and  are  governed  by  mathematical  equations. 
The  gyroscope,  fully  illustrates  rotation  and  the  com- 
position of  forces  and  establishes  the  fundamental  Newtonian 
laws. 

The  earth  is  a  gyroscope  of  larger  magnitude  and  its 
rotation  on  its  axis  is  due  to  electrical  induction. 

The  geotactic  and  rheotactic  movements  of  organisms  in 
their  orientation  prove  the  supremacy  of  the  laws  of  cosmical 
physics. 

The  writer  has  attempted  a  rehabilitation  of  this  subject, 
notably  in  the  direction  of  making  records  which  he  has 
called  GYROGRAMS  or  specifically,  pathograms  when  the 
oscillations  are  influenced  by  pathological  energy. 

In  conducting  the  experiments,  the  eyes  of  the  subject 
are  closed  so  that  the  direction  of  the  oscillations  are  unin- 
fluenced. 

The  character  of  the  energ>'  discharge  must  not  be  known 
to  the  subject  so  that  expectant  attention  which  has  a  de- 
cided influence  on  involuntary  muscular  movements  may 
be  excluded. 

Individuals  vary  in  their  susceptibility  to  the  energy 
discharge  and  temperamental  subjects  are  necessary.  The 
latter  is  practically  a  reflexophile  (one  with  exaggerated 
reflexes)  who  shows,  "greater  susceptibility  to  all  impres- 
sions, greater  rapidity  of  action,  of  ideas  and  of  speech." 


GYROGRAPHY 


241 


Comfortably  seated,  the  subject  suspends  from  the 
fingers  a  cord  (15  cm.  in  length)  to  which  is  attached  a  weight 
(35  grams). 

The  arm  rests  on  a  cushion.  Below  the  edge  of  the  table 
is  a  microscope  (with  ocular  removed)  into  the  aperture  of 
which  the  recording  plate  covered  with  blackened  paper  is. 
fixed  (Fig.  62). 


Fig.  62. — Method  of  making  gyrograms.  A,  weight  with  attached  shaving  of 
cork;  B,  recording  plate;  C,  microscope  into  the  ocular  aperture  of  which  the 
recording  plate  is  placed. 

With  the  coarse  adjustment  of  the  microscope,  an  assis- 
tant raises  or  lowers  the  plate  to  accommodate  the  recording 
tip. 

The  latter  (thin  shaving  of  cork)  is  fixed  to  the  weight  by 
plaster. 

The    proximal    electrode    of    the    sphygmobiometer    is 


242  APPEXDIX 

attached  to  the  abdomen  whereas  the  receiving  electrode  is 
placed  in  juxtaposition  with  the  energy  source. 

The  subject  with  closed  eyes  first  communicates  with 
his  fingers  a  shght  lateral  motion  to  the  weight. 

When  the  latter  motion  is  regular,  the  circuit  is  closed 
and  when  any  change  in  the  direction  of  the  movement  of  the 
weight  occurs,  the  microscope  is  raised  and  the  record  is 
made. 

Several  minutes  may  elapse  before  the  direction  of  the 
weight  is  altered. 

In  using  the  sphygmobiomoter  the  index  of  the  variable 
condenser  should  be  at  zero.  The  illustrated  pathograms 
were  made  under  the  conditions  specified. 

Although  the  subjects  were  not  cognizant  of  the  character 
of  the  conveyed  energy,  }'et  the  pathograms  show  a  remark- 
able uniformity. 

Assuming  that  the  gyrograms  are  automatic,  subliminal 
and  executed  with  an  expectant  idea,  it  is  only  according  a 
tribute  to  the  prodigious  memory  of  the  subconscious  mind 
to  enlist  it  for  service  in  research  work.  The  writer  suggests 
that  physicians  should  select  persons  with  known  diseases 
for  gyrographic  experimentation.  In  this  way,  the  subcon- 
consious  mind  may  memorize  the  directivity  of  energy  and 
may  reproduce  it  in  individuals  with  like  diseases  although 
the  latter  are  unknown  to  the  physician. 

Energy  may  be  conveyed  by  a  conducting  cord  (to  the 
epigastrium)  in  the  usual  way  without  the  aid  of  a 
sphygmobiometer. 


PATHOGRAMS 


243 


C0LI3EPSIS 


^^ 


SARCOMA 


QUIESCEJIT   STfHILlS 


CHOLELITHIASIS 


TUBERCULOSIS 


ACTIVE  SYPHILIS  CARCINOMA 

Fig.  63. — Pathograme, 


244  APPENDIX 


NOTE  V. 

SUBLIMINAL   MIXD — TELEPATHY. 

The  so-called  subliminal  self,  embraces  psychical  activi- 
ties which  He  beneath  the  threshold  of  consciousness.  It 
records  past  impressions  (latent  memor\')  and  possesses 
functions  transcending  our  conscious  cerebration. 

The  subliminal  mind  suggested  as  a  working  hypothesis 
is  now  demonstrable. 

Thought  transference,  which  refers  to  the  direct  action  of 
mind  on  mind  without  the  intervention  of  any  sense  impres- 
sions is  likewise  capable  of  analogical  demonstration.  Here- 
tofore, our  knowledge  of  telepathy  could  be  embraced  by  an 
aphoristic  statement  of  George  Eliot,  ''We  map  out  our 
ignorance  in  long  Greek  names."  * 

The  fourth  dimension  idea,  the  sixth  sense  and  telepathy 
have  been  the  subject  of  enormous  speculation  and  when 
viewed  from  the  evidential  side,  the  formulated  conclusions 
are  untrustworthy  for  the  reason,  that  the  proof  of  a  single 
objective  fact  is  worth  tons  of  theories. 

With  the  introduction  of  wireless  telegraphy,  the  analogy 
between  it  and  telepathy  was  supposed  to  be  theoretically 
demonstrated.  This  h}pothesis  was  subjected  to  ridicule 
for  the  reason  that  the  existence  of  brain  waves  was  denied 
and  furthermore,  one  would  have  to  assume  that  the  per- 
cipient was  in  possession  of  a  natural  detector,  condenser, 
tuning  device,  potentiometer,  ammeter,  variometer  and  all 
the  other  apparatus  for  receiving. 

Laboring  art  at  its  best  is  only  a  crude  imitator  of  nature. 
The  lungs  antedated  the  bellows,  the  heart,  the  pump,  the 
hand,  the  lever  and  the  eye,  the  photographic  camera  with 


SUBLIMINAL    MIND 


245 


its  eyelid   (cap),  iris   (shutter),  lens  and  retina   (sensitive 
plate) . 

Telephonic  and  telegraphic  apparatus  with  switches, 
batteries,  transformers,  relays,  shunts  and  automatic  circuit 
are  mere  mimicry  of  what  is  done  in  the  nervous  system  and 
always  by  aid  of  the  same  energy. 


^^N 


B 


c5 


-Vvv*.^" 


Fig.  64. — Showing  ihe  method  of  connecting  the  receiving  electrode  with  the 
antennae  when  using  the  sphygmobiomcter  or  reflexophone.  A,  antennae;  B, 
receiving  electrode;  C,  abdominal  electrode  for  use  with  the  sphygmobiometer. 

Psychic  energy  is  demonstrable  by  the  stomach  reflex 
(page  66)  or  the  sphygmobiometer  (page  272). 

Connect  the  receiving  electrode  of  the  latter  apparatus 
with  the  antennae  (Fig.  64)  and  the  other  electrode  to  the 
subject  in  the  usual  way  (page  36).  The  indicator  of  the 
variable  condenser  is  placed  at  zero  on  the  scale. 


246  APPENDIX 

The  moment  an  individual  in  an  adjacent  room  some 
distance  from  the  subject  engages  in  profound  thought 
(with  red  material  across  his  head,  page  69),  the  buzzing 
of  the  sphygmophone  of  the  apparatus  ceases.  In  some 
individuals  this  effect  may  be  secured  at  a  distance  of  100  or 
more  feet.  With  the  sphygmobiometer,  it  is  also  possible  to 
demonstrate  the  specificity  of  brain  waves  fpsychovibratory 
effects). 

Thought,  like  ever\'  other  natural  phenomenon  is  depend- 
ent upon  matter  in  motion  or  vibration  and  matter,  is  only 
an  eft'ect  of  a  definite  kind  of  motion. 

Colors  are  mereh'  dift'erences  in  wa\'e  lengths ;  the  longest 
and  slowest  of  the  waves  produce  the  sensation  of  red,  the 
shortest  and  most  rapid,  violet. 

In  wireless  telegraphy  when  electro-magnetic  waves  are 
set  in  motion  by  electrical  energy,  tuxixg  is  necessary  so 
that  the  wave  vibrations  may  be  adjusted  to  affect  the 
receiver. 

For  the  latter  purpose,  a  tuning  coil  or  a  variable  con- 
denser (more  delicate  in  adjustment)  is  used  to  increase  or 
decrease  the  electrical  waves  to  the  proper  lengths. 

Mbration  is  a  species  of  stimulation.  Just  as  color  is 
determined  by  retinal  stimulation  by  dift'erent  vibratory 
rates,  a  like  varied  physiologic  response  is  elicited  from  the 
different  structures  of  the  body,  which  are  like  the  keyboard 
of  a  piano  and  respond  like  bodies  set  in  motion  by  tone 
vibrations. 

The  great  riddle  of  the  universe  can  never  be  solved  by 
our  natural  senses  which  are  too  crude  and  inaccurate  to 
reveal  the  world  beyond  them. 

The  telescope  and  spectroscope  have  been  devised  to 
substitute  the  e}'e  in  analyzing  the  firmament,  the  micro- 
scope, to  reveal  the  infinitesimal  of  the  microcosm  and  the 


THOUGHT    SPECIFICITY  -47 

REFLEX,  the  instrument  of  the  subliminal  mind,  to  respond 
to  vibrations  beneath  the  threshold  of  consciousness. 

Specificity  of  thought. — A  specific  thought  is  energy 
of  a  definite  wave  length.  Employing  the  sphygmobiometer 
after  the  manner  cited  (page  278)  but  placing  the  index  of 
the  variable  condenser  at  i  on  the  scale,  an  individual  in  an 
adjacent  room  is  directed  to  look  intently  on  some  figure 
from  2  to  10.  The  position  of  the  index  on  the  scale  will 
indicate  the  number  thought  of  by  the  other  person. 

Thus,  if  the  number  9,  is  selected,  the  sphygmophone 
will  only  cease  to  sound  when  the  index  attains  10  of  the 
scale. 

The  following  indices  have  been  empirically  established 
for  different  numbers. 

//  the  number  Buzzing  ceases  when 

selected  were:  the  index  on  the  scale 

attains: 

1 2 

2 3 

3 4 

4 5 

5 6 

6 7 

7 8 

8 9 

9 10 

10 10 

A  code  of  words  was  similarly  established. 

//  the  word  selected  Buzzing    ceases    when 

were:  the  index  on  the  scale 

attains: 

Saved 5 

Well 2 

Arrived 4 

Operated 6 

Girl 7 

Boy 1, 

Buy 8 

Sell II 

Better 14 

Found 25 


248  APPENDIX 

Two  or  more  numbers  or  words  may  be  selected  after  the 
following  manner. 

Thus,  the  index  of  the  variable  condenser  is  placed  at  90 
to  secure  condensation  of  the  greatest  amount  of  psychic 
energy.  Another  person  thinks  of  one  word  for  one-half 
minute  and  of  another  word  for  the  same  period  of  time. 

If  the  buzzing  of  the  instrument  ceases  at  5  and  4  of  the 
scale,  the  words  selected  were  saved  and  arrived. 


e 

Fig.  65. — Illustrating  the  specificity  of  thought  in  relation  to  figures.  The 
numbers  refer  to  the  wavemeter  indices.  This  psychological  investigation  may 
likewise  be  executed  with  the  reflexophone  in  connection  with  a  variable  condenser. 

When  thought  is  concentrated  on  a  figure,  the  latter  is 
revealed  when  the  index  attains  a  definite  position  on  the 
scale  (Fig.  65). 

In  the  foregoing  experiments,  one  may  employ  a  visceral 
reflex  (preferably  the  stomach)  or  the  heart  with  the  sphyg- 
mobiometer.  Results  in  my  investigations  were  not  uni- 
formly successful.  With  some  individuals  engaged  in 
thought  (good  mental  imagery)  positive  results  were  prac- 
tically always  secured.  In  general,  the  results  were  positive 
in  about  75  per  cent,  of  the  experimental  efforts.  Mistakes 
also  arise  owing  to  the  encroachment  of  one  wave  length  on 
the  other  (page  286).    The  distance  of  conveying  telepathic 


ABDOMINAL    BRAIN  249 

impressions  after  the  manner  indicated  was  subject  to  the 
''law  of  inverse  squares." 

If  the  foregoing  results  can  be  attained  by  means  of  a 
heart  or  stomach  reflex,  is  it  not  evident  that  the  brain  with 
at  least  three  billions  of  cells  specially  attuned  to  this  spe- 
cific function  is  more  capable  of  psychesthetic  action? 

The  author,  fully  realizes  the  hostihty  that  will  be  engen- 
dered in  relation  to  the  foregoing,  owing  to  its  apparent  lack 
of  relationship  with  existing  knowledge. 

The  writer  has  however  created  no  discontinuity  in  the 
transition  to  this  new  knowledge.  He  has  availed  himself  of 
reflexes  which  are  more  accurate  as  detectors  of  energ}-  than 
any  apparatus  that  can  be  devised  by  man.  He  has  not  con- 
fused proof  of  an  objective  fact  with  evidence  for  his  own 
convictions.  The  living  functions  conform  to  the  uniformity 
of  law  accepted  in  the  inorganic  world.  Electricity  is  an 
invariable  property  of  matter  but  matter  and  electricity  are 
so  intimately  associated  that  they  are  practically  the 
same. 

In  the  latter  sense,  mind  must  consort  with  matter  and 
is  essentially  a  question  of  physics  and  not  metaphysics. 

Abdominal  brain. — The  Bible  does  not  refer  to  the  word 
brain.  The  Hebrews  located  mind,  in  the  kidneys  and  ten- 
der emotions,  in   the  bowels. 

The  regulatory  mechanism  of  the  splanchnic  area  is  con- 
trolled by  the  sympathetic  system,  appropriately  called, 
abdominal  brain  (solar  plexus). 

This  system  being  independent,  self-regulative  or  autono- 
mous in  its  activity  has  been  correctly  called,  autonomic 
nervous  system. 

The  splanchnic  area  includes  the  vessels  supplied  to  the 
intestinal  tract,  liver,  kidneys  and  spleen. 

Vasomotor  reflexes  can  be  discharged  by   the  vessels 


250  APPENDIX 

themselves  and  they  participate  in  the  reflex  regulation  of 
their  ovm.  functions. 

As  a  rule  the  localized  reflex  is  a  Vasodilation.* 

Thought  directed  to  a  part  \\'ill  increase  its  vascularity. 

If  heterodoxy  has  not  characterized  the  writer's  previous 
asseverations,  he  surely  stands  convicted  as  a  heterocHte  by 
attempting  to  demonstrate  one  of  the  subsidiary'  residences 
of  mind  in  the  abdominal  region. 

The  abdominal  brain  aids  specificalh'  in  the  demonstra- 
tion of  telepathy. 

]\Ian  is  essentially  a  reflex  animal  (page  26).  Con- 
sciousness depends  upon  the  action  of  the  reflexes  and  it  is 
not  coextensive  with  mind.  ^Mental  function  as  work  might 
proceed  without  consciousness,  just  as  the  machinen,'  of  a 
clock  might  work  without  a  dial.  Everj-  emotion,  is  simul- 
taneously an  instinct,  and  ever\'  physical  reaction  to  an 
emotion,  is  the  natural  expression  of  protection. 

Huxley,  referred  to  science  as  organized  common  sense 
which  paraphrased  signifies  that  science  does  not  interpret 
as  a  myster}'  what  is  in  realit}'  a  \'ery  simple  thing. 

Instinct  is  an  adaptive  impulse  in  the  absence  of  intelli- 
gence and  made  up  of  reflex  acts  purely  automatic  and  with- 
out the  domain  of  the  mind.  A  reflex  movement  in  neurons 
is  the  basic  condition  in  ever\-  \'olitional  act. 

Despite  repetition,  let  us  recall  that  vibration  is  a  mode 
of  stimulation  and  that  the  response  of  our  tissues  to  a  spe- 
cific rate  of  vibration  differs  in  no  wise  from  the  A  string  of  a 
piano  (in  s}Titon}')  which  sounds  in  harmony  when  the  A 
string  of  a  violin  is  struck.  Now,  the  splanchnic  vasomotor 
nerves  will  respond  to  the  psychovibratorx'  component  of 
cerebration. 

This  observation  conforms  to  that  of  Haab,  who  directed 

*Read  Polar  Expression  of  Energy  on  page  8i. 


TELEPATHY 


251 


attention  to  a  psychical  reaction   (pupilary  reflex)  due  to 
a  suggestion  of  light. 

In  executing  the  following  experiments,  the  subject  on 
whom  the  areas  of  abdominal  dulness  are  to  be  demon- 
strated must  have  an  abdomen  which  yields  a  t>'pical 
tympanitic  sound  on  percussion.  The  subject  must  stand 
facing  the  west  (page  59). 


Figs.  66  and  67. — Illuslrating  ventral  areas  of  dulness  on  percussion   when 
words  or  the  senses  are  visualized  by  another  (transmitter). 


At  some  distance  from  the  percipient  the  person  (trans- 
mitter) who  is  able  to  concentrate  his  mind  connects  his 
psychomotor  region  with  red  material  (page  69). 

When  the  transmitter  visualizes  any  of  his  special  senses 
(sound,  taste,  smell),  areas  of  dulness  on  percussion  (caused 


252  APPENDIX 

by  the  splanchnic  vasomotor  reflexes)  appear  in  specific 
locations  of  the  abdomen  (Figs.  66  and  67), 

These  areas  may  be  reproduced  by  an  individual  on  his 
own  abdomen  provided  red  material  isused  after  the  manner 
cited   (autotelepathy) . 

The  latter  are  endogenetic  and  the  former,  exogenetic 
reflexes. 

By  connecting  the  percipient  with  an  aerial  (Fig.  64), 
another  person  can  by  thinking  of  definite  words,  make  a 
record  of  the  same  (areas  of  dulness)  on  specific  abdominal 
areas  of  the  percipient  (Figs.  66  and  67). 

These  telesthetic  results  (or  specifically  sympathetico- 
esthesia,  if  neologization  is  permitted)  have  been  success- 
fully achieved  by  the  writer  in  most  instances. 

Subliminal  Mind. — To  the  subliminal  self  is  conceded 
sense  impressions  too  feeble  to  arouse  conscious  perception, 
the  unconscious  power  dominating  physiological  processes, 
higher  mental  faculties  (genius,  prodigies),  dual  conscious- 
ness, higher  faculties  of  percipience  (exaltation  of  the  senses) 
etc. 

Subliminal  consciousness  may  be  demonstrated.  Atten- 
tion has  already  been  directed  to  the  writer's  method  of 
locating  centers  (page  229).  If  a  person  slightly  distant 
(2  or  3  feet)  from  the  percipient  and  separated  from  the 
latter  by  a  closed  door  places  a  ticking  watch  or  compresses 
a  Galton  whistle  (consciously  inaudible  to  the  percipient) 
on  a  line  with  the  ear  of  the  percipient,  an  immediate  dul- 
ness of  the  stomach  ensues  (energy  conducted  from  the 
auditory  area,  Fig.  61  to  the  stomach  region). 

By  this  means,  the  observer  eliciting  the  reflex  can  tell 
each  time  the  watch  is  brought  on  a  line  with  the  ear  of  the 
percipient.  The  same  result  may  be  achieved  with  the 
sphygmobiometer,  but  the  action  of  the  latter,  dependent 


SUBLIMINAL    MIND  253 

on  the  vagal  reflex  (page  85),  is  not  as  sensitive   as    the 
stomach  reflex. 

The  sense  of  smell  may  be  similarly  demonstrated.  WTien 
a  corked  bottle  containing  some  odoriferous  substance 
(consciously  imperceptible  to  the  percipient)  is  moved 
toward  the  nose,  it  is  only  when  the  bottle  reaches  the  latter 
that  a  reflex  is  discharged. 


Fig.  68. — Illustrating  functional  areas  on  the  surface  of  the  left  hemisphere 
in  a  right-handed  person.    The  cross  indicates  the  area  of  cutaneous  sensibility. 

This  objective  demonstration  of  an  odor  below  the 
threshold  of  consciousness  explains  a  number  of  phenomena. 
Thus,  the  power  to  be  conscious  of  a  cat  as  near  while  un- 
seen and  unheard  (known  as  ailurophobia)  is  a  subconscious 
recognition  of  olfactory  emanations  known  only  by  the 
results  in  susceptible  persons. 

Subconscious  vision  can  likewise  be  determined  b}'  the 
method  described  but  the  source  of  energy  can  only  be  con- 
ducted from  the  left  hemisphere  (visual  area)  in  a  right- 
handed  person  (Fig.  68).  This  is  in  accordance  with  the 
fact  established  by  physiologists,  viz.,  that  the  visual  area 


254  APPEXDIX 

like  the  speech  centers  are  located  in  the  left  hemisphere 
only.  This  subject  will  receive  further  consideration  in  the 
discussion  of  mediums  (page  257), 

Touch  at  a  DISTA^XE. — This  refers  to  the  faculty  pos- 
essed  by  the  blind  of  recognizing  the  existence  of  objects 
several  yards  awa}".  It  is  no  longer  necessarv^  to  invoke  a 
sixth  or  even  a  tenth  sense  to  explain  the  phenomenon.  It 
is  merely  an  exaltation  of  an  existing  sense  which  translates 
imperceptible  vibrations  into  sensations. 

It  is  a  fa  cult}'  common  to  animals  which  perceive  vibra- 
tions beyond  our  range  of  audition. 

If  one  electrode  on  a  conducting  cord  is  fixed  at  the  area 
of  cutaneous  sensibility  (Fig.  7)  on  the  left  brain  hemi- 
sphere and  the  other,  at  the  stomach  region,  the  experi- 
menter (eliciting  the  stomach  reflex)  can  absolutely  say 
each  time  another  person  (with  the  finger)  approaches  the 
skin  on  the  right  side  of  the  subject. 

In  the  average  person,  the  energ\'  discharge  from  the 
area  of  cutaneous  sensibility,  does  not  occur  until  the  finger 
is  within  4  inches  from  the  skin.  \Mien  the  tactile  sense  is 
exalted  (in  the  blind),  the  energ}-  discharge  is  noted  at  a 
distance  of  several  feet. 

NOTE  VI. 

PERSONAL    MAGNETISM — OCCULT    PHENOMENA. 

The  figurative  employment  of  the  phrase,  personal 
iLA.GNETiSM,  has  a  literal  significance.  It  was  regarded  as 
a  force  equivalent  to  that  exhibited  by  a  magnet  which 
passed  from  one  person  to  another. 

The  conception  of  personality  was  abandoned  when 
science  was  unable  to  demonstrate  a  so-called  '"vital  force." 

It  is  fully  a  generation  back  since  Huxley,  asserted  that, 


PERSONAL    MAGNETISM  liOi) 

"the  forces  exerted  by  living  matter  are  identical  with  those 
existing  in  the  organic  world  or  are  convertible  into  them." 

To  deprecate  "personal  magnetism,"  because  it  is  a 
misnomer  is  only  a  matter  of  logomachy. 

Astrology  has  no  ofhcial  recognition,  yet  astrological 
terms  are  employed  by  the  lexicographer. 

We  commence  our  prescriptions  with  an  inv^ocation 
to  Jupiter,  we  prescribe  mercury  and  speak  of  venereal  and 
lunatic  affections. 

The  energy  emanating  from  the  human  organism  is 
electro-magnetic  (page  225).  The  whole  domain  of  physics 
is  tending  toward  a  unification  of  various  forms  of  force 
under  one   great  principle. 

All  the  cosmic  forces  are  now  comprehended  in  a  single 

word — ENERGY. 

The  discharge  of  energ}-  from  the  average  individual  is 
relatively  potent  (page  234)  and  visceral  reflexes  may  be 
elicited  by  application  of  the  finger  tips  to  different  vertebral 
spines.  Nothing  is  left  to  the  imagination  in  such 
demonstrations. 

Before  the  Roentgen  rays,  the  pylorous  opens  and  the 
stomach  discharges  its  contents  into  the  duodenum  (page 

65). 

With  the  finger  tips  at  the  7th  cervical  spine,  the  lung 
border  descends  and  the  heart  diminishes  in  diameter. 

With  the  ophthalmoscope,  the  retinal  vessels  contract 
when  the  finger  tips  are  applied  at  the  7  th  cervical  spine  and 
dilate,  when  they  approach  the  loth  dorsal  spine  etc. 

Temperamental  individuals  (the  writer  designates  them 
as  ergohypertonics)  may  discharge  the  foregoing  reflexes 
at  a  distance  of  several  inches. 

Reference  has  already  been  made  to  the  influence  of 
soil  in  treatment  (page  195).     The  "laying  on  of  hands"" 


256  APPENDIX 

for  the  cure  of  disease  predicates  not  only  energy  discharge 
but  energy  polarity. 

Dr.  W.  B.  Page  (Goshen,  Ind.),  reports  to  me  as  follows: 

"I  have  repeatedly  observed  in  our  vicinity  several 
old  farmers  who  cure  facial  erysipelas  in  a  very  short 
time  by  holding  their  finger  tips  at  a  distance  of  about 
one  inch  from  the  erysipelatous  areas  and  making 
downward  passes.  They  cannot  explain  the  phenome- 
non and  only  know  that  results  are  attained." 

The  energy  from  erysipelas  is  negative  (page  127).  The 
energ>'  discharge  from  the  finger  tips  of  one  hand  is  positive 
and  from  the  other,  negative.  WTien  the  finger  tips  from 
both  hands  are  used,  the  discharge  must  be  neutral. 

Dr.  Gaston  Durville  (France),  has  shown  that  human 
hands  have  pronounced  bactericidal  power  in  certain  cases 
and  that  remarkable  cures  have  been  achieved  by  the  im- 
position  of  hands. 

With  others,  he  has  succeeded  in  mummifying  dead 
hands  by  passes  with  living  hands  at  a  distance  of  six  inches 
for  three-quarters  of  an  hour  daily. 

W.  H.  Allen  (Cleveland),  dessicates  bodies  of  animals 
and  pieces  of  meat  by  subjecting  them  for  several  days  to 
the  action  of  a  magnetic  field. 

PsYCHOMETRY. — This  is  a  supposed  occult  power  of 
recognizing  by  physical  contact  the  character  of  an  object 
and  to  diagnose  disease  by  touch. 

This  phenomenon  is  not  a  m}'th. 

Identity  is  no  less  an  attribute  of  the  inorganic  than  it  is 
of  organic  matter.  Here  identity  is  associated  with  the 
number,  arrangement  and  vibratory  rate  of  electrons 
(page  47). 

The  writer  has  repeatedly  demonstrated  that,  if  several 
individuals  make  contact  with  the  finger  tips  of  one  hand 


OCCULT    PHENOMENA  257 

for  about  one  minute  with  different  sheets  of  paper,  the 
latter  may  be  identified  with  respect  to  the  individual 
touching  the  paper. 

The  vibratory  rate  of  the  finger  tips  is  primarily  deter- 
mined (page  51). 

WTien  the  paper  is  touched,  the  vibratory  rate  is  com- 
municated to  the  paper  by  induction,  and  assumes  the  same 
rate  as  the  individual  who  touched  it. 

The  \ibratory  rate  from  the  paper  (after  contact  with  the 
finger  tips)  is  determined  after  the  same  manner  and  may 
persist  for  several  hours. 

Occult  phenomena. — The  visceral  reflexes  and  aux- 
iliary methods  (Chapter  V),  are  absolute  and  constant 
indices  for  demonstrating  human  energ}\ 

The  potentiality  of  the  latter  varies  in  different  indi- 
viduals (page  55). 

The  new  knowledge  of  human  energy  corroborates  the 
theor}'  of  human  radiations  (page  9). 

The  new  psycholog}'  of  spiritualism  will  eliminate  self 
deception  by  a  correct  interpretation  of  supposed  super- 
normal phenomena  as  extraordinary  manifestations  of 
human  energy  and  the  recognition  of  the  possibility  that, 
the  subliminal  self  in  certain  individuals  (called  mediums, 
psychics  or  automatists),  may  be  so  exalted  as  expressed  in 
sense  impressions,  that  phenomena  transcending  our  con- 
scious apprehension  become  perceptible. 

Such  individuals  may  be  compared  to  the  instruments 
of  science  which  translate  the  invisible  into  the  visible. 

Every  spiritistic  phenomenon  is  reproducible  by  the 
kinetic  energy  inherent  in  the  individual  and  it  is  unneces- 
sary to  invoke  a  supernal  reason  for  its  origin. 

Occult  phenomena  would  have  long  since  been  relegated 
to  the  scientific  knowable  had  it  not  been  for  the  antipathy 


258  APPENDIX 

shown  by  the  scientist  to  the  unclassified  residua  of  the  facts 
of  experience. 

The  credulous  believe  too  much;  the  scientific  too  little. 

"Superstition  is  true  psychology  in  the  wrong  dress." 

Elliot  Smith,  observed  that  smell  was  the  predominant 
sense  of  the  Ptilocercus — like  ancestor  of  the  primate  but 
SIGHT  had  become  the  predominant  sense  in  man. 

The  psychology  of  deception  has  no  limitation  if  the 
senses  are  invoked  in  the  interpretation  of  phenomena. 

Our  apprehension  of  the  world  is  one  prolonged  decep- 
tion:   the  senses  perceive  and  the  mind  apperceives. 

It  was  Helmholtz,  who  observed  that,  nature  seems  to 
have  packed  the  eye  with  mistakes  as  if  with  the  avowed 
purpose  of  destroying  any  possible  foundation  for  the  theory 
that  organs  are  adapted  to  their  environment.  It  is  reason 
which  restrains  the  senses  from  making  a  fool  of  their 
possessor. 

Let  us  succinctly  recall  some  spiritistic  data. 

Telekinesis. — This  refers  to  the  movements  of  objects 
without  contact  with  the  mover.  It  has  already  been  sho\\Ti 
(page  80)  that  ever>'  individual  is  encompassed  by  a  neuro- 
dynamic  field. 

The  potentiality  of  the  latter  varies  with  the  individual. 

In  the  biomechanic  detection  of  energ\^  (page  18), 
some  indi\'iduals  by  extending  their  fingers  in  the  direction 
of  the  stomach  may  raise  the  latter  a  distance  of  one  inch. 
Another  biomechanic  phenomenon  which  the  writer  has 
witnessed  was  an  arrest  of  the  pulse  at  a  distance  of  20  feet 
when  the  fingers  were  directed  at  the  7th  cervical  spine 
(page  63). 

This  extraordinary  energy  discharge  is  necessarih-  patho- 
logical, and  engendered  by  emotional  states  in  mediums, 
leaves  the  latter  after  the   performance    in    an  enervated 


OCCULT    PHENOMENA  259 

condition.  The  extraordinary  energ}^  producing  and  trans- 
forming brain  of  a  genius  is  equally  pathological  and  if  the 
mental  anomaly  were  physical,  the  genius  would  serve  as 
an  exhibit  in  a  museum. 

The  Cartesian  conception  that,  matter  cannot  act  where 
it  is  not,  was  overthrown  by  Newton,  in  his  law  of  universal 
gravitation. 

In  the  actio  in  distans  observed  at  seances,  certain  con- 
ditions are  exacted. 

In  materialization,  a  dark  seance  room  is  demanded  for 
better  propitation  of  the  spirits? 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  that  while  the  potentiality  of  human 
energy  is  less  in  the  dark  than  in  the  light  (page  269),  it 
can  evoke  a  visceral  reflex  at  a  greater  distance  in  a 
dark,  than  in  a  light  room. 

This  is  also  true  of  the  waves  in  wireless  transmission; 
more  power  is  necessary  in  the  day  than  in  the  night  to 
cover  the  same  distance  owing  to  the  light  (reducing  con- 
ductivity and  partial  absorption  of  weaker  waves)  which 
is  an  electro-magnetic  disturbance  of  the  ether  (page  224). 

Telekinetic  and  kindred  phenomena  are  dependent  on  a 
"compound  of  the  elementary  consciousness  of  the  sitters." 

In  the  latter  sense,  each  sitter  enters  as  a  dynamogenic 
element  in  the  production  of  energy. 

If  the  energ}'^  discharge  from  the  finger  tips  of  an  indi- 
vidual is  determined  biodynamometrically  (page  44)  and 
found  to  be  -h  of  an  Ohm,  the  discharge  is  increased  to  i  Ohm 
when  another  person  grasps  the  other  hand  of  this  individual 
and  to  II  Ohms,  when  a  third  person  enters  into  the  circle. 

At  seances,  certain  individuals  are  regarded  as  detri- 
mental factors  in  the  execution  of  phenomena. 

My  friend,  Hereward  Carrington,  who  has  accomplished 
so  much  in  the  differentiation  of  what  is  fraudulent  and 


260  APPENDIX 

genuine  in  spiritualism,  refers  to  an  internal  repulsive  force 
which  may  combat  phenomena. 

The  latter  contention  may  now  be  demonstrated  as  true. 

When  one  person  attempts  to  evoke  a  visceral  refle.x  by 
an  extension  of  his  fingers  toward  an  organ,  another  person 
by  willing  that  the  reflex  should  not  be  discharged  prevents 
elicitation  of  the  reflex.  It  is  not  necessary  for  the  person 
thus  willing  to  use  red  material  on  the  head  (page  69). 

Thus  it  is  that,  one  can  positively  affirm  whether  the 
second  person  is  a  propitious  or  opposing  element. 

The  physiologic  rank  of  the  will  is  loftier  than  that  of 
the  mind  by  directing  and  governing  the  latter. 

In  mentalization  with  the  content  of  thought  only,  red 
across  the  psychomotor  regions  (page  67)  is  necessary  to 
elicit  a  visceral  reflex  but  when  will  is  concerned,  red  is 
UNNECESSARY.  Will,  expressed  positively,  yields  an  energy 
with  a  polarity  which  is  both  positive  and  negative. 

Will,  expressed  negatively,  yields  a  neutral  energy. 

Insomuch  as  telekinetic  phenomena  are  achieved  by 
human  energ}^  which  is  positive  or  negative  (page  41),  it 
is  understandable  how  an  individual  with  an  opposing  will 
could  frustrate  a  physical  phenomenon. 

Even  antagonism  and  contempt  which  are  evidently  sub- 
conscious states  of  adverse  willing  yield  a  neutral  duling 
energy^. 

There  can  be  no  question  that  experiments  conducted 
before  critical  audiences  often  owe  their  failure  to  unfavor- 
able attitudes  of  mind. 

Lecturers,  actors  and  musicians  are  similarly  influenced. 
Their  thoughts  are  expressions  of  energy  difterentiated  by 
rate  vibration  and  polarity  (page  247). 

Adverse  willing  is  absolutely  ineft'ective  if  the  person  thus 
willing  wears  anv  vellow  material  on  the  head. 


mind's  eye  261 

The  author  suggests  the  use  of  yellow  light  in  a  place 
toward  the  attainment  of  the  latter  object.  Diffuse  yellow 
light  does  not  produce  the  stomach  reflex  (p.  67),  but  only 
retards  its  elicitation  for  several  seconds. 

The  mind's  eye. — The  mind  cooperates  in  seeing.  Vision 
is  a  subjective  as  well  as  an  objective  process.  **None  so 
blind  as  those  that  will  not  see"  is  literally  true. 

When  the  visual  center  (p.  253)  is  connected  with  the 
stomach  region,  looking  at  yellow  yields  a  positive  duling 
energy,  whereas  red  yields  a  negative  energy. 

If  the  subject  mentally  afhrms  that  he  sees  yellow  when 
looking  at  red,  the  energy'  yield  from  the  visual  center  is  that 
of  yellow — a  negative  duling  energy. 

Thus,  an  unfavorable  attitude  of  mind  physically  pre- 
vents correct  apperception. 

The  will  component  of  mind  is  relatively  of  great  po- 
tentiality. If  the  sphygmobiometer  is  employed,  the  re- 
ceiving electrode  is  connected  to  the  aerial  (page  64)  and 
the  proximal  electrode  to  the  abdomen.  Another  person 
engages  in  thought  for  30  seconds  to  charge  the  con- 
denser (index  of  which  is  at  90).  The  energy  current  is 
then  closed  and  the  index  of  the  condenser  is  placed  at  o. 
Using  the  stomach  reflex,  the  energy  discharge  of  an  average 
person  occupied  in  thought  is  2^^  of  an  Ohm.  Executing  a 
like  investigation  with  the  same  person  who  strongly  wills 
the  energy  discharge  is  s)4  Ohms.  Thus  will  has  an  energy 
value  nearly  27  times  greater  than  thought.  ]ldc  cardio- 
kinesthesia. 

Supernor]vl\l  perception. — The  "medium,"  is  a  mere 
term  sanctioned  by  usage  to  designate  an  individual  with 
h^-peresthetic  perception,  who  can  perceive  with  the  senses, 
which  the  average  person  cannot. 


262  APPENDIX 

The  former  is  one  "who  sees  without  eyes''  and  employs 
the  other  senses  in  apparently  impossible  ways. 

By  the  author's  method  of  brain  localization  (page  229), 
such  exalted  sense  reactions  (page  254)  are  believeable 
after  an  examination  of  a  number  of  subjects  thus  endowed. 

The  latter  not  only  possess  exalted  receptiWty  of  the 
subliminal  self  but  bicerebration  (page  233). 

In  two  individuals  with  "second  sight"  (telegnosis), 
a  \'isual  center  was  demonstrable  in  both  hemispheres  of  the 
brain  (page  264). 

Legendary  lore. — Tradition  not  explained  has  no 
official  recognition.  It  is  easier  to  condemn  than  investigate. 
If  the  Pasteurian  spirit  of  catholicity  were  rampant,  the 
humility  of  genius  would  find  its  expression  in,  'T  do  not 
know    ...    I  will  investigate." — Pasteur. 

Amulets,  charms,  talismans  and  the  abracadabra  have 
subserA-ed  their  purpose  in  the  cure  of  disease  by  the  influence 
of  the  mind  on  the  body. 

Any  deprecation  of  the  latter  is  engendered  by  ignorance 
and  ignores  the  law  of  reserve  energy  which  is  succincth- 
expressed  by  Prof.  William  James  as  follows: 

It  is  evident  that  our  organism  has  stored  up  reserves 
of  energy  that  are  ordinarily  not  called  upon,  but  that 
may  be  called  upon;  deeper  and  deeper  strata  of  com- 
bustion or  explosible  material,  discontinuously  arranged, 
but  ready  for  use  for  any  one  who  probes  so  deep,  and 
repairing  themselves  b\'-rest  as  well  as  do  the  superficial 
strata. 

The  tissues  of  the  bed}'  are  condensers  (page  ic6)  and 
are  practically  reservoirs  of  surplus  energ\-.  They  can  be 
tapped  by  suggestion  an  essential  component  of  which  is 
encouragement.  Heretofore,  our  knowledge  was  incapable 
of  explaining  the  influence  of  the  mind  on  the  body. 


LEGENDARY    LORE  263 

Let  US  express  numerically  and  therefore  without  equivo- 
cation how  much  energ\-  may  be  supplied  by  hope. 

A  depressed  patient  comes  to  my  office  and  I  find  that 
the  energy  output  from  his  left  finger  tips  and  psycho- 
motor region  is  only  1-25  of  an  Ohm.  He  is  assured  of 
complete  recovery  and  when  this  suggestion  was  accepted 
the  energy  output  from  his  finger  tips  was  i  Ohm  (in- 
creased 25  times)  and  from  the  left  psychomotor  region, 
15-25  of  an  Ohm. 

The  tradition  associated  with  a  potato  for  the  cure  of 
rheumatism  has  its  detractors  among  the  erudite  but  not 
the  afflicted. 

Reference  has  been  made  to  the  causation  of  pains  in 
rheumatics  (page  270). 

A  cut  potato  (carried  on  the  person)  prevents  elicitation 
of  the  stomach  reflex  when  the  negative  pole  of  a  bar-magnet 
is  presented  to  the  stomach  region  w^hereas  the  positive  pole 
will  evoke  dulness.  If  the  cut  surface  of  a  potato  is  charged 
with  the  streamings  from  the  negative  pole  of  a  magnet  it 
will  not  evoke  the  stomach  reflex  but  wdll  do  so  when 
charged  with  the  positive  pole.  Thus,  the  potato  in  lieu  of 
the  rheumatic  joints  takes  up  the  positive  charges  during 
ionization. 

To  be  effective  in  attaining  the  latter  object  it  is  sug- 
gested theoretically,  that  the  potato  must  be  renewed  for  it 
is  only  capable  of  taking  up  a  definite  number  of  positi\e 
electrons. 

"Rheumatic  Rings"  (of  iron)  when  worn  yield  a  neutral 
energy  which  prevents  the  elicitation  of  the  stomach  reflex 
by  either  pole  of  a  bar-magnet  (page  35). 

Any  supposed  efiicacy  of  the  "rings"  must  be  due  to 
neutralization  of  the  positive  ions. 

Various  electrical  appll\nces   (belts,   pendants,   in- 


264  APPENDIX 

soles,  etc.)  have  been  similarly  discredited  without  adequate 
reason. 

If  the  current  from  a  little  dry  cell  is  applied  to  the  epi- 
gastrium for  lo  minutes,  the  following  may  be  noted: 

BEFORE    APPLICATIOX 

Energy  discharge  from  the  left  finger 

tips  (male) 2-25  of  an  Ohm. 

Discharge  from  left  psj'chomotor  re- 
gion   1-25   of  an  Ohm. 

.\FTER    APPLICATIOX. 

Energy  from  fingers 3  Ohms. 

Energy  from  left  psychomotor  re- 
gion   2  Ohms. 

The  divixixg  rod. — This  supposititious  relic  of  ancient 
superstition  no  longer  belongs  to  occultism  but  is  entitled  to 
consideration  as  a  scientific  fact.  The  rod  is  merely  a  vehicle 
of  expression  of  subconscious  perception. 

If  the  dowser  is  born  and  not  made  inascitur  non  til),  it 
is  not  because  he  possesses  a  transcendental  gift  but  because 
like  the  clairvoyant  (page  264)  he  is  in  possession  of  super- 
senuous  perceptive  power;  perception  at  a  distance  (page 
254).  Every  man  is  an  ideo-motor  being  and  his  idea  is 
expressed  in  some  kind  of  external  motion. 

It  is  impossible  to  entertain  an  idea  without  participa- 
tion of  the  whole  bod}'  in  harmony  with  it. 

Everything  in  nature  is  in  a  state  of  perpetual  motion. 

These  rhythmatic  changes  in  the  energ}'  held  by  elec- 
trons are  no  longer  a  matter  of  speculation  (page  8). 

With  the  sphygmobiometer  it  is  now  possible  to  demon- 
strate the  wavemetric  index  (page  286)  of  water,  oil  and 
minerals.  The  distinctive  rates  and  lengths  of  waves  is  the 
basis  of  spectrum  analysis;  each  chemical  element  when 
heated  vields  its  own  characteristic  set  of  waves. 


ORIGTXAL    CAPACITY  2()5 

Thus  subterranean  determination  of  the  foregoing  as  a 
prerogati\'e  of  the  specially  gifted  must  be  relegated  to 
scientitic  reality. 

By  aid  of  the  apparatus  in  question,  one  may  even  ven- 
ture further  and  ascertain  quantity  and  depth* 

PsYCHOMETRY  (page  256)  and  human  radiations  (page 
9). 

NOTE  VII. 

ORIGINAL    CAPACITY —  CONSER\  ATION    OF    ENERGY 
ELECTRONALGIAS. 

The  hereditarian  contends  that,  "The  Gods  x'isit  the 
sins  of  the  fathers  upon  the  children.  That  we  are  omnibuses 
in  which  all  our  ancestors  ride,  and  that  the  life  of  each 
individual  is,  in  some  real  sense,  a  continuation  of  the  lives 
of  his  ancestors." 

Despite  this  pessimistic  fatalism,  my  investigations  will 
not  permit  me  to  eliminate  heredity  as  a  factor  in  our  so- 
called  personality  for,  I  am  constrained  to  believe,  in  a 
mechanistic  conception  of  life. 

In  accordance  with  the  electronic  theory  (page  3), 
the  individual  plays  an  unimportant  part  in  his  life  history. 

Design  in  the  creation  of  electrons  and  accident  in  their 
combinations  are  rampant  in  nature. 

The  inequalities  with  reference  to  humans  are  accidental, 
otherwise  nature  must  be  arraigned  as  unjust  and  even  cruel. 

Will  is  likewise  an  accidental  attribute  of  mind,  other- 
wise we  would  will  what  we  are  not. 

The  Binet-Simon  and  other  measuring  scales  of  intelli- 

*It  is  impossible  to  describe  the  author's  methods.  They  demand  personal  dem- 
onstration but  a  careful  study  of  this  book,  will  reveal  to  the  reader,  the 
QUALITATIVE  determination  of  all  things  in  nature. 


266  APPENDIX 

gence  must  include  among  mental  defectives  the  psychas- 
thenic types  which  after  the  slightest  mental  effort  yield 
the  reaction  of  psychasthenia  (page  174). 

Man  is  essentially  a  reflex  animal  (page  26).  Con- 
sciousness predicates  reflex  action  and  is  not  coextensive 
with  mind  (page  236). 

"Science  is  organized  common  sense"  and  phenomena  of 
the  animal  body  must  be  interpreted  from  the  viewpoint  that, 
they  are  vital  demonstrations  of  chemistry  and  mechanics. 

The  atom  is  a  living  thing  "writ  small"  and  we  no  longer 
believe  that  the  atom  is  fixed  and  unchangeable.  Applying 
the  author's  methods  for  detecting  energy  in  so-called  in- 
animate things,  it  may  be  demonstrated  that  all  matter 
lives.  That  irritability  may  be  demonstrated  in  metals, 
that  the  latter  is  assuaged  by  narcotics  and  the  energy  pre- 
sent may  be  subdued  for  many  minutes  by  subjecting  them 
to  the  action  of  an  anesthetic. 

Bose,  has  demonstrated  the  foregoing  Galvanometrically, 
and  by  aid  of  his  crescograph  and  oscillating  recorder,  has 
shown  the  amount  of  growth  in  plants  and  automatic  move- 
ments. 

The  latter  is  also  demonstrable  b}'  the  visceral  reflexes 
and  in  addition,  one  may  measure  the  polarity  and  poten- 
tiality of  plant  energy. 

Tropism,  demonstrates  environmental  influences  inde- 
pendent of  will  and  so-called  "freedom  of  will",  is  a  myth 
insomuch  as  man  is  a  creature  of  his  environment. 

What  the  pragmatist  calls  truths,  come,  continue  and 
pass  like  living  creatures. 

"An  idea  is  true  as  long  as  belief  in  it  is  useful  for  our 
own  life." 

"Nothing  endures  eternally  in  order  that  all  may  en- 
dure." 


CONSERVATION    OF    ENERGY  267 

"In  the  midst  of  life  we  are  in  death." 

It  is  impossible  to  conceive  physiologic  activity  without 
dissolution. 

The  super-activity  of  radium  is  due  to  the  entanglement 
of  radium  bromid  with  the  decomposition  products  of  rad- 
ium each  of  which  is  itself  disintegrating. 

If  a  radium  salt  is  separated  from  the  products  to  which 
it  gives  rise,  it  loses  (temporarily)  some  of  its  radio-activity 
in  the  emanation  given  off  and  its  activity  is  regained  just 
in  proportion  as  the  other  decays. 

In  the  original  activity  of  the  electrons,  lies  the  origin 
of  mental  characteristics  and  reaction,  is  in  accordance  with 
the  electronic  characteristics. 

With  the  means  now  at  our  command  of  analyzing  human 
energ>%  individuals  will  be  properly  classified  and  then 
assigned  to  the  life-work  for  which  they  are  fitted. 

By  determining  the  reaction  of  the  sense  centers  (page 
230),  the  child  may  be  properly  guided  in  its  mental  educa- 
tion. The  child's  senses  are  the  avenues  of  knowledge  and 
original  capacity  is  concerned  not  only  with  seeing  but  in 
perceiving. 

Ribot,  divides  mankind  into  three  classes: 

I.  The  highly  active  who  never  fall  to  a  minimum  of 
effort;  2.  Those  with  moderate  activity  with  limited 
energ}--capital  who  represent  the  majority  of  mankind; 
3.    The  asthenics  who  dislike  work  and  are  ''born  lazy." 

Grasset,  has  sententiously  portrayed  certain  individuals 
who  say  they  cannot  do  things,  their  friends  say,  "they  will 
not"  and  the  physician  says,  "they  cannot  will."  Such 
indi\'iduals  ha\'e  a  deficiency  of  vital  energy  and  their  in- 
adaptability is  recognizable   (page   268). 

Conservation  of  energy. — The  ideal  man  has  been 
called   a  perfect   transformer.      He   acts   like   a   reversible 


268  APPEXDIX 

batter}-;  after  ha\'ing  acted  like  an  ordinary  battery  for 
discharge,  he  is  regenerated  by  a  nerve  current  which  con- 
stitutes the  recharging. 

Life  is  a  continuous  adjustment  to  the  environment 
(Spencer). 

Astrology  began  its  deca}-  at  the  renaissance  but  its  re- 
vival can  be  forecast  in  the  terms  of  physical  science. 

The  attraction  of  man  by  the  sun,  the  mechanical  energy 
imparted  to  him  by  the  sun  and  rotation  of  the  earth, 
atmospheric  pressure,  variations  in  temperature,  rain  and 
winds  tremors  of  the  earth  and  the  electric  potential  at 
billions  of  volts  all  influence  the  microcosm  by  the  macro- 
cosm— the  world  machine. 

Brain  and  physical  exhaustion  may  be  computed  (page 
63)  and  fatigue,  is  an  intoxication  of  the  cells  (page  167). 

Original  mental  capacity  is  essentially  the  capacity  for 
charging  and  limiting  the  discharge  of  the  human  battery. 

This  energy  production  varies  with  the  individual 
(page  53)  and  when  so-called  latent  energy  is  produced, 
while  it  is  referred  to  will  (page  261)  an  original  organization 
for  will  energ}'  must  pre-exist.  The  teleology  of  the  organism 
is  a  question  of  its  inherent  properties. 

Repair  succeeding  waste  is  an  effort  of  least  resistance 
thus  avoiding  the  reaccommodation  of  the  organism  to 
changed  conditions. 

Nerve  force  has  been  compared  to  electricity  and  this 
comparison  aids  us  in  framing  a  positi\'e  knowledge  con- 
cerning the  action  and  laws  that  govern  human  energy 
which  in  relation  to  electricity  are  precise  and  extensive. 
Nerve  health  is  the  resultant  of  the  income  and  expenditure 
of  energy  and  the  ner\-ous  system  must  be  made  equal  to 
its  task. 

It  has  been   shown   that   energy  is  constantly  passing 


CONSERVATION    OF   ENERGY  209 

from  the  body.  To  minimize  this  expenpiture,  the  follow- 
ing procedures  are  apposite:  i.  Short-circuiting  the  brain 
(page  109);     2.    Posture  (page  102). 

The  least  expenditure  of  energy  occurs  in  the  recumbent 
posture  with  the  head  to  the  north.  The  maximum  intake 
of  energy  occurs  when  the  bed  or  couch  is  placed  in  the  mag- 
netic meridian  (page  103)  but  in  this  position,  there  is  a 
corresponding  output  of  energy.  The  latter  may  be  minim- 
ized by  short-circuiting  the  brain  or  by  the  use  of  color. 

"God  has  employed  color  in  His  creation  as  the  unvary- 
ing accompaniment  of  all  that  is  purest,  most  innocent  and 
most  precious"  (Ruskin). 

Purple  on  any  part  of  the  body  inhibits  the  discharge  of 
energy  from  the  brain  and  body. 

Dickens,  it  is  said  would  invariably  place  his  bed  in  a 
definite  position  with  relation  to  the  points  of  the  compass. 
Dr.  George  White,  informs  me  as  follows: 

"A  stock  breeder  observed  that  the  breeding  of  cattle 
was  more  effective  if  the  mangers  were  placed  in  the  magnetic 
meridian." 

In  the  dark,  the  energy  output  is  less  than  in  the  sun 
(page  61). 

My  observations  show  that  this  is  also  true  of  radium. 

In  the  dark  a  given  quantity  of  the  latter  yields  an  energy 
equal  to  H  of  an  Ohm;  in  the  sun,  1 5  of  an  Ohm. 

Red  on  the  head  increases  the  output  of  psychical  energy. 

The  latter  fact  gives  credence  to  the  popular  conception 
that  an  individual  with  red  hair  is  usually  very  alert. 

Yellow  on  any  part  of  the  body  augments  the  output 
of  physical  energy. 

Elsewhere,  the  writer  has  discussed  the  deleterious  in- 
fluence of  NOISES  on  the  organism. 

The  structures  of  the  body  are  infinitesimal  magnets 


270  APPENDIX 

(page  298),  the  polarity  of  which  may  be  modihed  by  dis- 
cordant sounds. 

Reference  has  already  been  made  to  the  storage  capacity 
of  the  tissues  (page  106). 

If  a  horseshoe  magnet  is  placed  in  apposition  with  the 
7th  cervical  spine  for  15  seconds,  the  energy  output  (from 
the  fingers)  may  be  raised  from  ih  of  an  Ohm  to  2^ 
Ohms  but  after  one  minute,  it  is  again  reduced  to  the 
norm. 

Mental  short-circuit. — Intense  voluntary  attention 
conduces  to  nerve  cell  tension  and  mental  relief  is  afforded 
by  projecting  impulses  to  the  periphery  to  accomplish  ex- 
ternal work. 

The  former  condition  may  be  likened  to  a  short-circuit 
in  a  dynamo  which  discharges  the  current  within  the  ma- 
chine thus  causing  its  deterioration  and  minimizing  its 
energ}'  output. 

Electroxalgl\.  —  The  employment  of  this  neologism 
by  the  writer,  was  suggested  by  his  investigations  which 
prove  the  character  of  the  pains  experienced  by  so-called 
human  barometers  (rheumatics). 

It  has  always  been  suggested  that  electricity  was  the 
most  significant  meteorological  factor  in  explanation  of  the 
peculiar  behavior  of  many  animals  prior  to  a  storm  or  other 
atmospheric  disturbance. 

Reference  has  already  been  made  to  the  author's  ether 
theory  (page  223). 

Coincident  with  the  disrupti\'e  discharge  from  a  large 
induction  coil,  draughts  or  saturation  of  the  atmosphere 
with  moisture,  ionization  (page  200)  ensues  and  a  structure 
previously  implicated  by  disease  (rheumatic  joints,  cica- 
tricial tissues  etc.,)  becomes  charged  with  positive  electricity 
(stomach  reflex  employed  in  polarity  determination). 


PAix  '271 

The  normal  structures  do  not  take  up  the  charge  in 
question. 

The  charge  of  positive  electricity  ma}'  be  withdrawn 
from  the  diseased  structure  for  a  variable  period  of  time 
(minutes  to  hours)  until  it  is  neutralized  by  a  negative 
charge  (from  a  bar-magnet).  Investigations  with  colors 
demonstrated  that  violet  (negative  non-duling  energy) 
would  not  only  dissipate  the  positive  charge  (like  the  nega- 
tive pole  of  a  magnet)  but  would  prevent  the  charge  when 
next  to  the  pathological  structure. 

In  accordance  with  the  foregoing,  a  violet  material  may 
be  employed  as  a  prophylactic  in  electronalgias.  In  investi- 
gating the  polarity  reaction  of  different  violet  materials,  it 
was  found  that  cotton  material  frequently  yielded  a  positive 
non-duling  energy  owing  to  the  presence  of  some  special 
dyestufT. 

Thus,  the  use  of  the  latter  would  do  no  good. 

Violet  silk  or  wool  however  can  be  emploxed  as  a  pro- 
phylactic. 

Pain. — This  is,  ''A  benelicient  reaction  through  the 
nervous  system  of  altered  function  against  threatening 
forces."  The  polarity  of  pain  has  heretofore  never  been 
solicited  in  behalf  of  its  beneficient  action  in  altering  the 
character  of  the  vital  soil  (page  195). 

Many  affections  as  noted  throughout  this  work  \-ield 
either  a  positive  or  negative  energy. 

Pain,  which  yields  a  neutral  energy  (page  164),  may  be 
regarded  as  a  protective  mechanism  by  soil  modification 
{vis  conservatrix)  and  in  this  sense,  its  subjugation  would 
prove  inimical  to  the  natural  curative  power  {vis  medicatrix 
naturae.) 


272 


APPENDIX 


NOTE  VIII. 

THE    SPHYGMOBIOMETER. 

Components. — i.  Variable  condenser.  2.  Induction 
coil.     3.     Resistance  coil.     4.     Sphygmophone. 

The  Variable  Condenser  (Wavemeter)  is  made  up  of 
semicircular  metal  vanes  (43),  of  which  21  are  movable  and 
22  are  stationary.  To  the  condenser  is  attached  a  circular 
black  top  with  a  180  degree  scale,  knob  handle,  arrow  indi- 
cator and  binding  posts  (Fig.  69). 


U 


•*  »*V»i' 


Fig.  69. — Sphygmobiometer.    Showing  the  components  and  the  direction 
of  the  energy  current. 


Fig.  70. — Sphygmobiomclcr.  A,  receiving  electrode;  B,  pusii  bulton; 
C,  abdominal  electrode;  D,  ground  wire;  E,  potentiometer;  F,  variable  con- 
denser; G,  rheostat;  H,  induction  coil  which  may  be  put  in  or  out  of  the  cir- 
cuit by  aid  of  a  lever. 


SPHYGMOBIOMETER  2  /  0 

The  Induction  Coil  (Fig.  69  b)  is  constructed  on  the  con- 
ventional principle  with  vibrator  eliminated.  Its  essential 
object  is  to  increase  the  voltage  of  energy. 

The  Resistance  Coil  (Fig.  69  e)  is  practically  the  biody- 
namometer  (Fig.  18). 

This  may  .be  used  for  vibrodynamometry  (p.  49)  pro- 
\'ided  the  index  of  the  condenser  is  at  zero. 

The  POTENTIOMETER  (Fig.  70)  is  an  arrangement  for  so 
regulating  the  voltage  of  energy  that  it  will  render  the 
detector  (heart)  as  sensitive  as  possible. 

The  index  is  usually  left  at  zero  (of  the  scale)  but  when 
the  energy  is  too  strong  so  as  to  diminish  the  force  of  the 
ventricular  contractions  (page  85),  more  resistance  is 
interposed. 

The  foregoing  apparatus  is  designated,  biometer. 

The  Sphygmophone  (Fig.  71)  is  made  up  of  a  tambour 
(A)  to  which  a  lever  (B)  is  attached.  The  end  of  the  latter 
by  making  and  breaking  contact  rhythmically  on  a  platinum 
plate  (C)  evokes  a  sound  from  a  buzzer  by  aid  of  an  "E\'er- 
ready  battery  (No.  750)."  The  latter  is  operative  for  three 
hours  intermittent  service. 

Unipolar  conduction  (page  54)  is  employed  with  the 
apparatus. 

Ensemble. — The  energy  is  conducted  (Fig.  69)  from  the 
RECEIVING  electrode  (A),  to  One  binding  post  of  the 
CONDENSER  (B),  and  from  the  other  binding  ])ost  of  the 
latter,  the  Energy  is  conducted  to  one  binding  post  of  the 
INDUCTION  COIL  (C).  From  one  binding  post  of  the  latter, 
a  GROUND  WIRE  (D),  is  connected  preferably  to  a  radiator 
or  a  gas  or  electric  fixture  or  water  pipe  may  be  used. 

From  another  binding  post  of  the  induction  coil  a  con- 
nection is  made  with  one  binding  post  of  the  resistance 
COIL  (E),  and  from  the  other  binding  post  of  the  latter  a 


276 


APPENDIX 


connection  is  made  with  a  push  button  (F),  for  making  or 
breaking  the  current  circuit.  The  latter  may  be  executed 
with  the  hand  or  the  foot.  From  the  latter,  a  conducting 
cord  is  attached  to  the  abdominal  electrode  (G),  which 
may  for  convenience  be  designated  as  proximal  or  de- 
tecting ELECTRODE. 


^•-C 


Fig.  7i.^Sphygmophone. 

Theory  of  action. — If  radio  (wireless)  telegraphy  is 
employed  as  a  paradigm,  it  is  because  it  is  better  understood 
and  serves  our  purpose  by  analogy. 

The  electro-magnetic  waves  set  in  motion  b\'  the  wireless 
spark  differ  only  in  amplitude  and  magnitude  from  the 
ethereal  vibrations  set  in  motion  by  the  revolution  of  the 
electrons  (page  4). 

During  the  revolutions  of  the  latter,  an  electro-magnetic 
field  of  energy  is  produced  which  has  thus  far  eluded  all 
instruments  for  its  detection. 

Thus,  the  revolutions  of  the  electrons  alone  substitute 
the  apparatus  (oscillator  or  exciter)  for  the  production  of 
waves  in  "wireless." 


PPHYGMOBIOMETER  _' /  t 

Electronic  energy  as  has  already  been  shown  (page  8) 
may  be  demonstrated  physiologically. 

No  instrument  of  science  can  substitute  the  human 
organs  for  detecting  the  electro-magnetic  field  of  energy 
(page  8). 

In  the  use  of  the  sphygmobiometer,  the  detector  is 

THE   HEART. 

Irritability  is  the  fundamental  property  to  which  is 
referred  the  total  activity  of  living  substance. 

When  the  heart  ventricle  is  inhibited  by  moderate 
vagus  stimulation,  the  beats  although  slower  are  stronger, 
whereas  when  stimulation  is  greater,  the  contractions  are 
diminished  in  strength  and  rate. 

With  the  sphygmobiometer,  energy  is  conveyed  to  the 
abdomen  of  the  subject  to  secure  reflex  vagus  stimulation 
like  in  the  Goltz  tapping  experiment  upon  the  abdomen. 

\\^hen  energy  is  conveyed  to  the  \'ariable  condenser 
(Fig.  69B),  the  latter  (at  90)  stores  it  and  the  wave  length  of 
the  energy  released  (by  turning  the  thumb  knob  attached 
to  the  mo\'able  plates),  is  arbitrarily  determined  by  a  scale. 

When  the  physiologist  stimulates  a  nerve  or  muscle,  the 
total  energy  (irrespective  of  wave  lengths)  is  employed. 

Matter  is  only  an  effect  of  a  definite  kind  of  motion  and 
the  variable  "condenser  like  the  tuning  coil  in  "wireless," 
increases  or  decreases  the  wa\'es  of  energy  to  the  proper 
lengths. 

Tuning  is  of  great  importance  in  recei\'ing  a  message  and 
separating  it  from  other  ''wireless"  oscillations. 

The  sphygmobiometer  is  analogous  to  a  receiving  station 
with  the  heart  as  a  detector.  In  justice  to  nature,  it  would 
be  more  apposite  to  reverse  the  comparison  and  make  inven- 
tion the  mimicry  of  nature  in  accordance  with  the  data  cited 
on  page  244. 


278  APPENDIX 

Electrons  are  characterized  by  the  uniformit}'  of  their 
vibrations. 

The  Hnes  of  Hght  making  up  the  spectrum  of  an  element 
originate  from  the  vibrations  of  electrically  charged  systems 
and  if  the  vibrations  of  atoms  were  not  attuned  to  each 
other,  the  spectral  lines  would  be  blurred  and  diffused. 

My  investigations  show  that,  a  specific  form  of  energy 
may  be  condensed  in  various  diseases  and  that,  when  this 
energy  is  released  at  a  given  point  on  the  scale  of  the  con- 
denser (established  empirically)  and  at  this  point  only,  the 
energy  released  stimulates  the  heart  and  raises  blood  pres- 
sure. Other  visceral  reflexes  (stomach,  liver,  heart)  are 
similarly  synchronized. 

When  the  point  in  question  is  attained,  the  lever  (B),  of 
the  sphygmophone  rises,  thus  breaking  the  circuit  and  the 
rhythmic  buzzing  corresponding  to  the  finger  pulse  ceases. 

Vagus  stimulation  is  an  individual  question  and  even  a 
feeble  stimulus  (in  Vagus  hypertonia)  may  diminish  the 
strength  of  the  contractions  (page  85)  in  which  instance, 
instead  of  the  lever  rising  it  would  fall  and  increased  buzzing 
ensues.  The  latter  could  be  accepted  as  an  evidence  of  con- 
veyed energy. 

By  throwing  in  Ohmic  resistance  with  the  resistance  coil 
or  by  holding  the  receiving  electrode  further  away  from  the 
energy  source,  the  usual  effect  would  be  noted  (rise  of  the 
lever).     Vide  potentiometer. 

Technique. — Finger  pulsations  (notably,  middle  finger) 
readily  respond  to  vagus  stimulation.  The  pleth}'smograph 
(Fig.  72)  consists  of  a  casing  (A),  inclosing  a  rubber  bulb 
(B).  \Vlien  the  entire  finger  (dorsal  surface  in  apposition 
with  the  bulb)  is  introduced  into  the  casing  the  straps  (C), 
are  fixed  by  buckles.  Readjustment  of  the  straps  may  be 
necessarv    to    secure    maximum    lexer    oscillations.      The 


SPHYGMOBIOMETER 


279 


amplitude  of  the  latter  varies  and  it  is  better  to  employ  a 
subject  in  whom  the  heart  response  to  stimulation  is  known. 
Usually,  the  more  vigorous  the  lever  oscillations  the  less  is 
the  sensitivity  of  cardiac  response. 

When  it  is  impossible  to  obtain  lever  oscillations  from  the 
finger  pulse,  the  bulb  (B)  is  removed  from  its  casing  and  may 
be  fixed  over  the  radial  artery  by  a  special  contrivance 
(Fig.  72).  In  the  latter  instance,  the  response  is  not  as  sensi- 
tive as  from  the  finger. 


Fig.  72. — Plethysmograph.     E,  special  contrivance  for  fixing  the   bulb 
(B)  to  the  radial  artery. 

Before  tightening  the  straps  (C),  release  stop  cock  (D) 
to  avoid  rupture  of  the  rubber  of  the  tambour  (A,  Fig.  71 ). 

When  the  straps  are  adjusted  and  the  end  of  the  tubing 
closed  by  the  stop  cock  (D),  oscillations  of  the  lc\er 
commence. 

To  maintain  passivity  of  the  finger,  the  latter  and  arm 
must  rest  on  an  unyielding  leather  cushion  (placed  on  another 
table).    Other  exactions  are  noted  on  page  85. 

Next,  secure  maximum  oscillations  of  the  lever  (B),  hx 
raising  or  lowering  the  screw  (D,  Fig.  71).      Then  lower  or 


280  APPENDIX 

raise  the  tambour  on  the  standard  (C  ,  Fig.  71)  so  that  the 
lever  approximates  the  platinum  plate  (C). 

By  adjusting  the  screw  (D)  of  the  tambour  or  the  other 
screw  attached  to  the  small  post  bearing  the  platinum  plate 
(C^),  just  enough  contact  must  be  secured  to  elicit  a  faint 
buzzing.  If  the  contact  is  too  close,  the  sensitivity  of  the 
apparatus  is  correspondingly  diminished  insomuch  as  the 
conveyed  energ}'  is  insufficient  to  raise  the  lever. 

The  contact  points  (point  of  lever  and  platinum  plate) 
must  be  cleaned  occasionally  for  which  purpose  use  the 
finest  sand  paper  with  oil  and  then  wipe  with  a  cloth. 

If  the  tambour  rubber  is  torn,  release  the  screw  holding 
the  tambour  and  use  a  new  piece  of  thin  rubber  dam  which 
is  made  hermetically  tight  by  waxed  floss  silk.  The  disk  is 
fixed  to  the  rubber  by  sealing  wax.  The  latter  is  applied 
before  the  disk  approximates  the  rubber  and  after  the  disk 
is  allowed  to  fall  into  position,  heated  metal  is  placed  in 
contact  with  the  disk  to  melt  the  wax  and  thus  fix  the  disk 
to  the  rubber. 

The  receiving  electrode  (A),  consists  of  a  broad  and  a 
pointed  attachment  (Fig.  69) :  the  former  to  receive  energy 
from  a  more  extensive  surface  and  the  latter,  for  localizing 
the  source  of  energy. 

Radio-dl\gxosis. — The  electrode  (G)  is  fixed  to  the 
abdomen  of  the  subject  employed  so  that  its  center  cor- 
responds to  the  umbilicus. 

The  epigastrium  is  the  best  area  for  indirect  vagus 
stimulation  (page  85). 

The  index  of  the  condenser  is  placed  at  o  of  the  scale. 

Let  us  suppose  the  object  of  our  diagnosis  is  a  tubercu- 
lous lung. 

Rhythmic  buzzing  of  the  instrument  is  heard.  Some 
slight  movement  of  the  subject  may  disturb  the  contact  so 


SPHYGMOBIOMETER  281 

that  readjustment  is  necessary  from  time  to  time.  With  the 
button  (F),  the  circuit  is  estabHshed. 

An  assistant  or  the  physician  now  passes  the  large  attach- 
ment of  the  electrode  (Fig.  69)  over  the  lung  and  when  it 
reaches  a  tuberculous  focus,  the  lever  rises  and  the  buzzing 
ceases  (vide  the  anomalous  reaction  on  page  286). 

The  height  to  which  the  lever  rises  is  (as  a  rule)  in  pro- 
portion to  the  potentiality  of  the  energy  discharge. 

With  the  index  at  o  (of  the  scale  of  the  variable  condenser) 
only  an  energy  discharge  is  demonstrated  but  the  specificity 
of  the  energy  discharged  must  be  established  by  its  wave 
length. 

It  has  been  demonstrated  empirically  that  the  position 
of  the  indicator  on  the  scale  of  the  condenser,  will  release 
energy  sufficient  to  evoke  vagus  stimulation  at  given  num- 
bers only  (wAVEMETER  iNDEx).  At  zero  (of  the  scale), 
energ}^  of  all  descriptions  is  discharged  from  the  condenser 
to  achieve  vagus  stimulation. 

To  determine  the  specificity  of  energ}'  two  methods  are 
available : 

1.  Place  indicator  on  scale  of  the  condenser  at  1.  Estab- 
lish the  circuit  and  gradually  move  the  indicator  to  15.  If 
buzzing  ceases  at  the  latter  number,  the  energy  discharge  is 
tuberculous. 

2.  Place  indicator  at  15,  and  then  make  and  break  the 
energy  flow. 

Each  time  the  current  of  energ}'  is  on,  the  buzzing  ceases. 
The  vagus  reflexes  may  become  exhausted  (page  170). 

If  the  potentiality  of  the  energy  is  low,  the  buzzing  may 
continue  for  10  or  more  beats  before  the  lever  rises  and  the 
buzzing  ceases. 

It  may  be  necessary  in  such  an  e\cnt  to  allow  the  energy 
to  accumulate  for  a  minute  in  the  condenser  (indicator  at 


282  APPENDIX 

90)  before  vagus  stimulation  is  attempted.  In  this  event  the 
current  is  not  allowed  to  flow  until  the  investigation  is  made 
(the  indicator  then  being  placed  at  15). 

The  energy  discharge  is  of  greater  potentiality  at  the 
wavemeter  index  than  at  zero. 

Whereas  normal  energy  which  is  electro-magnetic  (page 
225)  will  evoke  a  reflex  at  3,  and  8,  of  the  scale,  this  does  not 
occur  with  pathological  energ}\ 

In  all  the  biophysical  reactions  with  pathological 
energy,  the  data  accumulated  relative  to  the  visceral 
reflex  are  e(;ually  applicable  with  the  use  of  the 
sphygmobiometer  and  reflexophone. 

We  are  now  confronted  with  other  problems  {q.  v.  tuber- 
culosis). 

A  healed  tuberculosis  yields  an  energy  discharge  and  if  a 
mixed  infection  is  present,  no  vagus  stimulation  occurs  at 
zero  of  the  scale  (page  286). 

The  condenser  stores  pus  (streptococcic  infection)  and 
tuberculous  energy.  Pus  energy  is  released  at  7,  and  tuber- 
culous energy  at  15,  hence,  buzzing  ceases  at  7  and  15. 

One  minute  should  elapse  before  making  the  tuberculous 
reaction  after  the  reaction  for  pus  is  executed. 

With  the  resistance  coil,  the  potentiality  of  the  energy 
discharge  may  be  estimated  (page  275)  thus  gauging  the 
severity   of   infection   and   controlling   therapeutic   results. 

When  the  potentiality  of  energy  is  measured,  the  index 
of  the  condenser  must  be  at  zero.  During  the  flow  of 
energy,  the  indicator  of  the  resistance  coil  which  is  placed 
say  at  5  Ohms  of  the  scale  is  gradually  pushed  toward  zero. 

If  buzzing  ceases  at  i  Ohm  on  the  scale  or  at  5/25  of  an 
Ohm,  the  energ}'  discharge  represents  an  energ\'  resistance 
in  the  first  instance  of  5  Ohms  and  in  the  latter  instance  of 
5/25  of  an  Ohm. 


SPHYGMOBIOMETEK  283 

The  use  of  non-conductors  in  differentiation  is  important 
(page  125). 

The  wavemeter  indices  with  the  sphygmobiometer 
are  equally  available  when  the  stomach  or  other 
reflexes  are  utilised  for  demonstrating  energy.  the 
biometer  is  alone  employed  for  the  latter  object 
( reflexobiometer. ) 

The  dulness  of  the  stomach  reflex  will  he  more  intense 
with  the  sphygmobiometer  (increased  voltage  energy)  than 
when  discharged  in  the  usual  way  (page  275). 

WTien  employing  the  stomach  reflex  in  association  with 
the  sphygmobiometer,  a  small  electrode  is  employed  in  the 
usual  way. 

VisCEiL4L  SUFFICIENCY  may  be  determined  with  the 
sphygmobiometer  after  the  manner  indicated  on  page  153. 

Mere  palpation  of  the  radial  pulse  (eliminating  the 
sphygmophone  and  utilizing  the  remainder  of  the  apparatus) , 
shows  changes  when  the  energy  flow  is  established  either  at 
the  general  (zero)  or  the  specific  point  (wavemeter  index) 
on  the  scale  of  the  condenser. 

If  the  pulse  is  feeble,  before  vagus  excitation  is  attempted, 
an  absolute  inhibition  of  the  pulse  or  an  augmentation 
ensues  (page  284)  when  the  energy  flow  is  established.  This 
crude  method  is  available  in  diagnosis  when  the  physician 
possesses  the  tactus  cruditus. 

Indi\-idual  vagal  reaction  may  be  tested  after  the  manner 
indicated  on  page  85. 

Tracings  with  the  sphygmophone  (utilizing  a  straw  le\'er) 
show  a  varying  result.  Pulse  waves  may  be  annihilated  or 
increased  in  amphtude  (Fig.  73)  in  accordance  with  the  data 
already  cited.  The  writer  hopes  by  further  investigations 
to  secure  sphygmograms  which  will  indicate  the  specific 
nature  of  the  energy  discharge  in  disease  (page  296). 


284  APPEXDIX 

The  SPECIFIC  RECOGXiTiox  OF  EXERGY  may  be  achieved 
after  the  manner  indicated  on  page  291;  the  apparatus 
(exclusive  of  the  sphygmophone)  is  used  with  the  visceral 
reflexes. 

The  disk  (polar)  is  used  after  the  manner  already  indi- 
cated (page  302)  or  a  bar-magnet  may  be  used  (page  41). 

Using  the  former,  say  in  paralytic  dementia  (page  172) 
either  surface  of  the  disk  presented  to  the  frontal  eminence 
will  not  cause  the  buzzing  of  the  sphygmobiometer  to  cease. 
If,  from  the  source  of  energy,  the  positive  surface  and  not 
the  negative  surface  of  the  disk  causes  buzzing  to  cease,  the 
energ\'  is  positive. 


Fig.  73. — Illustrating  sphygmographically  the  effects  on  the  pulse  ampli- 
tude in  different  individuals,  i,  carcinomatous  energy;  B,  before  and  A.  after 
(during)  action  of  energy.  2,  showing  the  action  of  the  same  energy  in  dimin- 
ishing the  pulse  amplitude;  B,  before  and  A.  during  the  energy  flow. 


If  the  pulse  effect  is  noted  with  both  disk  surfaces,  the 
polarity  of  the  energy-  is  positi\-e  and  negati\e. 

The  following  tentative  method  may  be  used  for  deter- 
mining SEXUAL  POLARITY  (page  I  lo).  \Mien  the  left  finger 
of  a  male  is  connected  with  the  sphygmobiometer.  and  a 
female  with  normal  polarity  (page  iio)  touches  the  right 
psychomotor  region  (page  72)  of  the  subject  with  the 
finger  tips  of  her  right  hand  (to  energize  the  discharge  from 


SPHYGMOBTOlVrETER  285 

the  finger  tips,  let  the  discharge  pass  through  aluminum, 
(page  55),  buzzing  ceases. 

A  like  effect  is  noted  in  a  male  with  normal  polarit}'  with 
the  finger  tips  of  the  left  hand. 

With  the  sphygmobiometer,  neoplasms  may  be  localized 
and  pain  determined  objectively  (page  164).  WTien  the 
receiving  electrode  attains  the  site  of  pain,  buzzing  ceases. 
The  heart  and  aorta  may  be  delimited  (page  105). 

When  the  pointed  electrode  approaches  the  heart  border, 
the  lever  rises  and  buzzing  stops. 

Polar  cardiac  reactions. — The  sphygmophone  dem- 
onstrates the  following  new  reaction  assuming  that  vagal 
stimulation  increases  the  force  of  the  heart  (page  85). 

During  the  rhythmic  buzzing  of  the  instrument,  the 
negative  pole  of  a  bar-magnet  applied  to  the  extreme  left 
of  the  apex  beat  causes  the  buzzing  to  stop,  whereas  the 
other  pole  intensifies  the  buzzing. 

Careful  palpation  of  the  pulse  shows  like  effects. 

The  negative  pole  has  a  pressor  and  the  positive  pole, 
a  depressor  effect. 

The  opposite  effect  is  noted  with  the  poles  in  question 
when  the  right  heart  border  is  subjected  to  polar  action. 

The  sph}'gmobiometer  (exclusive  of  the  sphygmophone), 
may  be  used  for  determining  the  effects  of  energy  with  the 
sphygmomanometer  (page  84)  after  the  following  methods. 
One  is  to  presuppose  the  usual  vagal  response;  rise  of  blood 
pressure  (page  85). 

1 .  By  noting  the  action  on  the  mercurial  column  or  the 
needle  of  an  aneroid  gauge  (page  84). 

2.  By  palpation  of  the  pulse:  the  systolic  pressure  is 
from  3  to  8  mm.  higher  (during  energy  flow)  than  before  the 
energy  is  conveyed. 

3.  By  the  auscultatory  method  with  thejsphygmomet- 


286  APPENDIX 

roscope  over  the  brachial  artery:  systoHc  pressure  is  from  3 

to  8  mm.  higher  during  the  time  energy  is  conveyed  than 

before. 

Wavemeter  Indices. 

Determination  of  the  specificity  of  energy  after  the  man- 
ner indicated  on  page  280,  is  noted  by  the  vagal  response 
when  the  indicator  is  at  different  numbers  on  the  scale  of  the 
condenser. 

Disease  Vagal  Response 

(cessation  of  buzzing) 

Carcinoma 6 

Chronic  Inflammation 15 

Sarcoma 17 

Syphilis  (from  liver,  spleen  and  spine) 6  or  7 

Autointoxication   (intestinal) 10 

Tuberculosis 15 

Pus 7 

Arthritis  Deformans     J  (streptococcic  infection)        7 
]  (paratuberculosis)  15 

Pain  (does  not  pass  through  a  non-conductor 

(page  186) 32  to  35* 

A  SYMBIOTIC  REACTION  (page  1 38)  presuming  the  co-ex- 
istence of  syphilis  and  tuberculosis  would  be  as  follows: 
After  condensing  the  source  of  energy  a  reflex  would  be 
discharged  at  6  or  7,  and  15  respectively.  In  the  presence 
of  pus  and  tuberculosis,  at  7  and  15. 

Non-duling  energy  (p.  43)  has  its  definite  wave-meter 
index  and  at  the  latter  point  only,  it  will  evoke  a  visceral 
reflex  by  its  yield  of  duling  energy. 

Thus  the  thyroid  tissue  yields  a  non-duling  energy  but 
at  7  of  the  condenser,  dulness  of  the  stomach  is  elicited. 
Similarly,  the  index  of  the  gall-bladder  is  6,  appendix  7 
and  stomach  10. 

*Absolute  accurac}'  cannot  be  attained  as  yet  in  measuring  wave  lengths  of 
electronic  energy  b}-  our  condensers  due  to  defects  in  the  dielectric  capacity. 


SPHYGMOBIOMETEK  287 

Fat  has  a  wavemeter  index  of  5.  Elicitation  of  the 
stomach  reflex  at  this  point  when  energy  is  conveyed  from 
the  heart,  liver,  or  kidney,  suggests  fatty  degeneration  or 
infiltration. 

Lead  has  a  wavemeter  index  of  8,  and  it  may  be  defi- 
nitely located  even  through  the  chest. 

The  latter  is  of  great  importance  in  locating  bullets. 

The  foregoing  is  also  demonstrable  by  biosphygmo- 
manometry. 

SPHYGMOBIOMETRIC   ADDENDA. 

1.  Short-circuiting  the  brain  (page  109)  v^^ill  increase  the 
sensitivity  of  the  visceral  reflexes  and  will  restore  them  when 
lost. 

2.  The  sphygmobiometer  does  not  change  energy  polar- 
ity. In  other  words,  the  polarity  is  the  same  as  when  con- 
ducted without  the  apparatus  (page  303). 

3.  In  estimating  the  wavemeter  index  of  energy,  make 
several  readings  and  take  the  average  one.  The  lever  oscilla- 
tions are  plethysmographic.  Such  volume  pulses  are  affected 
by  respiratory  undulations  and  several  other  factors. 

4.  Always  discharge  the  energ>'  in  the  condenser  before 
charging  it  again  by  touching  its  both  binding  posts  with 
two  fingers. 

5.  The  sphygmobiometer  ma}'  be  used  for  conve)'ing 
energy  in  gyrography  (page  238). 

6.  If  the  lever  of  the  sphygmophone  does  not  work 
freely,  adjust  the  screws  at  its  pivotal  point. 

7.  Always  select  a  subject  with  a  regular  pulse. 

8.  To  test  the  vagal  reaction  (page  85),  place  one  end 
of  a  bar-magnet  to  the  receiving  electrode  of  the  sphygmo- 
biometer. 


288  APPENDIX 

NOTE  IX. 

BIO-CLINICAL   REACTIONS    IN   TOXICOLOGY. 

The  conventional  methods  of  toxicological  analysis  may 
now  be  supplemented  by  the  electronic  tests  of  the  author 
thus  suggesting  an  aid  of  clinical  importance.  The  stomach 
reflex  in  a  male  subject  was  employed  (page  43)  and  the 
reactions  of  the  few  drugs  cited  were  demonstrable  after 
average  medicinal  doses  of  the  medicaments. 

The  reactions  were  obtainable  from  the  liv^er  and  the 
VERTEBRAL  COLUMN  (7  th  dorsal  spine).  If  the  areas  in  ques- 
tions already  show  a  reaction  (autointoxication  and  s\-philis), 
the  toxico-clinical  reactions  are  not  dependable. 

Alcohol  (page  145). 

Arsenic. — Negative  duling  energy. 

Atropin. — Neutral  duling  energy. 

CocAiN. — Negative  duling  energ\\ 

Lead. — Neutral  duling  energy. 

MoRPHiN. — Positive  and  negative  duling  energy. 

Potassium  iodld. — Transitory  negative  duling  energy 
{vide  page  207). 

The  spinal  reactions  seem  to  demonstrate  that  at  least 
in  the  norm,  the  cells  secreting  the  cerebro-spinal  fluid  are 
not  as  impervious  to  drugs  with  complex  molecules  as  is  sup- 
posed by  Ehrlich,  whose  suggestion  of  "dead  corners"  makes 
the  treatment  of  paras^philitic  diseases  so  difficult.  In 
medicinal  doses,  the  foregoing  drugs  were  demonstrable  in 
the  spinal  fluid  (electronic  reactions)  within  five  minutes 
after  their  administration. 


TRACHEAL    PERCUSSIOX  289 

Note  X. 

TRACHEAL   PERCUSSION — CRICO-THYROID   REFLEX. 

Reference  to  the  tracheal  traction  test  has  been  made 
elsewhere. 

By  conveying  energy  to  the  abdominal  electrode  with 
the  sphygmobiometer,  a  reflex  stimulation  of  the  broncho- 
constrictor  fibers  in  the  vagus  ensues  and  the  contraction  of 
the  bronchial  muscle,  puts  the  air  in  the  trachea  under 
tension,  thus  converting  the  normal  tracheal  resonance  into 
a  dull  or  flat  sound.  Percussion  is  executed  over  the  cricoid 
cartilage  with  the  head  of  the  subject  bent  slightly  forward. 

The  energy  may  be  conducted  directly  to  the  trachea 
with  a  conducting  cord  like  in  the  elicitation  of  the  stomach 
reflex  {q.  v.)  and  polarity  may  be  similarly  determined. 

Crico-thyroh)  REFLEX. — Coincident  with  the  contrac- 
tion of  the  bronchial  muscle,  the  crico-thyroid  space  closes. 

The  latter  phenomenon  is  best  elicited  when  the  finger 
tip  is  placed  at  the  side  of  the  crico-thyroid  membrane. 

The  crico-thyroid  muscle  is  supplied  by  the  superior 
laryngeal  (branch  of  the  vagus). 

The  reflex  in  question  ensues  in  from  3  to  30  seconds  after 
energy  is  conveyed  and  is  brisk  in  the  young  and  tardy  in 
elderly  subjects.  In  the  latter,  closure  of  the  space  is  main- 
tained for  a  number  of  seconds  even  after  the  energy  is  no 
longer  conveyed. 


290  APPENDIX 

NOTE  XI. 

THE   CELL  DOCTRINE. 

Reference  has  already  been  made  to  the  cellular 
THEORY  (page  2). 

The  conception  of  the  cell  has  sustained  many 
vicissitudes. 

Primarily,  its  wall  was  considered  the  essential  part  but 
this  was  supplanted  by  the  protoplasmic  theory  and  later, 
by  the  nuclear  conception. 

The  study  of  the  centrostome  yielded  the  undoubted  fact 
that,  none  of  the  cellular  constituents  can  be  regarded  as  the 
cell  or  as  constituting  life.  The  reaction  against  the  cell 
doctrine  was  further  fortified  by  the  fact  that,  the  cells  are 
all  connected  by  protoplasmic  fibers  and  are  not  independent 
units  and  furthermore,  that  the  organism  cannot  be  regarded 
as  the  sum  of  the  activities  of  the  individual  cells.  Organiza- 
tion surpasses  cell  structure  and  the  cell  must  be  an  organiza- 
tion of  infinitesimal  units. 

Biologists  no  longer  seek  explanation  of  the  life  processes 
in  the  microscopic  cellular  constituents.  The  latter  are  only 
a  part  of  a  machine  the  activity  of  which  is  the  result  of  the 
action  of  physical  forces. 


SPLANCHNO-DIAGNOSIS  291 


NOTE  XII. 

SPLANCHNO-DIAGNOSIS  —  BIOSPHYGMOMANOMETRY  CARDIO- 
KINESTHESIA  —  PREDETERMINATION  OF  THE  SEX  OF 
EGGS  —  ALOPECIA  —  PERSONAL  EQUATION  —  REFLEX- 
OPHONOMETRY  —  TELEDIAGNOSIS  —  VAGAL  POLARITY — • 
ENERGEIAOMETRY. 

SPLANCHNO-DIAGNOSIS.* — Reference  has  been  made  to 
the  splanchnic  nerves  (pages  8i,  83,  249).  The  regulatory 
mechanism  of  the  splanchnic  vasomotor  system  is  attained 
by  vasomotor  reflexes  which  supply  autonomically  the 
quantity  of  blood  necessary  for  visceral  activity. 

The  splanchnic  circulation  is  identified  with  the  emotions 
and  in  shock,  the  vessels  are  paralyzed  resulting  in  dilated 
splanchnic  vessels.  Worry,  fear  and  pain  are  attenuated 
shocks  and  abdominal  sensations  in  such  conditions  may  be 
referred  to  the  vicious  circle  created  by  splanchnic  vaso- 
dilation. 

If  PATHOLOGICAL  ENERGY  is  conducted  to  the  area  be- 
tween the  3rd  and  4th  dorsal  spines,  its  specificity  as  revealed 
by  definite  areas  of  ventral  dulness  (Fig.  74)  may  be  demon- 
strated. This  action  is  dependent  on  stimulation  of  the 
depressor  nerve. 

Physiologically,  a  nerve  is  endowed  with  different 
functions. 

The  vagus  has  fibers  which  control  the  rhythmicity,  irri- 
tabihty,  conductivity,  contracility  and  tonicity  of  the  heart. 

All  physical  phenomena  are  forms  of  motion  and  accord- 
ing to  the  energy  conveyed,  specific  fibers  of  the  depressor 

*The  pathology  of  the  S[)lanchnic  Circulation  was  first  exhaustively  discussed 
in  the  author's  work  "Splanchnic  Neurasthenia,"  E.  B.  Treat  and  Co.,  New  York. 


29"^ 


APPEXDIX 


nerve  are  stimulated  resulting  in  vasodilatation  of  the 
splanchnic  vessels  in  different  abdominal  areas. 

A  like  phenomenon  iq.  i.)  is  noted  with  the  reflexophone. 

A  simple  conducting  cord  (Fig.  19)  is  used;  one  electrode 
of  which  is  approximated  to  the  source  of  pathological  energ>' 
and  the  other,  between  the  3rd  and  4th  dorsal  spines. 


Fig.  74. — Areas  of  ventral  dulness  in  splanchno-diagnosis. 

Unlike   the  stomach  reflex   (p.    124),   the   splanchnic 

VASOMOTOR  REFLEXES  CANNOT  BE  EVOKED  IF  PATHOLOGICAL 

ent:rgy  TR.A. VERSES  A  NON-CONDUCTOR  either  with  or  with- 
out  a  variable  condenser  (wavemeter  indices,  p.  286). 

If  a  biod}'namometer  (p.  50)  is  used  in  connection  with  a 
variable  condenser  for  conducting  energ}'  to  the  stomach,  to 
the  area  between  the  3rd  and  4th  dorsal  spines  or  to  the 


SPLANCH  NO-DIAGNOSIS  293 

reflexophone,  the  phenomena  peculiar  to  each  will  ensue 
through  a  non-conductor  (thin  rubber)  at  the  vibratory 
INDEX  (p.  191)  provided  the  index  of  the  condenser  is  at 
zero. 

The  vibratory  indices  (with  a  tested  biodynamometer) 
are  as  follows: 

Carcinoma 50 

Syphilis 20 

Autointoxication  (intestinal) 10 

Tuberculosis 15 

Streptococcic  infection  (pus) 15 

r  Gall-stones 20 

'    Chronic  Inflammation  40 

(^  (Energy  does  not  traverse  a  non-conductor.) 

The  splanchnic  areas  of  ventral  dulness  measure  approxi- 
mately as  follows: 

ENERGY  TRANSVERSE  VERTICAL 

DIAMETER  DIAMETER 

Syphilis 5  cm invades  liver  dulness 

Autointoxication 4  cm 6  cm. 

(intestinal) 

Carcinoma 9  cm 4  cm. 

Chronic  Inflammation  .  11  cm 12  cm. 

Sarcoma 5  cm 7,  cm. 

Tuberculosis 5  cm 4  cm. 

Pus 2  cm 4  cm. 

Gall-stones 5  cm 4  cm. 

The  reactions  are  alike  in  both  sexes.  The  subject  on 
whom  percussion  is  executed  must  face  the  west  in  the  erect 
posture.  The  precautions  noted  on  p.  32  must  be  rigorously 
observed. 

Thirty  seconds  may  elapse  before  the  areas  of  \'entral  dul- 
ness are  elicited  and  the  latter  are  always  in  proportion  to 
the  potentiality  of  the  conveyed  energy  and  the  duration  of 
its  action. 


294  APPEXDIX 

The  dull  areas  disappear  during  a  forced  inspiration  and 
are  twice  as  sensitive  as  the  reactions  of  the  stomach  reflex. 
Symbiotic  reactions  (p.  286)  ensue  when  two  forms  of  energy 
are  s^mchronously  conveyed.  Thus,  in  mixed  infection  in 
tuberculosis,  there  will  be  two  areas  of  dulness  corresponding 
to  tuberculosis  (Fig.  74)  and  pus  (2  cm.  to  the  left  of  the 
navel) . 

If  the  biometer  is  employed  (p.  275),  the  dull  areas  appear 
either  at  zero  on  the  scale  of  the  condenser  or  at  the  wave- 
meter  indices  (p.  286). 

BiosPHYGMOiLA.xoMETRY. — This  signifies  the  use  of  the 
biometer  (p.  275)  with  a  sphygmomanometer  (p.  84). 

The  best  t^-pe  of  the  latter  is  sho\^Ti  in  Fig.  34  and  it  is  so 
constructed  that  any  rise  in  pressure  may  be  read  directly  or 
ma}'  be  indicated  by  the  sound  of  a  buzzer  or  the  lighting  of 
a  lamp. 

All  the  data  concerning  the  biosphygmomanometer  cor- 
respond to  the  sphygmobiometer  (p.  272)  only  substituting 
for  the  latter  the  fact  that  any  blood-pressure  rise  substitutes 
cessation  of  buzzing. 

The  pressure  rise  varies  from  V4  to  i^  mm.  (direct  read- 
ing) when  the  energ\'  is  allowed  to  flow. 

The  degree  of  rise  indicates  the  energ}'  potentiality  pro- 
vided the  same  subject  is  employed. 

In  some  instances,  the  primary  action  of  conveyed  energ}' 
is  to  decrease  pressure  but  this  contingency  may  be  obviated 
by  the  potentiometer  (p.  275). 

Vagal  exhaustion  easily  ensues  after  several  observations 
on  the  same  subject  and  rest  is  imperative. 

Before  an  observation  is  attempted,  permit  the  oscillating 
needle  to  attain  a  constant  position  (leakage,  movement  of 
the  subject,  etc.). 

Tentative   obser\'ations   appear   to   show   that   sexual 


CAKDIOKINESTHESIA  295 

POLARITY  (p.  no)  may  be  determined  as  follows;  In  a  male, 
a  pressure  rise  ensues  when  the  finger  tips  of  the  left  hand 
approximate  the  distal  electrode  whereas  in  a  normal  female, 
a  like  effect  is  only  noted  with  the  finger  tips  of  the  right 
hand. 

Cardiokinesthesia. — This  neologism  is  worthy  of  ac- 
ceptance insomuch  as  the  mind  can  no  longer  usurp  the 
functions  of  sentiency. 

The  heart  has  always  been  apostrophized  by  the  poet  as 
the  abode  of  the  emotions  and,  "In  many  ways  doth  the  full 
heart  reveal  the  presence  of  love  it  would  conceal." 

The  biblicist  pays  a  more  extended  tribute  to  the  organ, 
*'As  he  thinketh  in  his  heart,  so  is  he." 

"Sensations  sweet,  felt  in  the  blood,  and  felt  along  the 
heart"  are  responses  equally  as  acute  as  revealed  to  the 
mind  by  the  senses. 

Thought  is  energy  and  consequently  only  a  mode  of 
motion  (p.  233). 

A  frequent  experiment  which  the  author  believes  is 
original  is  to  request  any  one  in  an  assembly  to  will  forcibly 
and  invariably,  one  skilled  in  palpation  of  the  pulse  can  say 
the  instant  the  person  executes  the  power  of  willing. 

Any  person  with  a  responsive  vagus  (p.  85)  may  be  em- 
ployed for  this  purpose.  The  nature  of  the  vagal  response 
is  either  an  infinitesimal  inhibition  or  irregularity.  Some 
sensitives  experience  a  peculiar  sensation  {heart  reflex)  in 
the  epigastrium  at  the  moment  another  person  wills. 

The  action  of  energy  on  the  vagus  has  been  explained 

(P-85). 

Adverse  willing  (p.  260)  by  another  will  nullify  the  pulse 
phenomena.  The  moment  of  intense  thought  can  be 
similarly  demonstrated  if  the  person  thus  engaged  in  thought 
covers  the  head  with  red  material  (p.  69).    The  latter  is 


296  APPENDIX 

UNNECESSARY  IN  THIS  AND  SIMILAR  EXPERIMENTS  IN  TELE- 
PATHY PROVIDED  THERE  IS  A  RED  LIGHT  IN  THE  ROOM.     How- 

ever,  one  must  remember  that  it  is  difficult  to  exclude  the 
thoughts  of  others  when  there  are  several  persons  present 
but  if  the  latter  short-circuit  the  brain  (vide  personal  equa- 
tion) this  possibility  may  be  obviated. 

The  changes  in  the  radial  pulse  as  described  may 

BE  utilized  for  DEMONSTRATING  THE  CONVEYANCE  OF 
NORMAL  OR  PATHOLOGIC  ENERGY. 

The  latter  is  best  conducted  to  the  epigastrium  (p.  85). 


,V/vJW.\. 


2> 

Fig.  75. — I,  Sphygmogram  illustrating  the  effects  on  the  line  of  descent  when 
energy  is  conveyed  to  the  epigastrium  through  the  biometer  at  zero  on  the  scale 
of  the  condenser.  2,  Illustrating  the  same  effects  when  tuberculous  energy  is 
similarly  conveyed  at  the  wavemeter  index  of  this  energy,  i/:.,  15. 

If  the  energy  is  primarily  allowed  to  pass  through  the 
biometer,  the  pulse  change  may  be  noted  either  at  zero  on 
the  scale  of  the  condenser  (showing  only  energy  in  general) 
or  at  its  wavemeter  index  (p.  286)  which  demonstrates  the 
specificity  of  the  energ>'. 

The  pulse  changes  noted  by  palpation  may  now  be  dem- 
onstrated by  the  sphygmograph  (Fig.  75),  although  mention 
of  this  impossibility  was  noted  on  page  90. 

This  graphic  demonstration  of  energ}^  with  the  heart  as 
the  detector  is  of  the  greatest  scientific  value.  Thus,  in  2, 
fig.  75,  one  observes  that  tuberculosis  only  shows  a  charac- 
teristic sphygmogram  at  its  wavemeter  index,  viz.,  15. 


ALOPECIA  297 

Predetermination  of  the  sex  of  eggs/'" — Having  estab- 
lished a  basic  principle  in  the  matter  of  polarity  in  relation 
to  sexuality  (p.  120),  it  was  only  natural  to  extend  the  scope 
of  my  observations.  The  following  data  are  presented. 
Eggs  of  the  domestic  fowl  yielded  an  electronic  reaction  in 
the  center  but  not  from  the  ends.  For  the  reaction,  the 
stomach  reflex  was  employed  although  the  reflexophone  is 
equally  available. 

On  July  29,  '15,  predetermination  of  sex  was  made  and 
the  results  were  reported  Sept.  7,  191 5. 

Four  eggs  yielded  a  negative  polarity.  The  result  after 
incubation  was  four  pullets  (hens). 

Five  eggs  yielded  a  positive  polarity  but  only  two 
hatched.     The  result  was,  one  hen  and  one  rooster. 

Note  here  an  error  in  observation. 

Three  eggs  yielded  a  neutral  polarity  and  as  predicted, 
the  eggs  were  sterile. 

In  one  of  the  eggs  yielding  a  negative  polarity  an  attempt 
was  made  to  reverse  the  sex  by  painting  one  end  of  the  egg 
with  a  yellow  (p.  122)  coloring  material  (gamboge).  The 
result  was  a  rooster. 

Alopecia. — Reference  to  this  subject  at  this  time  is  to 
correct  any  possible  errors  that  may  ensue  when  electronic 
reactions  are  executed  with  energy  derived  from  the  head  in 
PsYCHONEUROSES.  Some  forms  of  symptomatic  alopeciae 
yield  a  neutral  duling  energy  (usually  with  a  wavemeter 
index  of  6)  strictly  limited  to  the  bald  areas.  The  psychon- 
eurotic reactions  are  in  no  wise  modified  by  the  conven- 
tional forms  of  baldness  (congenital,  premature  and  senile). 

Personal  equation. — What  we  perceive  frequently 
depends  on  what  we  expect  to  perceive.    The  employment 

*l  am  very  such  indcbled  to  I.  Douglas,  of  Cloverdale,  Cal.,  whose  careful 
observations  and  keen  interest  enabled  me  to  report  these  results. 


298  APPENDIX 

of  WILL  on  the  part  of  the  operator  (p.  261)  working  with  the 
reflexes  or  the  reflexophone  may  dull  either  the  latter  or  the 
stomach.  To  eliminate  a  possibility  of  this  kind,  the  physic- 
ian should  temporarily  short-circuit  his  brain  (p.  109). 

Reflexophonometry. — There  is  a  unity  of  the  living  and 
non-living  world  of  materiality.  The  reflexes  exhibited  in 
the  living  world  may  be  demonstrated  in  certain  metals. 
These  reflexes  have  suggested  the  neologism,  metallic 
REFLEXES.  All  matter  lives  (p.  266)  and  polarity  is  not 
an  exclusive  property  of  magnetic  materials  (p.  266).  Like 
in  the  living,  the  electrons  which  make  up  the  structure  of 
metals  may  be  regarded  as  a  number  of  infinitesimal  mag- 
nets. The  theory  of  magnetism  may  be  applied  to  the 
metal  used  in  the  reflexophone,  viz.,  the  molecules  are  ar- 
ranged in  a  haphazard  manner  but  when  acted  upon  by 
energy,  they  become  so  arranged  that  their  poles  point  in  the 
same  direction  (Fig.  76). 


Fig.  76. — Illustrating  the  theory  of  magnetism.  In  the  upper  figure  the  mole- 
cules owing  to  their  disorderly  arrangement  have  lost  their  magnetism,  but  when 
the  molecules  are  arranged  end  to  end,  so  that  their  N-seeking  poles  all  point  in 
one  direction  and  the  S-seeking  poles  in  the  other  as  in  the  lower  figure,  the  mole- 
cules are  magnetized. 

Elsewhere,  the  mechanic  effects  of  magnetism  have  been 
described.  Similarly,  when  the  metal  of  the  reflexophone  is 
subjected  to  energ\',  the  tension  of  its  walls  is  augmented 
and  its  vibration  is  changed  (p.  25).  The  changes  in  reson- 
ance of  the  reflexophone  has  its  analogue  in  spectroscopy 
(p.  49)- 


REFLEXOPHONE  299 

The  phonetic  recognition  of  a  reflex  is  a  matter  of  experi- 
ence. In  telegraphic  transmission,  the  mechanical  device 
that  was  first  used  for  impressing  the  dots  and  dashes  on  a 
ribbon  was  discarded  by  the  operators  who  found  that  they 
could  read  the  dots  and  dashes  from  the  click  of  the  instru- 
ment. 

Stomach  reflex  and  reflexofhone. — ^Many  reasons 
urged  the  necessity  for  replacing  the  stomach  reflex  with 
a  viscus  factitia  notably,  the  difficulty  of  obtaining  a  proper 
subject,  the  vagaries  of  the  stomach  reflex,  its  enervation 
and  the  elimination  of  the  personal  equation  in  percussion. 

With  experience  in  the  recognition  of  sound  nuances, 
the  reflexophone  will  be  found  to  be  as  sensitive  as  the 
stomach  reflex.  It  responds  like  the  stomach  reflex  to  all 
the  reactions  (including  polarity)  in  this  book. 

Construction. — -Its  essential  component  is  a  metal 
cylinder  (A,  Fig.  77)  covered  at  one  end  with  thin  rubber 
dam  (B)  with  a  minimum  amount  of  tension  and  secured  by 
floss  silk  (waxed).  To  the  cylinder  A,  is  fixed  three  buttons 
(C,  D,  E)  and  refer  respectively  to  the  area  for  receiving 
energy  from  the  electrode  (REC),  for  determining  energy 
polarity  and  for  percussion.  F,  electrode  for  conveying 
energy  to  the  reflexophone.  The  shaft  of  this  electrode  has 
a  scale.  G,  cord  for  conducting  energ\'  to  REC;  H,  con- 
denser connected  with  REC  for  intensifying  the  conveyed 
energy;  I,  switch  for  making  or  breaking  the  energ>^  cur- 
rent; J,  muffler;  K,  standard  with  a  revolving  disk  marked 
POSITIVE  and  negative  for  determining  energy  polarity. 

Employment. — ^  Before  diagnosis  is  attempted,  the 
physician  must  acquaint  himself  with  nuances  of  sound 
following  the  conveyance  of  energy  from  F  to  C.  Strike  E, 
with  the  felt  hammer  (Fig.  29)  a  series  of  uniform  blows  to 
obtain  a  maximum  degree  of  resonance.    It  is  necessary  to 


300 


APPENDIX 


insert  the  rubber  tubing  (not  shown  in  fig.  77)  under  the 
rim  of  the  cyHnder  and  possibly  to  shift  the  position  of  the 
cyUnder  to  obtain  good  resonance.  The  muffler  (J)  must  as 
a  rule  be  clear  from  the  rubber  (B). 

All  the  following  phonetic  exercises  must  be  executed 
objectively,  i.  e.,  the  physician  must  be  ignorant  of  the  acts 
of  his  assistant. 


Fig.  77. — Reflexophone. 

The  latter  places  one  end  of  a  bar-magnet  to  F,  after 
the  switch  I,  closes  the  current. 

One  then  notes  the  transition  of  sound  from  resonance  to 
dulness.  The  crescendo  effect  is  gradual  and  the  full  effect 
is  not  noted  for  several  seconds.  With  experience,  the  tran- 
sition in  sound  is  noted  immediately  even  at  a  distance  of 
20  or  30  feet.    During  the  time  energy  is  conveyed,  say  with 


REFLEXOPHONE  301 

a  magnet,  sound  transitions  are  best  noted  by  opening  and 
closing  the  switch. 

Next  attempt  to  recognize  whether  the  positive  or  nega- 
tive pole  of  the  magnet  is  touching  F.  To  attempt  the  latter, 
first  note  the  dulness  and  then  turn  the  disk  marked  positive 
to  D  and  then  the  one  marked  negative. 

If  the  dulness  continues  with  the  positive  disk  surface 
and  the  sound  becomes  resonant  with  the  negative  surface, 
the  magnetic  pole  employed  by  the  assistant  was  positive. 

Next,  attempt  to  determine  the  moment  a  person  wills 
(p.  260).  During  the  time  the  physician  strikes  the  reflexo- 
phone  a  series  of  uniform  blows,  there  is  an  immediate 
change  in  the  percussion  note.  This  is  an  excellent  objective 
demonstration  of  telepathy.  With  a  red  light  in  the  room 
(p.  296),  concentrated  thought  on  the  part  of  another  will 
immediately  change  the  resonance.  A  code  can  be  thus 
established.  A  person  willing  consecutively  three  times 
would  convey  the  message  yes  and  twice,  no  and  etc. 

An  interval  of  several  seconds  must  elapse  between 
willing  and  thinking  for  reasons  to  be  mentioned.*  Investi- 
gations after  this  manner  were  successful  with  R.  R.  Rogers, 
manufacturing  chemist  in  this  city  at  a  distance  of  2  miles 
and  with  H.  G.  Aylsworth,  a  "wireless"  expert  of  this  city 
at  a  like  distance. 

Next  attempt  to  determine  male  and  female  polarity 
with  the  fingers  approximating  F  (p.  112).  The  tips  of  all 
the  fingers  must  touch  the  electrode.  The  sound  of  the 
reflexophone  only  dulls  when  the  finger  tips  of  the  left 
hand  of  a  male  approximates  F,  whereas  a  like  effect  in  a 


*By  means  of  the  method  specified,  the  author  was  able  to  receive  correct 
messages  from  L  E.  Levi,  Esq.,  a  resident  of  Cupertino  which  is  distant  41  miles 
from  San  Francisco.  The  electrode  F  was  attached  to  the  antennae  as  shown  in 
Fig.  64. 


302  APPENDIX 

normal  female  is  only  observed  with  the  finger  tips  of  the 
RIGHT  hand. 

Note  also  that  the  metallic  reflex  of  the  reflexophone 
cannot  be  elicited  when  normal  energy  traverses  a  non- 
conductor.* 

Prove  the  gravitational  theory  (p.  226). 

The  amateur  in  phonology  soon  determines  the  best 
object  on  which  to  place  the  reflexophone. 

If  the  latter  is  placed  on  a  thick  layer  of  felt  on  a  hard- 
wood table  (latter  on  carpet),  the  best  results  are  achieved. 
C,  for  receiving  energy  should  face  the  west  (p.  34). 

Before  attempting  any  new  experiment  strike  the 
reflexophone  a  series  of  blows  with  the  felt  hammer. 

The  object  of  the  latter  expedient  is  to  restore  the 
resonance  of  the  instrument.  This  action  is  not  unlike  that 
in  "wireless"  when  the  automatic  tapper  strikes  the  coherer 
to  readjust  the  filings. 

Diagnostic  technique. — The  object  of  investigation 
is  a  supposititous  pulmonary  tuberculosis.  F,  is  gradually 
passed  over  the  lung  during  the  time  percussion  of  the  re- 
flexophone is  executed.  The  moment  a  tuberculous  area  is 
attained,  dulness  supplants  resonance  and  the  polarity  of  the 
transferred  energy  is  determined  by  the  disks  (K) ;  restora- 
tion of  resonance  with  the  positive  and  negative  disks — 
the  energy  is  neutral.  The  moment  the  energ}^  is  cut  off 
at  the  switch  (I) ,  the  dulness  disappears  and  reappears  when 
the  energy  current  is  on. 

All  the  reactions  pertaining  to  the  stomach  hold 
with  the  reflexophone. 


*The  reflexophone  is  provided  with  a  non-conductor  of  rubber  (not  shown  in 
Fig.  77)  which  can  be  interposed  between  C  and  REC  when  it  is  necessary  to 
differentiate  normal  from  pathological  energy. 


REFLEXOPHONE  303 

The  scale  on  REC  (in  millimeters)  approximately  meas- 
ures the  intensity  of  the  conveyed  energ}-. 

BiOREFLEXOMETRY. — The  reflcxophone  previously  de- 
scribed is  available  for  ordinary  use  but  when  the  vibratory 
index,  wavemeter  index  and  measurement  of  energy  poten- 
tiality* is  desired  it  is  made  so  that  it  can  be  used  in  con- 
nection with  the  biometer  (p.  275).  If  one  substitutes  for 
the  action  of  the  heart,  the  transition  of  resonance  to  dul- 
ness,  all  the  reactions  mentioned  in  connection  with  the 
sphygmobiometer  (p.  280)  are  available  with  the  reflexo- 
phone.  This  apparatus  is  provided  with  an  AUTOiL\Tic 
TAPPER  which  excludes  the  personal  equation  in  percussion. 

NoN-DULiNG  ENERGY  (p.  43). — With  the  rcflexophone, 
note  that  either  disk  (K)  will  dull  the  apparatus.  If  the  non- 
duling  energy  is  positive,  dulness  w^ill  persist  with  the  posi- 
tive disk  and  clears  with  the  negative  disk.  If  the  non- 
duling  energy  is  neutral^  neither  disk  will  dull  the  reflexo- 
phone  DURING  the  flow  of  energy. 

Reflexophonic  recognition  of  specific  energy. — It 
has  been  found  empirically  that  the  lower  end  of  the  cylin- 
der (A)  will  only  dull  in  specific  areas  when  certain  kind  of 
energy  are  conveyed  to  it  like  in  splanchno-diagnosis 
(p.  291).  These  areas  not  shown  in  fig.  77,  are  specified  as 
follows : 

P.    —Pus. 

A.  I. — Autointoxication. 

C.  I. — Chronic  Inflammation. 

G.  S . — Gall-stones. 

C.    — Carcinoma. 

S.     — Syphilis. 

T.    — Tuberculosis. 

Sa.  — Sarcoma. 

*The  biometer  must  be  grounded  at  the  connection  specified  on  the  coil,  other- 
wise the  POLARITY  of  the  energy  passing  through  it  will  be  reversed. 


304 


APPENDIX 


In  chronic  inflammation  the  energy  does  not  pass  a  non- 
conductor hke  in  carcinoma  (pages  184  and  191). 

The  duHng  of  these  specific  areas  has  its  analogue  in 
spectroscopy  (p.  49). 


A- 


<r,trtiKtmliin,»i1l,Ali^ 


vr>^'''''t^H'^^^^>,)yj^, 


0 

B 


■^-M^+  ^MH-^'^'HH«KM/^/-'^H*/•*^■' 


^ — '>^viii|i'il'i!>i|^hMiiili 


Fig.  78. — Reflexophonograms  (to  be  read  from  right  to  left),  i,  Tracings 
before  (B),  and  during  the  time  (A),  energy  is  conveyed  to  the  reflexophone.  Note 
in  B,  that  during  the  energy-  conveyance,  the  reflexophone  partially  recovers  to 
again  relapse  into  its  former  state  (diminished  cun,-e  amptitude).  2,  Tracings  of 
tuberculosis  before  (B)  and  (A),  during  the  time  tuberculous  energ\'  is  conveyed  with 
the  variable  condenser  at  15  (wavemeter  indexj.  3,  Tracings  before  (B)  and  during 
the  time  (A)  carcinomatous  energy-  is  conve3-ed  through  the  variable  condenser  at 
6  (wavemeter  index).  These  tracings  show  that  a  Diagnostic  Record  may  be 
made  with  the  reflexophone  in  association  with  a  variable  condenser  (biometer 
employable)  at  specific  points  on  the  scale  of  the  latter.  Tracing  i,  shows  only 
energy-  transmission  in  general  and  was  obtained  without  the  condenser. 

In  seeking  these  areas,  adjust  mufHer  (J)  so  that  the 
maximum  resonance  is  obtainable  at  the  lower  end  of  the 
cylinder  (A).  As  a  rule,  the  felt  of  the  muffler  must  just 
approximate  the  rubber  (B).  Use  the  felt  hammer  (Fig.  29). 
It  is  understood  that  the  cylinder  in  its  totality  dulls  at  E, 
but  when  a  specific  energ\'  is  conveyed,  only  specific  areas 
dull  when  the  latter  are  percussed.  WTien  the  specific  areas 
of  dulness  are  sought,  remove  the  rubber  tubing  under 
cylinder  (A).  Specific  recognition  of  energy-  is  also  possible 
when  E,  is  percussed  when  energ}'  is  conveyed  at  definite 
vibrator}^  or  wavemeter  indices*. 

*Definite  words  thought  of  by  a  transmitter  (p.  247)  may  likewise  be  revealed 
by  specific  areas  of  dulness  on  the  cylinder.  Interchangeable  cylinders  are  con- 
structed for  this  purpose  for  psychologic  study  and  also  for  the  mineralogist. 


TELEDIAGNOSIS 


305 


Reflexophonograms. — If  the  button  of  a  cardiograph 
is  so  adjusted  to  the  rubber  (B)  of  the  CyHnder  so  as  to 
elicit  maximum  oscillations  of  the  lever  of  a  tambour,  a 
graphic  record  may  be  made  on  a  registering  apparatus 
when  E  is  tapped.*  To  attain  the  maximum  resiliency  of 
the  cylinder,  the  rubber  tubing  is  placed  beneath  the  latter. 
The  effects  of  energy  conveyance  is  noted  in  fig.  78. 

Telediagnosis. — It  occurred  to  the  writer  that  patho- 
logical energy  could  be  conveyed  over  long  distances  and 
that  reactions  could  be  made  at  the  office  of  the  physician. 
My  anticipation  in  this  regard  was  more  than  realized  with 
the  stomach  reflex  or  the  reflexophone. 


A  B 

Fig.  79. — Telediagnosis  (Pathotelephony).  A,  showing  the  method  of  convey- 
ing energy  from  the  subject  to  the  telephone  hook  at  the  transmitting  station;  B, 
receiving  the  energy  at  the  receiving  station.  The  distal  electrode  in  B,  may  be 
used  for  eliciting  the  stomach  reflex  or  it  may  be  connected  with  the  biosphyg- 
momanometer\  reflexophone  or  energeiaometer. 

To  execute  this  method  of  pathotelophony,  the  hook  of 
the  telephone  is  used  at  the  transmitting  or  receiving  station 
(physician's  office).  The  telephone  may  be  grasped  in  the 
hand  (insulating  material  on  it  prevents  the  transmission 
of  normal  energy)  and  the  hook  applied  directly  to  the 
energy  source  or  in  the  case  of  pus,  the  latter  may  approxi- 
mate the  telephone  hook. 

Better  still,  a  conducting  cord  (with  aluminum  electrodes) 
is  allowed  to  hang  from  the  hook  (Fig.  79)  of  the  telephone 

*The  automatic  tapper  is  employed  to  attain  uniformity  in  the  force  ;\nd  rhyth- 
micity  of  the  blows. 


306  APPENDIX 

both  at  the  receiving  and  transmitting  stations,  and  the 
other  electrode  is  used  at  the  receiving  station  for  receiving 
the  pathological  energy'  and  at  the  receiving  station  for 
conveying  it  to  the  stomach  region  (for  the  stomach  reflex) 
or  to  the  refiexophone.  All  kinds  of  reactions  (polarity, 
vibratory  rate  and  wavemeter  index,  splanchno-diagnosis, 
etc.)  may  thus  be  made  despite  distance,  and  all  the  reactions 
thus  far  executed  were  as  distinct  as  though  made  in  my 
own  ofhce. 

My  primary  efforts  were  made  with  Dr.  V.  G.  Vecki,  of 
San  Francisco,  whose  eminence  as  an  andrologist  is  conceded. 
His  office  is  approximately  two  blocks  from  mine.  He 
requested  me  to  diagnose  a  specimen  of  urethral  pus  which 
he  had  placed  on  a  glass.  To  assure  myself  that  the  energy 
conveyed  was  from  his  ofhce,  I  requested  him  to  approach 
the  hook  of  his  telephone  with  the  specimen  at  intervals  of 
his  own  choosing.  After  having  announced  to  him  over  the 
telephone  every  time  he  did  so,  I  was  ready  to  make  my 
reaction.  The  reaction  demonstrated  the  absence  of  gono- 
cocci  which  later  he  confirmed  to  his  surprise  by  micro- 
scopical examination. 

One  week  later,  he  requested  me  to  make  a  reaction  from 
a  specimen  of  urethral  secretion  from  another  patient. 
This  specimen  gave  the  gonococcal  reaction.  He  demurred 
to  this  reaction  claiming  that  the  individual  from  whom  the 
specimen  was  obtained  had  married  only  three  weeks  before 
and  that  his  previous  physician  could  find  no  gonococci  in 
his  urethra. 

My  reaction  was  confirmed  by  Dr.  Vecki,  by  micro- 
scopical examination  of  the  secretion.*  Later,  reactions 
were  obtained  from  Berkeley,  a  distance  of  ii  miles. 

*It  has  been  suggested  by  the  captious  critic  that  telepathy  is  responsible  for 
my  results.  In  the  experiments  with  Dr.  Vecki,  who  was  not  aware  of  the  nature 
of  the  specimens,  this  contention  may  be  eliminated. 


TELEDIAGNOSIS  307 

On  Oct.  12,  1915,  the  author  requested  Prof.  J.  T.  Fisher, 
of  the  University  of  Southern  Cahfornia  in  Los  Angeles,  to 
have  in  readiness  several  specimens  for  the  object  of  tele- 
diagnosis.  Each  time  Dr.  Fisher  approached  the  specimen 
with  his  electrode,  my  assistant  so  announced.  This  was 
done  a  number  of  times  with  two  errors.  Finally,  a  diagnosis 
of  streptococcus  was  made  (among  several  specimens  se- 
lected by  Dr.  Fisher  and  unknown  to  me)  which  was.  correct. 

The  telephone  wire  (non-insulated,  30  to  50  feet  above 
the  ground  and  not  reenforced  by  telephone  repeaters) 
extends  475  miles  from  Los  Angeles  to  San  Francisco. 

Radiogeodiagnosis. — My  reactions  with  the  ground  as 
the  conducting  medium  for  conveying  pathological  energy 
were  uniformly  successful  in  San  Francisco  but  only  par- 
tially so  at  long  distances.  Further  experiments  will  be 
necessary  to  carry  this  method  of  telediagnosis  to  a  success- 
ful issue. 

The  subject  used  for  the  test  stands  on  an  aluminum 
plate  connected  to  the  ground  wire  of  a  telephone  (a  part  of 
which  is  free  from  insulation)  or  directly  to  the  earth.  If 
the  refiexophone  is  used,  it  is  similarly  connected  at  the 
receiving  station.  At  the  transmitting  end  the  electrode  is 
similarly  connected.  It  is  best  to  employ  a  rubber  covered 
electrode  at  the  receiving  station  to  eliminate  all  but  the 
conveyance  of  pathological  energy. 

Vagal  polarity. — In  a  male,  the  following  is  noted 
when  energy  is  directed  toward  the  vagi  in  the  neck. 

Positive  energy  to  the  left  vagus-  causes  the  stomach 
reflex  whereas  negative  energy  is  without  any  effect  in  the 
elicitation  of  the  reflex  in  question. 

Negative  energ>^  to  the  right  vagus  will  only  produce 
the  stomach  reflex.  These  reactions  show  the  opposite  po- 
larity in  a  female.     The  foregoing  may  be  utilized  in  diag- 


308  APPENDIX 

nosis.  Thus,  carcinomatous  energ\'  (positive)  will  only 
evoke  the  stomach  reflex  when  directed  to  the  left  vagus 
in  the  neck  in  a  male  and  the  right  vagus  in  a  female. 

ENERGELA.OMETRY. — The  greatest  discovery  ever  made 
in  magnetism  was  that  of  Oersted; — the  production  of 
magnetism  from  electricity  and  the  greatest  discover}'  ever 
made  in  electricity  was  that  of  Faraday: — the  production 
of  electricity  from  magnetism.  The  whole  domain  of 
physics  is  tending  toward  a  unification  of  the  various  forms 
of  force  under  one  great  principle.  This  tendency  is  sug- 
gested by  the  transmutation  of  various  forms  of  force  such 
as  the  conversion  of  sound  into  electricity  and  of  the  latter, 
into  heat,  light,  motion  or  chemical  energ}-.  .\11  the  forces 
are  under  the  influence  of  one  or  two  mechanic  conceptions: — 
that  of  ether  and  that  of  ultimate  particles  which  embody 
matter  and  electricity. 

^Matter  is  an  accumulation  of  positive  and  negative 
electric  charges  and  the  chemic  elements  are  merely  varying 
numbers  and  arrangements  of  these  charges. 

It  is  not  strange  that  Thales,  should  have  endowed  the 
magnet  with  a  soul  and  when  Lucretius,  was  inspired  to 
sing  the  magnet's  power  in  his  ''De  Reriim  Xatura,''^  he 
could  have  apostrophized  no  greater  marvel. 

The  law  of  magnets: — Like  poles  repel  each  other  and 
unlike  poles  attract  is  practically  limited  to  magnetic 
materials. 

Magnetism  is  the  oldest  of  the  physical  sciences  and 
despite  its  antiquity,  its  exact  nature  is  still  unknown. 

The  law  of  attraction  and  repulsion  is  universal  and  it 
remains  for  us  to  prove  the  correctness  of  this  contention 
by  a  method  of  procedure  which,  we  believe,  is  essentially 
new.  We  believe  furthermore,  that  b\-  this  method  we  shall 
better  acquaint  ourselves  with  the  supra-sensual  world. 


ENERGEIAOMETRY  309 

Polarity  as  has  been  shown  (p.  228)  is  not  the  exclusive 
prerogative  of  magnetic  materials. 

When  studying  the  Atom  in  Vibration  (p.  49),  it  was 
shown  that  a  definite  vibratory  rate  could  be  established 
in  different  diseases  (p.  191). 

What  holds  for  health  and  disease  is  equally  applicable 
with  reference  to  all  things  in  nature. 

Personal  Magnetism  (p.  254)  can  no  longer  be  regarded 
as  mythical  as  we  shall  presently  show. 

In  the  discussion  of  love  (p.  231),  reference  was  made 
to  attractive  force. 

In  the  Sanscrit  language  the  magnet  is  called  "Ayas- 
kanta"  (loving  towards  iron.) 

Apparatus  heretofore  suggested  for  measuring  human 
radiations  are  impracticable. 

Energeiaometer. — This  term  refers  to  an  apparatus 
(Fig.  80)  devised  by  the  author  for  measuring  energy.  Its 
principle  embraces  the  polarity  of  a  suspended  non-mag- 
netic needle.*  One  end  of  the  latter  (negative  pole)  is  re- 
pelled by  a  negative,  and  attracted  by  a  positive  energy. 
The  other  end  of  the  needle  (positive  pole)  has  a  contrary 
action|.  When  the  energy  conveyed  to  the  needle  is  positive 
and  negative,  there  is  a  to  and  fro  motion  which  is  slow  and 
regular  and,  if  the  energy  is  neutral,  the  motion  is  the  same 
but  jerky  in  syphiUs  and  relatively  rapid  in  tuberculosis. 

The  best  results  are  attained  when  the  needle  is  placed 
directly  north  and  south  and  the  apparatus  is  level.  As 
before  remarked,  the  results  attained  are  based  on  my  ob- 
servations concerning  the  atom  in  \'ibration  (p.  49).  The 
energy  must  be  conveyed  through  the  biometer  (p.   275) 

*Energy  conveyed  through  the  I)iometer  will  also  attract  or  repel  (dependent 
on  energy  polarity)  the  needle  of  an  ordinary  compass. 

fFor  convenience,  the  negative  pole  is  employed  by  the  author  in  his  biotic 
estimations.  Several  observations  should  be  made  to  exclude  movements  from 
causes  other  than  conveyed  energy. 


310 


APPENDIX 


at  the  wavemeter  index  and  vibrator}^  rate  (p.  191)  of  the 
particular  energ}-  investigated. 


Fig.  80. — Energeiaometer.  A,  biometer  (p.  275);  b,  suspended  magnetic 
needle  (e)  in  case  which,  when  deflected  by  conveyed  energy,  establishes  an  elec- 
trical connection  (positive  or  negative  at  f,  f),  thus  causing  the  needle  of  the  Gal- 
vanometer (c)  to  deflect  to  the  right  or  the  left  side  of  a  scale;  d,  circuit  between 
B  and  c. 

\Mien  the  energ}'  flow  is   estabhshed   by   B,   Fig.    70^ 
the  special  movements  of  the  needle  ensue. 
Energeiaometry  IX  Disease*. 

Vibratory  Wavemeter  Negative  Pole 
Disease  Rate     Index         of  Needle 


Carcinoma 50 

Chronic  \  40 

Inflammation. .  .  .  \ 

S}'philist 20 

Tuberculosis is 


Pus  (Streptococcic! 

infection) f 

Autointoxication  \ 
(Bacillus  coli) ....  J 


Sarcoma , 


10 


17 


Gail-Stones. 


20 


Pain+  (pages  164! 
and  286) J      20 


32 


Attracted. 
Attracted. 

(To  and  fro  motion 

(jerky). 
I  To  and  fro  motion 

regtilar    but     not 
[slow. 

Repelled. 

[To  and  fro  motion 

<i  (regular  but  very 

[slow). 

[To  and  fro  motion 

(slow    but     regu- 
,  regular). 
I  To  and  fro  motion 

(slow    and    regu- 
[lar). 

[To  and  fro  motion 
<!  (notably       at- 
Itracted). 


*The  reaction  indices  may  var>'  (foot  note  p.  191)  but  all  energeiaometers  are 
correctly  gauged  by  the  manufacturers  before  delivery. 

tParas\-philis  yields  a  like  reaction  at  these  indices.  Thus,  in  dementia  para- 
lytica (p.  172),  the  reaction  from  either  frontal  eminence  is  at  20  and  6. 

|To  compute  the  intensity  of  pain  (p.  164)  the  author  prefers  the  stomach, 
reflex.  Pinching  the  skin  in  an  average  person  yields  an  energy  equal  to  6-25  of  an. 
ohm.    Severe  pain  may  overcome  a  resistence  of  200  ohms. 


ENERGEIAOMETRY  311 

The  needle  movements  are  small  and  may  be  observed 
directly  (accurate  vision  necessary),  or  by  aid  of  a  reading 
telescope.  By  aid  of  a  mirror  attached  to  the  needle,  the 
movements  of  the  latter  are  accentuated  by  reflection  on  a 
screen  so  that  many  persons  may  make  synchronous  ob- 
servations. The  movements  of  the  beam  of  light  may  be 
photographed  on  a  moving  surface  thus  furnishing  a  graphic 
method  when  the  jerky  movements  of  the  needle  in  a  neu- 
rasthenic are  contrasted  with  the  steady  flow  of  normal 
energy. 

In  Fig.  80,  the  apparatus  is  so  constructed  that  the 
polarity  of  the  energy  is  determined  by  the  movements  of  a 
Galvanometric  needle. 

The  potentiality  of  the  energy  conveyed  is  determined 
by  the  swing  of  the  needle  with  the  reading  telescope  or 
with  the  potentiometer  (p.  275). 

The  latter  is  of  the  greatest  importance  (p.  44). 

When  the  amplitude  of  the  swing  of  the  needle  is  deter- 
mined, accurate  and  uniform  readings  can  only  be  secured 
when  a  fixed  distance  is  established  between  the  tip  of  the 
needle  and  the  electrode  (within  the  box).  The  best  move- 
ments are  attained  when  the  latter  is  1.5  cm.  from  the  point 
of  the  needle.  Another  method  of  measuring  energy  po- 
tentiality is  after  the  manner  suggested  on  page  47;  needle 
movements  are  noted  at  variable  distances  when  the  elec- 
trode of  theenergeiaometer  is  on  a  line  with  the  energy  source. 

The  potentiality  and  polarity  of  Drugs  (p.  209)  may  be 
determined  by  the  energeiaometer. 

Drug  Vibratory  Rate  Wavemeter  Index 

Safranin 4  4 

Gamboge 5  13 

Picric  acid 3  3 


312  APPENDIX 

XoRiLA.L  HuiLA.x  ExERGY. — Bv  aid  of  the  energeiaometer, 
it  can  be  shown  that  human  radiations  (p.  9)  are  electro- 
magnetic (p.  225).  WTien  the  vibraton-  rate  of  the  biometer 
is  at  14,  and  the  wavemeter  index  at  8,  and  the  energ}^  of  a 
bar-magnet  approximates  the  recei\Tng  electrode  of  the 
apparatus,  the  needle  is  either  repelled  or  attracted  (when  the 
energ}'  flows)  according  to  whether  the  negative  or  positive 
end  of  the  magnet  is  in  apposition  with  the  electrode. 

The  latter  fact  definitely  establishes  the  escape  of 
electrons  from  a  magnet  (p.  224).  The  finger  tips  of  the 
left  hand  in  a  Male  (negative  energ}')  will  repel  the  needle 
and  the  finger  tips  of  the  right  hand  in  a  male  (Figs.  26  and 
27)  approximating  the  receiving  electrode  \vi\\  attract  the 
needle. 

In  a  Female,  this  polarity  from  the  finger  tips  is  reversed. 

The  foregoing  experiment  not  only  demonstrates  human 
radiations  but  it  also  shows  the  magnetic  character  of  the 
latter  insomuch  as  at  the  \dbrator\'  rate  and  wavemeter 
index  cited,  only  energ}'  of  a  magnetic  character  will  in- 
fluence the  needle  This  observation  sustains  the  mag- 
neton theory  fp.  211).  Other  experiments  demonstrate  that 
every  phenomenon  is  not  only  a  question  of  vibration  but  of 
polarization,  thus  emphasizing  the  importance  of  duahty  in 
Nature. 

The  energy  discharge  in  a  temperamental  individual  is 
relatively  great. 

A  magnet  capable  of  lifting  nearly  a  pound  has  less  in- 
fluence on  the  needle  than  the  energ}'  discharge  from  the 
finger  tips  of  a  temperamental  person. 

Traumatic  neuroses  may  now  be  explained.  After  a 
shock  or  concussion  of  the  spine,  the  potentiality  of  the 
energ}-  discharge  is  diminished  oxs-ing  to  the  disarrangement 
of  the  magnetons  fp.  211,  Fig.  76).    At  the  indices  for  recog- 


ENERGEIAOMETRY  313 

nizing  human  energ>'  (normal)  with  the  energeiaometer, 
topographical  percussion  may  be  executed  after  the  manner 
cited  on  page  loi  et  seq. 

The  influence  of  Colors  on  the  individual  may  be  de- 
termined. Red  (bright)  on  the  head,  increases  the  rapidity 
and  amplitude  of  the  needle  deflections  whereas  yellow  on 
the  head,  reverses  the  polarity  of  the  male  and  female. 

The  energy  discharged  from  Plants  is  likewise  magnetic 
and  it  can  be  shown  that  some  colors  thrown  on  the  plant 
will  so  modify  the  polarity  that  the  plant  energy  previously 
attracting  the  needle  will  repel  it  or  vice  versa.  Heliotropism 
may  thus  receive  explanation. 

Psychological  Investigations. — The  energeiaometer 
only  confirms  the  numerous  new  data  cited  in  this  work. 
The  nature  of  gravitation  (p.  225)  may  be  demonstrated. 
Personal  magnetism  (p.  254)  is  not  a  myth  and  ^^ actio  in 
distans  repugnaf'  cited  by  the  medieval  scholastic  philoso- 
phers is  easily  disproved.  Technically,  the  positive  tem- 
perament (firm  will  power)  is  negative  (negative  pole  of 
needle  repelled)  and  the  negative  temperament  is  posi- 
tive" 

Argument  by  analog}^  is  deceptive  but  positive  and 
negative  temperaments,  and  mediumistic  polar  attraction 
and  repulsion,  are  conditions  capable  of  demonstration. 

The  latter  psychodynamic  phenomena  find  expression 
in  will.  The  potentiality  of  the  latter,  varies  as  determined 
by  the  energeiaometer,  and  its  polarity  may  be  expressed 
positively  or  negatively  so  that,  the  needle  may  be  willed 
in  or  out.  If  one  person  willing  that  the  needle  should  go 
out  is  opposed  by  another  person  (with  a  stronger  will)  willing 
a  deflection  of  the  needle  in  the  opposite  direction,  the  latter 
will  prove  the  victor  in  the  will  contest.  Such  opposition  of 
will  is  enhanced  by  a  violet  purple  color  on  the  head. 


314  APPENDIX 

The  specificity  of  thought  may  be  determined  after  the 
manner  indicated  on  page  247. 

The  energeiaometer  may  be  connected  with  a  buzzer  and 
the  instant  of  profound  and  concentrated  thought  (p.  236) 
may  thus  be  recognized  at  enormous  distances.  In  this 
experiment  the  receiving  electrode  is  connected  with  the 
antennae  (Fig.  64). 

The  following  usual  code  words  may  be  selected  with 
their  vibratory  rate  and  wavemeter  index: 

Wavemeter  Index     Vibratory  Rate 

Saved 5     30 

Well 2     40 

Arrived 4     12 

Operated 6     16 

Gid 7     13 

Buy 8     12 

Sell II     13 

If  the  reaction  for  lead  or  iron  is  desired  (287),  for  the 
former,  place  the  index  at  8  (wavemeter)  and  at  40  (vibra- 
tory rate)  and  for  the  latter,  at  6  (wavemeter)  and  20  (vibra- 
tory rate). 

With  the  energeiaometer,  one  may  demonstrate  the 
rhythmic  undulations  in  the  flow  of  human  energy.  The 
potentiality  of  will  and  thought  may  be  computed. 

It  is  impossible  to  cite  all  the  experiments  made  by  the 
author  with  this  new  instrument.  Its  use  explains  many 
supposed  contradictions  of  physical  law  as  exhibited  by  the 
"psychic  medium"  and  others;  it  is  destined  to  dignify 
diagnosis  as  an  exact  science  and  to  aid  the  physicist  and 
physiologist  in  the  interpretation  of  phenomena  heretofore 
regarded  as  inexplicable. 

Telaerodiagnosis. — Reference  has  already  been  made 
to  telediagnosis  on  page  305.   The  author  has  recently  sue- 


ENERGEIAOMETRY  315 

ceeded  in  recognizing  energy  by  aerial  transmission  over  a 
distance  of  one  mile  and  hopes  that  further  experiments  will 
enable  him  to  exceed  this  distance. 


316  BIBLIOGRAPHY 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 

1.  Soddy. — Matter  and  Energy. 

2.  Leduc. — The  Mechanism  of  Life,  igii. 

3.  Kilner. — The  Human  Atmosphere. 

4.  Abrams. — Autointoxication,  E.  B.  Treat  and  Co.,  New  York. 

5.  Denis. — Psychologie  Expreimentale,  4th  Congress  of  Lnternational 

Psychology,  Paris,  1900. 

6.  Grasset. — The  Marvels  Beyond  Science,  igio. 

7.  Hooker. — The  Lancet,  Nov.  1905. 

8.  Baines  and  Bowman. — Electropathology  and  Therapeutics,  1914. 

9.  Duncan. — The  Xew  Knowledge,  1910. 

10.  Loeb. — The  Mechanistic  Conception  of  Life,  191 2. 

11.  Weininger. — Sex  and  Character,  6th  German  Edition. 

12.  Dubois. — The  Psychic  Treatment  of  Nervous  Disorders,  p.  331, 

1906. 

13.  Auld. — London  Lancet,  Oct.  17.  1903. 

14.  Sajous. — Internal  Secretions,  p.  1703,  1912. 

15.  Abderhalden. — Defensive  Ferments  of  the  A  nimal  Organism,  1914. 

16.  Lemel. — Xederlandsch  Tijdschrift  vor  Geneeskunde,  Amsterdam, 

July  25,  1914. 

17.  Journal  A.  M.  A.,  Nov.  13,  1914;  Russky  Vratch,  Apr.  12,  1914. 

18.  White. — American  Journal  of  Clinical  Medicine,  Nov.  1914. 

19.  Sgier. — Long  Island  Medical  Journal,  Sept.  1913. 

20.  Sprude. — Deutsch.  Med.  Wochenschrift,  p.  245,  No.  6,  1913. 

21.  Vigneron. — La  Nature,  Feb.  1912. 

22.  Wood. — Journal  A.  M.  A.,  Oct.  17,  1914. 

23.  White. — American  Journal  of  Clinical  Medicine,  Feb.  191 5. 

24.  Riesman. — Journal  A.  M.  A.,  Feb.  20,  191 5. 

25.  Journal  A.  M.  A.,  May  i,  191 5. 

26.  Bovie. — American  Journal  of  Tropical  Diseases  and  Preventive 

Medicine,  Feb.  191 5. 


EEFERENCES  317 


A  FEW  REFERENCES  TO  THE 

VISCERAL  REFLEXES  OF  ABRAMS 

BY  OTHER  INVESTIGATORS. 

American  Electro-Therapeutic  Association  (Report  of  Committee  on 
Standardization,  Sept.  1914). — "In  Spondylotherapy"  (the  au- 
thor's work  on  the  therapeutics  of  the  reflexes)  "the  employment 
of  miechanical  vibration  fills  one  of  the  most  useful  roles  in 
therapeutics.  It  is  easily  controlled  and  as  practical  and  effective 
of  application  in  the  hands  of  those  familiar  with  the  methods  of 
employing  it  as  spinal  percussion." 
Anderson. — Address,  National  Eclectic  Medical  Convention,  June  15, 

1914. 
Medical  Summary,  Aug.  1915. 

"After  years  of  studious  investigations  he  (Abrams) 
discovered  the  reflexes  and  evolved  a  system  of  treatment 
that  reaches  cases  wherein  old-time  methods  had  igno- 
miniously  failed.  The  writer  was  one  of  the  first  physi- 
cians in  the  East  to  adopt  Abram's  methods  and  some  of 
the  results  obtained  are  little  short  of  marvelous." 
Archives  de  Neurologie,  July  191 2,  October  191 2,  and  Editorial,  Feb. 

1913- 
Auld. — The  Lancet  (London),  Oct.   17,   1903;  The  British  Medical 
Journal,  June  18,  19 10. 

Baird. — The  Medical  Record,  Dec.  30,  191 1;  Journal  of  Physiological 

Therapeutics,  June,  19 14. 
Barr,  Sir  James. — President's  Address  at  the  i8th  annual  meeting  of 
the  British  Medical  Association,  British  Medical  Journal,  July  27, 
1912. 

"The  versatile  genius  of  Dr.  Albert  Abrams,  who  has 
come  all  the  way  from  San  Francisco  to  do  honor  to  this 
meeting  of  the  British  Medical  Association,  has  taught 
us  how  best  to  cure  intrathoracic  aneurysm  and  has  shed 
light  on  the  nature  of  the  cardiac  and  respiratory  reflexes. 


318  EEFERENCES 

In  the  treatment  of  diseases  of  the  heart  and  lungs  his 
work  does  great  credit  to  the  new  Continent  and  he  has 
given  us  further  insight  into  methods  of  prevention." 
British  Medical  Journal,  June  ii,  1910.  Ibid.,  Jan.  10, 
1914. 
Bishop,  Francis. — International  Clinics,  Vol.  II,  23d  Series. 
Bishop,  Louis. — Heart  Diseases,  etc.,  1913. 

Bloch  (Franzensbad,  Austria). — Douching  the  heart  region  with  car- 
bonic acid  in  cardiac  disease  to  evoke  the  "heart  reflex  of  Abrams." 
Bond. — The  American  Journal  of  Clinical  Medicine,  Aug.  1913. 
Boyd. — New  York  Medical  Journal,  Oct.  21,  191 1. 
Burch. — Journal  of  Advanced  Therapeutics,  July,  1910. 
Butler,  Geo.  F.  (Chicago). — Clinical  Medicine. 

"Dr.  Abrams  has  revolutionized  the  whole  method  of 
physical  diagnosis.    He  handles  the  human  body  and  its 
organs  with  as  much  skill  and  exactness  as  the  most 
expert  watchmaker  handles  a  watch." 
Cabot. — Textbook  on  Physical  Diagnosis. 
Campbell. — The  Lancet  (London),  Nov.  7,  1903. 
Cattell. — Medical  Dictionary,  Lippincott  Co. 

Cohen,  Myer  Solis. — Medical  Record,  Sept.  20,  1913;  New  York  Med. 

Jour.,  Oct.  16,  191 5,  Heart  and  Aortic  reflexes  of  Abrams,  with  43 

illustrations.    Read  before  section  in  General  Medicine,  College 

of  Physicians,  Philadelphia,  May  24,  1915. 

Cotzhausen  von. — Advanced  Therapeutics,  March,  1913;  Philadelphia 

Journal  of  Physiological  Therapeutics,  Dec.  191 2. 
Excerpt  from  a  paper  on  the  author's  reflexes  read  before  the  American 
Electro-Therapeutic  Association,  Sept.  4,  191 2. 

"All  the  above  claims  are  made  by  Abrams.  Most  of 
them  seem  proven  by  Jaworski,  Laborde,  Fliess,  Bon- 
nier, Denslow  and  lately  by  his  American  students, 
among  whom  we  may  conscientiously  class  some  of  our 
most  progressive  and  enthusiastic  physicians  and  physio- 
therapists. 
Craig,  A.  W.—Phil.  Med.  Monthly,  March,  1899. 

(Prize  Essay).    The  diagnostic  value  of  the  X-rays  in 


KEFERENCES  Sl^ 

this  country  has  been  established  by  Williams  of  Boston, 
Stubbert  of  New  York  and  Abrams  of  San  Francisco.* 

Cyriax. — The  Edinburgh  Medical  Journal,  Dec.  1913. 

Da  Costa. — Physical  Diagnosis  (Textbook). 

Dawson,  B.  E.  (President  Eclectic  Medical  University,  Kansas  City,. 
Mo.). — Bulletin  II,  Eclectic  Medical  University,  July,  19 14;  con- 
tribution New  England  Eclectic  Medical  Society,  May,  1914. 

Diefifenbach. — Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Homeopathy, 
Nov.  1914. 

Dominick. — Ibid. 

Dorland. — Medical  Dictionary,  Saunders. 

Gamier  and  Delamare. — Dictionnaire  des  Termes  Techniques  de 
MHecine. 

Gordon. — British  Medical  Journal,  June  18,  1910  and  July  2,  1910. 

Gordon,  W. — The  cardiosplanchnic  phenomenon  of  Abrams,  British 
Medical  Journal,  March  25,  191 1. 

Gottschalk. — Journal  of  Physiological  Therapeutics,  June,  1914. 

Graham. — Massage  (Textbook). 

Guild. — Journal  of  Physiological  Therapeutics,  June,  1914. 

Heitz. — La  Presse  Medicate,  June  10,  1907;  Lyon  Medicate  Dec.  3,. 
1905. 

Hely,  St.  John. — Medical  Record,  May  21,  1910. 

Hill. — Further  Advances  in  Physiology. 

Hirsch,  A.  B. — Report  Section  on  General  Medicine,  College  of  Physi- 
cians, Philadelphia,  Jan.  25,  191 5.  Splanchnic  Neurasthenia 
(Abrams). — New  York  Med.  Journal,  April  10,  19 15. 

Hirsch,  J.  A. — Illinois  Medical  Journal,  May,  1914. 

Hirschfeld. — (Book  on  Heart  and  Bloodvessels). 

"The  results  of  Spondylotherapy"  (author's  work  on 

\hQ  reflexes) "will  hardly  be  believed  except 

one  has  seen  them." 

Houlie. — Bulletins  ct  Memoires  de  la  Societe  de  Medicine  (Paris, 
France),  March  28,  April  10,  May  8,  1914.  Report  on  "The 
Abrams  Method  of  Treating  Aneurysms"  and  "The  Reflexes 
of  Abrams." 

Humphris. — Electrotherapeutics ,  Longsmans  Greene  &  Co. 

*Several  of  the  author's  reflexes  were  first  discovered  by  the  A'-rays" 


320  EEFEREXCES 

Ireland,  Chas.  L. — Reflex  Chart,   1913;  address  Medical  Society  of 

Ohio,  May  11,  1914. 
Ireland,  D.  V. — Physiological  Therapeutics,  March,  1914. 
Jarvis. — The  Archives  oj  Diagnosis,  New  York,  Oct.  12,  1912;  Monthly 
Cyclopedia   and   Medical  Bulletin,   March,    1914;   Physiological 
Therapeutics,    Dec,    1913,    and    March,    1914;    Pacific   Dental 
Gazette,  Aug.  and  Dec,  1913;  Lectures,  University  Southern  Cali- 
ifornia,   1915.      Vide  surgical   corroboration  of  the  reflexes  on 
page  58. 
Jaworski. — Communications   to   the   Medical  Congress,   Lyon,   Oct. 

1911;  Academy  of  Medicine  (Paris,  France),  May,  1912. 
Journal  de  Medicine,  Dec  10,  191 1. 
Journal  of  Advanced  Therapeutics  (Editorial,  Oct.,  1914). 

"Spondylotherapy  has  become  a  term  with  the  medical 
profession  which  signifies  a  scientific  advance  along  lines 
of  treatment  through  the  reflexes.  The  work  of  Dr. 
Albert  Abrams,  who  has  given  this  department  of 
therapy  a  large  measure  of  scientific  study,  has  placed 
the  therapeutics  of  the  spinal  reflexes  upon  a  substan- 
tially scientific  basis." 
Kellogg,  J.  H. — Address  International  Electrical  Congress,  St.  Louis. 
Kodama   (Tokio,  Japan). — Tokyoer  Medizin.  Wochenschrift,  July   2, 

1914. 
Kreider. — Journal  Physiological  Therapeutics,  June,  191 4. 
Lancet  (London). — Editorial,  'T/ze  Cardiac  Reflex  of  Abratns,^'  Aug. 

29,  1903. 
Lebon  and  Aubourg. — Demonstrations  of  Abram's  visceral  reflexes, 
Societe  de  Radiologic  Medicale  de  Paris;  Archives  de  Neurologic, 
Feb.  T014. 
Martin. — Journal  of  Advanced  Therapeutics,  Jan.,  191 5. 
Medical  Summary   (Editorial,   Nov.    1914). — 

"WTien  medical  men  everywhere  learn  that  the  real 
object  of  Spondylotherapy  work  is  in  the  interest  of 
medical  men,  is  of  the  highest  scientific  importance,  in 
fact  making  for  him  some  of  the  greatest  advances  in 
clinical  methods  of  exact  diagnosis  and  cure,  he  ■will  then 
cease  to  wonder  at  the  profound  interest  displayed  in 


EEFERENCES  321 

class  and  convention  and  see  why  our  eminent  men  often 
come  to  scoff  and  return  enthusiastic  followers  of  reflex 
possibilities." 
Merklen  and  Heitz. — Examen  et  Semeiotique  du  Coeur,  Paris  (Text- 
book); La  Presse  Medicate,  Aug.  i,  1903. 
Minerbi,  Cesare. — Rivista  Critica  di  Clinica  Medica  (Florence,  Italy), 
1909;  an  exhaustive  monograph  on  the  Lung  Reflex  of  Abrams 
(Esplorazione  del  riflesso  pulmonare  di  Abrams);  Rivista  Critica 
di  Clinica  Medica,  191 1. 
Minerbi,  Giacomo. — Rivista  Critica  di  Clinica  Medica,  Firenzi,  Nos. 

50  and  51,  1911. 
Monell. — System  of  Instruction  in  X-ray  Methods  (Textbook). 
Morris,  Robt.T. — The  Archives  of  Diagnosis,  Jan.,  1913. 
Musser. — Medical  Diagnosis  (Textbook). 
Nothnagel. — Encyclopedia  of  Practical  Medicine. 
O'Donnel. — This    eminent   radiologist    like   many   others    has    con- 
firmed by  Roentgenism  the  author's  pyloric  (page  65)  and  other 
reflexes. 
O'Reily. — Physical  Diagnosis  (Blakiston's  Son  &  Co.) 
Perdue. — The  Medical  Council,   1914;   Bulletin  ii.  Eclectic  Medical 
University,  July,  1914.     Vide  page  188.     Extracts  from  contri- 
butions by  Prof.  Perdue: 

"Nothing  in  recent  medicine  has  been  so  revolution- 
ary in  diagnosis  as  the  reactions  founded  upon  the 
emanations  of  human  energy  as  promulgated  by  Abrams. 
For  many  years  the  profession  has  looked  to  the  labora- 
tory for  exactness  in  diagnosis  and  our  literature  has 
been  full  of  the  Wassermann  reaction  and  the  Abder- 
halden  tests  for  pregnancy  and  cancer. 

In  the  midst  of  all  this  came  the  diagnostic  methods  of 
Abrams.    Methods  so  simple,  so  scientific,  so  exact,  so 
practical,  at  once  made  the  processes  of  the  laboratory 
obsolete  and  historic  in  medicine." 
Prof.  Perdue  is  Director  of  the  largest  laboratory  for  cancer  research 
in  America  and  observes  as  follows: 

"I  have  never  seen  the  Abrams  reaction  fail  or  be  mis- 
leading. I  can  say  the  same  for  the  syphilitic  reaction 
and  the  reaction  for  the  predetermination  of  sex." 


SSI  EEFEREXCES 

Planck. — Bulletin  I,  Eclectic  Medical  Unvvcrsity,  March,  1914. 

Plessi. — Gazetta  degli  Ospedali  e  delle  Cliniche. 

Pope,  Curran. — The  Medical  Fortnightly,  Nov.  25,  19 14;  Journal  oj 

Advanced  Therapeutics,  July,  191 2. 
Pratt. — The  Medical  World,  March,  1913. 

Reed,  Boardman. — Diseases  of  the  Stomach  and  Intestines,  page  311. 
Referring  to  the  author's  work  on  reflexes; 

"His  new  work  is  the  most  scientific  and  at  the  same 
time  the  most  practical  which  has  yet  appeared  on  the 
subject." 
Riches  (Editorials;  Oct.,  1915  and  Nov.,  1915). 

"Right  in  front  of  us  is  the  wonderful  discovery  of 
Dr.  Abrams.  Are  the  medical  schools  alert — are  they 
preparing  to  add  these  ideas  to  those  they  are  teaching?" 
"Abrams  is  probably  better  known  in  Paris,  London, 
\'ienna  and  Berlin  than  in  this  country,  but  the  time  is 
swiftly  approaching  when  he  will  be  considered  at  the 
very  head  of  his  profession  all  over  the  world." 
Riviere,  Clive,  Lancet  (London),  Aug.  21,  1915. 

This  distinguished  physician  referring  to  the  reflexes 
of  the  author  comments  as  follows: 

"These  important  discoveries  of  Abrams  are  for  the 
most  part  readily  confirmed." 
Rosewater. — Journal  of  Physiological  Therapeutics,  Dec,  1913.. 
Sahli. — Diagnostic  Methods  (Textbook). 
Satterthwaite. — The  Post-Graduate,  Jan.,  190S. 

Savill  (London,  England). — Medical  Press,  Oct.  6,  1915.     Confirma- 
tion of  the  Splanchnic  reactions  of  Abrams. 
Sawyer,  H.  C. — The  Matter  with  Nervousness,  page  32,  1909. 

"The  work  of  Abrams,  is  that  of  an  accomplished 
clinician  and  of  a  clear  and  forceful  writer  and  is  one  of 
the  most  stimulating  in  the  whole  literature  of  nerve-cure." 
Smith,  Edward. — The  Journal  of  the  American  Institute  of  Homeo- 
pathy, Nov.  1914. 
Smith,  Kendrick. — Xew  York  Medical  Journal,  March  22,  1913. 
Snow. — International  Clinics,  vol.  IV,  23d  Series;  Mechanical  Vibra- 
tion, 1912. 

From  the  latter  fpage  148),  "The  reflexes  of  Abrams 


REFERENCES  323 

open  a  field  of  wide  study  not  only  in  diagnosis  but  in 
therapeutics.    They  are  of  prime  importance  in  Spondy- 
lotherapy,  first  systematized  by  Abrams,  in  a  study 
which  has  broadened  the  field  of  medicine." 
The  visceral  reflexes  of  Abrams  are  illustrated  skiagraphically 
in  International  Clinics.    Journal  of  Advanced  Therapeutics,  Jan., 

Starkey. — The  Glands  of  Life,  page  209,  1914. 

Stedman. — Medical  Dictionary,  William  Wood  and  Co.,  New  York. 
Taylor,    J.    Madison. — International    Clinics,    Vol.    I,    24th    series; 
Monthly  Cyclopedia  and  Medical  Bulletin,  July,   1913; 

"An  appreciation  of  the  teachings  of  Dr.  Abrarrts": 
"Dr.  Abrams  has  focused  our  attention  on  one,  in  my 
opinion  likely  to  yield  increasingly  valuable  returns — 
that  of  the  scope  and  significance  of  the  spinal  reflexes. 
In  his  book  will  be  found  an  impressive  aggregation  of 
convincing   evidence.     The   light   which   Dr.   Abrams' 
researches  afford  is  the  largest  source  of  illumination — 
and  I,  for  one,  welcome  it  with  thankfulness." 
Torbett,  J.   W. — President  American   Electro-Therapeutic  Associa- 
tion; address  Central  Texas  Med.  Assoc,  Jan.  14,  1915. 
Tousey. — Electricity  and  X-Rays,  W.  B.  Saunders  &  Co. 
TurnbuU. — Medical  Record,  Sept.  9,  191 1. 

Vaquier, — Contribution  to  the  Study  of  Refiexotherapy;  Thesis  for  the 
degree,  Doctor  of  Medicine,  191 2,  University  of  Toulouse,  France. 
Vecki. — Sexual  Impotence  (Textbook),  W.  B.  Saunders  &  Co.;  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Physiological  Therapeutics,  Sept.  1910;  Contribu- 
tion, San  Francisco  County  Medical  Society,  March  30,  191 5. 
Vide  page  190.  Extract  from  Sexual  Impotence  (1915).  W.  B. 
Saunders  and  Co. 

'T  have  witnessed  marvelous  results  in  the  diagnosis 
of  syphilis  by  the  electronic  tests  of  Abrams." 
Walsh. — Psychotherapy,  D.  Appleton  &  Co.,  191 2. 
White. — American  Journal  of  Clinical  Medicine,  Nov.,  1914;  Feb.  and 
March,  191 5;  Address  and  Demonstrations,  University  of  Cali- 
fornia, Feb.  16,  1915.     Extract  from  American  Journal  of  Clini- 
cal Medicine. 

"It  is  many  years  since  the  medical  profession  has 


324  REFEREXCES 

shown  such  interest  in  any  new  discovery  as  they  have  in 
electronic  diagnosis,  first  discovered  by  Dr.  Albert 
Abrams  of  San  Francisco.  It  is  not  the  novelty  of  the 
method  that  interests  the  progressive  physician,  but 
the  great  field  opened  to  him.  To  be  able  to  diagnose 
at  the  very  beginning,  tuberculosis,  carcinoma,  s>'philis, 
pus  formation,  and  so  on,  and  not  have  to  rely  upon 
doubtful  laboratory  methods,  is  almost  beyond  com- 
prehension or  belief." 

Wilson. — Physical  Diagnosis  (Textbook),  Lippincott  Co.,  1909. 

Zulawski. — Deidsch.  Med.  Wochenschrijt,  March  31,  1910. 


INDEX 


INDEX. 


Abdcrhiildcn,  1Q5,  204. 

Abdominal  brain,  81,  24Q. 

Abrams,  reflexes  of,  317. 

Abscess,  of  liver,  149. 

Actinomj'cosis,  128. 

Actio  in  dislans,  259,  313. 

Action  currents,  12,  66. 

Adeposity  and  infantilism,  162. 

Adrenal  gland,  energy  of,  157. 

Adrenal  gland,  excitation  of,  157. 

Adrenal  gland,  insufficiency  of,  159. 

Adrenalin,  58. 

Aerial,  connection  with,  245. 

Ailurophobia,  2SS. 

Alcoholism,  145,  170,  288. 

Allen,  256. 

Alopecia,  297. 

Allotropism,  202. 

Aluminum,  35,  55,  210. 

Amebiasis,  149. 

Anemia,  Splanchnic,  169. 

Anesthesia  of  skin,  165. 

Anesthetics,  56. 

Aneurysm,  155. 

Angina  pectoris,  154. 

Anions,  200. 

Animal  Experimentation,  57. 

Anthropodynamic,  47. 

Antennae,  connection  with,  245. 

Anthrax,  12S. 

Apolarity,  1 15. 

Appendicitis,  108,  146,  214. 

Appendix,  107,  221. 

Arrhenius,  205. 

Arsenic,  reaction  of,  288. 

Art,  laboring,  244. 

Arteriosclerosis,  155. 

Arthritis  deformans,  141,  213,  218. 

Arthropathy,  pulmonary,  141. 

Asexuality,  115. 

Asthma,  151,  154,  162. 

Astrology,  255,  268. 

Atmosphere,  human,  9. 

Atoms  and  Electrons,  13. 

Atoms,  in  vibration,  49,  266,  309.  /  7^ 

Atropin,  25. 

Atonia  sympathetica,  168. 


Attunement,  48. 

Audition,  energy  on,  98,  171. 

Aura,  human,  9,  10,  78,  80. 

Aural  polarity,  79,  187. 

Autochthonous  energy,  105. 

Autoconduction,  182,  208. 

Autogenous  energy,  182,  208. 

Auto-intoxication,  and  Raynaud's  dis- 
ease, 167. 

Auto-intoxication,  reaction  of,  143. 

Auto-intoxication,  and  syphilis,  133, 
144,  155,  163. 

Automatic  tapper,  303. 

Automatisms,  257. 

Automatism,  human,  26. 

Auto-telepath}',  252. 

Aj'lsworth,  301. 

Bacillus  coli,  143. 

Bacillus  smegmatis,  131. 

Bactericidal  therapy,  193. 

Baines  and  Bowman,  12. 

Baraduc,  11. 

Barclay,  23. 

Barometer,  human,  270. 

Beling,  166,  175. 

Bell,  20. 

Belts,  electric,  263. 

Bertillon,  51. 

Bibliography,  316. 

Bicerebration,  it,^,  262. 

Binet-Simon,  265. 

Bioclinical  reactions,  288. 

Biodynamics,  2. 

Biodynamgnosis,  2,  124  cl  scq. 

Biodynamometer,  44,  60,  224,  234. 

B'odynaniopathology,  2. 

Biogens,  13. 

Biometer,  11,  100,  275,  303,  309. 

Bipolarity,  115. 

Bioreflexometry,  303. 

Biosphygmomanomctry,  294. 

Bismuth,  210. 

Blondlot,  10. 

Blood-pressure,  109,  137,  159. 

Bolton,  171. 

Bose,  266. 


328 


INDEX 


Brain,  abdominal,  8i. 

Brain,  localization,  229. 

Brain,  waves,  233. 

Brain  and  spinal  centers,  228. 

Brocq,  196. 

Bromids,  17.  ■re 

Calculi,  reaction  of,  156. 
Capacity,  original,  265. 
Carcinoma,  113,  117,  145,  149,  215,  216, 
217.     • 

electropathology  of,  17. 

irritation  in  pathology,  185. 

polarity  of,  113. 

precaution  in  diagnosis  of,  187. 

reaction  of,  181. 

stomach,  145. 

summary  of,  184. 
Carcinomatosis,  184. 
Cardiokinesthesia,  261,  295. 
Cardiopath,  143. 
Carrington,  259. 
Cartesian  conception,  259. 
Cataracts,  171. 
Cell-doctrine,  290. 
Cell,  morbid,  178,  197,  215. 
Cell  theory,  7,  197. 
Centers,  brain  and  spinal,  228,  252. 

energeiagenic,  71. 

grounding  of,  218. 
Cerebration,  56,  70,  113,  250. 
Charcot,  16,  26. 
Charms,  262. 
Chemotaxis,  198. 
Chemotherapy,  203,  205. 
Chloroform,  on  reflexes,  124. 
Chromodiagnosis,  68,  203. 
Chromotherapy,  67,  203. 
Chronic  inflammation,  149. 
Circuiting,  short,  37,  109,  114,  176,  187, 

270. 
Circulation,  splanchnic,  291. 
Clapp,  188. 
Clavus  hystericus,  176. 
Clairv-oyant,  264. 
Clerk-Maxwell,  11. 
Clinical  physiology,  57. 
Clock-test,  17. 
Cocain,  207. 
Coil,  induction,  275. 
Colon  bacillus,  143. 
Colisepsis,  143. 
Colloids,  13,  26. 

Colors,  48,  67,  68,  69,  114,   115,   122, 
201,  246,  313. 


Color,  in  diagnosis,  139. 

on  energy,  269. 

on  polarity,  210. 

penetration  of,  210. 

on  pain,  271. 

on  sexual  polarity,  114. 

on  thought,  260. 

on  will,  260. 
Concentration  of  mind,  236. 
Concussion,  160. 

Condensed  energy,  106,  185,  262. 
Condenser,  leakage  of,  71. 

variable,  272,  286. 
Conduction,  6,  47,  55,  228. 
Congestion,  intra-abdominal,  143. 
Consciousness,  236,  253. 

subliminal,  252. 
Conser\'ation  of  energy,  265,  267. 
Crile,  58. 
Cross,  149. 

Cricothyroid  reflex,  289. 
Crj'stalloids,  13. 
Currents,  action,  12,  66. 

Dannenbaum,  182. 
Demagnetizing,  69,  103,  104. 
Dementia  paralytica,  137,  172,  284. 
Dementia  precox,  172,  174. 
Denis,  10. 

Depressor  ners'e,  81,  86,  104,  291. 
Dermatoses  and  soil,  196. 
Detector,  heart  as,  277. 

human,  244. 

pulse  as,  283,  285. 
Dextral  and  sinistral  symptoms,  237. 
Diabetes  mellitus,  142. 
Diagnosis,  electronic,  188. 

radio,  280. 

splanchno,  192,  291. 
Diphtheria,  126. 
Disease,  2,  177,  203. 
Divining  rod,  264. 
Doctrine,  cell,  290. 
Dog,  use  of,  33. 
Dowser,  264. 
Drugs,  energy  reaction  of,  209,  210. 

and  non-conductors,  217. 

potentiality  of,  207. 

reactions  of,  288. 

testing  of,  209,  311. 
Dubois,  175.' 
Dulness,  retentivity  of,  184. 

splanchnic,  293. 
Durville,  256. 
Dynamoscope,  12. 

Earth,  a  magnet,  35. 


INDEX 


329 


East,  214. 
Eggs,  sex  of,  297. 
Electric  belts,  263. 
Electrobiology,  12. 
Electricity,  in  the  body,  13. 
Electrification,  206. 
Electrocardiography,  19.    ] 
Electrode,  distal,  276. 

pointed,  45. 

proximal,  276. 
Electrodes,  45. 
Electrolytes,  102. 

Electromagnetic  phenomena,  244,  276. 
Electron,  224. 

diagnosis,  2. 

pathology,  2. 

summary  of,  5. 
Electronalgias,  265,  270. 
Electronic,  conception  of  growths,  179. 

diagnosis,  188,  191. 

pathology,  177  ei  seq. 

pharmaceology,  205. 
Electronotherapy,  197,  199,  211,  214. 
Eliot,  239. 
Elliot,  189. 
Ellis,  244. 

Emotions,  250,  291. 
Energeiaometer,  308. 
Energeiaometry,  309. 
Energy,  3,  5,  7',  8,  36,  47. 

adrenal,  157. 

.aaestlieti^s  on.  ■;6. 

aural,  79,  80. 

autochthonous,  105. 

autogenous,  182,  208,  255. 

biomechanic  detection  of,   18,   77, 
258. 

centers,  71,  218. 

condensation  of,  70,  106,  278. 

conductivity  of,  55,  61. 

conservation  of,  8,  265,  267. 

defined,  255. 

demonstration  of,  75. 

discharge  of,  63. 

duling,  41.  I  Ljil^ 

dynamogenic,  259. 

electromagnetic,  255. 

epigastric,  74. 

flow  of,  10. 

and  hope,  263. 

human,  i,  9,  255,  311. 

indices  of,  225. 

kinetic,  226. 

light  and  darkness,  61,  259,  269. 

measurement  of,  44. 

non-duling,  43,  286,  303. 

normal  &  pathological,  124. 


output,  55. 

photography  of,  98. 

physics  of,  54. 

plant,  266. 

polar  expression  of,  81,  250. 

polarity  of,  41.  /  ^  2L 

posture  on,  59. 

potential,  8. 

potentiality  of,  44. 

production  of,  25. 

psychic,  65,  69. 

reserve,  262. 

specific,  291,  303. 

specific  recognition  of,  284. 

sphygmograms  of,  291,  303. 

subatomic,  6. 

therapeutic,  207,  209. 

and  thought,  260. 

as  work,  235. 
Eosin,  207,  210,  211,  215. 
Epicene  reaction,  174. 
Epilepsy,  10,  16,  165,  166,  177. 
Equation,  personal,  297. 
Ergohypertonics,  255. 
Erysipelas,  127,  256. 
Erythema,  213. 
Evans,  214. 
Ether,  3,  5,  223. 
Exophthalmic  goitre,  159,  161. 

Faraday,  308. 

Fat,  index  of,  287. 

Fatigue,  reaction  of,  167,  268. 

Fatty  heart,  154,  287. 

Finsen,  61. 

Fisher,  307. 

Fetus,  diagnosis  of  sex,  120. 

Fluorescein,  210. 

Frog,  as  a  detector,  19,  67. 

Fuchsin,  200.  jTu^^     ;  '>  v;~ 

Gall-bladder,  59. 

electronic  location  of,  147. 

location  of,  147. 

reactions  of,  147. 
Gall-stones,  148,  149. 
Galton  whistle,  252. 
Galvanism,  209. 
Galvanometer  string,  19. 
Galvanometric  measurements,  93. 
Gastric  cancer,  145. 
Gastric  nucleus,  40. 
Gastro-biodynamometer,  18. 
Gastrodiaphane,  93. 
Gastrography,  91. 
Gcodynamics,  108. 


330 


INDEX 


Gland,  parathyroid,  i6i. 

thymus,  i5g. 

thyroid,  i6o. 

tuberculous,  214. 
Glanders,  128. 
Goitre,  159,  161. 
Goldscheider,  30. 
Gonococcus  reaction,  128. 
Gout,  142. 
Graham,  26. 
Grasset,  267. 

Gravitation,  223,  225,  226,  302,  313. 
Gravity,  center  of,  226. 
Grounding,  35,  186,  218. 
Growths,  177  et  seq. 
Gwathmey,  57. 
Gyrations,  239. 
Gyrography,  100,  238. 
Gyrograms,  240,  242. 
Gyroscope,  240. 

Haab,  250. 

Hair,  reaction  of,  119. 

Hands,  laying  on  of,  255. 

Harmony,  in  nature,  202. 

Harzbecker,  204. 

Heart,  delimitation  of,  105. 

fatty,  154. 

functional  test  of,  153. 

insufficiency,  152. 

reflex,  64,  275. 
Hearing,  test  for,  171. 
Hebra,  194. 
Helmholtz,  258. 
Heredity,  265. 
Hermaphroditismus,  198. 
Hertel,  204. 
Herter,  143 
Hertzian  waves,  10. 
Hoffman,  147. 
Homosexuality,  117. 
Hooker,  in. 
Hope,  263. 
Human,  automatism,  26. 

barometer,  270. 

energy,  i,  41,  54,  55,  225. 

radiations,  9,  56,  74,  99. 
HiLxley,  232,  239,  250,  254. 
Hydroiodic  acid,  208. 
Hydronephrosis,  156. 
Hydrophobia,  128. 
Hydrothorax,  152. 
Hyperpiesis,  109. 
Hyperpituitarism,  162. 
Hj-pertension,  137,  158. 
Hypoadrenalism,  158. 
Hypopituitarism,  162. 


H\-pothyroidism,  161. 

Hypnosis,  235,  236. 

Hysteria,  10,  16,  116,  158,  176. 

latrophysics,  i. 
Impotency,  117. 
Index,  wavemeter,  272,  281,  282,  2S3. 

286. 
Indicanuria,  145. 
Individuals,  classification  of,  267. 
Induction  coil,  275. 
Infantilism  and  adiposity,  162. 
Infection,  endogenous,  144. 
Inflammation,   15,   147,   149,   190,   191, 

304- 
Influenza,  126. 
Insanity,  reactions  of,  175. 
Insulators,  61,  124,  192. 
Intellectuality,  measuring,  166. 
Intelligence,  266. 
Investigations,  cultural,  211. 
lodids,  208. 
Idoform,  210. 
Ions,  26,  200. 
Ionization,  210,  270. 
Irritability,  25,  266. 
Irritation   and   malignancy,    183,    185, 

191. 
Iron,  filings,  217. 

reaction  of,  287,  314. 
Isoelectric,  183. 

James,  262. 

Janet,  239. 

Jarvis,  57,  58,  147,  182,  1S9,  213. 

Joire,  II. 

Kellogg,  133. 
Kelvin,  225. 
Kidney,  fatty,  152. 

reaction  of,  156. 

test,  of,  156. 
Kilner,  9. 

Kinetic  theory,  58. 
Knowledge,  modern,  i. 

Laboring  art,  244. 
Lactation,  187. 
Laryngitis,  151. 
Law  of  reserve  energ}-,  262. 
Lead,  index  of,  287. 

reaction  of,  288,  314. 
Lebon  and  Aubourg,  65. 
Legendary  lore,  262. 
Levi,  301. 
Levison,  182. 
Life,  268. 


INDEX 


DO  I 


Light,  5,  60,  204. 

action  on  stomach,  36. 

electromagnetic,  theory  of,  223. 

red,  69,  296. 

visceral  action  of,  67. 
Liver,  abscess,  149. 

border,  77,  80. 

reflex.  77,  80,  187. 
Localization,  spinal  and  cerebral,  229. 
Lodge,  9,  228. 
Loeb,  26. 
Love,  pathology  of,  231. 

physiology  of,  231. 
Lydston,  131. 
Magnet,  law  of,  308. 

lettering  of,  42. 
Magnetic,  energy,  224 

meridian,  35,  103,  269. 
Magnetism,  11,  115,  308,  309. 

personal,  254,  255,  309. 

theory  of,  298. 

action  on  viscera,  102,  269. 
Magnetometer,  11. 
Magnetons,  211. 
Malaria,  128,  132,  208. 
Malignancy,  161. 
Malignancy    and    irritation,    183,    185, 

191. 
Man,  attraction  by.  268. 

reflex,  animal,  298. 

as  a  transformer,  268. 
Markham,  234. 
Marriage,  sterile,  137. 
Materialization,  g. 
Mathews,  26. 
Matter,  3,  8. 
Mediums,  257,  261. 
Men,  typical,  115. 
Meningococcic  infection,  126. 
Menopause,  113. 
Menstruation,  116,  118. 
Menstrual  blood,  119. 
Mental  short-circuiting,  270. 
Menthol,  213. 
Mentoids,  99. 
Mercur\-,  207. 
Methyl  blue,  210. 
Metals,  irritabilitj'  of,  266. 
Metallic  reflexes,  298. 
Metopion,  145. 
Mikhailoft",  215. 
Mind,  232. 

on  body,  262. 

concentration  of,  236. 

eye  of,  261,  262. 

location  of,  249. 

subliminal,  244,  252. 


^Minerals,  264. 

Minot,  122. 

Moran,  121. 

Morphin,  reaction  of,  207,  28S. 

Motion,  7,  8. 

Movements,  unconscious,  239. 

Moynihan,  191. 

^Muscles,  fatigued,  167. 

paralyzed,  165. 
Musicotherapy,  204. 
Myocardium  test  for,  153. 

Neoplasms,  177  d  scf. 
Nephrolithiasis,  156. 
Ner\-e,  depressor,  81,  86,  104. 
Nerve,  disorders,  164. 

force,  234,  268. 

splanchnic,  81,  83,  249,  291. 

stimulation  of,  26. 
Newmark,  133. 
Neurasthenia,  15,  158,  167. 

splanchnic,  81. 
Neurod\'namic  field,  80,  258. 
Neuroelectrical  storms,  219. 
Neuroses,  traumatic,  312. 
Noguchi-luetin  reaction,  129. 
Noises,  269. 
Non-conductor,  125. 
Non-duling  energy,  43,  286,  303. 

Ocular-gastric  reflex,  116. 

Ocular  reflexes,  94. 

Oculo-pupillary  tract,  62. 

Occult  phenomena,  257. 

Odor,  detection  of,  238,  253. 

Odic,  II. 

O'Donnell,  65. 

Odyle,  239. 

Oersted,  308. 

Ohms,  44. 

on,  264.   ,~l -^  '^'' "-y^  if  ^  t  <^V»-^  f^^ 

Olfaction,  2o.  / 

Opthalmo-axonometer,  95. 

Ophthalmoatonia,  170. 

Orifices,  dilation  of,  168. 

Original  capacity,  65. 

Organ,  relaxed  in  tone,  27,  103. 

Organotonomctry,  75,  97. 

Ovarian  infertility,  117. 

Ovaries,  localization  of,  116. 

Packard,  215. 

Page,  256. 

Pain,  index  of,  2S0. 

measuring,  310. 

reaction  of,  164,  186,  271. 

reflex,  164,  270. 


332 


INDEX 


Paralysis,  165. 

agitans,  167. 
Paranoia,  174. 
Paretic  dementia,  172,  284. 
Parasjphilis,  137,  173,  197,  310. 
Parath}Toid  gland,  161. 
Paratuberculosis,  141. 
Paratyphoid  reaction,  125. 
Pasteur,  202,  262. 
Pathograms,  243. 
Pathology-,  57. 

electronic,  I'j'i  el  scq. 

humoral,  197. 
Pathotelephony,  305. 
Pa\"ne,  175. 

Perception,  supernormal,  261. 
Percussion,  23.  25,  28. 

methods  of,  28,  30,  2>2- 

topographic,  35,  loi. 

tracheal,  289. 

vago- visceral,  23. 
Pendule  explorateur,  239. 
Perdue,  188,  215. 
Periodic  law,  49,  177. 
Personal,  equation,  297. 

magnetism,  254,  309. 
Pertussis,  reaction,  126. 

and  th}Tnus,  159.  160. 
Pharmacology",  electronic,  205. 
Phenomena,  occult,  257. 
Phonograms,  83. 
Phot  isms,  9. 
Photography,  98. 
Physicodiagnostic  methods,  45. 
Physiology,  clinical,  57. 
Picric,  acid,  210. 
Pilocarpin,  ^^. 
Pituitar}-,  body,  161,  162. 

gland,  151. 

reaction,  162,  163. 
Planck,  87,  100,  123. 
Plants.  266. 
Plethysmograph,  279. 
Pneumonia,  126. 
Pointed  electrode,  45. 
Polar  bodies,  122. 
Polarity,  223,  228. 

aural,  79,  187. 

anomalies  of,  114. 

color  on,  114. 

drugs  on,  114. 

reversed,  123. 

rods  on,  125,  228. 

se.xual,  72,  78,  no,  284,  295,  301. 

types  of.  III. 

vagal,  307. 

varieties  of,  41. 


Polar  cardiac  reactions,  285. 
Polarity  of  colors,  210. 
Polarity  reaction,  187. 
Polarity  or  rods,  125. 
Poliomyelitis,  128. 
Polyarthritis,  drugs  in,  208,  211. 

reaction  of,  128. 
Posture  and  position,  34,  59,  103. 
Potassium,  chlorate,  209. 

iodid,  207,  215,  288. 
Potato,  263. 
Potentiometer,  275. 
Pregnancy,  reaction  in,  119. 
Protoplasm,  6. 
Prouty,  189. 

Psychasthenia,  51,  S3,  158,  172,  174 
Psychics,  257. 
Psychic  energ}-,  66,  69. 

color  on,  67. 
Psychoanalysis,  230. 
Psychology-,  new,  230. 
Psychometn,-,  256. 
Psychomanograph,  100. 
Psychomotor  area,  52,   109,   in,   165, 

166,  234. 
Psychoneuroses  and  alopecia,  297. 
Psychophanometer,  87. 
Psychoses,  117,  ct  seq. 
Psychoses,  th\TOgenous,  176. 
Psycho-vagus  tone,  34. 
Pulmonan.-  arthropathy,  141. 
Pulse,  inhibition  of,  63. 

energy  detector,  283. 
Pus,  reaction  of,  127. 
P\-lorus,  opening  of,  64,  255. 

reflex.  34. 

Quinin,  208. 

Radioactivitv,  4,  7.  loi,  179,  183,  198, 
206. 

polarity  of,  74. 
Radiation.  4. 
Radiations,  human,  9,  56,  99. 

electromagnetic,  224. 
Radiodiagnosis,  307. 
Radiogeodiagnosis,  307. 
Radio-Rem,  215. 

Radium,  4,  19,  20,  179,  184,  200,  217, 
267. 

energy  of,  269. 
Ragland,  147. 
Rays-X,  10. 
Reaction,  polarity,  187. 

symbiotic,  138,  286. 
Red,  color  action,  69,  296. 
Red,  and  thought,  69. 


INDEX 


333 


Reflex,  8,  26. 

and  chloroform,  124. 

crico-thyroid,  289. 
,  factor,  212. 

heart,  64,  153. 

Jarvis  on,  59. 

liver,  77,  80,  187. 

metallic,  298. 

nature  of,  26. 

ocular,  94. 

oculo-gastric,  116. 

pain,  164. 

pulmonary  vasomotor,  83. 

retinal,  83,  97. 

and  short-circuiting,  177. 

splanchnic,  43,  83,  292. 

stomach,  19,  21,  38,  40,  103,  124. 

pylorus,  34. 
Reflexes,  as  detectors,  249. 

vasomotor,  249. 

vagal,  253,  255. 
Reflexophone,  282,  299. 

diagnosis  with,  302. 

experiments  with,  301. 

and  stomach  reflex,  299. 

use  of,  299. 
Reflexometry,  303. 
Reflexophonograms,  304,  305. 
Reflexophonometry,  298. 
Reichcnbach,  10. 

Registration,  sphygmographic,  90. 
Resistance  coil,  275. 
Resonance  of  gastric  nucleus,  40. 
Rctentivity  of  dulness,  184. 
Retraction  of  stomach,  39. 
Rheostat,  44. 
Rheumatic  rings,  263. 
Rhythm,  sense  of,  239. 
Ribot,  269. 
Rings,  263. 
Rod,  divining,  264. 
Rods,  polarity  of,  125,  228. 
Rogers,  301. 
Ross,  215. 
Rubber-cement,  212.  _ 

Sajous,  151. 
Safranin,  131,  210,  212. 
Salicylates,  208. 
Sarcoma,  187. 
Second  sight,  282. 
Scarlet  fever,  126. 
Selenium,  209. 
Selling,  147. 
Senses,  237,  252. 

hyperesthesia  of,  261. 


Sex,  differentiation  of,  117. 

of  eggs,  297 

prediction  of,  1 20. 

production  of,  122. 
Sexual,  attraction,  no. 

discharge,  231. 

polarity,  72,  78,  81,  no,  114,  134, 
284,  295,  297,  301. 

power,  117. 
Sgier,  179. 
Sherman,  133. 
Short,circuiting,  37,  109,  114,  176,  187, 

269,  270,  298. 
Sigmoid  dulness,  135. 
Sillo,  121. 

Sinusoidal  current,  210. 
Skin,  storage  action  of,  206. 
Skoda,  94. 

Smell,  detection  of,  237,  253. 
Smith,  Eliot,  258. 
Sodium,  bicarbonate,  114,  145. 

cacodylate,  216. 
Soil,  195. 
Solar  rays,  208. 
Sound,  252. 

Specific  energy,  291,  303. 
Spectroscope,  19,  49,  202. 
Spencer,  228,  i^,:;,,  239,  268. 
Sphygmobiomcter,  225,   226,  242,  246, 

252,  264,  272. 

addenda,  287. 

components,  272. 

ensemble,  275. 

heart  with,  275. 

pulse  and,  285. 

technique  of,  278. 

theory  of,  276. 
Sphygmographic  registration,  90. 
Sphygmomanometry,  84  cl  seq. 
Sphygmophone,  100,  275,  283. 
Spinal  centers,  stimulation  of,  63. 
Spinthariscope,  7. 
Spiritualism,  257. 

Spirochcta  pallida,  132,  155,  172,  173. 
Splanchnic  anemia,  169. 

area,  249. 

circulation,  291. 

nerves,  81,  83,  249,  291. 

neurasthenia,  81. 

reflexes,  43,  81,  83. 
Splanchno-diagnosis.  192. 
Splanchnoptosis,  105. 
Spleen,  reaction  ef,  161. 

storage  action  of,  106. 
Sporulation,  132. 
Sprude,  217. 
Steenstrup,  1 10. 


IXDEX 


Stereo-chemistn-,  203. 
Sterile  marriage,  137. 
Sterility.  X-ray,  118. 
Stimulation  of  vagus,  85. 
Stimuli,  25,  198. 
Stomach,  anatomy  of,  21. 

as  a  detector,  18,  19. 

delimitation  of,  223. 

hj-permotility  of,  40.  -  )^ 

ner\es  of,  21. 

reflex  of,  19,  21.  38,  40. 

retraction  of,  39,  187. 

tonicity  of,  25. 
Streptococci,  reaction  of ,  127,  147,  149. 
Subliminal,  consciousness,  252. 

mind.  244.  252. 
Subterranean  diagnosis.  265. 
Supernormal  perception,  261. 
Superstition.  258. 
Suprarenal,  bodies,  157. 

extract.  159. 
S\Tnbiotic  reaction.  286. 
S^-mptoms,  dextral  and  sinistral.  237. 
S\phiUs,  corroborating  diagnosis,  134  el 
seq. 

differential  diagnosis  of,  133,   144, 
163,  172,  309. 

drugs  in,  207. 

familial,  174. 

inherited.  136. 

mesaortitis  in.  155. 

polarity  in.  118. 

potentiality  of  reaction,  132. 

and  psychoses.  177. 

quiescent  and  active,  136, 

reaction  of,  128  ct  scq. 

safraninin,  131. 

Tabes.  219. 
Tactile  sense.  254. 
Tapeworm.  149. 
Tapper,  automatic.  303. 
Tashiro  and  Adams.  234. 
Taste,  detection  of,  238. 
Telaerodiagnosis,  314. 
Telediagnosis.  305. 
Telegnosis.  262. 
Telekinesis.  258. 

Telepathy,  69,  244.  245,  250,  251,  252, 
301. 

auto.  352. 
Telephone,  diagnosis  by,  305. 
Temperament.  313. 
Teniasis.  149. 
Testicles,  energ}-  of.  118. 

reaction  of,  118. 
Tetanus,  128. 


Therapeutic  nihilism,  57. 
Therapy,  bactericidal,  193. 
Thought,  on  pulse,  295. 

physics  of.  60.  66 

Potentiality  of,  234. 

specificity  of.  247,  248,  314. 
Thymus,  gland,  159. 

percussion,  106. 

relation,  159,  161. 
Thyroid,  feeding,  161. 

gland,  160. 

and  insanity,  176. 
Th\Togenous  psychoses,  176. 
Tissues,  index  of,  286. 
Tonicity,  \-isceral.  27, 
Tonoscope,  77. 
Topognosis,  164. 
Topographic  percussion,  loi. 
Touch,  at  a  distance.  254, 
Toxicology,  clinical.  288. 

reactions  in,  288. 
Tracheal  percussion,  289. 
Traumatic  neuroses,  312. 
Treatment,  new  concepts  in.  193. 
Trichiniasis,  150 
Tropism,  266 
Tuberculosis,  active,  141. 

in  childhood,  139. 

colors  in  diagnosis,  139. 

glands  in.  314. 

and  mixed  infection.  138. 

energy  potentiality  in.  138. 

reaction  in.  137  el  seq. 

sputum  reaction  in,  139. 

treatment  of,  212. 
Tuning,  246. 
Typhoid  fever,  125. 

Ulcer,  duodenal.  146. 

gastric.  146. 
Unipolar  conduction.  54. 
Ureter,  calculi  of.  156. 

course  of,  156. 
Urotropin,  in  diagnosis,  223. 

\accine,  reaction  of.  125. 
Vaccinia,  reaction  of,  125. 
\'agus,  exhaustion,  294. 

hypotonia ,  170. 

measuring  tone  of,  154. 

nerve,  291. 

polarity,  307. 

reaction  of,  287. 

reflex.  85.  253.  277.  278. 

stimulation  of.  62.  85.  96,  10 •,  278. 

testing.  85. 
Vago- visceral  percussion,  23. 


INDEX 


335 


Variable  condenser,  272. 
\'asomotor  reflexes,  249. 
Vecki,  137,  182,  190,  209,  306. 
Vibration,  7,  201,  204,  233,  237,  246, 
250,  257. 

of  atoms,  49,  266,  309. 

indices  of,  293 

rate  of,  47,  50. 
Vibrodynamometry,  49,  186. 
\'isccral,  attraction  and  repulsion,  105. 

demagnetization,  103. 

malignancy,  182. 

rest  cure,  67. 

sufficiency,  152,  283. 

tonicity,  25,  75,  loi,  102,  154. 
Viscus  factitia,  299. 
Vision,  261. 

test  for,  170. 
Visual  area,  253. 
A'italism,  i. 
A'ital  force,  254. 
Vital  soil,  195. 
Vivisection,  58. 
\'oltage  of  human  energy,  54. 


Ward,  188,  190. 

Wassermann  test,  129. 

Water,  264 

Waves,  brain, 233. 

Wavemeter,  272,  281,  282,  283,  286. 

indices,  125,  225,  247,  264,  281. 

index  of  fat,  287. 

index  of  lead,  287. 
White,  75,  88,  94,  188,  199,  269. 
Will,  an  accident,  265. 

color  on,  260. 

polarity  of,  260. 

potentiality  of,  261. 

action  on  pulse,  295. 
\\'illing,  adverse,  260,  295. 

favorable,  260. 
Wireless,  276. 
Women,  atj-pic,  115. 
Worm,  tape,  149. 

Yamaguchi,  99. 

Yellow,  67,  122,  261,  269. 


X-rays, 


199,    206,    215,    21] 


DATE  DUE 

leY : 

:  4  is/e 

1 

NOVO 

9  r\tCO 

M 

BISH 

NOV 

3  198b 

i 

GAYLORD 

PRINTED  IN  U    S    A 

3  1970  00630  7471 


°°°  '65  ,08 


\TBk60 
Al6ln 
1916 
Abrams ,  Albert . 

New  concepts  in  diagnosis  and  treatment. 

physico-clinical  medicine. . . 


MEDICAL  SCIENCES  LIBRARY 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  IRVINE 
IRVINE,  CALIFORNIA  92664 


»iiiTi»  iM  ».:», 


